diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473-8.txt | 6365 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 109909 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 159405 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473-h/25473-h.htm | 8081 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473-h/images/002.png | bin | 0 -> 759 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg | bin | 0 -> 39811 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473.txt | 6365 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 25473.zip | bin | 0 -> 109888 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
11 files changed, 20827 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/25473-8.txt b/25473-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6781c68 --- /dev/null +++ b/25473-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6365 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Frontier Boys on the Coast + or in the Pirate's Power + +Author: Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +Release Date: May 15, 2008 [EBook #25473] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST *** + + + + +Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: "THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."--P. 204. + +_Frontier Boys on the Coast._] + + + + +FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST + +OR + +_IN THE PIRATE'S POWER_ + +BY CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT + + NEW YORK + HURST & COMPANY + PUBLISHERS + + + + +THE FRONTIER BOYS + +By CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT + + +This series tells the adventures of Jim, Joe, and Tom Darlington, first +in their camp wagon as they follow the trail to the great West in the +early days. They are real American boys, resourceful, humorous, and--but +you must meet them. You will find them interesting company. They meet +with thrilling adventures and encounters, and stirring incidents are the +rule, not exception. + +Historically, these books present a true picture of a period in our +history as important as it was picturesque, when the nation set its face +toward this vast unknown West, and conquered it. + + 1. Frontier Boys on Overland Trail + 2. Frontier Boys in Colorado + 3. Frontier Boys in the Rockies + 4. Frontier Boys in the Grand Canyon + 5. Frontier Boys in Mexico + 6. Frontier Boys on the Coast + 7. Frontier Boys in Hawaii + 8. Frontier Boys in the Sierras + 9. Frontier Boys in the Saddle + 10. Frontier Boys in Frisco. + 11. Frontier Boys in the South Seas + + _Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth_ + _Price per Volume, 50 Cents_ + + + COPYRIGHT, 1909, BY + THE PLATT & PECK CO. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER PAGE + I. CAPTAIN BILL BROOM 9 + II. THE COVE AND THE CAVE 16 + III. THE BARBED WIRE 23 + IV. PETE'S YARN 30 + V. THE FOUR BOYS 37 + VI. THE HUNCHBACK 45 + VII. FARMER BROOM 53 + VIII. THE CAMP IN THE POCKET 60 + IX. THE ATTACK 68 + X. "HAUL IN" 76 + XI. MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE 82 + XII. THE RANCHERO 90 + XIII. A NEW FRIEND 100 + XIV. THE PURSUIT 109 + XV. JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE 118 + XVI. THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE 127 + XVII. ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE 135 + XVIII. A DAY AT SEA 144 + XIX. THE PASSENGER 152 + XX. TO THE RESCUE 161 + XXI. THE BANDITS 169 + XXII. RACE WITH THE TIDE 177 + XXIII. THE ENCHANTED ISLE 184 + XXIV. IN THE WHITE BOAT 191 + XXV. IN PERIL 198 + XXVI. TWO LASSOES 206 + XXVII. ANOTHER FRIEND 214 + XXVIII. A TALE OF YORE 220 + XXIX. A WONDERFUL LEAP 232 + XXX. IN THE STRAIT 239 + XXXI. CONCLUSION 246 + + + + +FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST + + + + +CHAPTER I + +CAPTAIN BILL BROOM + + +"What devilment has old Bill got on for tonight, Pete?" + +The speaker was seated on an old scarred sea chest in a dimly lighted +forecastle. + +"I dunno," replied Pete, "maybe he's lookin' fer a wreck." + +"I heard the mate say somethin' about a passel of four boys," put in a +third man who was laying back in his bunk, "that the skipper was +a-lookin' for." + +"Kidnapping, eh?" said Cales, the first speaker. "Hold 'em for ransom, I +suppose. Well, the old man has been in worse games than that. I reckon +the kids' parents are rich and are willin' to pay a high price for their +darlings." + +"You're on the wrong tack, matey," said the man in the bunk. "Cap'n +Brinks, who landed in San Diego from a Mexican port put the old man +wise. He told him that those fellars had considerable money and a raft +of jewels with 'em that they picked up in Mexico." + +"Ho, Ho, that's the game, is it," cried Cales, thumping his knee with a +gnarled fist, "that ought to be easy then." + +"Looks so, but it ain't," replied the other, "those four boys have got +somethin' of a reputation in the southwest. Hard fighters and good shots +and their leader is a husky lad and about as crafty as a red Injun." + +"He ain't met the Old Man yet," said Cales significantly. + +"I don't see where you get all your news from, Jake," growled Pete from +his seat on the chest, "you ought to be a reporter." + +"I keep my eyes open and my mouth shet," replied Jake, "any man can get +larned if he will do that." + +"I'd like to have a picter of you with your mouth shet," remarked Pete. +"It's open even when you are asleep." He dodged just in time to avoid a +heavy shoe flung from Jake's ready hand that crashed against the wall. + +"Don't do that agin," he warned, a red light showing in his eyes. "I'll +larn you boys that I ain't as old as I looks to be." + +Jake laughed harshly. + +"You mustn't keep your own mouth open so wide, Pop, cause you'll have to +swallow your own words if you do." + +"I guess I'll never git choked," replied Pete, truculently. "Kin you +tell me what the skipper means snooping down this coast with no lights +showing when it's plumb dark? We are liable to sink ourselves or +Californey all of a suddint." + +"Why don't you ask the Cap'n what he is up to?" inquired Cales, "that +is, if you want some real useful information, Pop." + +Pop raised himself up and glared at the speaker. + +"I ain't done living," he replied. + +"We are navigating pretty careful," remarked Jake. "You can hardly feel +the Sea Eagle moving." + +"Running for the cove, I reckon," suggested Cales, "I'm mighty pleased +not to be the man at the wheel. Well, I'm goin' to turn in for a +snooze." + +In a brief time the two men were snoring loudly, while old Pete sat +smoking his pipe, as stolid as a wooden Indian and the forecastle was +fogged with the smoke, through which the swinging lantern shone dimly. +The air is stifling so let us go up on deck where we can breathe the +salt ozone and incidentally get acquainted with Captain Bill Broom, who +is to occupy such a prominent place in this narrative. + +He is well worth meeting, not only as the opponent of our old friend, +Jim Darlington, but because of his own unworthy but interesting +character. In those days Skipper Bill Broom was known all up and down +the coast and beyond. His fame, such as it was, comes down even to this +recent day. + +On deck it is muffling dark, with the stars obscured in some dim way by +mist or fog. There is a breeze blowing steadily from the broad wastes of +the ocean. The bulk of the California coast looms dimly on the port bow. +Not more than a half mile distant can be seen the white rushing forward +of the breakers towards the rocky coast. + +Dangerous work this, navigating the Sea Eagle through the thick gloom of +the night but the old man knew his business. He was on the bridge pacing +back and forth like some strange animal and giving hoarse directions to +the man at the wheel. He knew every inch of that coast, the sunken reefs +and dangerous rocks. + +"Starboard your helm," he growled. + +The sailor spun the wheel obediently. And the captain resumed his pacing +back and forth upon the bridge. Not much could be seen of him, except +that he was a powerful man, with a peculiar crouching stoop, as if he +and the sea were engaged in a mysterious game. One striving to get a +dangerous death-hold upon the other, both wary and using unceasing +watchfulness. + +There was a strange softness in Captain Broom's tread like that of a +padding panther, but his arms had the loose forward powerful swing of a +gorilla's. Once he stepped into the chart house to look at something and +the light of the lamp will give us a square look at him. + +"That man a pirate!" you exclaim at the first glance; one who carried +the blackest name along the coast as a smuggler and wrecker, who had +brought cargoes of wretched slaves from Africa in the days before the +Civil War and who had had more marvelous escapes than any man in the +history of piracy with the exception of Black Jack Morgan! Impossible! + +"Why that man is nothing but an old farmer," you exclaim in +disappointment, when you see him. "He ought to be peddling vegetables on +market day." But just wait. + +True, Skipper Broom had come from a long line of New England farmers, +hard, close-fisted, close-mouthed men. Young Broom had broken away from +the farm and followed his bent for sea-faring, but to the end of his +days, he kept his farmerlike appearance and he affected many of the +traits of the yeoman which he found to be on more than one occasion a +most useful disguise. + +Let's look at him. That heavy winter cap pulled down on his grizzled +head gives him a most "Reuben" like appearance. Jeans pants are thrust +into heavy cowhide boots. The deadly gray eyes soft as granite have +become red rimmed from fits of fury and hard through many scenes of +coldly calculated cruelty. A most dangerous customer and I for one, and +I ought to know, consider that he will have the better of Jim Darlington +in their approaching encounter--and yet Jim is never beaten until the +last shot is fired and so it is impossible for me to foretell how this +contest of wit and daring will come out. + +After examining his chart closely, Captain Broom crouched out through +the door and on to the deck. He took one keen look towards the shore, +then he approached the helmsman. "Git below, Bill. I'll fetch her in." + +The helmsman relinquished the wheel gladly enough and under the +Captain's masterful hand the Sea Eagle swung slowly around and pointed +in towards the curving shore. + +The dark form of the mate could be seen on the deck below waiting for +the order that he knew must come soon. The crew of the Sea Eagle though +subordinate enough were necessarily partners in Captain Broom's wicked +enterprises so that the discipline was somewhat different than in +ordinary vessels. + +"Call 'em up, Mr. Haffen," roared the skipper to the mate. "It's chore +time." + +"Aye, aye, sir," replied Mr. Haffen. + +The watch was called on deck and the dark forms of the men could be seen +in the bow. The pulsing of the Sea Eagle had stopped and with scarcely a +sound the anchor was dropped into the water. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE COVE AND CAVE + + +The starboard boat was lowered into the water. First the mate, then +Captain Broom and two men got in. The latter were Cales and Pete who +pulled noiselessly at the oars. The boat glided quietly through the +silent darkness towards the shore. The Captain was seated in the stern, +his great bulk crouched forward, but there was nothing inert in his +posture. His big hands clasped either side of the craft. + +In a few minutes the boat grounded softly on the sand of the beach and +all hands got ashore. Scarcely a word was spoken, though the cove was so +hidden that there seemed to be no possible chance that the landing of +the free-booters would be observed. However, Captain Bill Broom took no +risk of being discovered. He had many enemies upon the coast and inland +as well. Besides, the State of California had set a price upon his head. + +Two thousand dollars was the reward for his capture, and so profitable +an investment was apt to be realized on sooner or later by some +enterprising citizen. So Captain Broom took due care whenever he went +abroad not to attract undue attention. + +This cove was a favorite lurking place of his when close pressed, where +he would take refuge after some daring adventure upon the high seas, +until such a time as the hubbub along the coast had died down. Sometimes +he lay in hiding there, with the Sea Eagle screened behind the +encircling cliffs, waiting like a black spider to rush out and capture +some unsuspecting craft. + +"Pick her up, boys," said the Captain, "you know where she belongs," +pointing to the boat. + +"Aye, aye, sir," they replied, and putting it on their shoulders they +carried the boat along a narrow path that divided the thick undergrowth; +until, after going several hundred yards, they reached a thick screen of +brush through which they shoved, and came to a cave. + +Although so well hidden, the entrance to the cavern was quite high, so +that the men gained admission without stooping, and going a short +distance into the dark interior, they placed the boat gently down +against the wall. There was a constant and heavy drip of water, so that +there was no chance for the boat to warp, as it would have surely done +if placed outside in the dry California air. + +"I don't like this yere cave," remarked Pete, when left alone with +Cales. + +"What's the matter with it? It's dark and damp, but that is the nature +of caves." + +"It makes me feel creepy, that's all," replied Pete, "and it takes +considerable to do that." + +"Whatever happened?" inquired Cales, grinning, "something terrible, I +reckon, to make your thick hide chilly." + +"It were before your time," replied Pete somewhat reluctantly, "we +raided a ranch back thar agin the mountings. Senor Sebastian owned it +and it was said that he could ride all day and never git off his place, +and that he had more sheep and cattle than thar is folks in Frisco." + +"The Captain shanghied him, I reckon," cut in Cales. + +"You hold your windlass," commanded the old man in a querulous tone, +"I'm telling this yarn." + +"All right, Pop," said Cales in a conciliating manner, "have it yer own +way." He was really anxious to hear the story the old man had referred +to. + +"Young fry is always flapping," the older speaker mumbled,--then he +took up the course of his narrative. "Waal, as I was telling ye, this +Senor had lots of money and the Cap'n being short of funds thought that +he could use some of it. So one night we ran into the cove, it was +blacker even than this. I don't see how the old man ever got the craft +past the sharks' teeth at the entrance but he did." + +"He could have brought her in with his eyes shut," declared Cales. "I +never have seen his equal for navigating." + +"Waal, we made camp here that night, and the next day, the Cap'n with +some of the gang, left for the ranch and I stayed to look after things. +Nothing happened that day, and I was dozing by the fire about midnight +when I heard them coming back. They had the Senor, a fine-looking old +man with a gray mustache and as cold and proud-looking as they make +them. + +"The Cap'n was furious because he had not been able to lay his hand on +the coin, and he swore that he would make the old Senor tell where his +money was or there would be trouble. He took him into this cave and I +don't know what happened there, and I don't want to know. All I'm sure +of is that I never saw him come out. + +"The Cap'n sent me to the ship to get some chains on the second day and +he took 'em into the cave. We sailed a couple of days later, but not a +sign did I see of the Senor. That's why this cave makes me creepy, +Cales." + +They were standing near the entrance, when there came a distinct low +moan from the interior. It was not a ghostly sound, either. There was no +mistaking it. + +"Did you hear that, Cales?" asked old Pete in a quavering voice. + +"Yes," replied Cales, "I heard it all right. It can't be the Senor?" + +"No," replied Pete. "He has been dead these years." + +"Let's find out," said his comrade. + +"There's nothing in this world could make me go in thar," declared Pete +solemnly, "besides, it's agin the Captain's orders." + +"Well, I'm going," said Cales either more brave or less experienced than +the other. "It sounds to me like a woman's voice." + +"And I'm goin' to git," declared old Pete, tottering towards the path. + +"You're a brave old pirate," said Cales contemptuously, and with that he +went slowly back into the cave. He had to go cautiously, for beyond a +certain point he was not acquainted with the interior. He could feel the +moist ground under foot and he kept his hand stretched out, not knowing +what he might run against in the dense damp darkness. + +Then, suddenly, his hand struck a stone wall. Groping his way, he turned +a sharp corner and followed along a low narrow passageway that obliged +him to stoop. Then came the sound of the moaning just ahead. Jack Cales +was a brave man but it was all that he could do, to keep from turning +and running in panic for the mouth of the cave. But though his +determination had received a severe shock, it did not turn to flight. + +He saw a faint light ahead, spreading a glow at the end of the passage +as he came nearer. Then he saw something that held him stone still with +a clutch of weird fear. He had reached the end of the narrow passage, +and dimly made out a domed room in the rock, white with translucent +encrustation. + +He struck a match. About him, before, to the right and to the left he +could see forms all of ghostly white, some crouching, others standing. +Hardly had the light flared up than it sizzled out. Some drops of water +falling from the roof had extinguished the blaze. Then was repeated that +awful sound of distress. + +Cales groped around almost in a frenzy of terror. Where was the exit +from that awful room? Round and round he went, and all the time there +were strange whisperings in his ears, and unseen hands seemed to clutch +his clothes. Once he slipped and was trembling so that he was hardly +able to get to his feet. Just as he did so, something swept past him +like a breath of wind. Rendered desperate he made another dash, and this +time if he had not found a passageway, he felt that he could have +knocked a hole through the wall. Then he stood at the mouth of the +cave. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE BARBED WIRE + + +Just at that moment was heard the hoarse voice of Captain Broom booming +through the darkness outside. + +As Cales turned about, some furry animal sprang past him dashing between +his legs and nearly upsetting him. + +"On deck, you scoundrel, come out of there," called the Captain. + +"Aye, aye, sir," came the reply of Cales in a strangely weak tone, +though he was now more concerned by the possible penalty to be meted out +by the Captain for disobedience of orders, than by thought of the +undetermined occupants of the cave. If it were a cat it was certainly a +good joke on old Pete. This was, had they but known it, the swift +solution of the mystery. + +Oddly enough the Captain said not another word, a fact suggestive to +Cales that there was something amiss in the cave and the little company +at once took up their line of march. Captain Broom was in the lead, +followed by the mate, then Cales, with old Pete bringing up the rear. +Just as they started Captain Broom extinguished the lantern and they +took up the trail in total darkness. Every precaution would now be +necessary for they would soon be in a region where the very name of +Broom was execrated with bitter hatred, and every bush would grow a +poniard if his whereabouts were known. + +It was evident that the skipper was as good a guide on land as he was a +pilot at sea, for he led his little party at a steady gait by a winding +cow-path through the thick undergrowth. He doubtless knew this region +thoroughly, for he had made more than one raid in this locality. + +It was soon to be determined, however, that they were not the only ones +abroad that night. + +They had walked in silence for some time, well on to two hours, when +they came to an open space, with the irregular form of a live oak on the +southeast corner. Then Captain Broom stopped suddenly, his keen eyesight +which no darkness could baffle had discerned some object moving out from +the shelter of the oak tree. + +It came slowly with uplifted black arms and white hair falling around +its face. There was a terrible intensity in its advance across the open +space, withal that it moved so slowly. The figure stopped directly in +front of Captain Broom. + +"Get out of my way, you hag," he roared, but for the first time in his +life a certain tremor crept into his voice. Perhaps he was growing old. +He drew back his arm as though to strike the woman in his path. + +As he did so Jack Cales stooped and picked up a round rock at his feet, +intending to hurl it, not at the woman but at the skipper, for he alone +of the party divined the possible cause of this poor woman's dementia. +But his interference was not necessary for it seemed as though the +Captain's arm was paralyzed. He declared afterwards that some invisible +hand had seized his arm. + +Then, in a loud, wailing voice the woman put a curse upon the slayer of +her husband, for this spectre was none other than the Senora Sebastian. +It was terrible to hear her and it must have sent a shiver into the soul +of the hardy skipper. + +When she had finished, the woman moved past them and vanished in the +direction of the ranch. For a full minute the line of men stood without +moving a step and in absolute silence, Captain Broom with his arm +upraised as he had lifted it to strike. + +Then, without saying a word, he took the first forward step and the +others followed him through the darkness. + +"Say, Cales," growled Pete in a low voice, "what was it you found in +that cave? My old timbers are shaking yet." + +"Keep your old jaws shut," yelled the Captain, who had wonderfully keen +hearing, when anything was spoken that concerned him. + +"How do you suppose the old man heard me?" mumbled Pete to himself. He +dropped back a pace or two, then whispered, "The old man must be crazy. +He is making direct for the Sebastian ranch." + +"Do you reckon that these four boys he is looking after, are located +there?" asked Jack. + +"I dunno," replied Pete, "you can calkerlate on one thing though and +that is that the skipper knows pretty nigh where those lads are. One of +his messengers, a one-eyed, twisted greaser, came aboard the other day, +and was gabbling in the Captain's cabin. Then the next thing I knew we +was under sail, and came kiting down to the cove." + +Just then the party halted at the confines of a four strand barbed wire +fence. This was the first indication that they were entering the great +ranch property that formerly belonged to the Senor Sebastian, the +elderly man the Captain had made captive, and which was now the property +of his only son. + +"Now, lads," said the leader of the expedition, "Here's a chance to make +yourself small. This yere barb is like a devil fish if it once gits a +holt of your panties--it won't let go." + +"That's so, Captain," said the mate, a generally silent and saturnine +man. + +"I reckon you know, mate," said the Captain. "The last time we was +through these parts, and that some considerable years ago, this same +fence got a holt of yer pants and wouldn't let go. I never heard you +talk so much and so earnestly in my life before. You want to be more +keerful this time." + +The mate simply grunted by way of reply and, lying close to the ground, +he very gingerly and carefully worked his way under the wire and thus +escaped his mentioned former unpleasant detention. He then held the +lower wire up as high as he could until his chief had wiggled under. + +Pete was the only one of the party who was seriously detained, for Jack +Cales had slid under as slick as an eel. But Pete's joints were old and +rusty and the venomous wire got a clutch on his coat and his pants. + +"What's keeping you back?" inquired the Captain, gruffly, as Cales and +his comrade did not put in an immediate appearance. + +"Pete has got caught, sir," said Jack. + +"What are you doing there, you old barnacle?" inquired the Captain as he +came back to the fence. + +There was a certain odd comradeship between the skipper and the old salt +who had been with him since his African days. Both were New Englanders +and had come from neighboring homesteads. + +"Just resting, sir," replied the captive. + +It certainly did have something of that appearance, for Pete had kept a +decisive grip on his old black pipe with his stubby teeth and was +puffing at it in apparent peace and resignation. + +"Want me to git you a piller?" inquired the skipper, sarcastically. + +"Thank ye, sir," replied Pete imperturbably. + +Meanwhile the mate had been at work with deft fingers and he finally +succeeded in extricating the old man and putting him upon his pins. + +"Now if ye are sufficiently rested," proposed the skipper, "we will hike +along." + +This they did. Their way now lay between two stretches of fence that +enclosed a road not much traveled for there were only faint traces of +wheels in the turf. It was probably not a public highway but belonged to +the great ranch. + +Everything seemed smooth sailing now, as there was no more barbed wire +to be immediately met but Pete soon made himself prominent again. He +was rolling along with that gait peculiar to a sailor when aboard land, +when he gave a sudden spring and clutched Cales convulsively in the +back, giving that individual a big scare. + +"Dad burn it, boys. I've stepped on a rattler." An investigation was +made very carefully and Captain Broom quickly picked up a short piece of +rope. + +"I'll rattle you," he cried, touching up the old man with the rope's +end. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +PETE'S YARN + + +They went along steadily through the darkness in an almost directly +easterly direction. Being now clear of the brush they could make good +time on the springy turf. + +"How far are we now from the ranch, Pete?" inquired Jack. + +"Too durn close to suit me," replied Pete. "I can't tell exactly for +these ranches are as big as all outside creation, but I guess we must be +as close as a mile to the buildings." + +"I reckon the Captain is going to walk up to the front door and ask for +accommodations." + +"Wouldn't s'prise me a bit, if he done that," replied Pete querulously. +"The old man ain't lacking in nerve. Back thar was the first time I ever +seen him hang back in my long experience with him." + +"When the old lady was speaking her piece? Suppose I ask him how much he +made when he captured the Senor," suggested Cales, who had recovered his +flippant humor. + +"I wouldn't git gay, lad," said old Pete, warningly. "She is just as +liable to haunt you in your black spells." + +"Don't have 'em, uncle," replied Cales. + +"You collect the material for 'em when you are young," said the old man +wisely, "and they come out of your bones like rheumatiz when you git +old." + +"Somebody is coming back of us," suddenly whispered Cales. + +"Take to cover, lads," ordered the skipper, who was as quick to hear as +the younger man. The only cover was a high and thick growth of wild +mustard growing alongside the fences. + +Quickly they stepped from the open road into the shelter of the tall +mustard. They had not long to wait. There was the jingle of spurs and +the thud of horses' feet walking slowly along. Next came the voices of +men talking. + +"It is useless, Senor, to try and find her, I fear," replied one man to +the other. + +"It seems so," replied the other sadly. "My mother always seems to be +worse when the time of the year approaches that my father disappeared. +In spite of all our care she will escape." + +They had now arrived at a point opposite where the free-booters were +hidden. The man who had last spoken struck a light and lit a cigarette; +the instantaneous glare showed the dark handsome face of the Spanish +type. There was the high-peaked sombrero, the striking clothes, the +intent face and then the light died suddenly out. + +"Ah, Manuel," said the young man to his companion, "if I could only once +lay hands on that cursed Gringo," and he ground his teeth in fury, +unable to express himself. + +"Humph, Gringo," grunted the Captain, disdainfully. + +"Did you hear anything, Senor?" asked Manuel. + +"Nothing." + +"I was sure I heard something," asserted his companion. They had reined +in their horses and sat listening quietly for a few seconds. + +"It was probably nothing but a calf by the roadside," said the Senor. + +The other shook his head doubtfully, then they turned and rode on +towards the rancho. + +When they were safely out of range, the party of pirates took up their +line of march once more. + +"So the greaser took me for a calf," remarked Captain Broom. "If it had +been you, Jack Cales, there might be some excuse fer such a mistake." + +"Aye, sir," replied Cales, glumly. + +"Getting kind of close to the ranch, ain't you, Cap'n?" ventured old +Pete. + +"I thought of leaving you there, Pete, while the rest of us corralled +those kids. You are getting too old for these long tramps." + +No more remarks were heard coming from the direction of Pete, for he was +not at all sure but that the Captain might, in a moment of irresponsible +humor, do just as he threatened without regard to the consequences. + +After they had gone on for a mile from the point where the two men had +overtaken them, Captain Broom led his party away from the road in a +southerly direction, once more undergoing the harrowing experience of +getting through the barbed wire fence. But this time Jack Cales was +especially detailed by the Captain to get old Pete through so there +would not be any unnecessary delay. + +It was evident that they were getting into a different section, a short +time after they left the road, for they began going up and winding among +little rocky hills. At last they came to a stopping place. They climbed +up an elevation and sat on some rocks among a group of dark trees. + +"Now, lads, take it easy," said the Captain, "ye have had quite a +footin' and when morning comes, there will be some more ahead and at a +faster gait." + +"Gosh, Cap'n," declared old Pete, "It's the most walking we've done +together since the time we corralled the last bunch of niggers on the +west coast of Africa." + +"We certainly made money that trip when we sold that cargo of coons to +the traders on that Palmetto Island below Charleston. But we will clean +up about as much money when we round up those four boys and twice as +easy. Tell the two lads about that trip, Pete." + +The old sailor sat on a rock, and taking out his bag of tobacco filled +his short black pipe with one thorny thumb, then he commenced his +narrative, with the glow of his pipe lighting up his weatherbeaten face. + +"Well, orders is orders, and the Cap'n wants me to tell this yarn. I +might just as well begin it, lads. I never knew any good to come to +sailormen cruising around on dry land any more than on this trip." He +cast a wary eye at Captain Broom, but that worthy merely grunted and +Pete resumed his story. + +"Our clipper lay at anchor in a wide bay with only a couple of men on +board and the Captain, myself and six men trailing inland for to find a +village of naygurs that our guides had told us of. + +"It certainly was hot and steamy going through the jungles and every +once in a while a big snake as large as my leg would crawl across our +path and rustle away into the undergrowth. Once I felt one of 'em +a-twisting and rolling under my foot like a big log that had came to +life. I guess I must have jumped twice as high as my own head and I lit +on the back of one of the naygurs that was guiding us. + +"He didn't know what struck him; probably thought it was a tiger for I +sunk my hooks into his hide. He let out a yell and went ripping and +snorting through that jungle and me not having sense enough to let go, +until a grape vine about as thick as a manilla rope chucked me under the +chin and I fell flat on my back and I guess that naygur is still +running." + +Here the captain who was evidently enjoying the narrative hugely, burst +into a volcanic roar of laughter. + +"I can see yer yet, Pete, on that bounding buck of a nigger, and him +a-hiking through the jungle and a-yelling like a wild Injun." + +"I remember you got out of the way mighty quick," said Pete, "when you +heard us a-coming behind you." + +"It certainly was a curious spectacle," said the Captain, "but go on +with your yarn, Pete." + +"The further we went into the jungle the worse it got. The mosquitoes +fairly ate us alive and they wern't the only cannibals in those woods by +any means. There was a tribe of man-eaters beyond the Big River and we +didn't try to capture any of them. They wern't our stripe of bacon. + +"We went on for six days, with the monkeys chattering over our heads all +day and the mosquitoes serenading us at night. Talk about birds, there +was a whole menagerie of them and their colors beat the handkerchiefs +that these greasers wear around their throats and you can't get ahead of +that for color. + +"One night we got in range of the village we were after and there was a +great pow-wow going on. There was a big fire in the circle of the grass +huts and some big black bucks were doing a dance around it. Just then I +saw--" + +"Hold on, Pete," said the Captain in a low, gruff voice, "somebody is +coming our way." + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE FOUR BOYS + + +"Hey, Jim, where are we going to make camp?" It was his brother Jo's +genial voice. + +"Not until we can strike water," replied Jim. "No more dry camps for +me." + +"I don't think much of the coast range, or the Sierras, either." It was +Juarez Hoskins' well-remembered voice, with its rather low, deep tones. + +"Give me the Rockies every time." + +Juarez was nothing if not loyal to his mountains. + +"I don't think any of the mountains are much to brag of." + +It is hardly necessary to say that it is Tom Darlington who is now +speaking, for the discerning reader is pretty well acquainted with his +style by this time. + +"There's always something to look out for," continued Tom, "if it isn't +Indians it's rattlesnakes, and you have got to choose between a +cloudburst or no water at all. Give me the East every time." + +"You make me exhausted talking about the East," said Jim. "Why didn't +you stay there when you were there? I had just as soon take a chance +with a rattlesnake as with an ice cream soda." + +"Tom would like to _play_ Indian," cut in Jo, "with turkey feathers +sticking up from a red flannel band around his head. And creeping upon a +flock of sheep pretending that they are antelope and that cows are real +live bears." + +"Yes," said Jim, "you have lined it out all right, Jo. Then when they +were tired of playing Injun, Tom and his little playmates could pretend +that they were Daniel Boone's men with wildskin panties on." + +"Shut up, boys," said Juarez, coming to Tom's rescue. "What's the use in +rubbing it in? The East is all right for some folks and if the boys back +there can't have real adventures they have to do the best they can. +After all, Jim, you are an Eastern boy. You can't get away from that." +Jim writhed under the implication but replied good humoredly. + +"You're right, Juarez, old chap, but I can't help stirring up Tom once +in a while. It is good for him too. It keeps his liver active, so he +won't get bilious." + +"Juarez has got more sense than you two put together," said Tom. + +"Forget all about it now, Tommy," urged Juarez good-naturedly, getting +the aforesaid Tommy by the nape of the neck with one vigorous brown hand +and giving him a shake. + +Thus under Juarez's straightforward management the family quarrel was +abated. + +"We might just as well ride now, boys," said Jim. "The horses are good +and rested and we will soon be going down grade instead of up." + +The horses had been following in single file back of the four boys. They +were to be trusted not to cut up any shindigs or to wander from the +narrow mountain trail. The boys had had them a long time and together +they had gone through the numerous hardships and adventures. They were +as perfectly trained as Uncle Sam's cavalry horses. + +The horses halted as the boys dropped back to their sides, and they +swung into the saddle simultaneously. Jim rode in the lead on a splendid +gray, with a powerful arching neck, strong shoulders and hindquarters +made for speed. Him, he called Caliente. Next rode Tom on a pretty bay. +Then Jo on a black of medium size but finely built for speed and +endurance. Juarez brought up the rear on his roan, a sinewy animal with +a broncho strain in him which was liable to crop out at unexpected +moments. + +It is to be noticed that there was a certain formation in the way the +column rode. Jim, the strong and resourceful in front, and Tom, the less +experienced and capable, following, forming the first division. The +second division was composed of Jo and Juarez. + +Juarez having an equally important position with the leader, for he was +rear guard, a more trying position sometimes than being in front for in +their travels through dangerous regions, it was the man in the rear who +was more apt to be cut off by the wily Indians. But the cool and crafty +Juarez was not likely to be caught napping. + +Even now you notice as they ride along through the comparatively safe +region of the coast range that Jim and Juarez are ever on the alert, +glancing this way and that, halting to examine some peculiar mark on the +trail, and not a motion of tree or bush upon either mountain slope +escapes their attention. They had lived too long in the midst of +treacherous enemies, Indians and outlaws, to be taken off their guard. +They had been in Mexico on a venture the outcome of which was all their +fondest dreams could wish for. Their expedition over, Tom was for going +home, to at least deposit the treasure they had gained, but the others +had outvoted him, and now the long pleasure trip to Hawaii was their +object. + +Now, if they but had known it, they were riding to meet the most deadly +danger that they had yet encountered. For as you know, Captain Broom and +his party were advancing to meet them. In an open or running fight, we +know perfectly well that the boys could take care of themselves, but in +the skipper of the Sea Eagle, they were to meet a far more dangerous +opponent than in Eagle Feather, described in "The Frontier Boys in +Colorado" or Cal Jenkins in Kansas and in Mexico as detailed in +"Overland Trail" and in "Mexico." In compliance with a determined plan, +they were now on their way to Hawaii. + +Not only had Captain Broom the craftiness and cruelty of the Indian, but +the cool, hard judgment of the New England Yankee, coupled with a +knowledge of their possessions, supposedly limited to themselves alone. +The Mexican spy, who had reported the route the boys were going to take, +had given the game into his master's hands. + +"I wonder what has become of our one-eyed greaser friend," said Jim, "we +haven't seen any sign of him since he gave us the shake a week ago at +the hunting camp. I kind of thought we might run across him again." + +"It's good riddance to bad rubbish," said Juarez in a surly tone. "If I +had my way I'd hang him to the first oak tree on general principles and +on account of his personal appearance. I bet he is a treacherous little +rat." + +"He isn't very pretty, that's a fact," admitted Jim, "but he is a useful +little beast about the camp and can do a lot of chores." + +"I kind of like to hear him play his guitar," put in Jo, "and sing those +Mexican tunes. They certainly sound pretty." + +"He's a picturesque beggar too," remarked Tom. "Just the kind that in +the old days would have been made a king's jester. They dressed 'em up +in a blazing bright style then. That hump would have made his fortune." + +Tom, as you remember, was an authority on Romance, and as pertaining to +which he always carried two favorite volumes, much worn by hard travel +and frequent usage, but which no amount of ridicule by his brothers +could make him give up. + +"Have it your own way," acceded Juarez, "but he is not the sort of +animal that I would recommend for a household pet." + +"Well, he is gone," said Jim, "so we don't need to worry about him." + +"I don't know but that I would a little rather have him in sight," said +Juarez. "Then you know where he is." + +Jim laughed good-naturedly at the prejudice that Juarez showed against +the little greaser and put it down to his darkly suspicious nature +acquired by his life among the Indians. It would have been better if Jim +had taken more stock in his comrade's suspicions. Now, Jim was not to be +caught napping when once an enemy had declared himself, but it was his +nature to be open-minded and unsuspicious. + +The four Frontier Boys were riding up a winding trail through a narrow +mountain valley, having reached a point almost level with the summits, +which rose several thousand feet above the eastern plain. It had been a +hard, all day climb, and the horses were tired and the gray dust was +caked upon their sweaty riders. + +Let us take a look at our old acquaintances, Jim, Tom, Jo and Juarez, to +see if they have changed any since we saw them last. They are dressed +about as we have always known them. In gray flannel shirts and pants of +the same color, moccasins on their feet and on their heads battered +sombreros with the flaps turned back. + +Their coats are tied back of the saddles, and their shirts open at the +throat for the air is hot and dry in that California mountain valley. +Their rifles are swung across their shoulders held by straps, revolvers +in the holsters at their hips. + +Jim sits in the saddle tall and sinewy, grown somewhat thinner by +constant exercise and by the drying effect of the desert air. His skin +is baked to an absolute brown. Juarez, too, is black as an Indian and he +rather looks like one with his hair quite long and of a coarse black +fibre. The boys look a little fine-drawn but sinewy and strong and fit +for any adventure. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE HUNCHBACK + + +The shadows were already falling on that side of the range as the boys +rode slowly into a narrow pass. The shade was a decided relief from the +glare of the California sun that they had encountered all day. + +"Gosh, but I should like to have a cool breath from the Rockies," +declared Juarez with emphasis, "This sort of a climate makes me tired. +Nothing but the sun staring at you all the time. It goes down clear and +comes up with the same kind of a grin on its face." + +"It will be cooler when we get on the other side," said Jim, +encouragingly, "and it won't be long now." + +"I hope we will strike water on the other side," remarked Jo. "I'm tired +of looking at that bald-headed stream down there," indicating the dry +blistered bed of a former water-course. + +Nothing more was said until of a sudden they rode to the top of the +Pass, and saw a new landscape spread out before them. + +It was a broad and beautiful view, with the sun striking the wide +Pacific, with a blazing glare of silver and below the wooded slope of +the mountains, stretched an apparently level plain, where roamed +countless cattle, and innumerable sheep. It had all the breadth +characteristic of the Californian landscape. + +"That's a pretty good looking view," remarked Jim admiringly. He would +have been still more interested if he could have seen a trim-looking +black vessel in a small cove directly west but a good many miles +distant. + +"I wonder if it isn't going to rain," said Tom. "See those clouds +rolling in over the ocean." + +"Rain!" ejaculated Jim with superior wisdom, a wisdom that appertains +particularly to older brothers, "I guess not. Those are fog clouds. +That's a sure sign in this country that it won't rain." + +"Well, I'm glad to see them, anyway," said Juarez. "It looks sort of +stormy even if it isn't." + +It was restful, there was no question about that, the change from the +constant glare of a white sun in a blue sky, to the soft damp grayness +of the fog. It was already rolling over the level plain towards the +mountains and, in a short time, a high fog was spread over the whole +sky. + +The boys had ridden down the western side of the range for a distance of +a half mile, when Jim suddenly waved his hand backward in a sign of +caution for the column to halt. He leaned forward, looking intently in a +northwesterly direction to a point on the opposite side of the mountain +valley. Juarez followed the direction of the leader's look with a keen +gaze. + +"I was sure that I saw some one slipping through the undergrowth on the +opposite side over there," Jim finally said, "but I could not make sure +whether it was a man or some sort of animal." + +"I noticed the bushes shaking," said Juarez, "but I did not see +anything." + +"Might have been a brown bear," hazarded Jo. + +"They do have them in this range," put in Tom. + +"Perhaps it is the bear that we hunted for two days on the other slope," +said Juarez, "and he has come to give himself up." + +"We had better keep our eyes open," advised Jim, though he did not take +the trouble to unsling his rifle. "Jo, you and Tom watch the upper side, +Juarez will take care of the trail in front." + +"All right, boss," said Juarez, cheerfully. + +"How much reward, captain, for the first glimpse of the lost child?" +inquired Jo. + +Jim paid no attention to this sally, but kept his eye on the trail +ahead. The trees were quite thick on either side of the trail and as +dusk was coming on, it was difficult to make out any object clearly. + +Just as Jim rode around a turn in the trail, Caliente reared and leaped +to one side and a less skillful rider would have been thrown. + +"Easy, old boy," said the rider, patting his horse's neck. Caliente +stood trembling and snorting and watching a curious object that was +struggling up the bank towards the trail. + +It was hard to tell what it was, whether man or beast and the dusk only +served to make it more obscure. Then the object scrambled up on to the +trail and Jim at once recognized the dwarf Mexican with his high-crowned +sombrero and his velvet suit richly slashed. With his crooked back and +one eye, he was anything but a prepossessing-looking creature. Caliente, +when he, too, recognized who it was, put back his ears and rushed with +bared teeth for the Mexican. + +Spitting out a curse, the greaser jumped to one side with a marked +agility, and Jim succeeded after a struggle in bringing his furious +steed to terms, but he had his hands full and there were not very many +men who could manage Caliente when he got into one of his rages. + +"Hi! Manuel," (every Mexican was Manuel to the boys), cried Jim, "look +out for my Tiger, he wants to eat that velvet suit of yours." + +"Si, Senor," called Manuel from a safe station on a granite rock. "He is +a tiger as your Honor says." + +One would have expected to hear the crooked little greaser speak in a +harsh croaking voice, but instead it had a rich sonorous quality. + +"Do you know where there is any water in this country?" asked Jo. "We +are as dry as a desert." + +"Certainly, Senor, I will show you," replied Manuel. (It was true that +Manuel spoke in Spanish of which language the boys had a working +knowledge, due to their sojourn in the southwest. But I shall put his +words in English.) "Where is Senor Juarez?" inquired the dwarf. "I do +not see him." + +"The Senor is still with us," replied Jim, gravely, "but you cannot see +him on account of the dusk, but you might hear him," he added in a lower +tone. + +It was true that Juarez was growling to himself about the greaser for +whom you know he had a cordial antipathy, a feeling which was +reciprocated by the Mexican. + +"Lead on, Manuel," urged Jim, "we want to make camp before morning." + +"But, Senor, the tiger will eat me up," objected the Mexican. + +"I will take care of Caliente. He won't bite you. Go ahead." + +"Si, Senor," assented Manuel. + +Then he jumped down from the rock and took the trail at a discreet +distance ahead of Jim's horse, who was held in check by his rider though +his temper seemed in no wise abated. There was something sinister in the +figure of the Mexican as he led the way down the trail. + +All in black, except the gray of his hat with its golden cord and the +tinsel of his clothes. There was something malignant in his make-up and +even the unimaginative Jim was affected by the presence of the Mexican, +while Juarez was very uneasy, and asked Jo and Tom to allow him to move +up next to the Captain. This they did, though it left Jo as rear guard +on that rocky trail. + +He seemed quite isolated but he had become sufficiently enured to danger +and though he kept a wary eye, he was not nervous. The boys had +unholstered their pistols and Juarez kept a straight eye on the moving +shadow in the darkness ahead. At the first sign of attack or treachery, +he was going to get that particular Manuel. + +"I've got my eye on the little varmint," said Juarez in a low voice to +Jim. "He may be leading us into an ambush." + +"Oh, I guess not," said Jim, with a note of hesitation in his voice. "We +have got to find water anyway. The horses are suffering for it, and this +beggar can show us where we can locate it." + +Just then Manuel threw up his hand with a shrill whistle that had every +malignant intention in it. Juarez raised his pistol just ready to fire, +when the Mexican laughed shrilly. + +"Senor Juarez very nervous. I just stretch and whistle a little and he +want to shoot." + +A peculiar smile came over Juarez's face, but he said nothing. All the +stolid Indian in his nature came to the surface. He merely grunted +contemptuously at the Mexican's remark and this made the volatile Manuel +uneasy in his turn, for he wanted to realize that his malice had struck +home, but Juarez did not give him that satisfaction. There was a sort of +hidden duel between these two, the subtle Mexican and the crafty Indian +nature of Juarez. It remained to be seen who would win. + +The four Frontier Boys went silently along down the dark canyon, each +one occupied with his own thoughts and the ill-omened Mexican guide in +the lead. Juarez kept a sharp lookout on either side of the trail +expecting an ambush. His horse seemed to feel something of the strain +his rider was under, as a horse will. Once he shied at something he saw +in a clump of bushes, and nearly went off the trail. It was only with +the aid of Juarez's horsemanship that he clawed his way back to safety. +The Mexican was much amused at this incident, and Jim gave him a sharp +call down. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +FARMER BROOM + + +We must now return to Captain Broom and his escort, whom we left sitting +on a hill covered with trees near the Sebastian rancho. Old Pete's story +had been interrupted by the skipper's warning,--"Somebody is coming our +way." + +There was no question about that, they could hear the someone coming +towards the hill whistling cheerfully. Then the form of a man could be +seen, coming up the slope of the elevation. + +"I wonder where those altogether blessed cows are," he was heard saying +in Spanish, but of course, this is a free and not a literal translation. + +"They are generally hiding under these trees," he continued. The sailors +kept absolutely still and old Pete covered the bowl of his pipe with his +hand so that its light might not discover them. + +"Carambe!" cried the Mexican as he stopped about three feet from the +recumbent Captain, "I fear my good master's cows have been smoking, not +like nice Mexican cows, a cigarette, but a pipe like a vile gringo. +Come, get up, you black brute," noticing the big bulk of the Captain for +the first time, and he hauled off and gave the skipper a hearty kick on +the haunch. + +Never was there a more surprised greaser in the whole ungainly length of +California for this apparently gentle cow that he kicked, (not for the +first time either) suddenly turned and grabbed him with a powerful hand +before he could yell, though he was so frightened that he probably could +not utter a squeak. Another hand got him by the throat. + +"Take me for a cow, did you, you bespangled Manuello?" roared the +Captain, and he waved the aforesaid Manuello about in his great grip as +though he had been a rag. + +"No use killing the beggar, Captain," said the mate. "Maybe he can tell +us something." The Captain let the Mexican drop and he lay on the ground +perfectly inert. + +"He won't be able to say much right away," said the Skipper. + +It was now getting light, the first signs of dawn showing above the +mountains. As the darkness was drawn away, they could see their position +more clearly and there came the sounds of the morning from the direction +of the ranch houses. The barking of dogs, the crowing of roosters, and +the call of human voices. + +"I guess, lads, it's about time for us to have something to eat," said +the Captain, "because we have got to do some tall climbing today and I +want to get an early start." + +An expression of disgust showed itself on old Pete's face at the idea of +more walking, which the Captain was quick to note. + +"How would you like to stay here, Old Bones, and look after Manuello?" +said the skipper. But Pete shook his head. + +"I'll stay by the ship, Cap'n," said the old fellow stoutly. + +"Durn my buttons," said the Captain, whose oaths were as mild as his +actions were vicious, "if you ain't a good old barnacle, Pete. I +wouldn't think of leaving you in such company as this," and he gave the +prostrate Mexican a shove with his foot. Manuello looked up at the +Captain with an evil eye and a muttered curse. + +This roused the fury of Captain Broom and he held him off from the +ground as if he had been a rat, his jaws working ominously and a look in +his eyes that made the Mexican shrivel. + +Nothing was said, not even by the Skipper, and the others watched him +fascinated as he glared at his victim, and even the iron composure of +the saturnine mate seemed to be moved partially aside. The Mexican began +to whimper and moan as his eyes shifted to avoid the terrible ones of +the Captain. He was not suffering any special violence, but a strange +tremor filled the soul of the Mexican, in the grip of the grizzled +giant. + +As the greaser began to cry, the Captain gave a roar of laughter and +threw him aside upon the ground, about all the humanity he had shriveled +out of him. He lay there absolutely without any power of motion in his +body. + +Just then the crew of the Sea Eagle became aware of the fact that a +horned animal with big brown eyes was looking at them. All the farmer in +the nature of Captain Broom came to the surface. + +"By Gum," he exclaimed, "if here ain't a bovine cow looking at us. I +ain't milked one for forty years, but I'm not afeard to try. 'Member, +Pete, when we used to milk the cows back in old Connecticut on the farm. +After working in the hay all day, I'd go down in the side hill pasture, +that was so steep that you had to hold on with your toes and your teeth +to keep from sliding down to the brook." + +"You bring it back to me just like it was a living picture," said Pete, +his hard face softening under the gentle showers of memory. + +"Then I'd drive the black and white one that was breechy, and the red +mooley, the yaller and white that gave the richest milk. I'd drive them +into the stanchions in the old barn, with the ground floor stoned up on +the side, where it was sunk into the hill." + +"But it was winter, Cap'n," said Pete, "that it was interesting doing +the chores," and he blew reminiscently on his fingers, "snow two feet on +the level and the sun a piece of blue ice in the sky. A condemned sight +better place than Californey, where you don't feel no more alive than a +enbalmed corpse." + +The Captain began now a series of manoeuvres to get within range of +one of the cows so that they might have fresh milk for breakfast. He +managed it finally, and he certainly looked like a peaceful old farmer +as with his gray head against a fat red cow's flank, he milked into a +large tin cup. Pete selected a black mooley and soothed by the man's +persuasive manner, she consented finally to give down a thin blue +stream. But the saturnine mate was less successful as he knew much more +about navigating a ship than he did about cows. + +Finally after much awkward manoeuvring, he got a cow cornered and +began operations upon the left side with the result that the cow landed +upon him with her hoof and sent him sprawling on his back to the great +delight of the Captain. + +"Hurt bad, Bill?" inquired the Skipper with mock sympathy, "I'm afeard +that you will never make a farmer." + +"I never calkerlated to," replied the mate. "It ain't my line of +business." + +"Don't tell me that," said the Captain, "I can see that for myself. Come +up here and I'll give you a drink." + +They had scarcely finished their simple breakfast when Jack Cales gave a +sudden alarm. + +"Cap'n," he cried, "I see two men legging it our way. They are making +straight for the hill." + +"I guess they are coming to see why Manuello doesn't show up with the +cows," remarked the Captain, "we don't want to stir up this hen roost as +we've got other chicken to fry. So we'll git." + +"Take the greaser?" inquired Jack. + +"You and the mate fetch him," said the Captain. + +Just as the two men were mounting the hill, the Captain and his crew +made a swift sneak down the opposite slope, and were soon making their +way through the bush towards the foot-hills. In a minute they heard the +cries of the two men as they drove the herd of cows towards the home +ranch for the morning milking. The sun had now risen above the eastern +range just in front of them and was blazing down upon the plain and the +sea beyond. There was something exhilarating in the air in spite of the +heat. + +"We don't need the company of that greaser any further," said Captain +Broom, after they had made some headway up a canyon back of the ranch +buildings. So they took some rope grass, tough as manilla, and tied him +firmly, and, after having gagged him, they left him to be found later by +some of his countrymen. + +Then they toiled steadily up the trail of the canyon, until about noon +they reached a pocket in the canyon where there was a pool of clear +water fed by an invisible spring. Coming to meet them were four boys +riding up the trail on the other side of the range. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE CAMP IN THE POCKET + + +Under the guidance of the Mexican dwarf, the four boys came at last to a +halt. It seemed as if the canyon down which they had been riding had +come to an end for there was a wall of rock directly in front of them. + +"Down there, Senor, is a pool of clear water," announced the Mexican. + +"Glad to hear it, Manuel," said Jim heartily. + +"Did you ever see a picture, Jim," put in Juarez significantly, "of a +pool where the thirsty animals have to come to drink and before they get +their noses in the water the hunter shoots them?" + +But nothing of this dire nature happened and in a few minutes the +famished animals were pumping the delicious water down their long, baked +throats. + +"My Gracious, but that tastes good!" cried Tom, drawing in a long, +gasping breath, after he had been drinking steadily for about a minute. +"It makes my head swim." + +"I should think it would," said Jo, sarcastically, "considering the +amount you have drunk." + +"You weren't far behind," grumbled Tom. "I thought that you were not +going to leave enough for the horses." + +"I don't especially like this place to camp in," said Jim. "We are not +accustomed to get in a pocket like this. But it is too late to pull out +tonight and the horses need a rest, so we will keep guard." + +"Better drown the brown rat first," remarked Juarez to Jim. But the +latter only shook his head and laughed. + +The camp was made about twenty feet east of the spring in a small grove +of slender trees backed by a high wall of steep granite, down which +poured a waterfall in the rainy season. + +The fire was built upon a flat rock in the centre of the grove where +there was no danger of it catching in the grass and bushes which were +dry as tinder. If once a mountain fire was started at the end of the dry +season there would be no stopping it until it had devastated the whole +country. + +The light of the fire showed the usual cheery and active scene that goes +with making camp. How many times the Frontier Boys had gone through +these preparations it is impossible to say. They had camped on the +plains of Kansas, in the mountains of Colorado, on the Mesas of New +Mexico, the banks of the Colorado river, and the Pampas of Mexico. Now +we find them in the coast range of California. + +It was not an especially dangerous country in which they were camped, +nothing to compare with parts of Colorado and Mexico, but never were +they in greater danger than at the present moment and this camp promised +to be their last together, except they had unusual luck. + +There was a traitor in the company, and even now four pairs of hostile +eyes were watching them as they moved in the light of the fire. The +Captain of the Sea Eagle and his three trusty men were hidden in some +bushes at the top of the pocket on the western side. + +Juarez and Jim busied themselves first in looking after their horses. +Removing the saddles they rubbed down each animal thoroughly, clear to +the fetlocks and then gave them a good feed of grain. Jo and Tom were on +the supper committee and busying themselves making preparations for a +square meal. Manuello, who had been with the boys on the other side of +the range and was accustomed to help in odd chores about camp, now +offered to aid in getting the supper. + +"I will make the coffee with your permission, Senor Jo," he proposed. + +"Do you savvy it all right, Manuello?" inquired Jo. + +"Ah, yes, Senor. I can make such coffee as the Holy Father would be +pleased to drink," he replied with fervor. + +"Not too strong because it keeps me awake," protested Tom. + +"No, no, Senor Thomas," replied Manuello with a sweeping bow, "the +coffee I make is very soothing. It will give you a long, soft sleep." +There was an undertone of subtle irony that was entirely lost upon the +two straightforward boys. + +"That's a good fellow, Manuello," said Jo, cordially, and he handed the +coffee pot filled with water to the Mexican, who went about the +preparation of it with a deftness that showed that he knew what he was +about. Not one of the boys saw him slip a white powder into the coffee +pot. It quickly dissolved and the coffee began to bubble innocently +enough under the eyes of the hunchback Manuello. + +Juarez and Jim just then came back from looking after the horses which +were fastened near the wall of rock. As soon as Juarez saw the Mexican +watching over the coffee pot, his eyes narrowed with suspicion. + +"Who made the coffee?" he asked Jo, bluntly. + +"Manuello," replied Jo. + +"The Senor will find the coffee truly delicious," said the hunchback +with a bow, "only the Mexican knows how to keep its aroma when boiling +it." + +"Humph," grunted Juarez, and he went deliberately to the fire and lifted +the coffee pot off and poured its contents on the ground. + +"The American does not care for the aroma of your Mexican coffee," he +said coolly. + +The Mexican merely gave a peculiar hitch to his shoulder, spat on the +ground and turned away apparently mortally offended as he, no doubt, +was. That part of his scheme had been blocked by the craftiness of +Juarez, but the Captain might make good where his spy had failed. + +The Mexican sat back in the shadow on a rock smoking a cigarette, while +the boys ate their supper of beans, meat, bread and coffee. He was the +skeleton at the feast as it were, not only his malignant humor made +itself felt, but there was a sense of depression that they could not +shake off, try as they would. + +This was so unusual that they could not account for it. As a rule, they +were jolly and even when danger was impending, they felt a certain +confidence and assurance, but not so tonight. + +"What makes us feel so on the bum tonight, do you suppose?" asked Tom. + +"Maybe this canyon is haunted," proposed Jo, who had an imaginative +streak in him. + +"I tell you the way I figure it," said Jim. "We are not used to camping +in a hollow like this, for before this we have always selected a place +that we could defend, and though there is no particular danger from +outlaws or Indians in these mountains, we can't shake off our old +habits." + +"I believe there is something in that," acquiesced Jo. + +"It's that rat over there," said Juarez loudly. + +The Mexican laughed coolly and insolently, and lighted another +cigarette. This would have maddened an excitable person, but Juarez was +in a stoical mood and he contented himself with flinging a bone that he +had been gnawing at, carelessly over his shoulder, almost striking the +Mexican in the face. + +This set that peppery individual wild and he tore around considerably, +tearing his hair, stamping his feet and sputtering with maledictions at +the insult that had been offered him. + +"I am no dog that you can throw a bone to," and he sizzled off into a +string of unpleasant remarks. + +"Here you, Manuello," roared Jim, rising to his feet and standing over +the Mexican, "not another yelp out of you." + +Manuello had a respect for this big American lad much as he despised his +simplicity and he sobered down. Besides he had not finished his work for +the night. He had failed to get the sleeping drug to the boys in the +coffee and now he must be ready to help his master, Captain Broom of the +Sea Eagle, in some other way. + +There was a person whom he feared and admired absolutely and he had been +a most useful spy and agent for the Skipper in certain nefarious plots. +It was well for the little hunchback that no one knew of his share in +the betraying of old Juan Sebastian some years before. + +"You will have the first watch, Jo," ordered Jim. "It is now nine +o'clock. I will relieve you at eleven and stand guard until two. Juarez +from two until five and Tom can have the short watch." + +According to this arrangement, Jim and Juarez would be on guard during +the danger hours. + +How many times in the past had the boys stood guard over their camp. Was +this to be the last guard? There were the old Kansas days, when they had +to be on the watch against horse thieves. Then came the dangerous crisis +in their Colorado experiences, when they had to guard against the wiles +of the Indians. And most exciting of all, perhaps, the night in old +Mexico when they camped on the trail of the outlaws. I wonder if Jo, the +first on duty, thought of these old times that night. Probably not, his +mind being fully occupied with the business in hand. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE ATTACK + + +So the three boys rolled into their blankets with the saddles for +pillows and dropped immediately to sleep as they were very tired from +the long, hard ride. They lay at different points around the fire, which +was allowed to die down as the fog seemed like a warm gray blanket over +the whole landscape. + +Jo sat on a log by the slowly dying fire, with his rifle on his knees +looking into the darkness and not far from him lay the Mexican a mere +dark lump on the ground, apparently asleep, but keeping a wary eye on +all around. Imperceptibly he crept nearer to where Jo was sitting, but +he did not have the weapon he would have preferred in his hand, the +stiletto, which was as natural to him as the fangs to a rattlesnake. + +But it did not suit the long-headed Captain Broom to have the boys +killed. He wanted their life as well as their money, but in a different +sense than the adage has it. From what he had heard of them, they were +boys of unusual mettle and varied acquirements. If caught young, he +could train them to good purpose. If they proved worthless, he would +hold them for ransom. + +So Captain Broom had told Manuello briefly and to the point that there +was to be no rib-sticking and the Mexican would have thought as soon of +disobeying the commands of the Evil One as of going contrary to the +instructions of the Captain. So as he crept towards Jo, he held not a +poniard in his clenched hand, but a heavy weapon like a black-jack, made +of leather with a weight at the end. + +Jo, however, spoiled his first attempt, for when the greaser had got +within striking distance, Jo got up and went down to the pool to get a +drink. If it had not been so dark, when they arrived, the boys would +have seen tracks around the pool that would have aroused their +suspicions. But everything seemed to work against them this time. + +Jo stooped down at the brink and scarcely put his thirsty lips to the +water when some instinct of warning made him look quickly around and he +saw a small dark object directly back of him. + +"Pardon, Senor, for startling you;" it was the voice of the dwarf, "but +I, too, was very thirsty. It is in the air." + +"You needn't have been so quiet about it," said Jo, crossly. This little +rat always had a way of baffling and irritating him, because he did not +have Jim's force, which could beat down the dwarf when occasion demanded +it, or the stoicism of Juarez, which blocked the hunchback. + +"I came softly, Senor," said the Mexican, imperturbably, "because I did +not wish to disturb the slumbers of the Senors who are resting." + +"Get down and drink, then," said Jo, who, though he realized that the +Mexican was up to some hidden deviltry, did not know how to meet him. +Jim and Juarez would have knocked him out of the camp if they had +discovered him trailing them, with a warning that he would be shot if he +put in an appearance again. + +While the Mexican was pretending to drink, Jo satisfied his thirst at a +point of the pool where he would be safe from a sudden attack by the +hunchback. For Jo was not a fool by any means. Then he got to his feet +and with the Mexican ahead of him, he saw to that, he made his way back +to the camp. + +Scarcely had Jo seated himself upon the rock again than he heard a stick +snap upon the mountain side above the horses, so he got to his feet to +investigate. + +"You can stay where you are, Manuello," said Jo. "I don't need your +company this time." The Mexican laughed softly to himself. + +"I hope the Senor Americano will not get lonesome," he said. + +Jo made a careful search in the direction of the sound but found no sign +of a human being lurking among the trees. Though he felt exceedingly +nervous, he was unable to account therefor or give a reason. + +Very quietly he went the rounds, so as not to awake the boys, who, +however, were sleeping heavily. He found the horses all right standing +with drooping heads as though dozing, Jo's black with his neck over +Tom's bay, as these horses were great chums. But Caliente and Juarez's +roan were not sociable and kept strictly to themselves. + +Then Jo returned to the rock where he had been sitting. He stirred the +dying fire so that it sent up a feeble spurt of flame by the aid of +which he looked at his watch. It lacked a few minutes of ten. The +Mexican had taken up his old place on the ground watching for his +chance. He was anxious that the attack should take place during Jo's +watch for he had his doubts in regard to Juarez or the redoubtable Jim +proving easy victims. + +All this time, Captain Bill Broom and his crew had been keeping watch +upon their intended victims from the top of the cliff above the pool. +They could see every move from the time the Frontier Boys had arrived +until they lay down near the smouldering fire. + +"They are a husky lot," was the Captain's first comment. "That tall +fellar, I guess, is a horse tamer and Injun fighter." + +Some time later when the altercation occurred about the coffee and +Juarez expressed his opinion about the Mexican, the Captain could +scarcely keep from haw-hawing right out. + +"Them fellars have got some dis'pline," commented the saturnine mate. + +"You're right they hev," said the Captain. + +"That lad don't know how to handle my pet rattlesnake," was the +Captain's comment when the Mexican trailed Jo to the drinking pool. +After Jo had returned from making his rounds and had resumed his guard +again, the Captain decided that the time had come for action. + +"Now, lads," he ordered, "pull off your shoes and the first man that +makes a sound will get his neck cracked. Knock 'em out, if necessary, +but no killing this time." + +Then they started, the Captain in the lead, and old Pete bringing up the +rear. They had had a good many hours in that vicinity and had made a +path from their hiding place to the soft dust trail. So they moved in +their sock feet without a sound. There was an oppressive stillness in +that dark canyon under the heavy blanket of fog. + +Already it had began to lower and as the sailors advanced with +snail-like slowness the heavy white fog settled down, filling the canyon +with its white opaqueness. You could not see five feet in front, and the +moisture beaded itself upon the eyebrows and mustaches of the men. + +This dense fog was a great help to the attacking party. They had now +crawled half way down the main trail, when Pete came near putting all +the fat in the fire, for his eyesight was not overly keen, and the fog +made it more difficult for him. He did not see a round stone poised on +the edge of the trail until it rolled down towards the pool. + +Although every sound was deadened by the fog, still the watchful Jo +heard it distinctly. He got quickly to his feet and, with soft +moccasined tread he went in the direction of the sound, his pistol in +his hand. + +No sooner had the stone fallen than the Captain motioned the mate to +halt. This signal was repeated to Jack Cales, who was so hidden by the +fog that he could not see the Captain. He stopped suddenly so that old +Pete tumbled over him, making some noise. + +The Captain almost had a fit of apoplexy because he did not dare express +himself at this interesting juncture. Jo had heard the noise on the +trail and his suspicions centered in that direction. Noiselessly he went +up with slight footprints in the damp dust of the trail. The Captain +waited his coming, crouched behind a bend in the trail. + +Then Jo saw a huge figure rising suddenly out of the fog in front of him +and, before he could fire, a great hand gripped for his throat, but if +he could not shoot in defense, at least he could give his comrades +warning. He fired one shot, and then he was overpowered. + +Jim and Juarez heard it instantly. Then Manuello got in some of his +work. Before Juarez could rise, he struck him a vicious blow upon the +head that stunned him, rendering him unconscious. Cold with fury, Jim +picked up the rat of a Mexican before he could land a blow upon him, +whirled him over his head and dashed him upon the ground. + +Then he sprang through the fog in the direction of the shot. He heard Jo +groan as the ruffians overpowered him and he leaped up the trail blind +with a fighting rage. The Captain had just got up from the struggle +with Jo, who lay as good as dead in the trail. + +Then Jim hurled himself upon him. Powerful though he was, the Captain +could not withstand the sinewy lurch of that sudden attack and together +boy and man crashed from the trail over rocks and through brush until +with a fearful impact they struck the trunk of a pine tree. + +The mate sprang swiftly down to the rescue of his fallen master. He was +a strong, sinewy man and knew how to act in an emergency. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +"HAUL IN" + + +The jar of the fall had knocked out the Captain partially and Jim had +risen to give him the coup de grace, when he heard the rush of the mate +coming down through the fog. It was a strange sensation hearing your +enemy but not able to see him. + +Then the mate plunged into view, a dark ball through the opaqueness. He +could not have stopped if he had so desired and it was evident that he +did not wish to. For, with lowered head, he came for Jim as he would for +an ugly sailor. + +Jim stopped him with his shoulder and ripped in a right uppercut with +his keen hard fist that would have stopped the heart action of an +ordinary man, and it sent the seasoned mate back upon his haunches, +partially dazed. Feeling the Captain squirming back to life, he planted +a back blow with his heel in the latter's stomach that took the wind out +of the Captain's sails for the time being. The mate, a really hardy +individual, had made good use of the brief respite and, picking up a +heavy stick, came for Jim with it. + +The latter dodged the blow aimed at his head and it glanced off his +shoulder. Then he closed with the sailor, struggling to put him out. +Three seconds more and Jim would have landed the proper blow, had not +Jack Cales arrived upon the scene under cover of the mêlée. Before Jim +could turn to meet this new assailant, a stone crashed against his +head--and the frontier boys had lost. + +The Captain had now recovered sufficiently to get on his feet, and the +fallen Jim was kicked until the Captain himself called a halt. + +"Wait till we get him on board ship, lads," he said, "and we will finish +this job." + +"Better get the other two, Cap'n," advised the mate. + +So they dragged the prostrate Jim to the foot of the trail near where +the drinking pool was and went to look for Juarez and Tom. They saw a +small black object crawling towards them through the fog. + +"What's this a coming?" asked Jack Cales. + +"Why, it's my Mexican ferret," said the Captain. "What's the matter, +Manuello?" he asked as he turned him over none too gently with his foot. + +"The big Senor throw me over his head and on the ground. I think I +crack the world open," he explained. The Captain roared with laughter. + +"Where is the rest of this dangerous gang?" he asked. + +"I will show you," he said, struggling to his feet. The presence of his +master gave him strength and confidence. "This way, Senor Captain." + +He brought them to where Juarez lay upon the ground, partially held up +by Tom, who had been crying and endeavoring to bring his comrade back to +consciousness from the ugly blow that the Mexican had given him. I am +sure that none could blame Tom for tears upon this occasion for it was +calculated to try the heart of the stoutest. + +"Why, this boy looks like an Indian," said the Captain regarding Juarez +closely. + +"He lived with the Indians when a boy, Senor Captain," volunteered the +dwarf, who by subtle means of his own had become possessed of the +history of the four boys. + +"He don't seem to be much more than a boy, now," said the Captain. They +had not paid much attention to Tom because he seemed a mere kid, but the +hunchback was not to be caught napping, for he had worked around back of +Tom, and as the latter aimed his revolver at the Captain, having worked +it cautiously out of his holster, the dwarf grabbed him in the nick of +time else the expedition would have lost its head. + +Instead of being infuriated as one might have expected, the Captain was +decidedly amused at the temerity of the youngster, for that is all Tom +appeared to him, and, therefore, he did not hand him a beating. + +"The nerve of the little rooster," guffawed the Captain. "I'll make a +real pirate out of you." + +Tom struggled wildly, but it was no use, as Jack Cales and the mate +disarmed him. Just then there came a loud yell from up the trail. + +"Haul in, Cap'n!" It was Old Pete's well known and melodious voice. + +"Jack, go and see what the old cuss wants," ordered the Captain. "I +expect that the lad up there is trying to kidnap Pete." + +When Jack arrived on the scene, he found that the Skipper had guessed +right. For Jo had been playing possum and was not nearly so badly hurt +as he had appeared to be. + +He came near escaping from his keeper and it was only by a quick forward +lunge that Pete had grabbed him and then occurred a short struggle in +which Pete had called for help and just as Jo had wrestled himself +loose, Cales appeared and grabbed him. It took both Pete and Cales +quite a while to subdue him. + +Finally it was accomplished and they made him go down the trail, one on +either side. At the foot of the incline he saw the bruised and battered +form of Jim lying on the ground and a big lump came into his throat. + +"You fellows will pay for this," he said, rendered desperate by the +sight of Jim. But his captors only laughed, not realizing that the +Frontier Boys were apt to keep their word. + +Then they joined the main gang and Jo saw to his dismay that Tom and +Juarez were in the coils as well as himself and that Juarez, too, had +been laid out and appeared dazed and only partially conscious of what +was going on. Thus there was little hope of escape with the two leaders, +Jim and Juarez, done for. + +"Better search these beggars for their money, Captain," suggested the +mate. + +"It hadn't slipped my mind," replied the Skipper. + +Now the money and the jewels that the boys had found in Mexico were in +leather belts around their bodies. These were soon in the possession of +the Captain, but the crew knew full well that they would receive their +share and thus it was that the Skipper gave promise of living to a ripe +old age instead of being murdered for his money. + +"It's about time to make a start, Cap'n," announced the mate, and the +Captain consulted his watch by the light of a lantern. He found that it +was half-past eleven. + +"We won't be so long going back," he said. "We will use their horses." + +This was easier said than done, for when any of the crew approached +Caliente, that noble animal became transformed into a tiger and as he +came for them with bared teeth or whirled and kicked out with his heels, +they decided that discretion was the better part of valor and they left +him alone. Sailors at best are not very clever horsemen. + +"Let me have a chance and I'll quiet him for you," volunteered Jim +gruffly. "I don't want to see you poor fellows eaten alive." + +"My lad," said the Skipper solemnly, "I'm no spring chicken and you +can't catch me with any such chaff." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE + + +The other three horses proved more tractable than Caliente, and after +some skirmishing they managed to get their new ships rigged up with the +saddles and other tackle. Now as soon as they got their cargo aboard, +they would be prepared to set sail and to cruise over the plains. (I +must use this nautical language out of respect for Captain Broom and his +crew.) + +As I have said before, sailors are poor horsemen and when it came to +making fast the double cinches, they were quite at sea, where sailors +should be, perhaps. Old Pete came near getting his head kicked off by +pulling the back cinch too tight, but he and Captain Broom profited by +their youthful experience on a New England farm, so the horses were +finally all saddled and bridled and ready for a flight--except Caliente. +He was to be left marooned in the lonely canyon. + +It was surprising to Jim and his comrades how quietly Juarez's roan took +matters, but there is no relying on a broncho, because he always does +the unexpected, and the Captain was so pleased with his behavior that +he decided to ride the animal himself. + +"Now, that's what I call a well broken hoss," he said. "I ain't so sure +of the black so I will let you cruise on him, Jack, being the most +active. I don't know what I shall do for Pete, unless I can find him a +rocking-horse." + +"What are you going to do with the boys?" inquired the mate. "Have 'em +walk?" + +"They can ride their pack mule," said the Captain grimly. + +So Jo, Juarez and Jim were securely fastened on the patient mule, while +Tom rode behind the mate upon his own horse, but no longer as master. +Then the queer procession started up the trail through the dense fog. +The Captain was in the lead, followed by the mate with Tom, then the +mule with Pete and the Mexican dwarf guarding the animal and its cargo, +while the active Jack Cales was the rear guard. It was exactly twelve +o'clock when they weighed anchor and sailed from the harbor or cove in +the mountain canyon. + +The three boys said little to each other. They did not waste their +breath with threats of what they would do to their captors later on, but +accepted the situation with true western stoicism. But you may be sure +that their minds were active even if their tongues said little. + +They were so securely tied that there was no chance for them to make a +move as their arms were corded tight to their bodies and their feet were +tied under the belly of the mule. Unless they had been experienced +riders they would have had a difficult time of it. But it was terribly +humiliating, especially under the insolence of the malignant Mexican. +But he did not dare do them any actual injury, because the Skipper had +given him a warning which he did not dare to disregard. Finally, old +Pete put an end to his slurring remarks to the prisoners, so he had to +content himself with ugly looks and frequent expectoration wherewith to +express his disgust. + +Before they reached the foot of the trail, Jack Cales changed with Pete, +though the latter demurred at first, at boarding the strange black craft +with four legs, but finally consented under the urging of Jack and the +warm recommendation of the boys, who had taken somewhat of a fancy to +the old sailor, since he had shut up the Mexican in their behalf. + +"He won't hurt you, Pop," said Jim, "he is a good horse. Any lady could +ride him." + +"I ain't no lady," replied the old fellow suspiciously, as he slowly +and stiffly mounted, while Jack held his head, that is to say, the +horse's head, not Pete's. + +"What did he do that for?" inquired Pete, anxiously, preparing to +dismount. + +"Stay on, you old Barnacle," roared the Captain from the head of the +procession, for though he could not see anything in the rear, still he +seemed able to keep an instinctive tab on his old comrade Pete. + +"That horse is all right, Pop," said Jo, "and I ought to know. I've +ridden him a good many hundred miles. Don't tickle him with your heels, +that's all." + +"I guess that's what I've done," admitted Pete. + +Then the procession resumed its march with Pete as rear guard, riding +with due caution and circumspection as though his craft was loaded with +dynamite and liable to explode at any time. Jack Cales tried to quiz the +prisoners on the mule in a friendly way, but they would not relax in +their attitude of grim, if not sullen, defiance towards their captors. + +Captain Broom need not think that his prisoners would ever accept any +conditions from him. Doubtless, he thought that these boys might be +trained to help him in his business for he appreciated their courage +and fighting ability, but he did not fully understand what stuff the +frontier boys were made of. + +The procession of pirates and their prisoners had now reached the foot +of the range and were in close proximity to the ranch, but everything +favored the plans of the Skipper of the Sea Eagle. The fog became denser +when they reached the level plain so that it was scarcely possible for +the rider to see the ears of his horse. + +Every sound was deadened, so that they could have gone directly past the +ranch houses and not even the dogs would have heard them. But the +Captain was determined to take no chances, and as soon as the party were +free of the canyon, he bore off toward the south, making quite a +circuit. + +Anybody but an experienced navigator would have been lost in the fog +upon the plain, but you could not lose Captain Broom either on the high +seas or the low plains. They passed between two wooded hills, which the +reader will have to take on faith as he cannot see them. Then across a +gully, on the other side of which they came to a barb wire fence. + +This did not stop them long, as the Captain cut it and they rode +through. From the footing which was about all that could be observed, +they appeared to be in a pasture land with a gentle slope towards the +sea. The fog did not diminish in thickness and the boys determined to +escape. Here was their chance, if they could be said to have one. + +"Here's where we make a break," said Jim to Juarez. "Guide the mule +alongside of Tom. Then we will run for it." Jim did not say this in so +many words, but he had ways and means of indicating to Juarez, who was +tied directly back of him, by a sign and poke language which Juarez was +quick to seize. + +It seemed at every turn that his experience with the Indians was a help +to him. The mule was a protégé of Juarez and with a word he could guide +it in any direction that he wished it to go. The fog was one thing that +favored them. The Mexican could scarcely be seen and Jack Cales stalked +along looking like a giant through the mist. + +He had grown somewhat lax through the long march. This was the time, if +ever. Jim gave Juarez the signal that all was ready. A quick word to the +mule and he trotted out from his place in the column, knocking over the +Mexican and before Cales was fairly awake to the situation, he was +obscured by the fog. + +In about two seconds he had hove alongside of the horse that the mate +was on. Tom was foot-loose, and no sooner did he see Missouri's long +ears through the fog, than he was ready for action. + +"Jump, Tom," urged Jim. It took only about two seconds for Tom to +execute the manoeuvre. + +"Halt!" roared the Captain, and he tried to turn the roan to capture the +runaways, but right here, the broncho strain in the animal showed +itself. + +He began to buck and never in all his experience had the redoubtable +Captain Broom ever been on so choppy a sea. It was hard to distinguish +fog from whiskers. At the second hunch upward, the Captain shot into +space. The boys did not tarry to watch for his descent. A word from +Juarez to the mule, and Missouri turned directly south just as Jack +Cales came rushing up. + +"Touch him with your foot, Tom," said Juarez, meaning the mule, not +Cales. Tom's heel reached the right spot and up flew the mule's hind +feet with the rapidity of a rapid fire-gun. + +One foot struck Cales on the shoulder with a sufficient impact to send +him down and out. The mate had been involved in the cyclone of which +Captain Broom was the centre. Tom's horse, considered the gentlest of +the four, had become infected with the roan's example and he started in +to do a little bucking on his own account. Never since the mate had +rounded Cape Horn, had he known so much action in so short a time. + +The only one left was Old Pete and he came on right gallantly, but by +dodging and turning they got away in the fog. After putting what they +considered a safe distance between themselves and their former captors, +Juarez persuaded Missouri to halt, and Tom went to work and with great +difficulty first untied, then lifted, them to the ground for the boys +were as stiff as boards from being tied hard and fast for so long a +time. + +"My, but it certainly hurts," said Jo, stamping around in an endeavor to +get the blood to circulating again. "It's just like it used to be back +home in the winter when we would go skating and get our hands numb." + +"What is the matter, Juarez?" asked Jim in alarm. + +"Oh, I'm all right, I guess," he said in a voice that sounded faint to +the boys and far away to himself. Then, without warning, he fell over on +the ground and stiffened out. + +"It's from the blow that the greaser gave him," said Tom. "It would have +killed him if it had struck him fair." + +"Wait until I get my hands on him," cried Jim, significantly. + +What should they do now? It was not an easy question to decide. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE RANCHERO + + +They could not desert Juarez and they could not get far with him. It was +enough to stagger them and it seemed that they had reached the end of +their resources. + +"If it wasn't such an open country," said Jo, "we might hide until they +had got out of range and then get to the nearest ranch." + +"If they overtake us we can stand them off," saying this Jim reached for +his revolver. To his astonishment it was gone. Then he remembered he had +been disarmed by Captain Broom, and they were absolutely defenseless +unless they could depend on Missouri's heels which had furnished them +such active protection. + +Finally they brought Juarez around so that he was able to sit up. + +"Where am I?" he asked in a sort of daze. + +"You will be all right in a minute, old chap," encouraged Jim, speaking +cheerfully, but he did not feel so. + +"You bet I will," he assented feebly, but with invincible determination. +"What are you holding me for, Jim? Let's get at those fellows." It was +evident that his mind was not exactly clear yet. They got him on his +feet and he seemed better, though still very wabbly. + +"There come those fellows," cried Jim, suddenly, with more of despair in +his tone than he had ever spoken before, no matter how hard pressed they +had been. But before there had always been something to do, but now they +were helpless. Jim looked hastily around for some weapon. All he found +was a small round stone. + +With a yell of exultation, Jack Cales and the mate dashed down upon +them, followed by the Captain and old Pete. They had been able to follow +the distinctive mark of the mule's shoes in the soft earth until they +came in hearing of the boys' voices. Then they jumped upon them. They +were out for blood this time, for they had the boys' revolvers in their +hands, probably because they were better than their own. + +Missouri, finding himself free, made off. Tom halted when covered by one +of the sailor's revolvers, but Jim dodged as the mate fired at him. The +lug of lead spattered the mud between his feet, the next second he was +off full speed through the fog, followed by fleet Jo. + +The sailors soon gave up the useless chase, for there was no trail to +guide them, so they had to content themselves with half of their +original capture and they started for the cove where the Sea Eagle was +anchored as fast as they could go, though they were hampered by Juarez. + +"Better leave him, Captain," urged old Pete. "He is nothing but a +nuisance." + +"I'll have use for that fellow yet," said the Captain. "As for the other +lad, he won't feel so lively after a few days on shipboard." + +This did not have a very cheerful sound for Tom and he was in anything +but a happy frame of mind. Still he had great confidence in Jim and did +not give up hope of being rescued before the coast was reached. It was +now getting towards daybreak, and the fog began to lift somewhat so that +they could see a distance of thirty or forty yards. + +Captain Broom's gang had now left the region of the level pasture and +were coming to the brush section, fringing the coast, and beyond that +they reached the sand dunes. The nearer they came to the sea the more +depressed Tom became. The only thing that encouraged him was the fact +that Juarez began to seem like himself. + +Let us now return to Jo and Jim, who had been so fortunate as to make +their escape. As soon as they were sure that the pursuit was at an end, +they slowed down to a walk. + +"Well, they didn't give us much of a chase," remarked Jim. + +"Plenty to suit me. What are we going to do now?" + +"This fog is beginning to lift," said Jim, "and then we can take our +bearings. I want to locate this ranch the first thing, and then we can +get help." + +"Here's a wire fence," announced Jo, "I reckon it's the one the old +geser cut." + +"It surely is and a straight course north is our direction," remarked +Jim. + +"Here are hills that look like those we rode through," said Jo. + +"We will soon be there now," was Jim's cheerful comment "What's that? It +sounds like a dog barking." They stopped, listening intently, as the +sound came faint, but there was no mistaking it. + +"I suppose it's some big hound, that they usually keep on these +ranches," said Jo, who was beginning to feel depressed from hunger and +fatigue, "and he will jump at us because we haven't any weapons." + +But in spite of Jo's fear they hurried on in the direction of the sound. +In a short time, they came to a road between two barb wire fences, which +the reader will remember that the Captain and his crew took when they +were coming through the Sebastian ranch. But the boys struck it higher +up, and were soon in the pasture that sloped down from the ranch houses +toward the road. + +Jim and Jo now heard the voices of men as well as the baying of the +dogs. The men were talking excitedly about the finding of one of their +number in the canyon tied and gagged, and it was evident that it was not +a good time for strangers to visit the ranch of the Sebastians. + +But Jim and Jo were dulled to danger and did not care what risk they ran +and so they called to the men in a friendly Spanish greeting. There was +instantly a great hubbub, and two men charged down upon them, preceded +by a couple of fierce-looking mongrels. These came dashing for them with +red, gaping mouths. The boys defended themselves gallantly with two +stout sticks that they had picked up. Then the two Mexicans took a hand. + +"Look out, Jo," cried Jim, who was ever on the alert. "That fellow is +going to throw his lasso." Jo dodged just in the nick of time, but this +gave one of the dogs a chance, and if Jim had not stunned him by a +resounding crack on the head it would have gone hard with his brother. + +Just then another man appeared on the scene, attracted from the vicinity +of the house by the noise of the encounter. He came full speed on a +splendid sorrel. It was Juan Sebastian, a dark, handsome young man, a +true son of Spain. + +"What's all this?" he cried as he rode up. "Here, Sancho, Jan, you +brutes, come off." The dogs slunk obediently to heel. + +"We found those insolent Gringoes," said one of the men, "coming +straight for the Senor's house. We undertook to stop them." + +"Senor," said Jim, bowing low and speaking in his best Spanish, "we are +sorry, my brother and I, to have caused this disturbance. We are +strangers and unfortunate, and we have heard of your hospitality, +Senor"--Jim bowed again. He was not so simple, after all. + +The Senor Sebastian returned the bow with more grace than Jim could +command. + +"I regret, Senor--" he hesitated. + +"Darlington," added Jim. + +"Senor Darlington, that you have been attacked in this manner, but there +has been a party of desperadoes that have been overrunning this part of +the country for the past two days, and they took one of my men and bound +and gagged him and so you see, Senors," a smile and bow completed the +Spanish gentleman's apology perfectly. + +"We have just escaped, not more than an hour ago, from these same +desperadoes," said Jim. "They have taken my brother and friend with them +towards the coast." + +"We will saddle and overtake them," promised the Senor, "after we have +had breakfast." + +Jim was stunned by this gentle sort of procrastination. + +"But, Senor," he said gravely, "we will not be able to overtake them if +we do not start immediately. Pardon my abruptness, but I cannot rest +while there are two of my party prisoners in the hands of this gang of +cut-throats." + +"It is to be perfectly understood," replied the Spaniard with no less +gravity, "we will make haste, but first we will eat while the servants +are getting two of the horses ready for you and your brother." + +This was not Jim's idea of making haste by a long shot, but he was +enough of a traveler to recognize that the ways of men and nations +differed and that nothing was to be gained by going against the grain +of a national characteristic. So while fuming inwardly, he was outwardly +quiet and composed. He argued, too, that it was not likely the pirate +gang would retain the captured prisoners. Later, when they were +themselves at a safe distance they would set free the others. + +As they went towards the house, the Spaniard dismounted and walked with +them, giving his horse into the charge of one of the men, with +directions to bring two other horses to the house. There was an +unmistakable courtesy in doing this and the boys appreciated it. They +could not help but contrast their appearance with that of the Spaniard. +He was not gaudily dressed like a vaquero, but everything he wore was +possessed of a certain richness and was not lacking in color. He truly +was a Prince of the South in appearance as well as in courtesy. + +Jim and Jo were disreputable beyond words. Their clothes were muddy, +torn and disheveled, their faces so grimed that it was hard to tell +their original color, and there were blotches of blood upon their +clothes as well as faces and hands. But, though they looked worse than +tramps, there was something straightforward in their manner and their +way of speech that the Spaniard was quick to recognize. + +As they walked along the Spaniard explained that his household had been +unusually disturbed that morning. His mother, he said, was an invalid, +and had escaped from her attendant. Some mental trouble, he briefly +mentioned as the cause of the elderly lady's worriment. Evidently, he +did not connect the tragedy in his own life, in which his father's life +was sacrificed, with the boys' antagonist. His mother, he assured them, +had been found and was returned to her home. + +The boys now had a good view of the house, as they approached it. The +fog having lifted, they could take in the whole situation. The structure +itself was of adobe, of the early California type, low, with broad +verandas, and built on four sides around a court with a fountain in the +centre, with fish in the basin, and grass around it. There were +beautiful rose-tree bushes with gold and red clusters growing over the +corners of the house. + +From the verandah there was a beautiful view looking off over the +surrounding country. The house itself stood on a rise of ground that +sloped gently from the plain below. Back of it rose the mountains of the +coast range, while in the distance glittered the broad breadths of the +Pacific, shining like an azure floor. As far as eye could see was the +domain of this great ranch. It was, indeed, a princely estate, and one +of which the Senor Sebastian might well be proud. Those were the days of +romance and of charm in the land of Southern California. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +A NEW FRIEND + + +The servants eyed the two boys curiously as they stepped upon the +verandah and the brothers were not reassured by any looks of +friendliness, though they were outwardly courteous. A withered looking +old woman, who looked to Jim as though she had Indian blood showed the +boys to a room, where they could wash up. + +"Jove! Doesn't it dazzle your eyes, Jo?" exclaimed Jim, "to see a real +room, with a bed and a white spread, with those starched things where +the pillows ought to be." + +"This room would certainly please Aunt Maria," remarked Jo. "That four +poster bed with the canopy over it, is an old timer, I'll warrant you." + +"If I slept in this room," said Jim, "I would make a low bow to the bed +and then roll up in my blanket and go to sleep on the floor." + +"How do I look?" asked Jo, after he had rubbed and scrubbed his face +for a long time. + +"You have got off the first layer," replied Jim, "and look about the +color of a half-breed. Let me try my hand at polishing up." + +"It will take you a week," remarked Jo discouragingly. + +It cannot be truly said that they looked ornamental even when they were +clean, for Jim's face was badly torn, one side of it being scraped raw. +He got this memento when he tackled the Captain and fell down into the +canyon with him. One eye was blackened and the other cheek bruised. +These disadvantages were not to be overcome in a short time. + +Jo was somewhat more presentable, but he, too, showed signs of the rough +time that they had had with the Captain and his "merry" crew. But in +spite of all this, there was something in their bearing, an honest +hardihood and manliness that could not be discounted by torn clothes and +bruised faces. + +"This room looks dirty, now," said Jo, "I'm ashamed to leave it like +this." + +"We will go outside to brush off our clothes," proposed Jim, "and I'm +going to empty this dirty water myself." He started out with it when he +met one of the servants in the hall. With many explanations, numerous +gestures and much excitement, she took the pail from Jim and disappeared +with it. + +"They won't let you do anything for yourself here, Jo," reported Jim, +returning to the room. + +This was correct and the boys noticed afterwards that the servants +regarded them with odd expressions of amusement and it was evident to +the sensitive Jo that they were being "guyed" by them, to use a modern +expression. The boys being American lads, were self-reliant, and were +accustomed to do everything for themselves, and, unknowingly they had +gone counter to a custom of constant service of the Spaniards. It was to +demean oneself, according to their code, to do any menial work. + +"Might as well start for the dining room," proposed Jo. "I hate leaving +Tom and Juarez to their fate this way." + +"I more than hate it," protested Jim, "but as you can't hurry these +people, we will make the best time by falling in with their way of doing +business." + +Then they went out into a passageway and, taking the wrong turn, which +was quite easy in the rambling old house, they came to a door that +entered into the courtyard. + +"My, but this is beautiful," exclaimed Jo. "It makes you appreciate +California better when you see a place like this." + +"That hammock looks good to me," said Jim. "I would like to stretch out +in it right now." + +Just then the door opened on the verandah and a really beautiful young +girl stepped out. She was probably seventeen years of age, dressed in +white, with a black mantilla over her equally black hair and her dark +cheeks glowed with color. A very romantic meeting, Messieurs, the +gallant young Americans at one end of the verandah and the Senorita at +the other. Then she saw Jim and Jo with their scarred and bruised faces. +With a little shriek, and clasping her hand to her eyes, she retreated +quickly to her room. + +"What did you do to scare that girl, Jo?" inquired Jim severely of his +brother. + +"Nothing," declared Jo, stoutly. "It was the sight of your face. It +would give a wooden Injun a chill." Jim felt of the said face +reflectively. + +"I guess you are right, Jo," he admitted, "but you ain't so charming in +appearance that you would do any damage." + +"Let's walk along this side," proposed Jo. "Perhaps we will locate the +breakfast." + +"All right," agreed Jim. + +So they stalked along, more or less conscious that a pair of dark blue +eyes were regarding them, and they thought they heard a trill of +laughter, but it might have been one of the maids. They need not have +felt embarrassed for there was the grace in their movements that goes +with strength and youth and suppleness. + +They were walking under a perfect bower of flowers anyway. For this side +was beautifully latticed and over the lattice work grew vines with +purple and golden flowers, that would give a grateful shade when the +California sun would drive the fog away. + +Under foot there was a double flagging of stone with trodden dirt on +either side. + +"I don't see a broom anywhere," said Jo. + +Just then they heard the voice of Senor Sebastian behind them and they +turned quickly. + +"I had begun to fear, Senors, that you had become lost again." + +"We were, partially, Senor." + +"Our simple breakfast is ready now if you are," he said. + +"We will have to brush the dirt off before we can go in," protested Jim. + +"Antonio bring a brush," called the Senor. In a moment a gray-haired, +bent Mexican came with a big kitchen broom. Instantly the Senor flushed +with anger. + +"Stupid one, my guests are not my horses. Have a care." + +A suspicion flashed through Jim's mind that the ancient servitor had +brought the broom on purpose. It was clear that the servants did not +have a very high opinion of their American visitors. The next time he +returned he had gotten the right brush, and made a point of sneezing as +the dust flew from their mud-dried clothes. This made Jim laugh in spite +of himself. + +"More dust than the Sirocco brings," said Jim. The old servitor regarded +him with a cunning eye. + +"Si, Senor," he said, then he was seized with a perfect convulsion of +sneezing. This aroused his master's ire. + +"No more of that, Antonio," he commanded, "or it will be the lash." +Antonio's cold was cured from that moment. Jim's mouth twitched at the +corners with the humor of it but he did not laugh now for that would be +discourteous to his host. + +Finally the brushing was finished to the regret of the servants, who had +kept an amused eye on Antonio's performance, while pretending to be busy +on some trivial tasks near the Patio or court. In her own room, the +Senorita was faint with laughter as she watched Antonio dusting the two +American lads. + +It was a simple breakfast that the boys found prepared for them in a +long, low dining-room, with its dark beams and white plastered walls. +The coffee was excellent, with a delicate aroma, and was probably the +best that Mexico could afford. There was a large plate of meat garnished +with peppers, and a mixed dish of vegetables that looked odd, but that +tasted deliciously. You may be sure that Jim and Jo appreciated their +meal, and they felt invigorated when it was finished, wishing all the +while, however, that they were on the trail of their captured comrades. + +"Now, Senors, the horses are at the door. They are spirited, but I am +sure that you ride well." + +This was a mere expression of courtesy on his part, for he did not +expect any such thing and thought to see his guests fall off if the +horses should rise on their hind legs, as they no doubt would, for there +was not a horse on the big rancho but what was peppery and spirited. No +sooner had the Senor spoke than Jim jumped to his feet, putting his hand +to his head. + +"I have forgotten about Caliente!" he exclaimed. "It is my horse, +Senor," he explained to his host. "He is up the canyon because the gang +that attacked us last night were afraid of him." + +"I will send for him," said the Senor. + +"By the pool in the pocket," said Jim. "But I think I ought to get him +myself, though I appreciate your offer, but one's horse, you know--" + +"I understand perfectly." + +"I cannot leave him without food and water," said Jim. + +"I will attend to that. I will send a trustworthy man," and he spoke to +the servant who was waiting on the table. In a short time he returned +with a tall, sinewy man, with straight black hair and dark skin. He gave +this man the necessary instructions and with a "Si, Senor," the man went +out. + +"A good reliable fellow," remarked Jim. "He looks like an Indian." + +"He is an Indian," replied their host, "but of the right kind. Your +horse is in good hands." + +"Tell him to bring him down to the ranch," said Jim. "I'll trust +Caliente with him." The Indian was called back and under his stolid +demeanor was an appreciation of Jim's confidence. + +Breakfast over they went out on the verandah, where they could see the +horses. They were spirited looking beasts all right. One was a bay, the +two front legs white stockinged, very trimly built, with a flashing eye, +that he kept rolling around. The boy who was holding him had his hands +full, as the bay would rise on his hind legs and strike out viciously +with his forefeet. + +The other animal was much heavier than the bay. A brilliant black, whose +coat fairly shone with careful grooming. He had been standing +comparatively quiet until the three appeared upon the verandah of the +house, then, with a sudden surge backward, he dragged the Mexican boy +off his feet, shaking his head viciously. + +"We ought to be armed, Senor," advised Jim. "If we should overtake those +men, they will put up a desperate fight." + +"Certainly, Senor," he answered. "Come into this room and select your +weapon." + +After both Jim and Jo were armed, they went out to the horses. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE PURSUIT + + +All the servants seemed just now to find duties of importance in front +of the house or near it. They had no idea of missing the chance of +seeing these Gringoes, whom they held in contempt, thrown from their +horses. + +Jim took the black and Jo was left the red, the easiest to manage even +if he seemed the liveliest. Jo was too quick for his horse and before he +could whirl to one side, he was in the saddle. Then his animal reared +and plunged but Jo sat on him as easily as a cowboy does his steed. +There was no mistaking his horsemanship. The servants were duly and +deeply disappointed. + +But their hopes revived when they saw Jim tackle the black. He began +that steady sideways movement which Jim knew so well, whenever he tried +to put his foot in the stirrup. The servants began to smile, here would +be some fun. The "Black Devil," as they called the horse, had been known +to kill men, so they had pleasant anticipations. When Jim found that he +could not mount by the stirrup, he made a quick, powerful leap and was +in the saddle. + +"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian, but he knew that the fight had just +begun. + +Jo looked on with interest and perfect confidence in brother Jim's +ability. The black stood perfectly stunned for a moment or two at being +so suddenly mounted, then he sprang into action. With his back in a hump +he shot into the air and came down stiff-legged. + +Without loss of a second he went into the air again, higher than before. +From the corral the Mexican cowboys were looking at the duel between the +horse and the boy with lively interest. + +"The Diablo will kill him," said one nonchalantly, blowing a puff of +smoke from his cigarette. + +"Five dollars that the Gringo stays on," said a second. The wager was +made and others followed, for the Mexicans are inveterate gamblers. The +third time the horse pitched into the air, Jim swaying with the animal's +every motion as the trained cowboy does. Finding that he could not +dislodge his rider that way, the black rose on his hind legs to a +perpendicular position. + +Jim knew the trick of old, and was prepared for it. As the horse started +to fall backwards, Jim who had been sticking like a leech, leaped +lightly to the ground and with all his strength, pulling upon the +bridle, slammed him to the ground. No sooner was the horse upon his feet +again than Jim was in the saddle. + +Once more he tried that falling back trick and this time Jim brought him +down upon the damp earth with a thud that jarred things. The black devil +had had enough. He stood quivering and sweating, but for the time being +subdued. + +"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian again, and he shook his guest by the +hand warmly. "You are a true horseman. Now we shall go. We shall eat up +the miles." + +The crowd of cowboys swung their hats in a salute to the Gringo, who +could conquer the black devil, while the house servants, disappointed at +the stranger's triumph, went back to their different tasks. + +The three horsemen galloped away down the sloping pasture, the Spaniard +in advance as he knew the country and the most direct way to the coast. +His horse was a splendid sorrel, somewhat taller than the horse that Jim +rode. And he was a gallant figure in his leather riding suit and peaked +sombrero with a brilliant colored band around it. + +Jim and Jo rode few yards behind the Spaniard and side by side. Jim felt +a certain exultation in his victory over the Black before people who +would have liked to have seen him defeated. It was exhilarating, too, +this plunging gallop ahead with a chance to rescue Tom and Juarez and to +get even with Captain Broom and his gang, who had taken away their +valuables and had given the boys such a cruel defeat. + +"This is a fine horse," said Jim, "though he hasn't the stride of +Caliente." + +"He is a beauty, when it comes to bucking," Jo commented. "There is +nothing the matter with this bay but my black can beat him for speed." + +So they flew on, the speed of their steeds blowing back their horses' +manes, and the fresh air from the sea bringing a feeling of hope to +their hearts, that they would yet be able to overtake the pirates, and +rescue their comrades in distress. Their horses' feet were devouring the +miles. + +"We stand a chance to get 'em at this rate," shouted Jim. + +"Won't it be fine if we can all sit down to dinner tonight?" replied Jo. +"I bet that Tom and Juarez would enjoy a square meal with the Senor at +the ranch house. Ifs kind of nice to be civilized once in a while." + +"You're right, it is," declared Jim emphatically. + +"I wonder if there isn't a store around here where we could buy some +clothes," inquired Jo, anxiously. "We look too disreputable to appear in +polite society." + +"Thinking about that girl, I suppose?" remarked Jim with brotherly +intuition. + +"I wouldn't be so sure if I were you," replied Jo evasively. "How about +the Senorita down in Mexico who threw you the rose at the castle?" This +reference to the Senorita Cordova whom the Frontier Boys had rescued in +Mexico, checked Jim from getting too gay for he still had a tender place +in his memory for her. + +The fog by this time was entirely dissipated, and they could see by +certain white or rather light spots in the clouds where the sun was +going to break through and an absolutely clear day would result. The +three riders had now reached the brush region that began a few miles +from the coast and they were compelled to go more slowly. + +But if they had only known what was going on not more than two miles +away from where they were, they would not have slackened speed no +matter what risk they ran. For Captain Broom and his crew with the two +captives had arrived at the cove and old Pete and Jack Cales were going +into the cave for the boat. + +There was a chance, but the Senor and his companions must hurry. Some +mishap to the pirates' expedition just at this point and the frontier +boys would win. Tom and Juarez might have sung the tune that they had +often sung before in camp. + + "Tramp, tramp, tramp, the boys are marching, + Cheer up, comrades, they will come, + And beneath the starry flag + We will breathe the air again + Of freedom in our own beloved home." + +But they did not know and they sat miserable and dejected upon the damp +sand of the beach, not knowing that Jim and Jo were coming nearer every +second. Then there came an accident, though a slight one, that gave the +pursuers a chance. + +Old Pete was carrying one end of the boat. He was nervous, anyway, in +regard to the cave and its grewsome contents, thought he saw some dark +spectre coming for him out of the blackness of the cave and he dropped +his end of the boat and scudded for the beach. + +The Captain was furious, giving him a blow that sent him spinning half +way down to the water, and he and the mate rushed back to see what +damage the boat had suffered. It was only slightly stove in, but every +second was precious. The pursuers were only a mile away. + +Jim began to grow restless as they neared the coast. He seemed to feel +that they were nearing the enemy, and at his urging, the Spaniard, who +had an increased respect and liking for Jim ever since he had conquered +Black Diablo, put his horse to the gallop, and away they went along the +narrow winding path through the bushes. + +The branches whipt them, but they paid no attention, but on they went; +it was evident that they made considerable racket and Captain Broom, +with a fierce burst of energy for which he was famous, got the boat +launched, the two prisoners in, and with himself and the mate at the +oars, made the boat leap forward over the lazy rolling swell towards the +graceful Sea Eagle. + +When they had reached a point half-way to the vessel, the horsemen came +tearing through the last screen of brush onto the yellow sand. The enemy +had escaped by the skin of its teeth and it was heart-rending to see Tom +and Juarez being carried away from them at every stroke of the oars +towards their black prison. Jim put up his hands to his mouth and +yelled: + +"We will rescue you, boys. Don't give up. We'll get 'em yet." + +A derisive yell greeted this challenge and one of the men in the boat +fired at the group on the shore, but the bullet fell harmlessly short. +They did not dare to fire in return lest they hit either Tom or Juarez. + +"They have steam up on board," observed Jim. "But I see one chance to do +some execution." + +It was this. The Sea Eagle was anchored close under a cliff on the +northern side of the cove. So Jim slipped off his horse, for the way on +that side was impracticable except on foot. It was hard going at that, +especially as there were a good many cacti with their wretched thorns. + +Jim stepped gingerly along over the rocks, gliding through the bushes +until at last he reached a point above the vessel where he could almost +look down upon her decks. The boat from the shore had just come +alongside and the prisoners were hustled into the cabin and the door +locked. Tom and Juarez were a dejected-looking pair and it made Jim's +heart ache to see them. + +The Captain went upon the quarter-deck and gave an order to the man at +the wheel. The anchor had already been weighed. Slowly and gracefully +the Sea Eagle turned, and there stood Captain Broom, as big as life upon +the bridge. Why did not Jim fire? Because he had come to a certain wise +conclusion. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE + + +As Jim had raised his revolver to fire, a sudden idea came to him. In +the first place he rebelled instinctively from shooting a man down in +cold blood from ambush, even if he was as desperate and crime-stained a +character as Captain Bill Broom, besides it would not save Tom and +Juarez and only make their captivity harder to endure, if any injury was +done the Captain. + +Another thing, Jim was sure that if he began the attack that his two +comrades would be used as shields to protect the man at the wheel, so +that the Sea Eagle could be navigated safely out of the cove. He saw +with interest the narrow place between two lines of foam above hidden +ledges where the boat must pass in order to reach the open sea. He +marvelled at the temerity of Captain Broom in daring to bring his ship +through such a place. + +Then a brilliant thought came to him, a sudden stroke that might turn +defeat into victory. The Sea Eagle was now making straight for the +narrow channel. Jim slipped back for a short distance an ran as rapidly +as he could to a point a little to the west of where he had first +hidden. He did not have long to wait. The Sea Eagle was almost directly +opposite his place of ambush, and was just sticking her nose into the +narrow passage. + +Jim raised his revolver and took careful aim and fired. The man at the +wheel gave a yell and clapped his hand to the shoulder, letting go the +wheel and the nose of the little steamer swung toward the rock. A swell +lifted her bow clear by a few inches, and the Captain caught the steamer +by the wheel and brought her to a course. + +"Bring those boys up on deck and shoot them if that black-haired devil," +(meaning Jim) "fires another shot," he called to the mate. + +That worthy was not slow to obey the order, he had them on deck in full +sight in a jiffy and held a pistol at Tom's head. Jim had raised his arm +to fire at the Captain when he heard his order and it was as if he had +been paralyzed. He knew that Tom and Juarez would have been killed to a +certainty if he fired another shot. + +Luck had broken against him again, for that was all that had kept the +Sea Eagle from going on the reef, where if she had not been wrecked, +she and her crew would have been at the mercy of the men on shore. Just +the lifting of the wave had saved the vessel by a few inches, that, and +Captain Broom's quick and skillful action. + +The second round of the contest had gone in favor of the pirate and his +crew, but only by a shade as it were. But it would not surprise me a bit +if Jim evened up matters in the third and final round. Let us hope so, +at least, for that will give a silver lining to the black cloud that had +rolled over the boys' fortunes at this particular time. + +Jim made his way slowly back to where Jo and the Senor were waiting for +him on the beach. He was despondent over the failure of his plans by so +close a margin, and the sight of Tom and Juarez helpless on the deck in +the hands of these sea-coast pirates, was always before his eyes. + +"What were you trying to do, Jim?" inquired Jo, "Sink the ship?" Before +Jim could reply, the Spaniard gave a cry of warning. + +"Look out, they are going to shoot." + +Glancing toward the Sea Eagle, which was now a half mile from shore, +they saw a puff of smoke, and then a shell struck into the beach below +them and exploding, sent a shower of sand over them and the horses. The +latter, frightened, reared and plunged, but the boys soon got their +animals under control, as they quickly tired of acting up in the heavy +sand. Jim shook his fist in the direction of the Sea Eagle. + +"Curse your insolence!" he yelled. "I'll make every one of you eat crow, +you miserable hounds!" + +Jim looked ugly, his eyes glared with concentrated fury and the veins on +his temple were swollen and throbbing. Unthinkingly, he pulled back hard +upon the bit, sending his horse up in the air. + +"Easy, boy," he said, soothingly. "Easy. It was my fault for yanking +you." + +When the horse was quieted, Jim was cooled down to his normal +temperature, and he told his comrades of his attack upon the Sea Eagle +and how it had turned out. + +"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard impressively, "I will take off my +hat to you. You are a natural General. Take my advice, my friend, and go +to Spain. There you might head a revolution and in time rise to high +mark." + +"I appreciate your praise deeply, Senor Sebastian," responded Jim, "but +my own country, Senor, I could not leave it for another." + +"Right, Senor," replied the Spaniard, "you have the true spirit." + +"Which way will she turn, do you suppose?" asked Jo, pointing to the +vessel that was moving steadily out on the Pacific in a straight line +from the shore. + +"To the North, doubtless," replied the Spaniard. + +"Wherever she goes we must find her out," said Jim, with grim +determination. + +"I wish we could follow them," sighed Jo. "If we could only hire a +boat." + +"They have our money," replied Jim, briefly. + +"I had forgotten that," said Jo, and his face showed his disappointment. + +"Permit me to help you," said the Spaniard, "I am to blame for detaining +you at breakfast." + +"That is generous of you, Senor," replied Jim, "but I do not favor going +to the expense of chartering a steamer. Even if it were possible, my +plan would be to follow along the coast on horseback and see what can be +done when they make a landing." + +"As you are the General," replied the Spaniard, "we will allow you to +make the plans." + +"Look!" exclaimed Jo, "they are turning South instead of North." + +"Impossible!" cried the Spaniard. "There is only one port within two +hundred miles. I do not understand. Yes, they are surely going South." + +"Perhaps they have a secret landing place," hazarded Jim. + +"Not so," replied the Spaniard. "Not a harbor where they could land save +one and there they would not dare to go." + +The three watchers on horseback gazed until there was little to be seen +other than a smudge of smoke upon the horizon. It was no use, the Sea +Eagle was holding to her southerly course to some mysterious port. The +sun had now come out and was shining with sheer brilliance upon the +sparkling ocean. + +"We must return now," said the Spaniard. "There is nothing more for us +to do at present." + +"I think that my brother and I will start this afternoon and take the +trail to the south," announced Jim, "wherever those fellows set foot, I +want to be waiting for them." + +"I fear it is impossible to start so soon," replied the Spaniard, "I +must go with you as I know the country to the South, every foot of it." + +"The Senor is right, Jim," put in Jo, quickly, as he saw a frown on +Jim's face and was afraid that he was going to say something abruptly. +"You will want to give Caliente a good rest, so that when we start, we +will make the distance without delay. Then we have to make some +preparations ourselves." + +Jim looked at his brother with a moment's dark suspicion, but it was +evident that Jo was perfectly sincere in what he said. + +"I will promise, Senor," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile, "that +when we start which will be early tomorrow morning, that we will travel +far and fast enough to suit you and your horse." There was a challenge +in his voice that Jim met smilingly. + +"So be it, Senor," he said, "I will try to be in sight at the finish." + +"My horse is a remarkable animal for speed and endurance, I must tell +you frankly," said the Senor gravely. "He has no equal in this country +of California. He has proved it more than once and against all comers." + +"He is certainly a fine horse," admitted Jim, looking at the sorrel with +admiring eyes. "He has a splendid stride." + +"Ah, no, Senor," laughed the Spaniard with a gleam of his white teeth, +"I did not mean him," patting the horse on the neck, "a good animal, +indeed, but more for my little sister to ride than for me. Wait, my +friend, until I introduce you to Don Fernando and then you will see a +horse for the first time." + +"I should be very much pleased to see him," said Jim, frankly curious +and interested. + +"Tomorrow," said the Spaniard. + +They had now turned into the narrow trail among the bushes and had only +ridden a few steps when Jo called a sudden halt. + +"What do you think, Jim, there's my horse and Tom's tied in that +thicket." + +Sure enough there they were, utterly worn out, but with spirit enough to +recognize their old comrades Jim and Jo, and if ever horses expressed a +welcome these two did when they first caught sight of their two friends. + +"They have cut the saddles to pieces, the brutes," exclaimed Jo. + +"I'm glad to get the horses," said Jim, "I am surprised that they didn't +cut their throats." + +"They will follow us all right," said Jo, in reply to the Spaniard's +suggestion that they would have to be led, and they trotted along behind +Jo, who was the last one in line. + +"Do you know of any place where we could buy things?" asked Jim. "We +need a new outfit." + +"But we have no money," put in Jo quickly. + +"I will get the money or its equivalent today," said Jim. "If there is a +store where the Senor can get me credit." + +"Yes, there is a store where a Portugee sells about everything that we +need in this country," replied the Spaniard. "It is some distance to the +north. We will ride there before we return to the ranch. There will be +no difficulty about the credit," he concluded, with a bow to Jim. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE + + +"You do not know my ability to spend," said Jim, "I may have to plunge +to the extent of several hundred dollars. You see my brother has very +expensive tastes. It will cost quite a small fortune when I buy him a +complete trousseau including diamonds." + +"I will pledge my lands if necessary to get the young Senor diamonds," +said the Spaniard laughingly. + +In about an hour's time they came to a large one story frame building +painted a rather light blue, which color had weathered a good deal. It +had a square, false front with a sign on it that read, "Mr. Gonsalves, +General Trader." + +They hitched their horses to some well graveled posts, and went inside +leaving Jo's and Tom's horses free to graze at will around, or to stand +under the shelter of some drooping pepper tree across the road. The +proprietor, a short, thick-set Portugee with a close trimmed black +beard, and a gray slouch hat which he always wore, apparently, received +them graciously. The contents of the store were entirely at their +service,--if they paid for them. + +"We will miss poor Tom here," said Jo, "he was always our purchasing +agent." + +"And a mighty good one," added Jim. "Not even a Connecticut Yankee could +get the best of him in a bargain." + +The Spaniard sat in a round armed wooden chair, gracefully smoking a +cigarette, while his guests busied themselves making purchases. First +the boys bought some new clothes, which they retired behind a counter to +put on, and emerged in proper apparel for the plains. + +Blue flannel shirts, and pants of the same color, held up by leather +belts, with much glitter of silver on them, then they bought a sombrero +apiece, not after the Mexican style, but of the American type. Jim had a +red band around his and Jo had a blue. + +"Now we want some handkerchiefs to tie around our necks," said Jo. + +"Of course," remarked Jim with a wink, "something that will catch the +eyes of the ladies." + +So M. Gonsalves brought out a brilliant assortment of handkerchiefs. + +"Here's a very fine article, gents," he said holding out a red silk +handkerchief, clustered with white horseshoes. + +"Nothing the matter with that," admitted Jim admiringly, with a droll +look at Jo. "But this plain red one will suit me. My brother would +probably like the horseshoe one." But Jo also declined. + +"I will take the dark blue one," he said, "it matches my costume +better." + +"Gee! but you will look like a color scheme," laughed Jim, "blue eyes, +blue pants, shirt, tie and socks, and hat band, you ought to be a sailor +on the blue Pacific." + +"The next things are boots," remarked Jo. + +"Not for me," said Jim briefly, "I want moccasins. Worn 'em all my life, +and I am not going to change to boots now." + +"Fine line of moccasins," said the accommodating Mr. Gonsalves in his +best trade manner. You see he had been in business in San Francisco and +knew something of the ways of customers. + +"But it gives us more style to wear boots. You notice that all the +inhabitants wear them, we can buy moccasins too. You wear them all the +time and they will set you down for an Indian." + +"When a fellow once gets the idea of style in his head," said Jim +resignedly, "nothing this side of matrimony is going to stop him. So lay +on MacDuff and cursed be he who first cries hold, enough." + +"I feel like I was anchored," commented Jim, stepping across the floor +with heavy tread. "I should like to stalk a deer or an Indian in these +things. He could tell you were arriving before you got above the +horizon." + +"But you look fine in 'em," said Jo. + +It was true that he made a striking figure in his blue togs. The lithe +powerful physique, and the strong, resolute face. + +"Better look out, Jo," grinned Jim. "No Senorita would look at you, when +they see me dashing over the landscape." + +"I'm a pretty stylish looking guy myself," responded Jo, confidently. He +did make a good appearance, there was no doubt of that. Though slighter +than his brother he was well set up, and his frame was well muscled. He +was handsomer than Jim. But there was no nonsense about either of the +two boys and they never gave an unnecessary thought to their appearance. + +"Now, Mr. Gonsalves," said Jim, "we would like to look at some of your +man-killers." + +"Revolvers?" he questioned, "just step this way. I can fit you out all +right." + +He did have a fine collection and Jim examined the different ones +carefully, noting their action and how easily they worked. + +"I see you are no tenderfoot," complimented the proprietor. "You have +handled shooting irons before." + +"I'll be a tenderfoot before long, if I wear these condemned boots you +sold me," said Jim gruffly ignoring the compliment. He did not care +especially for M. Gonsalves' style. "Now let's have a look at your +rifles." The proprietor actually took off his hat and bowed. + +It was evident that the distinguished gentlemen from nowhere in +particular were going to buy out his entire stock. + +"Would you be so gracious as to step this way?" he said, "I have the +rifles in the back of the store." + +They were so gracious, and after due examination they selected a couple +of well balanced guns and purchased enough ammunition to stand off a few +Indian raids. All the stuff besides what they had on their backs they +packed upon Tom's horse, as Tom was not present to resent the indignity. + +"Now the last things are some saddles," said Jim, "seeing that our kind +friends, the pirates, cut up those we owned." + +"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard coming forward and touching Jim +lightly on the arm, "Do not speak of buying saddles. I will see to +that." Jim did not know exactly what their host meant but he thanked him +and deferred to his request. + +Now behold the frontier boys in complete costume, with glittering +revolvers at their hips and rifles swung across their backs, upon their +hands were fringed buckskin gloves. They had gone the whole hog as Jim +said. + +"I'll take the shine off this costume in about one day," said Jim +grimly, "when I get in the open, I would rather break a broncho, than a +new suit of clothes." There was no doubt about his impressive +appearance, as the sun flashed on the metal of the accoutrements and he +swung himself into the saddle. Even their host seemed to hold them in +higher regard. Different people, different manners. + +When they reached the house ranch the first thing Jim did was to find +Caliente. He was in the long adobe stable that was a half-mile from the +house, at the beginning of a wide mountain valley, where the air drew +through from the sea. + +"How are you, Caliente old fellow," cried Jim, as he opened the box +stall and went in to shake hands with his old comrade. But the horse +leaped to one side, and then reared up as if to strike Jim. + +"He don't know you," cried Jo who was on the outside of the stall. "Take +off your hat." + +Jim whirled it out of the stall, and a change came over Caliente. He +recognized his master, and nickering in recognition he rubbed his head +against Jim's shoulder, and took playful nips at his fine new shirt, +while Jim fairly hugged him, and gave him resounding whacks with his +open hand upon his splendid sides and shoulders. + +"A magnificent animal, Senor Darlington," said Senor Sebastian to Jim, +"I congratulate you." + +It was a true word. Caliente with his proud neck, small but shapely +head, powerful but not too heavy frame, and color of mottled gray was +magnificent. + +All that afternoon Jim busied himself grooming his horse until his coat +fairly glistened. He looked carefully to his feed, and saw to his +watering. For Jim was determined that his horse should not be beaten by +the Spaniard's. He knew that the latter's horse must be an unusual +animal. It was not a short race, instead, one of two hundred miles that +lay before them on the morrow. + +That evening the American boys presented a better appearance than they +did at breakfast. It was a pretty scene that evening in the long dining +room. The snowy table lit by light of candles and set with ancient +silver brought from Spain. The young Senorita was seated at her +brother's right, and on the other side were James Darlington and his +brother Joseph. As to the impression she made upon them, we will say +nothing, as this is not a romance, but they had a merry and delightful +evening. + +Their host and the young Senorita were much interested in hearing of the +adventures of the boys in Mexico, especially that part that referred to +the rescue of the Senorita Cordova from the hands of Cal Jenkins and his +gang. I do not know that The Frontier Boys told it with any less fervor +because the eyes of the young girl, seated opposite, were fixed intently +upon them. It appeared that their host knew of the Senor Cordova, who +was a man of prominence in his country, though he had not actually met +him. So there was one more bond of sympathy between the Senor Sebastian +and James and Jo Darlington. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE + + +Let us now turn our interest and attention for a time to the cruise of +the Sea Eagle, under the guidance of that redoubtable free-booter, +Captain Broom. It was a mystery to the three who watched the ship turn +to the South, what her port could be. We will soon be in a position to +solve that problem. + +No sooner had the Sea Eagle cleared the cove than Captain Broom went to +his cabin to go over his spoils which he had taken from the frontier +boys. He placed all the belts upon the table, took up one, and with a +keen knife slit the first pouch. A large heavy Spanish coin rolled out +and then clinked down upon the table. + +The Captain's eyes glistened. "By Gosh!" he exclaimed, "it was worth +while rounding up those fellows. They must have struck it rich down in +Mexico. I bet the boys will be tickled to death to get their share." For +whatever crimes and shortcomings Captain Broom could be charged with, +at least he always divided fairly with his crew. Thereby he held their +loyalty. It was not all policy, either, for there was a sterling streak +in the bad old fellow. + +Out of the next pouch there glittered upon the table several diamonds +and a small palm full of rubies, with their rich color and radiance. +"The boys will have enough to start a jewelry store," commented the +Captain. "But I am not surprised at this haul. I know something about +the hidden treasures myself, and they do say Mexico is the the place for +them." + +Out of another belt he got some ingots of gold and a girdle that caused +the Captain to open his eyes. At first he did not know what to make of +it. When he held it up he saw that it was formed of golden disks linked +with strings of rubies and sapphires. In the third belt was a necklace +that might have been worn by some Princess of the Incas. It was oddly, +almost weirdly beautiful. + +The fourth belt that he picked up chanced to belong to Jim. + +"This seems lighter than the others," remarked the Captain. "Three of +the pouches are empty." His face got black with rage. For instantly his +mind leaped to the suspicion that one of his men had rifled it. If such +had been the case, the guilty party would have got short shift at the +end of a rope from the yard arm. + +But the second examination showed that the cut was an old one. + +"So!" he cried, "one of the boys has cached part of his share. I bet it +was that long-legged, black-haired guy. That fellow would give the best +of us trouble. I wish I had him to train. Maybe, I can make something of +the Injun boy," meaning Juarez. + +As to the belts, the shrewd old fellow, to make sure, measured them to +see where the worn holes of the leather came, and the partially empty +belt had been worn two inches longer than any of the others. + +"It was the big fellow's," said the Captain. + +Then he went upon deck and called the crew forward. + +"Now, lads, choose your man to get your share of the goods," he said. + +"It's Jack Cales, sir," they said, knowing that they would be called +upon to select a man to take their share. + +"All right! Come, lad," said the Captain, and led the way to his cabin. +When Jack Cales saw the treasures on the table, he opened his eyes and +mouth in astonishment. + +"Why, Sir," he exclaimed, "we haven't seen anything like this since the +day two years ago when--" he stopped suddenly, seeing from a look in the +Captain's eyes that no reminiscences were desired. + +"This is your share, lad," said the Captain, gruffly. + +"Thank you, sir," responded Cales, as he swept the small pile of gold +and jewels into the palm of his big hands. + +"And mind ye, lad," warned the Captain, "I don't want any quarreling +among yourselves or ye will hear from me." + +"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor and backed out of the cabin. + +There was an interesting gathering in the forecastle when Jack Cales +deposited his handful of treasures on the top of a sea chest that had +been hauled out for the purpose. + +For once it was not necessary to have the lantern lit, for a broad band +of sunshine shone down the steep ladder and cut a golden swath through +the dingy gloom and fell athwart the chest and illuminated the group: +the tall and swaggering Cales, the rugged, grizzled Pete, and the other +sailormen; a typical group and not to be matched for picturesqueness +anywhere; with their faces intent upon the center of the old black sea +chest, where glowed and glittered the gold and jewels in the band of +light that shone upon some of the faces of the intent group, while +others were in the shadow. It was a scene such as Rembrandt--pardon, +kind reader, I forgot for a moment, this is a simple narrative of +Adventure. + +"Pete," said Cales, "how the ladies will love you when they see a chain +of glittering diamonds around your throat." + +"One thing is certain, lad," replied the grizzled Pete, "I won't be +givin' none of my diamonds away to the ladies. I'll keep the stones safe +in my jeans." + +"You'll have to be keerful, Pete," rallied another, "they'll be marrying +you for your ill-gotten wealth, when they find out that you are an +heiress. You can't help yourself, Pete. It won't make any difference +because you are a pirate, that won't scare 'em. Not when they see them +jewels." + +"What's the use of you boys a talkin' to me," he said with a wise wink, +"you're only kittens. I'm sixty year old and I'm a free man yit." + +"Here's a pill for you, Pop," said Cales, dropping a diamond into his +horny hand. + +"Gee! I'm just as well pleased to get this as I was to get a bunch of +popcorn when I was a kid back in New England, off the Christmas tree." + +"Better have it sot in one of your front teeth, Pop," said Jack. This +produced a roar of laughter, for Pete's front teeth were conspicuous by +their absence. + +So the distribution went on without any bickering at first, only jovial +jokes, but at last there came a bone of contention over the last +diamond. And in a jiffy Jack Cales and a short, stocky sailor were all +tangled up in a fierce encounter. Their comrades, none too gently, +hoisted them up on deck. There they continued their fight. + +No sooner did Captain Broom see them than he cluttered down from the +bridge at a furious rate. The two combatants ought to have taken warning +but they were deaf to everything except their own struggle. He was livid +with anger, and his wrath was in a large measure justified. + +"I'll larn you!" he yelled, grabbing each by the back of the neck. "You +won't fight any more this trip." + +They were like children in his hands. He had not only the arms of a +gorilla, but the strength of one when he was aroused and it was a +caution the way he slammed them around, flaying the deck with them, and +dashing their heads together. It seemed as if every bone in their bodies +would be broken. Finally he flung them unconscious on the deck. + +"Put them in the Sagenette," he ordered the mate. + +"Aye, aye, sir," he replied, and with the aid of one of the sailors, +they were chained in a narrow cell. + +Here was where Juarez and Tom came in. As the two fighters were knocked +out and locked up, it made the crew short and they were ordered out on +deck from the cabin where they had been kept. Almost famished though +they were, they had to jump in and work like nailers, not to say, +sailors. + +Fortunately for them, they had experienced a hard schooling in many +different ways since they came west and were practical masters of +several lines of industry, but this was their first experience +sailoring. It was a hard school, but they learned more in a few days, +than they would have under months of more gentle tuition. This was to +stand them in good stead when they started on their cruise to Hawaii. + +"I'll get even with those fellows," growled Tom as he passed near Juarez +who was busy polishing some brass work. "Yes, if it takes the rest of my +life." + +"What do you mean, stopping and gabbing, you little shrimp?" roared the +mate who chanced to see Tom stop. + +And he rushed up and grabbing Tom by the back of the neck, shook him +ferociously, landing him a couple of kicks at the same time. This was +too much for Juarez, who poised a stone that he was using and was about +to brain the mate with it when the Captain's iron grip fell on his arm. +He didn't throw that brick. + +"Easy, lad," said the Captain. "No more fighting on board this ship, or +I'll take a hand again and don't you two lads pass the time of day +either. You won't be killed if you work hard and keep cheerful." Then he +gave the mate a look, which that worthy understood and Tom was allowed +to go about his work without further molestation. + +But this was a new and hard doctrine that the Captain had laid down that +the boys had to take hard usage and unceasing work and keep cheerful +about it. They soon found that the Skipper meant what he said. It was a +bitter lesson, but perhaps they were the manlier for learning it so +young. For it's something that life hands out to everyone sooner or +later. + +Often the boys looked longingly over the rail towards the faint, far +outline of the California coast. The Skipper was keeping his ship far +out from the land for reasons best known to himself. One thing was +favorable in that the sea air had braced up Juarez so that he felt more +like himself though his head was queer at times. And no wonder for that +blow the Mexican dwarf had given him was sufficient to have stunned an +ox. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +A DAY AT SEA + + +The Sea Eagle was steaming steadily South to her mysterious harbor. The +day was a brilliant one and as the afternoon wore on the wind from the +Northwest began to blow with fresher force and the white caps began to +jump, here, there and everywhere over the broad surface of the ocean, +and then slide down on the back of the waves. + +There was a good deal of motion on the part of the Sea Eagle now, as she +plunged into the waves and threw the spray back over her decks. Both +Juarez and Tom proved themselves good sailors, which was just as well +for if they had been sea sick together with their other miseries they +might have succumbed. + +Finally the long afternoon wore away and the time came for supper. The +boys being neither flesh, fish or fowl, were not allowed to eat with the +crew, and they did not mind in the least. When their rations did arrive, +or rather when they went to the ship's galley and got their share, they +found the fare not lacking in quality and abundance. There was a heaping +plate of Mexican beans, a big hunk of bread and a bowl of hot tea. After +the boys had stowed this below in their hatches they felt a hundred per +cent better and more fit to meet any fate that might await them. + +An hour before sunset a heavy bank of fog began to roll up from the +West, soon covering the whole sky with its gracious softness, and +decided restfulness, after the glittering blue-diamond beauty of the +day. + +It is the fogs alone that make the climate of California, especially in +the Southern part endurable. Too much sunshine becomes as unbearable as +too much cloudiness. + +The sea went down, when the fog came up and the waters took on a steely +color under their blanket of gray, rolling on, in that monotonous +meditation that holds the mystery of forgotten ages in its brooding. + +"Here's where you will sleep, boys," said Old Pete, who had been +appointed by the Captain to have special charge over their education. +"The men won't have you in the fo'castle, and it's pretty crowded there +anyway." + +"This will suit us, sir," replied Juarez. He did not call him Pop, as +he would have on the land. This was the sea and had its own rules and +customs, therefore Old Pete received his due of respect. But in his +rough way he was not unfriendly towards the boys, for he remembered that +they had given him friendly advice, when he was aboard that strange +craft, a horse, the night before. + +The place where the boys were to sleep was a sort of cubby hole in the +bow of the boat, that was roofed over and where anchor chains and other +junk was sometimes kept. It was not over four feet high, five in width +at the broadest and narrowing to the bow. + +A rude place to sleep in, but what did the Frontier Boys care for that? +They could scarcely count the nights that they had slept out on the +ground, and in bad weather too. They had a blanket apiece, and a +tarpaulin to pull over them. + +The blankets they had spread out on the floor of the cubby hole and they +found that the tarpaulin made a mighty warm protective covering, keeping +out the damp sea air in fine style. + +"Where do you suppose we are heading for, Juarez?" inquired Tom. + +"Maybe a port in Mexico or South America and then again we may head for +Hawaii before we intend to." + +"We are going South now, though," said Tom. + +"If we run in close to the coast, we'll jump overboard, and swim for +it," said Juarez. + +"We could do it if we get within a mile," said Tom, "if it is not too +rough." + +Just then Juarez put his hand over Tom's mouth, he felt sure that +someone was listening or was preparing to. Juarez ran his fingers +carefully over the boards until he found where a hole had been bored +through the planking a little back of their heads. It was just as he had +suspected, someone was listening to hear what plans they would make. + +With the noiselessness characteristic of him when scouting, Juarez crept +out partially and cautiously raised his head until he caught sight of +the sole of a man's boot. Then he crept back to his place and gave Tom a +nudge. Forthwith they began talking in rather loud tones. + +"Say Tom, do you know I rather like this ship. These fellows are rough +in their way but that is to be expected." + +"Of course," said Tom, in an equally loud voice, "but we might as well +make the best of it. There is no chance for the boys to find us." + +"You're right there, Tom." + +Then in a short time they appeared to fall into a deep and sonorous +sleep. This was no fake on the part of Tom who was actually and +thoroughly tired. But Juarez was more of a veteran and he kept his eyes +open and he was rewarded in a few minutes by seeing a man's feet hanging +over the edge of their bunk house and then he saw the figure of the mate +slouch aft. + +"You sly old rascal, you," remarked Juarez. "We will 'larn' you to try +and be too smart with the Frontier Boys. We may be young but we are not +fools." + +Nothing happened for a while and the gentle plunge of the Sea Eagle into +the long rolling swell soon lulled the tired Juarez into a sound sleep, +so that neither he nor Tom were aware that the ship had suddenly changed +her course. + +By and by however, Juarez waked with a start. Something had happened, he +knew not what. He sat up and struck his head upon the planking overhead. +Fortunately however he did not hit the place where the Mexican had +struck him but at the best his head was a tender place with him and the +blow stunned him, but as he was now more his rugged self, he soon +recovered. + +He found what had wakened him was the stopping of the ship. He saw +several dark forms moving aft and he crept out to see what was afoot. He +had to move very carefully but managed to reach the hood of the +forecastle, where he crouched looking and listening. + +He saw that they were lying to, close in to shore and could see the +white splash of the breakers as they rolled towards the shore and could +hear their monotonous thunder upon the beach. Here perhaps was their +chance. Just then he heard the heavy voice of the Captain from the +bridge. + +"Lower away there." Then the starboard boat slid noiselessly down from +the davits into the water. + +Juarez got up and glided back into the cubby hole to tell Tom the good +news. It was their opportunity to escape and seemingly a good one. The +sea was smooth and the night was dark. They could slip over the side of +the vessel and pull for the shore, and not a soul on the Sea Eagle would +be the wiser until they looked into their nest in the morning to find it +empty. + +Once they got to the shore it would be an easy matter to make their way +North until they met Jim and Jo. + +The anticipation of the escape had already thrilled through every nerve +in Juarez's body. But he had just started to wake Tom, when something +made him look down the deck. There was the tall figure of one of the +sailors coming directly towards the bow. + +Juarez lay down quickly as though asleep. Then the man reached down and +caught hold of Tom's foot and Juarez's and gave them a rough yank. "So +you are here, you young brats. You had better make a move or the Cap'n +will finish you." + +Juarez was fairly sizzling with rage especially as Tom was really +frightened by being wakened in such rough fashion and after all Tom was +but a boy and it pained Juarez to see him so scared, but he was +helpless, and all he could do was to add one more black mark to the +score he was charging up to the free-booters. + +Instead of moving away, the man sat on a capstan a few feet distant from +the boys' den, watching for the slightest move on their part, a marlin +spike dangling playfully in his hands. Juarez had not taken the crafty +and keen sighted Captain Broom into account. + +From the Bridge, that worthy, although he was watching the launching of +the boat, had chanced to catch sight out of the tail of his eye of a +dark shadow flitting back to the forecastle. He was not sure it was one +of the boys, but he was taking no chances, for he had a real respect for +their prowess and audacity as he might well have. + +So he had sent one of his crew to guard this young lions' den, while the +ship was so close in shore. He did not intend to stay longer than was +necessary right at this point, and he waited with some anxiety for the +return of the mate and Pete in the boat. + +It was now two o'clock in the morning and Captain Broom wanted to be out +at sea a good safe distance before the light broke. The mate's boat had +now been gone over a half-hour, and the Captain stood at the end of the +Bridge looking towards the shore. There was not a light upon the vessel +to show her position. She lay silent and black upon the dark waters. + +Then the Captain straightened up. He saw a moving body approaching the +ship and heard the slight dip of oars. Then the boat was alongside and +instead of two men, there were three in the boat. The Captain went down +to the main deck to meet them. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +THE PASSENGER + + +They met without any formality. The new passenger was a tall, slightly +stooped man, with long hair falling down to his shoulders. Juarez was +exceedingly anxious to see him, but could make out only a dark form +moving along the deck. + +"Come to the cabin, Jeems," called the Captain. "I've got something to +tell ye." + +They were soon seated in the Captain's cabin. This was a good-sized +room, panelled in light wood and very neatly kept. There was quite a +broad table of the same wood as the walls and a swivel chair in front of +it. The Captain seated himself in this chair and whirled to talk to the +visitor from the shore. + +It was evident that he was not a temporary visitor for scarcely had they +seated themselves in the cabin than the Sea Eagle slowly and gently +turned and they felt the pulsation of her engines as she headed once +more for sea. The man was seated on a sea chest opposite the Captain. + +He wore long cowhide boots, with jeans pants thrust into their tops, +flannel shirt of a nondescript color and a corduroy jacket. His hat was +of a battered gray. The face was smooth-shaven, deeply lined and burnt +to a dull brown. The hair which came down to his shoulders had that +peculiar sun-burnt weathered tinge that comes from continual exposure to +the weather. He was not an old man, probably on the sunny side of forty. + +"Well, Jeems, what is your news?" inquired the Captain. + +"The government boat is in the harbor, that's all." The Captain gave a +low, peculiar whistle. + +"When did she show up?" he asked. + +"Two days ago, Cap'n," he replied. + +"Come from the South?" + +"Yes," replied the man. "Put in for coal, I reckon." + +"Then put out for us," said the Captain briefly. + +"Any 'baccy, Cap'n? Been out two days," remarked Jeems. + +"Lift your lanky frame off that chest," replied the Captain, "and I'll +git you some." + +The man sprang up with remarkable alacrity, and as he unfolded length +after length of his long figure, it seemed as if his head would touch +the ceiling of the cabin. In fact, he did not miss it by many inches. +It was a comical contrast between the short stooping figure of the +Captain and the tall stranger. + +"Waal, Jeems, I wouldn't advise you to grow any more, or I'll have to +raise the roof of my cabin." + +"That's what, Cap'n," replied Jeems imperturbably. "That's what happens +when you grow up in Californy. You grow all the year around, and not +like in New England where the winters makes you stubby." + +Then the native philosopher seated himself on the chest again and took +long and delightful pulls at his recently staked pipe. + +"Hum!" he said. "This tastes right. Did yer ever know what it war to be +starved for yer 'baccy, Cap'n?" + +"No," replied the Captain, "I can't say that I ever did." + +"Well, I want to tell you, Cap'n, that it is worse than going without +water and I know what that is. Been on a desert till my tongue was as +thick as a cow's, and hung out between my teeth, black." + +"How long have you been away?" inquired the Captain. + +"Three weeks, Cap'n." + +"How are the sheep lookin'?" + +"Pretty fair, Cap'n," he replied. "I think that they had a whiff of rain +over there a few days ago." + +"It won't be long till we git the rains," suggested the Captain. + +"I don't know, Cap'n," remarked the lanky one. "The climate of Californy +is a curious proposition. It's built on the bias down at this end." + +"How's that?" asked the Captain curiously. He had a certain interest in +this particular courier's theories, however he might laugh at their +peculiarities. For there was apt to be a basis of reason in them. + +"Well, it's this way, Cap'n," said James Howell, to give him his correct +name, thrusting one lanky hand deep into his jeans pocket and bending +forward awkwardly. "It's this way. You see the storms come down from the +North to the Tehatchipei mountains, where there isn't any way for them +to get through to the south. Then the clouds shift around to Arizony, +and if the wind is right they are blown through the passes of the Sierra +Madre into Southern Californy, then we get the rain. That's why I said, +Cap'n, that this dazzling climate is built on the bias." + +"Waal, Jeems, as a weather prophet you can't be beat," said the +Skipper. + +"In my business I get plenty of time to think, Cap'n," he remarked, "and +as they ain't much to see except climate I think about that." + +"Waal, I have a good sight more than that to consider," replied the +Skipper. "I'm thinking right now about that government boat. I'm going +on deck. You can turn in." + +The Captain showed him to an empty cabin and the lanky stranger +proceeded to make himself comfortable for the balance of the night, +while the Captain went up on the Bridge. + +"Where are you heading this boat to?" he asked gruffly of the man at the +wheel. + +Then he took the helm himself and immediately the Sea Eagle's prow +pointed to the Westward as if she were heading directly for Japan. +However, she held this course for only an hour and a half when the +Skipper swung her bow once more to the South. + +Long before the morning broke, Tom and Juarez, hauled out of their +resting place, were set to scrubbing the decks and rubbing them down +with holy-stone. They waited eagerly for the first break of day to see +where they were. + +Then the light came slowly through the fog-covered sky, showing a glossy +sea with a slight swell and not a sign of land anywhere. The boys' +hearts sank within them and they felt sure that they would not see their +native land again. + +Once in a while they would glance up at the Bridge where stood the +Captain with his powerful stooped figure. He was evidently on the +lookout, for with his eye at a long glass, he kept scanning the sky-line +to the east. What was he looking for? Juarez knew instinctively that he +was afraid of pursuit. + +If only they could be overtaken and captured, his heart thrilled at the +thought and he watched the Captain eagerly for the first sign of +excitement. About ten o'clock he saw by the Skipper's actions that +something of interest had come under his observation. + +There were a number of quick, sharp orders given and Juarez noticed the +increased volume of smoke pouring from the stack. The Sea Eagle began to +show the speed that was in her trim, black form. Juarez worked around +the port side of the boat as rapidly as he dared, and his heart leaped +with hope. + +He saw low upon the eastern horizon a smudge of black smoke. If he only +had known what the Skipper knew, his hopes would have risen still +higher. Certain preparations were going on upon deck. The three cannon, +one in the stern, that had fired the salute to the group on the shore, +one on either side of the quarter-deck, were divested of their canvas +jackets. + +They certainly gleamed bravely in their polished brass. Then the +ammunition was got ready beside each separate gun. It begin to look like +business. The Sea Eagle began to justify her name and fly through the +water. Still the spot upon the horizon grew bigger. + +Then Juarez began to have a paralyzing feeling of doubt. The steamer, +though coming up fast, did not seem to be steering the proper course to +head the Sea Eagle, bearing on her port-quarter instead of across her +bows as would have been the natural course if she wished to intercept +her. + +Then the doubt in his mind was changed to disappointed certainty for the +Skipper waved his hand to the mate, who was busy on the deck below. It +was after he had taken a pull at the spyglass, which this time seemed to +have an intoxicating effect upon the Captain. + +"It's all right, Bill," he yelled, "It's nothing but a steamer bound for +'Frisco. It looks like the Panama." + +Juarez and Tom resumed their work doggedly. That was all that was left +for them to do. They scarcely glanced at the big steamer as she +appeared, growing constantly larger above the horizon, and then +diminishing as she steamed North towards San Francisco. + +Juarez was scrubbing the deck near a cabin door when it suddenly opened, +and a tall, long-legged figure stepped out and fairly over him. He came +to the conclusion that it was the man who had come aboard the night +before. + +He took in the tall, gaunt man with the smooth-shaven face and long hair +at two glances--one not being sufficient to his height. + +"Well, who are you?" he inquired lounging on the rail and regarding +Juarez with mild-eyed interest. + +"I'm Juarez Hopkins, deck scrubber. Who are you?" + +"I'm James Howell, sheep farmer. I'll add you two lambs to my flock," he +replied, whimsically, glancing at Tom who was down the deck a way. + +"You are more apt to find us wolves in lamb's hide," retorted Juarez. +"Where's your farm?" + +"There," said the stranger, pointing with a long, bony finger on the +port-quarter, "that nigh island." + +Then Juarez saw to his surprise, two islands that seemed to have sprung +like magic upon the South-eastern horizon. The further one lay long and +low and dark but distant beneath the fog-lined sky, the "nigh one" was +more short and dumpy in appearance. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +TO THE RESCUE + + +During the afternoon, everything had been made ready for the journey of +the morrow. There was not a great deal to be done for the three rescuers +would travel light. There would be no need of a pack animal, because the +Senor had assured the boys that they would find hospitality on the way. + +Jo however was in mourning because when he gave his black a trial +gallop, it was discovered that he was badly lamed in the right knee. It +would not have been safe for any of the pirate gang to come within range +of Jo's wrath. + +"The cursed brutes stove him up for fair," he declared grinding his +teeth. + +"I'm afraid it will take a month's rest before he will be fit," +determined Jim. + +"Then I'm out of it," exclaimed Jo sorrowfully. + +"Not so, my friend," interrupted the Spaniard. "Take the bay. He is not +as good a horse as yours, but he has great endurance. He is yours to use +as long as you wish." + +Jo thanked the Spaniard heartily for his kindness and generosity. Then +he spoke in a low voice to his brother. "How about that money, Jim? +Don't forget to pay the Spaniard for those goods we bought at the +store." Jim spoke up. + +"Senor, I wish to show you a little something of interest." + +Then Jim got his heavy saddle, on which he had ridden so many hundred +miles. And the Senor regarded it with interest, because of the carved +leather workmanship which was of the finest and he was a connoisseur of +such matters. + +"How much would you give for it, Senor Sebastian," inquired Jim, "if it +were put up for purchase?" + +"It is a beautiful saddle. I would be willing to give a hundred dollars. +It is worth it." + +"That saddle is worth several thousand, Senor," replied Jim confidently. + +"I do not understand," replied the Spaniard. "It is the personal value, +I suppose." + +"I will show you," said Jim. + +Then he took from his hip pocket a heavy bone handled knife which he had +bought at the store and pulled back the hoof cleaner, an instrument +attached to the knife that was used to get a pebble or anything that had +got into the horse's hoof. + +With this he worked at the leather that covered the high and rather +thick horn of the saddle. Finally he pried the top leather flap off. +There was a heavy piece fitted into the top of the horn. With some +difficulty Jim got this out disclosing a hollow, in which was concealed +most of the jewels he had found in Mexico. + +"Hold your hands, Jo. Tight now." And with the word he emptied the +contents of the horn into Jo's palms. Diamonds, rubies, turquoises and +some heavy gold pieces. + +"That is what you might call a horn of plenty," said Jim jocosely. + +"But!" cried the Spaniard in amazement, "where did you get these?" + +"In Mexico," replied Jim. "This was what the Pirates were after. And +they got all but this. Sometime I will tell you the story of its +discovery. Now take this to reimburse you, Senor, for the money we spent +at the store." And he held out the diamond. + +"That is far too much. That stone is worth five hundred dollars at +least," said the Spaniard. "These three rubies would be more exact and I +will take them." + +Jim, handing over the three stones selected, said, "Now, Senor, you +shall take the diamond as a token of good will from my brother and +myself." + +"We insist upon it," chimed in Jo. + +Finally the Spaniard accepted the gifts with many protestations of +obligation and appreciation. Jo was about to urge him to accept a jewel +for his sister, but Jim stopped him, knowing that the proud Spaniard +would not hear to such a present. + +The next morning they were up an hour before daylight and ate a hearty +breakfast by the light of the candles. Veterans though they were, the +boys felt a thrill go through their pulses as they thought of the +expedition that lay before them. Outside they could hear the pawing of +the impatient horses. + +"To the success of our expedition and the rescue of our friends!" was +the toast the Spaniard proposed as they rose from the table. The +Frontier Boys drank it, but not in wine. They felt just a little foolish +too, but such is the reward that often comes with doing what is right. +But they were sturdy in their determination to stick to their +principles. + +If they had only known it, down in his heart the Spaniard respected them +the more, even though it seemed odd to him. + +Then they went out on the verandah, fully armed and ready to take their +departure. Two oil lamps near the door and fastened to the wall, backed +by shining reflectors sent a strong light across the verandah and into +the darkness outside. + +There stood the three horses, eager to be off, each one held by a +Mexican groom. Caliente we already know, and the horse that Jo is to +ride also. So let us take a glance at the third animal, Don Fernando. He +evidently justified all the enthusiasm of his master, a truly splendid +creature. + +A dark chestnut, as large as Caliente and built on something the same +lines. They were beautifully matched except in color. It was with a +thrill of pleasure that Jim swung himself into the saddle. His mount was +in fine fettle and ready for the long pull ahead. + +They started from the home ranch with a thunder of hoofs in unison, the +riders checking their horses to a slow gallop with a heavy hand. +Together they pressed through the waning darkness. There was a wonderful +exhilaration, as they leaped forward, the horses powerful and fresh. + +Instead of following in the direction of the morning before, the +Spaniard turned to the East until they came near the foot of the range. +In a short time they came to a gate, which seemed to open mysteriously +as they approached, but the motive power proved to be a small Mexican +boy, whom the Senor had sent on ahead. + +Now they were on a turf road with bushes on either side and down this +they thundered, Caliente the gray, and Don Fernando the dark, matching +stride for stride, with Jo well in the rear. For he found if he rode +close up he was blinded and stung by sods and stones thrown back from +the flying hoofs of the two horses in the front. + +It was a bit lonely for Jo and he wished that one of the other boys was +here to keep him company. As they rode, the bushes seemed to fly by as +they do when you look from a railroad train and Jo was afraid lest his +horse would be unable to keep the pace indefinitely. One thing in Jo's +favor was that he was the lightest of the three and what is more to the +purpose a very light rider. + +So like the good horseman he was, he determined to save his horse all he +could and make him last out. For eight miles or more they rode without a +stop until they came to another gate. This the Spaniard unfastened and +swung open without dismounting, then closed it after Jo. + +The morning light was now distinct, although the fog was over the sky. +Before them stretched a long level plain that broke into sand dunes near +the sea. They could see the ocean lying dark in its monotonous level of +color, to the Western horizon. + +"We have just left the Sebastian ranch," called the Spaniard. + +"It is immense," commented Jim. "May I ask how many acres it embraces?" + +"It was immense in the old days," replied the Spaniard. "Before your +people took possession of the land. It was held by no fences then. But +your laws were not ours and we lost many square miles. Now there are +fifty thousand acres under fence." + +"Fifty thousand acres!" exclaimed Jo. + +"Ah, but it was double that before the Americans came," replied the +Spaniard. Then he glanced critically at Caliente. "Your horse looks as +cool as though he had been standing in the stable. The pace does not +affect his wind either. Splendid condition!" + +"Caliente is as hard as nails," said Jim proudly. "But your horse has +wonderful speed." + +The chestnut seemed more on edge than the old warrior, Caliente, and +tossed the foam from his bit, until his dark coat was speckled with it. + +"He is high strung," said the Spaniard, "but I would back him against +any horse flesh in California. We can let them out here for a half dozen +miles." + +"Let her go, Senor. I won't let you lose me." + +At the word the Spaniard gave his chafing horse his head and away the +chestnut sprang in the lead. It was slightly down grade for a mile, +then there was a gulch twelve feet wide and of considerable depth. It +was a good jump and to make it saved a little distance. Going at top +speed the chestnut took the jump in fine style. His rider half turned in +his saddle to watch Jim's effort. Caliente had faced worse leaps than +that, he rose to it and swept over it as gracefully as a bird. + +"Good fellow!" exclaimed Jim patting him affectionately on the neck. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE BANDITS + + +When Jo saw the gulch ahead, he decided that discretion was the better +part of valor as he did not know his mount well enough to risk the leap, +so he galloped a few hundred feet below, where the gulch narrowed and +then he took the jump nicely, and scampered after the other two riders +who were quite a way ahead. + +Jim purposely held Caliente in check, keeping a hundred yards in the +rear of the Spaniard. Ahead a few miles, there was a perfect sea of +yellow where the tall mustard covered the plain for a great distance. +Into this they charged full tilt, the mustard reaching as high as their +heads. + +There was a swish of its blossoms in their faces as the powerful horses +charged into it and in spite of their strength they began to tire after +going some distance. + +"Where is Jo?" inquired Jim suddenly after they had slowed down, "I +don't see a sign of him." And he rose in his stirrups looking over the +level lake of mustard. + +"Hello, Jo," he yelled at the top of his voice. No answer came. Could he +be drowned in this lake? There was not a motion to indicate his +whereabouts, no waving of the yellow tops. + +"It is very strange," said the Spaniard. "Did he cross the gully all +right?" + +"Yes, I saw him take the jump below us a ways." Then Jim raised his +revolver above his head and fired. + +"That ought to fetch him," he said. Then they listened intently. +Suddenly about a quarter of a mile ahead of them they saw a sombrero +rise like a gray mushroom above the yellow surface of the mustard, and +Jo's voice came back to them. + +They both gave their horses the rein, this time Jim did nothing to hold +Caliente back, and with their powerful speed the two great horses tore +forward, on even terms until in the last hundred yards Caliente forged +ahead by half a length. + +"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. There was Jo sitting quietly on +his horse. + +"That's how you beat us," exclaimed Jim, pointing to a cow trail running +diagonally through the growth of mustard. + +"Yes," laughed Jo, "I struck it further down after I jumped the gully. +Otherwise you fellows would have lost me." + +"Good work, Jo," said Jim. "Now we will have it easier going." + +So in single file they galloped along the path, until they found +themselves by noon, at the foot of a spur of mountains that extended +from the main coast range to the ocean. Jim regarded this barrier in +their way with a practised eye. + +"This will slow us down, Senor," he said. "It looks like a pass below +there, about two miles." + +"Yes," said the Senor, "we can get through there all right, but it is +pretty rough going." + +They had to advance more slowly now, as the ground was broken into stony +ravines, and there was a good deal of brush. In this kind of country +Jo's horse more than held its own with the bigger animals, for he was as +nimble as a goat. + +"I hope we will find water, Senor," remarked Jim. "Our horses are pretty +dry now." + +"Yes," replied the Spaniard, "there is a good spring at the foot of the +Pass." + +They found it all right, in the entrance to the Pass, where there was a +small green cove, surrounded with bushes, and on one side was a sheep +herder's shanty. Jo investigated this immediately and found nothing in +it but the charred remnants of a fire and a pair of discarded overalls. + +Jim, who had himself been looking around, made a more important find. + +"There has been somebody here recently," he announced. "Here are some +tracks around the spring and not over twelve hours old." + +"Yes, I have no doubt," said the Spaniard carelessly puffing at his +cigarette. "This Pass is used occasionally by ranchmen and herders." + +"There have been five or six horses here," said Jim, whose experiences +had made him suspicious. + +"There are no Indians," said Jo, "in this section, at least none who are +on the warpath." + +"I suppose you do have cattle rustlers, Senor?" inquired Jim. + +"Yes, there is a band of outlaws," replied the Spaniard, "that raids +from as far north as our ranch, south to San Diego, but we have seen no +trace of them for many months." + +"Then, Senor," remarked Jim, "it is about time that they paid you +another visit." + +"Ah, Senor Darlington," exclaimed the Spaniard. "We Castilians do not +reason so. We say that there is no trouble today, why worry about +tomorrow. Perhaps these bandits may have starved to death, or been hung, +or the good Padres may have persuaded them by the fear of Hell, to +become quiet, sheep raising citizens. God knows." + +"I fear that they are raising sheep in their old style," grinned Jo. The +pun glanced off the Spaniard harmlessly. + +"The theory that they may be hung, sounds plausible, Senor," admitted +Jim. "But before we advance into the Pass, I will scout a little." + +"If the Senor pleases," responded the Spaniard courteously. + +"Do you chance to know of a small, hunchbacked Mexican who is more or +less in this section of the country, Senor?" Jim suddenly inquired. + +The Spaniard flushed with red anger and spit emphatically on the ground. + +"You give him into my hands and I will reward you well," cried the +Spaniard. + +Jim made no immediate reply but gazed thoughtfully at the ground. He was +considering the case. This was not the time to turn aside in a chase for +even so desperate a criminal as the hunchbacked greaser. So he made no +definite reply to the Spaniard. + +After the horses were fed, and watered, and while Jo was looking after +the coffee, Jim started off, to do a little scouting up the Pass. The +first thing that he did was to slip off his heavy riding boots, which +the stylish Jo had forced him to buy, and to put on his noiseless footed +moccasins. + +Then with his revolver loaded and ready to his hand, he went swiftly and +silently up the trail that followed through thick brush, gradually +working up the side of the mountain. It was no difficult task to follow +the tracks of the horses. In a half hour's swift climbing he came to the +top of a stony ridge, over which the trail curved, and dipped down the +other side. + +Jim now saw that the Pass was an irregular one with recurrent spurs, +thrusting out from the mountains on either side, at quite frequent +intervals. There were innumerable chances for ambuscades. Jim did not +stand in the trail but to one side partially hidden in a thicket. + +All the time his keen eyes were taking in the canyon below, not however +admiring the scenery. In fact there was nothing particularly beautiful, +or interesting in the view. In the Rockies and further South too he had +seen canyons incomparable to the rather ordinary ones that he had seen +in California. + +Jim was watching for some slight movement of a living creature in the +canyon. Finally he gave it up, and was about to turn away, then he gave +a start, he saw one, two, three, men crouch across the trail, a quarter +of a mile below, and disappear into the thick brush. He was almost +certain that the first one was the hunchback. + +That was all that Jim wanted to see. He noiselessly took the back trail, +thinking over the best course to pursue. He would have liked nothing +better under ordinary circumstances than to fight it out with the +outlaws and to capture the hunchback. But their first object must be the +rescue of Tom and Juarez. + +Was there not some way by which they could get to the South without +going through this bandit infested Pass? + +"Well brother, what didst thou find?" inquired Jo, who was at times +pleased to be dramatic. + +"Very few specimens in the way of bandits," replied Jim. + +"As I said, Senor," remarked the Spaniard, "they have become good +citizens." + +"Not yet, I am sure, because they are alive." + +"That is a good one, Jim," remarked Jo, appreciatively, but the Spaniard +was politely mystified. "Same as Indians." + +"I found one thing out," said the diplomatic Jim, "and that is, that the +Pass is a hard one on horses. Are you sure, Senor, that there is no +easier way than this to get through?" + +"Positive," briefly responded the Spaniard. + +Jim who was seated on a rock digging his heel into the soft earth, +looked up as a sudden idea struck him,--but without knocking him out. + +"How far is it from here to the sea, Senor?" he asked. + +"Not over five miles." + +"Can we not get around that way?" Jim inquired eagerly. + +"Why, yes," replied the Spaniard slowly, "if the tide is not coming in. +In that case we should be drowned." Jim glanced hastily at his watch. + +"We can try for it and make it, if we do not waste any time," he said. +"The horses have had a good rest." + +"Very well, Senor," said the Spaniard resignedly. He regarded Jim as an +amiable hurricane whom it was not worth while battering to resist. Jim +hastily swallowed his coffee and a hunk of bread and in five minutes the +three musketeers were in the saddle again. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +RACE WITH THE TIDE + + +In spite of the rough going, they made good time for the five miles, +spurred on by the constant anxiety lest they should not reach the beach +before the tide began coming in. There were several gathered to see them +off when they left the mouth of the Pass, but not to give them a send +off. + +A short explanation will prove this. It is not to be supposed that the +hunchbacked Mexican and the bandits did not know that the three horsemen +were coming over the plain of the mustard growth. Indeed, their scout, +the Mexican dwarf, saw Jim, Jo and the Spaniard when they first landed +in the entrance to the canyon. + +He had gone back to report to the bandits their coming, and after Jim +had returned, they had prepared the nicest trap imaginable near where +Jim had been hiding. They had had numerous experiences in that line and +were perfectly qualified experts. The spider and the fly was nothing to +the arrangements they had made to receive their supposably unsuspicious +guests. + +You can imagine the surprise and disgust of the bandits and their scout +when they saw the three horsemen ride in an entirely different direction +than that they had looked for. Talk about convulsions, you should have +seen these desperadoes express their disappointment. It was terrific. +Not a saint in the long calendar was left unscathed. + +How Jim would have enjoyed the performance. But entirely oblivious to +this, Jo, Jim and the Spaniard were riding rapidly towards the sea. +Before an hour had passed, they had ridden between the rounded sand +dunes and then out upon the hard, smooth sand of the beach. + +"This is splendid going, Senor Sebastian," exclaimed Jim. + +"It is all right," he replied, "if the sea does not get hungry too +soon." But the sea appeared to be in a very pleasant mood and the white +breakers had withdrawn as far out as it was possible to get. It was such +a smooth smiling sea with the laugh of its little sparkling waves that +it seemed that there could be no possible harm in it. + +"I never saw a road that was better than this!" exclaimed Jo in +delight. "It is perfectly springy and no dust or mud." + +It deserved all of Jo's praises, this broad, firm California beach. The +brown sand, that had been pounded down by the force of the great rollers +some hours before, showed scarcely a sign of the shoes of the horses. + +There was plenty of width and the three horses pressed on abreast, the +powerful sweep of the gray Caliente and the chestnut Don Fernando, and +the snappy, nervous leaps of the little bay that Jo was riding. With the +bracing sea air and the exhilarating speed, the three musketeers were +invigorated. + +The Spaniard hummed a gay ballad, while at times Jim's heavy bass and +Jo's lighter treble were joined in a rollicking American song. They +laughed without reason, for the simple joy of being alive and on the +move; but as pride sometimes goes before destruction, so happiness often +goes before disaster. + +It was a small matter too, but it made for trouble. The Spaniard's horse +stepped between two small rocks that were close together and wrenched +one of his hind shoes nearly off. Jim and Senor Sebastian hastily +dismounted. Of course they carried with them the necessary things to +fix the shoe on again, but even then it was a question of a number of +minutes. + +"You had better ride ahead, Jo," urged Jim. "Your horse is beginning to +tire and we will overtake you, when we once get started." + +"It is a good idea," joined in the Spaniard. + +"All right," acquiesced Jo readily enough, and he gave his bay the rein, +riding slowly down the beach. + +Then the two began operations on Don Fernando's hind foot. Here they +found their first real delay. At the point where the accident happened, +the mountains came down quite close to the sea, so that they were +crowded in much closer than they had been. The nearness of the water +made the big chestnut restless and hard to handle. + +The Spaniard had great difficulty in getting near enough to his horse to +get hold of his hind foot. When he did succeed in doing this, and was +just starting to peg the shoe on, an extra big wave slapped down upon +the beach, though at a safe distance and caused the big chestnut to jump +and hurl his master to a distance of a dozen feet. + +"This won't do," cried Jim. "I'll take my horse around to the sea side +of yours and close up. Perhaps that will give your animal confidence." + +It worked like a charm, for though Caliente was high-spirited, he was +not flighty and he steadied his comrade so that the two workers were +able to fasten the shoe. + +"We have lost a good half hour," said Jim, looking at his watch with a +grave face. + +"Perhaps we shall have to turn back," remarked the Spaniard with +gravity. "We may not escape the incoming tide if we go on." + +"Don't you believe it," cried Jim, impetuously. "I've got business ahead +and must go." + +"Have it your way," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile. He knew +what dangers lay ahead with a rising tide and Jim did not or he probably +would not have been so insistent. + +"I see no sign of Jo," remarked Jim, as they swung into the saddles. + +"Ah, we will not catch him. He is safe," replied the Spaniard. + +Then with tremendous speed, they swept down the beach, the splendid +horses responding to the crisis. It was their fleetness against the +steadily rising rush of the inexorable sea. They actually gained ten +minutes on the first two miles and a half. Then Jim saw ahead the dark +form of a headland thrusting out towards the sea. + +Already the rush of a long wave would send the water lapping around +their horses' feet. Jim recognized the danger. They must get around that +promontory or give up beaten. Then he gave Caliente a touch with a spur, +the first that day. With a snort, the spirited animal sprang forward +faster than before and at his shoulder was the chestnut with flaming +nostril. + +None too soon had they reached the headland, for the recurrent waves +were beginning to surge against it, with full force and gnawing foam. In +the fierce fury of their charge, they sent their horses against the sea. +It was at the long withdrawal that made bare the scattered black rocks, +that they rounded the headland. + +But too soon a great thundering wave with the force of the Pacific +behind it came roaring in and swelled to the horses' throats, almost +submerging the riders. But the animals held against its withdrawing +power and before the ocean could return to the attack, they had got +beyond the headland to a safe place on the beach. + +The horses were trembling and quivering with their exertions and with +the fear of the sea which is the most terrible and paralyzing of all +fears. Jim drew a long breath of relief and looked ahead to see if there +was any sign of Jo. Then to his consternation he saw that the beach +curved inland and at the further end of the curve was another frowning +headland thrusting itself out somewhat further than the one they had but +just rounded. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +THE ENCHANTED ISLE + + +Let us now return to the Sea Eagle, and find out what is happening +there. + +You recollect that Juarez had just discovered two islands lying on the +South-eastern horizon, the one, long and low, the other comparatively +short and dumpy. He had been conversing with the tall shepherd of the +island, who seemed to take an interest in Juarez. But because of his +isolated life during a greater part of the year, he would have taken an +interest in a stone idol, if he had chanced to discover one. + +"Which of these islands are we making for?" inquired Juarez. + +"The one where we land," replied the sheep farmer oracularly. "I might +ask the Cap'n, only I never pester him with questions. You aren't a +Yankee, are you?" + +"No," replied Juarez, "I'm not. My folks live in Western Kansas." + +"I'm glad to hear it, son. But what are you doing here?" he asked. + +"You aren't a Yankee, are you?" inquired Juarez, quizzically. The man +laughed softly to himself. + +"You've got me there, lad," he said. "It looks to me," he continued, +"that the old man is going to steer for the further island." + +"Then you will have to swim for your home," remarked Juarez. + +"I can wade," he replied whimsically, looking down at his long legs. + +"You are a humorist," said Juarez. + +"No, you can put me down for a philosopher, that is to say, a man who +has much time to think and nothing to do." + +"I should like to be one," said Juarez. "Suppose you holy-stone these +decks while I try it." + +"No, my friend," replied the shepherd, "I am too much of a philosopher +to make any such swap." + +"Is Captain Broom one?" asked Juarez. + +"Well, he is a sort of a philosopher till he gets mad, then he becomes a +living active volcano, belching out a lava of hot language and scorching +things generally. I guess that I had better be moving along. I see that +he is eyeing me from the Bridge, and he is likely to get active any +moment if I keep you from working." With this the lanky shepherd +strolled forward and seating himself upon the top of the boys' sleeping +place in the bow, smoked his pipe in meditative comfort. + +His estimate in regard to the destination of the Sea Eagle proved to be +correct. For in the early afternoon the ship passed under the lee of the +long island and was steaming up the channel between it and the mainland, +which was distant some thirty-five miles. + +The fog had cleared by noon, and there was that complete transition to +brilliant, sunny weather. There was a sort of a white haze along the +distant coast and beyond far inland, rose the faint summits of the high +mountains. + +Fortunately Juarez and Tom had a chance to observe their new +surroundings for they had been set to work sewing on a small sail that +was to be used in one of the boats. They sat upon the top of one of the +hatches, under the watchful eyes of old Pete and the philosophic gaze of +the shepherd. Sewing was one of the accomplishments of the Frontier +Boys. They had been obliged to learn. + +"What is that particular bronze looking weed, floating in these waters?" +asked Tom. It was as Tom phrased it, bronze and a most beautiful color. + +It was indeed a giant among weeds; just such as the garden of the ocean +would grow. The stems were fifty to eighty feet long, with peculiar +colored leaves eight to ten inches in length, growing on little boughs +from the parent stem. The whole structure was held up by small bronze +buoys, of a round shape. + +"Well as ye seem likely boys and want to learn, I'll tell you about this +plant," said the shepherd. "The scientific fellows call it Algae. When +the world was first made this algae covered the whole surface of the +ocean." + +"How did you learn this?" asked Juarez. + +"You know that the Captain is quite a collector, and in his travels has +gotten together among many other things some interesting books. He gives +them to me when convenient." The face of the lanky shepherd was +perfectly grave when he spoke of Captain Broom as a collector. + +"What makes the water so clear around here?" asked Juarez. "I never saw +anything like it." + +"Well, you see," replied their mentor, "this island is placed +peculiarly, I mean this side of it. You see how quiet the water is?" + +"It is certainly smooth and blue," said Juarez. "More like a lake than +the ocean." + +"That's only true of this side," resumed the shepherd, "the other is +rough enough, but you see the prevailing winds are from the Northwest +and this shore is never disturbed. So on the beaches you will find not +sand, but smooth round pebbles, because there is no action of the water, +no breakers or waves to grind them into sand." + +About four o'clock the Sea Eagle came into a perfectly beautiful little +harbor, at the South-eastern end of the island. There was a small level +plot back from the beach and on all sides rose steep hills and back of +them the mountains. It was the most picturesque scene the boys had ever +beheld in all their travels. + +What would they not have given to have been free to roam that island, +hunting inland, or fishing or bathing along those quiet, enchanted +shores. But this was no pleasure excursion. Far from it. Captain Broom +had his own ideas, and he did not intend to make a landing at all. + +"Get the whale boat ready, lads!" he ordered. "And put her over, we've +got no time to lose." + +They lost no time either, under Captain Broom's commanding eye. + +What was necessary for the cruise was already in the boat. Two casks of +water, several guns, and a lot of provisions. Then the boat was hove +overboard into the quiet bay. The captain was ready with a much battered +satchel in his hand. Not for one second did he entrust it to any one +else. + +"Now over with you, you two lads," he commanded and Juarez and Tom, +with a sinking of the heart, got into the boat. This was the last leg of +their mysterious journey, and it boded them no good they felt sure of +that. The mate they noticed stayed aboard in charge of the ship. + +They were put in the stern where old Pete had the steering oar. Near +them sat the shepherd on one of the casks of water, his long legs +getting uncertain accommodation. The captain had his position in the bow +and two powerful sailors were at the oars, one on either side. They did +not sit down, but stood up to their work. + +Without any loss of time the boat got under way proceeding seaward from +the shelter of the beautiful little harbor. In spite of their +depression, the two boys could not help being interested in the +absolutely clear water in which they could look down for eighty feet. + +They could see the straight slender columns of the Algae rising to the +surface, starting from where they were rooted in the bottom of the bay +and swaying to the slow pulsation of the tide. These strange plants of +this marine garden were marvels indeed. Between their stalks and among +the encrusted rocks swam in absolute unconsciousness of being watched, +many beautiful, and strange fishes. + +Some were small of golden hue, with little spots of a marvelous blue +(poetry) that flashed like keen electric dew, (that will do). Others +were like gold fishes, a foot in length and of corresponding breadth. +There were long mackerel, and innumerable minnows, and over the rocks a +peculiar little fish crawled or rather walked on thin rat-like feet. + +Before they had time to observe further the boat had got out of the +harbor where the water sunk away to blue unfathomed depth. When clear of +the harbor, they turned to the South, passing near a cove with a +symmetrical pebbly beach, built up for five feet, above the level of the +water. The ocean was perfectly smooth, with not a ripple upon its +surface. They were evidently making to round the Southern extremity of +the Island. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +IN THE WHITE BOAT + + +Ahead of them was a rock rising fifty or sixty feet out of the water. It +was evident that the rock was inhabited for there could be seen dark +forms moving around upon it. Nothing had been said since they started, +for the Captain was not in a talkative mood. Jeems Howell, the shepherd, +had sat silently smoking his pipe in philosophic contentment. + +"What are those things on that rock?" inquired Tom, his curiosity +getting the best of his reserve. + +"Two yankees in this boat," commented the shepherd. "Those are seals, +son. Didn't you ever see any before?" + +"No!" admitted Tom. + +"You didn't know that seals, next to humans, are the smartest animals, +in the world." + +"Is that so?" inquired Juarez. "They certainly are sleek." + +"They have got the most brain room, that's a fact." + +The boys regarded the seals with peculiar interest as the boat passed +near the rock. They were moving about awkwardly by means of their +flippers, moving their sinuous necks this way and that and regarding the +strange boat with their soft brown eyes. Then they dived headlong into +the sea, swimming about with a peculiar grace. + +"Queer animals," remarked Tom, "belong half to the sea and half to the +land." + +"Something like sailors," remarked the shepherd. + +"What's the Captain going to do with us?" asked Juarez in a low voice. +The shepherd's face took on a solemn expression, but before he could +reply the Captain's voice roared. + +"None of that, you'll find out soon enough. You can talk about the flory +and fauny, with long shanks, but don't let me hear anything else out of +you," such was the Captain's ultimatum. + +But soon matters grew so interesting that they lost all inclination for +talking. When they got near the Southern end of the island they began to +notice white caps to the Southward, dotting the darkness of the sea. + +"You lads will have to hold tight now in a few minutes," remarked +Howell. "Do you get seasick?" + +"No," replied the boys. + +"Well, you will have a chance soon, and if it don't fetch you, nothing +will." + +So far they had been rowing under the sheltering lee of the island whose +huge rocky bulk had shouldered off the charge of the wind-driven seas. +Now before they had fairly rounded the island the character of the water +began to change. The boat began to toss on the great rollers. Then as +they cleared the land for good and were in the channel, a fresh gust of +wind struck them, drenching the occupants of the boat with spray. + +The Captain stood up in the bow of the boat and steadying himself took +in the conditions of the sea and wind. There was nothing in his grim +weatherbeaten face to show what he felt. The men at the oars now made +hard work of it against the headwind and the running sea. + +They would climb up a steep wave and then with a sickening slide, go +down into the hollow, then with a lusty pull the sailors would bring the +heavy boat over the toppling crest of wave to find another rushing to +meet them. No rest, this was what made it such heart breaking work. + +The early fog had come, covering the sea with gloom, and the waves did +not go down perceptibly. At times, they shipped a good deal of water and +Tom and Juarez were kept busy bailing out. After an hour's hard +struggle the sailors were about all in and seemed hardly able to hold +their own against the sea and wind. The Captain was quick to notice +this. + +"Can you row, lad?" he inquired of Juarez. Now the latter's experience +had been confined to his work going down the Grand Canyon of Colorado, +on the raft-boat that the Frontier Boys had built. + +Even the old ocean itself could not show anything worse than some of the +rapids that the boys had run. As for rocks, nothing could beat the +canyon for them. + +"I'll try, sir," he replied, "I've never rowed on the ocean." + +"Humph!" grunted the Captain, "take the starboard. And you, you lazy +long shanks, you take the other oar." + +"All right, sir," replied cheerfully, the one addressed. + +"Get out of here, Pete," he cried, giving that worthy a lift with his +foot that landed him on top of Tom, "I'll do the steering. You boys will +only have to pull, that's all. I'll keep her headed up right." + +Fortunately Juarez was in fine condition, or he could never have stood +the gruelling work ahead. He weighed one hundred and sixty pounds and +there was not an ounce of fat on him. Likewise he had had a sound +night's sleep and three square meals so that he was fortified for what +was ahead. + +Juarez buckled to the task with all his strength, and he was glad of the +chance to get his blood in circulation for he was chilled to the bone by +the flying spray, and then too, anything was better than thinking of the +fate ahead. He was surprised to find out that the shepherd who appeared +rather frail in physique was able to keep up the pace. + +But he had that sinewy length of muscles that counts for more than mere +bunchy thickness. Juarez was crafty enough not to spend all of his +strength in the first fifteen minutes of work. He liked this, fighting +the sea and standing on his feet he was able to put the whole leverage +of his body into the stroke. + +The change in speed was noticeable right away, and the boat began to +pull ahead steadily. The two sailors who had been laid off from +exhaustion, had watched Juarez with a sneering grin as he took the oar. +They were sure that the first wave that came along would wrench the oar +out of his hand. Great was their surprise when they saw him buckle to +the oar, rising and pulling at the right time to meet the toppling, +rustling seas. + +"That little shrimp will last about ten minutes," said one of them to +his mate. + +"Sure, Bill," replied the other. + +Juarez choked back a hot reply, for he knew that it would not be good +for him to say anything to them. They were in the majority and would get +him if he did, besides making it bad for Tom. The ten minutes passed and +Juarez was just beginning to warm to his work. This took the wind out of +their sails completely. + +The powerful hand of the Skipper at the steering oar was a great help, +for now all that the two men at the oars had to do was to pull and not +to worry about keeping her headed right. Juarez kept steadily at it for +an hour and then darkness began to fall over the channel but not until +the island that they were approaching had begun to loom up, dead ahead. + +They were now getting in the lee of the strange island and the sea was +moderating perceptibly. At this juncture the two sailors who had become +thoroughly rested took the oars from Juarez and his co-worker and pulled +steadily through the gathering gloom. In a short time the bulk of the +island loomed above them in the darkness. + +Not a word was said, only the swish of the sea was heard and the +groaning of the oars in the locks. Tom and Juarez were deeply depressed +and gloomy. They felt exactly as though they were being taken to prison +and could sympathize with sailors who had been marooned on lonely and +desolate islands. + +"Easy now, lads," called the Captain, as he brought the boat's head +squarely around towards the shore. + +"Two strokes," he yelled, "and let her run." + +With great force they pulled the oars in succession, then they shipped +them in a hurry. Juarez could see the dashing of foam on either side of +the boat where the waves smote the rocks. There was a roar in his ears +as the boat rushed toward seeming sure destruction. It was going with +great speed from the impetus of the sailors' strokes. + +The Captain was standing taut at the steering oars, his eyes piercing +the darkness ahead, then the foam of the breakers dashed in their faces, +there was a quick sliding past of dark rocks and before they could draw +breath again the boat was in quiet water, under some black cliffs. At +last they had reached the mysterious goal of their mysterious journey. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +IN PERIL + + +We must now go back in our narrative to where we left Jim Darlington and +the Spaniard, Senor Sebastian, in a position of extreme peril, between +the cliffs and the deep sea, with the white-fanged tide coming in like a +devouring monster eager for its prey. + +"Is there a chance, Senor?" cried Jim as soon as his horse gained his +footing. + +"It is the fatal day, I fear," replied the Spaniard with resigned +hopelessness. "The sea is hungry." + +"As for that, so am I," declared Jim coolly. "So let us try to get +around the headland and after that, supper." + +"As you please," acquiesced the Spaniard quietly. + +Then Jim turned Caliente's head and with a quick touch of the spur sent +him full stride along the curving beach, followed closely by the +Spaniard. Already the heavy waves were licking far up the slant of the +sand. Even the veteran Caliente seemed nervous at its approach, while +Don Fernando would jump and shy as the hissing water crept around his +feet. + +In about two minutes the two horsemen reached the base of the rocky +headland that barred their way. It was a desperate moment, there was but +one thing to do and that was to take the chance. + +"Better be drowned quick, Caliente, old boy," cried Jim, "than slowly, +but we'll beat you yet," and he shook his clenched fist at the ocean, +and whirled his horse to meet a wave that struck Caliente breast high. +So for a moment, the two, boy and horse, stood facing their powerful +enemy, The Sea, that came with the recurring charge, its evenly +separated files robed in blue with white crests. Thus they stood getting +a full free breath before they leaped into the ranks of the foe. + +Jim's strained, keen gaze took in every detail of the situation, noting +the position of the rocks that a receding wave left bare, so that he +might find a clear path or trail in his dash for life. Nor did his gaze +flinch as he saw the advancing wave break against the front of the +cliff. + +"Now, Caliente," yelled Jim, with a sense of fierce determination and +exultation that communicated itself to his horse, and lifting his feet +free from the stirrups so that he would not be entangled, if Caliente +should fall, he headed him seaward, galloping fast down the beach upon +the heels of the withdrawing wave. + +Meeting a smaller inrush of water and dashing through its foaming crest, +his gallant horse swam until he got a foothold upon the rocks at the +base of the cliff. Now was the crucial moment. With absolute +recklessness, Jim urged his powerful horse over the foam-covered rocks, +striving to get around the prow of the headland before the charge of the +next wave. Not one look did Jim give seaward, all his energies were bent +upon using every precious second, and Caliente was filled with his +rider's indomitable spirit. + +Then above them towered the fatal wave, and with a confused roar, it +broke over them in sweltering foam and they were swept towards the black +front of the cliff. Then came the impact against the rock and the next +moment, stunned and bruised, Jim holding to the pommel of the saddle, +with a death-grip, was carried out to sea with Caliente in the grasp of +the retreating wave. + +It was all over, as like pieces of drift, horse and rider were swept +away, but fortune does sometime favor the brave and, being caught in a +powerful current, Caliente was carried South of the headland and his +progress towards the sea was stayed by a rock that rose high, an +outer-guard of the headland. So then the next great wave bore them +toward the beach, and once Caliente got his feet upon the sandy bottom +he braced himself against the fierce pull of the retreating sea, +striving to drag him back again. + +Though almost unconscious, Jim clung to the saddle with his body +half-drooping over the pommel. Then Caliente plunged blindly forward +until he stood with head bent down and nose almost touching the sand, +his great sides heaving, but safe at last. + +In the distance, a horseman could be seen coming at full gallop along +the straight line of the beach. It was Jo, who finally had become +frightened by the non-appearance of his two comrades and had turned +back. His fright had been increased by seeing a horse and rider coming +apparently out of the sea. + +When he came up, he found his brother Jim sitting on the sand still half +dazed but slowly coming to himself. + +"Where's the Senor, Jim?" cried Jo. This question served to bring Jim +completely to himself. He got up, looking pale, with one side of his +face bruised to a real blackness, and the flesh of his left hand badly +torn, where it had struck the cliff, but he was not thinking of these +matters. + +"Why, Jo, the Senor came after me. Where is he?" Then it came over him +all at once, that his companion was even now caught between the jaws of +the black cliff. + +"We must get to him, Jo," he cried. + +"But how did you ever get around that cliff?" asked Jo. + +Already it was an awesome sight as the waves crashed in foam against its +front and rushed shoreward along its black sides. It seemed impossible +that only fifteen minutes before Jim had actually come around that +foaming headland. + +In reply to Jo's question, Jim threw his arms around Caliente's neck +with warm affection. + +"This is the old fellow that pulled me through," he cried. "But we must +go to the help of our Spanish friend." + +"How can we?" inquired Jo. "We can't get around the headland unless we +become fishes." + +Jim considered the problem carefully. One thing he was determined on and +that was not to leave the Spaniard who had been so hospitable and +helpful to them. + +"No, we can't go around by the headland," he determined, "but we might +be able to find a way over the rocks and down on the other side." + +"All right, I'm ready." + +"Let's find a place for Caliente first," advised his owner. Back a short +distance from the beach there were some trees on a lower spur of the +mountain. Here Jim brought Caliente and took off the saddle and bridle. + +"Now make yourself comfortable," said Jim. + +Caliente, in seeming recognition of what was said, took immediate +advantage of the invitation and rolled heartily in a dry and dusty spot. + +"Get your lasso, Jo," urged Jim, "and we will start." + +So together they made for the steep rock and soon reached the base of +it, and now began a hard climb, but no more difficult than they had +encountered before in their travels. + +"Do you recollect, Jim," inquired Jo, "that day you got stalled in our +first canyon in Colorado, when you tried to imitate an eagle and fly up +a precipitous cliff and we had to get you down?" + +"Oh, yes, I remember," replied Jim, "and how I scared you and Tom by +pretending that an Injun was after me, when I went down to the creek for +water." + +"Poor Tom," said Jo sadly, "I wonder when we will see him again." + +"In a couple of days," stoutly declared the optimistic Jim. + +They were now going up the face of the cliff, the lariats over their +shoulders, and searching with careful feet for a foothold, while their +hands clutched some piece of projecting rock. + +"Lucky this rock isn't rotten," cried Jo, "or we would find ourselves +stuck headfirst in the sand below." + +"Like an ostrich," said Jim. "We couldn't do much in a place like this +without our moccasins, that's certain." + +The moccasins did make them nimble as goats, and they not only made +possible a secure hold, but they protected as well the feet. At first +they were not in any grave danger of a fall because the drifted sand at +the bottom of the cliff would have made a soft landing. But after a +while they were forced to work their way out over the rushing water, +then if they had slipped and fallen it would have been all up with them. + +It seemed as if the sea, furious at having lost Jim a short while ago, +was making fierce efforts to get at them now. The great waves foamed +against the cliff and the spray dashed over the boys, making the +surface of the rock treacherous and slippery. + +"I can't bear to look down," said Jo. "It makes me dizzy." + +"Look up, then," Jim called back. + +"That's almost as bad," replied Jo. + +"Keep 'em shut then," was Jim's command. + +Finally they came to a place that stopped Jo entirely. Jim was able to +get over it, because of his superior height and reach, and he attained a +point of safety above Jo. + +"What am I going to do now?" cried Jo. "I can't go any higher and it is +impossible for me to go back." + +"You wait," urged Jim, "till I get a secure foothold above here." + +"Oh, I'll wait," said Jo grimly, "you don't observe any anxiety on my +part to move, do you?" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI + +TWO LASSOES + + +Finally Jim reached a broad ledge, that gave him an excellent foothold, +and he got his lariat ready and dangled the loop under Jo's nose. + +"What are you going to hang me for?" inquired Jo. + +"For a horse thief, I reckon," replied Jim, "that bay don't belong to +you does it, Mister?" + +"Meaning this ocean bay?" queried Jo. + +"I certainly will hang you for that," retorted Jim, "Now get the loop +under your armpits." + +"All ready," cried Jo. + +Then Jim, bracing himself, kept a taut line on his brother, and with +this help he was able quite easily to get over the slippery, bare belt +of rock, and in a few moments was safe with Jim on the ledge. + +"It won't take us long now," said Jo, "to get to the other side." + +"Let's give him a yell," suggested Jim, "to let him know that we are +coming." + +Then Jim put his hands to his lips and cried: + +"Senor, ahoy." They listened breathlessly and in a few moments came a +faint reply. This put renewed energy into the boys and as the way was +now easier, they leaped ahead, agile as goats, and had soon reached the +top of the cliff. They looked eagerly down. + +There was the deep short semi-circle of the little bay with the waves +heaving in against the cliffs and at the point midway between the two +head-lands, where the beach was highest, they saw the Spaniard on Don +Fernando. Already the encroaching waves were gnawing at them. + +It was only a question of minutes now, and horse and rider would be +carried out to sea. The Spaniard sat like a statute. It was seemingly +possible for him to have made his escape up the cliffs, which were not +overly precipitous, like those Jim and Jo had just scaled, but he was a +fatalist and believed that his day had come. Perhaps he did not want to +abandon his horse, in which his pride was centered. + +"Cheer up, Senor, we'll be there," yelled Jim. + +Then followed by Jo, he sprang forward, leaping from rock to rock, and +from jutting point to opportune foothold. It was dangerous and daring +work, but the life of their friend was at stake and the boys were not +the kind to consider their own safety at such a time. + +It was only their sure-footedness and varied experience in climbing that +saved them from broken limbs or possible death. In a remarkably short +time, they stood upon a ledge above the Spaniard. + +"Here, Senor," yelled Jim, "catch the rope." + +He did as ordered but called up, "Is there no way to save my horse?" + +Jim considered a moment, then shouted: "All right, yes, we will save +your horse, too. Tie the ends of the lasso to the iron rings at the ends +of the front cinch." This was a broad, strong band, which would furnish +a good purchase, when Jim tossed down the lariat. The Spaniard caught it +and made it fast as ordered. + +"Now, fasten this under your arms," ordered Jim, as he cast down the +second lariat, which belonged to Jo. They then drew up the Spaniard to +safety and he appeared to be pleased in a quiet way but not at all +enthusiastic. + +"I am your eternal debtor, Senors," he said with a courteous bow. + +"How was it you did not follow me, Senor?" questioned Jim, "when I +sailed around the headland?" + +"Don Fernando balked," replied the Senor. "I thought, too, that you had +been drowned." + +"Came near it," replied Jim. "I would, too, if it had not been for +Caliente." + +"But my poor Fernando, he will be drowned," cried the Spaniard, now much +more excited about the safety of his steed than he had been for his own. +It did look rather bad for the big chestnut, as a large wave swelling +in, almost took him off his feet. He began to neigh wildly. + +"Don't worry, Don, old boy," cried Jim to the frightened horse. "If you +will help yourself." There was something in his voice that seemed to +reassure the animal. + +"Now, Jo, we will let you down by the lariat and get the bridle reins +over his head and help him get a foothold on that ledge below us. He +will be safe enough there, even if he does get somewhat damp." + +"Let me go. It is my risk for my horse," urged the Spaniard. + +"It is no risk, Senor," replied Jim. "You are heavier than my brother +and stronger and can do more good on this ledge with me." + +"The commands of the General!" said the Spaniard with a low bow. "I see +your plan is good." + +"We will tie this end of the lasso to the tree," said Jim, "so you will +feel perfectly safe, Jo." + +The tree referred to was a sturdy, gnarled cedar, growing on the ledge. +Then Jim swung his brother off and with every confidence in the strength +of the lariat to hold, Jo made his way quickly and safely down, while if +he had been without the rope he would have doubtless fallen into the +water below. + +A wave surged in, submerging him, and then started triumphantly to carry +him out to sea, but when the lariat pulled taut Jo struggled safely back +on the rock, while the wave went grumbling back. + +"Catch the bridle now, Jo," urged Jim. "Don't waste any more time +swimming." + +Thus adjured, Jo grabbed the bridle reins and pulled them over Don +Fernando's head, and braced himself on the rock above. All was ready +now, and the two above held the loop of the lasso that had been tied at +the cinch, with both hands, and they pulled together. Again a big wave +swelled in towards the cliff, which gave the frightened horse a big +boost. + +Then, with Jim and the Spaniard pulling mightily from the ledge above, +and Jo giving the big chestnut a purchase by a steady pull upon his +bridle, the horse scrambled with a mighty clatter and all his frightened +energy up the sloping rock. The lariat and Jo's work helped a whole lot. +Without the three, he would never have made it. + +Before the next wave swept in, Don Fernando stood, trembling and +dripping, but safe, upon the lower ledge. He seemed above the danger +point now, though an unusually big wave welled up around the horse's +fetlocks and the spray was continually dashing upwards. + +"He is all right now," cried Jim, "better come up, Jo, where it is +dryer." + +"Haul in then," replied Jo, and then he was landed safely on the ledge. + +"Caught a speckled trout," exclaimed Jim in happy humor again. + +"Referring to my freckles, I suppose," grinned Jo. "If I'm a fish, I +reckon Don Fernando is a whale." + +"Do you suppose he is safe?" inquired the Spaniard anxiously. + +"Who, Jo?" + +"Ah, no," said the Spaniard smilingly. "I mean the Don. The water seems +to be rising." + +"You may rest assured that he is safe," replied Jim. "It is the turn of +the tide now, and it is only a westerly wind that makes it appear +higher. All we will have to do now is to wait." + +"It is a great pity, this delay," said the Spaniard warmly. "You are +anxious to be on to the rescue of your brother and his friend. Anyway, I +hope you will succeed as well in their case as you did in mine." + +"In another hour we will be able to start," said Jim, "the tide will +then commence to run out." + +"Where shall we stop tonight?" inquired Jo. + +"Camp in the open as usual," replied Jim. + +"I hope we will get up above the sea so high that it won't come within a +mile of us," said Jo, fervently. + +"As to a place to stop, I will see to that," said the Spaniard. "Do not +give yourselves any uneasiness on that score." + +"It's getting kind of chilly roosting up here," remarked Jo, +plaintively, "especially as the fog is coming in." + +"I'll warm you," said Jim. "Put up your Dukes." + +"You'll take the counts if I put up my Dukes," said Jo, who was an +inveterate punnist. + +"Shut up," yelled Jim, giving his brother a hearty chug in the chest. +Then they went at it hammer and tongs, giving and receiving good hard +blows, and after ten minutes of whaling at each other, both were plenty +warm. The Spaniard looked on in mild wonder. + +"You Americans love the hard exercise," he said. "I should think you +would have great pleasure in resting awhile." + +"I got the best of the bout," declared Jo. "See how black and blue your +face is on this side." + +"You didn't do that," protested Jim. "That was a wallop that old Neptune +handed me when he bumped my head against yonder cliff." + +"Neptune! Yonder cliff!" jeered Jo. "You ought to be a story writer and +use fine words." + +"Me a story writer!" growled Jim. "I ain't got so low as that, not so +long as I have got two hands to steal chickens with." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII + +ANOTHER FRIEND + + +"Do you not think, Senor Darlington, that it is now safe to start?" +inquired the Spaniard, who was fearful of bloodshed, not quite +understanding the boys. + +"Certainly," responded Jim, "we will get Don Fernando down from his +perch and proceed." + +This proved to be an easier task than getting him up. His master lowered +by the rope to his side, one scrambling leap and the horse was on the +firm wet sand of the beach, almost knocking his master over in his +eagerness to be on safe footing again. Don Sebastian now showed the gay +side of his nature, as he vaulted into the saddle. + +He swung his hat wildly, the blood mounting to his face, and the horse +seemed to feel the sting and excitement of his master's mood, as he +pranced, danced and caracoled upon the sand and ended up by bowing in +unison with his master to the two American lads, who were looking on +with interest and amusement. + +Then the party made their way quickly along the curve of the beach and +went around the fateful headland with perfect safety, while quite a +distance out among the hidden rocks snarled the defeated ocean. Then +Caliente heard them coming and he quickly raised his head, neighing in +welcome to Jim and his comrade, Don Fernando. + +Jim gave him a vigorous hug for more than ever he was fond of his +faithful horse. In a few minutes he had him saddled and away the three +horsemen thudded in a swift gallop down the beach. The horses fairly +flew, the wind of their speed tossing their manes back. It was cool +beneath the fog laden sky and the refreshing sea air seemed to give the +horses tireless endurance. + +Soon three miles had spun backwards under their hoofs and the boys were +filled with the joyous excitement of the run. It seemed now that every +stride of the horses was bringing them nearer to the hoped-for rescue of +Tom and Juarez. And this was an incentive to their energy. + +"Here, friends, is where we branch off from the beach," cried the +Spaniard. + +Then he turned his horse to the left and headed straight for a wooded +spur that extended from the range to the shore. In a short time the +three came to a well-traveled trail and were soon riding through the +semi-dusk of the woods. For two miles they went up a steady grade. + +Then they rounded the summit of the wooded ridge and saw stretching far +below them in the indistinct dusk, a wide plain bounded on the West by +the blue darkness of the level sea with its rim of yellow sand. + +"We will soon be at the home of my friend, Senor Valdez," said the +Spaniard, "where we will spend the night." + +"I'm a lovely looking object to present itself in a civilized home," +protested Jim, "I look like a tough who has been in a bar-room rush." + +"You are my brave friend," said Senor Sebastian, quietly, "and will be +welcome." + +Jim blushed, at least one side of his face did, the other was already +too deeply colored to show any emotion, and he grinned sheepishly. +Before he had time to reply they swept into an open driveway, carefully +sanded, and drew rein in front of a long, low white adobe house, that +from its mountain terrace looked over Plain and Sea. + +Out came Senor Valdez to receive them, a stately Spaniard, who furnished +the boys with an ideal of perfect courtesy ever after. To the end of +their days they remembered their first visit to the home of Senor +Valdez. How they did enjoy their dinner that evening in the long, +pleasantly lighted dining-room. + +It was an excellent meal, with delicious soup, a salad garnished with +peppers of the Spanish style, and garlic. Jim and Jo had never tasted +anything equal to it. Besides there were frijoles and lamb, while the +dessert was some slight and delicate confection of jelly and cream, made +by the hands of the Senora Valdez. + +"I feel wicked sitting here and eating this fine meal," said Jo, +addressing Jim in a low voice, "when Tom and Juarez are being ill used +and probably starved." + +"Well," replied Jim, who was always practical, "I think it is better to +eat, and to keep my strength up." + +"I guess it won't fail," commented Jo slyly. + +The boys bore themselves well, and without any diffidence though Jim had +a whimsical recollection of his bruised side face and blackened eye, and +he tried to keep it turned from the Senora Valdez, the fragile little +woman who sat at the end of the table opposite her husband. She had snow +white hair, parted low over her ears and the pallid face was lined with +years. Very gentle was the Senora Valdez, but she had in her time beheld +scenes of carnage and terror, so Jim need not have worried about his +bruised face. But the wise old lady noticed his solicitude and +understanding, was the more gracious to the young Americano because of +it. + +That evening they sat on the piazza, that looked out towards the sea, +the Spaniards smoking and Jim and Jo enjoying the music of a guitar +played by a Mexican in a dim corner of the verandah and the boys heard a +bit of important news. + +"There was a mysterious ship put into shore several miles South of here, +late last night, Senor," said their host, "one of my shepherds brought +me word." + +"The first scent of the trail," cried Jim eagerly. Then the Senor +Sebastian explained to his friend more fully the objects of their +search. Immediately the listener was deeply interested. Then he sent for +an Indian, one of his trusted men, to come to him, and gave him minute +instructions about some matters. Without a word the Indian turned and +disappeared in the darkness, and in a short time there came the sound of +a horse galloping full speed down the road. + +"Tomorrow, Senor Darlington, this Indian will meet you at a point near +the Puebla de los Angeles, which my friend knows and he will have all +the information there is obtainable as to the location of this ship and +its crew," thus spoke the Senor Valdez. Jim thanked him with deep fervor +for his unusual kindness, but the Spaniard made light of it. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + +A TALE OF YORE + + +As they sat there in the dusk of the verandah, Jim would have liked to +ask his host to relate some of his experiences in southern California +for he felt sure that the Senor Valdez had known something of adventure +not only because those early days were full of marvels of interest, but +there was something in the bearing of the old Spaniard that spoke of +former days of romance and of stirring incidents. + +Then, too, there was something in the after-dinner content and quiet, +following the perilous adventure which they had been through that +predisposed the boys to listen to a good story of adventure. Their +friend, the Senor Sebastian, seemed to divine what was passing through +Jim's mind, for he suddenly spoke, breaking the meditative spell that +had fallen upon the group on the piazza. + +"It just occurred to me, Senor Valdez, that our friends here might like +to hear something of the early days in this part of the country, for you +of all men know it thoroughly and I am sure it would interest them." + +"Indeed, it would, Senor," cried Jim enthusiastically, "it was in my +mind to ask Senor Valdez to tell us of the early days but I was afraid +to impose upon him." + +"I feel greatly honored to think that you young men would care to hear +anything my poor tongue could relate. It would hardly be worth your +distinguished attention." Jim made due allowance for the courteous +exaggeration characteristic of the Spaniard. + +"Try us, Senor," he said briefly, "we would want nothing better." + +"I will have the coffee brought first," replied the Senor, "that may +serve to stimulate my dull imagination." + +In a short time a softly moving servant brought out a tray of coffee +cups, and placed one before each guest on a small wicker table. Jim +noticed these cups with immediate interest. They were certainly +beautiful and he had never seen anything like them before. They were of +a wonderful blue, each one, and had a coat of arms in gold with raised +figures on it; a scroll above with a Latin motto, and beneath the +representation of a wild animal couchant. The Senor Valdez was quick to +see Jim's interest and respond to it. "That is the coat of arms of my +family," he explained. + +"I am not a scholar, Senor," said Jim, "and all I can make of the motto +is that it has something to do with a lion." + +"You are quite right," the ghost of a smile hovered around the +white-fringed lips of the Spaniard, at Jim's innate boyishness. + +"That figure does not look exactly like a lion," remarked Jo frankly. + +"Not like an African lion certainly," replied the Spaniard, "but a lion +nevertheless, such as one finds yet in the mountain fastnesses of Spain, +something like a panther only larger and much more fierce." + +"The lion seems to have a rope or chain around his neck," commented Jim, +"and fastened to a collar." + +"Quite so," responded the Spaniard, "likewise the motto translated +reads, 'Gentle as a Lion.'" + +"Rather strange way of putting it," said Jim curiously. + +"I will explain, for you would naturally be puzzled by the phrase, +'Gentle as a Lion,' as it seems to contradict common knowledge," said +Senor Valdez. "You see my family has the distinction, if such it can be +called, in these modern days, the distinction of being old. This +coat-of-arms dates back to the eleventh century." + +Jo was about to give a prolonged whistle of surprise when Jim gripped +his knee to enforce silence, for though Jo might mean all right, the +Spaniard might not understand. + +"The founder of the family who flourished at that time was a rather +rugged character, and I am afraid would regard the family +representatives of this day as very puny and unworthy specimens. This +Rodriquez de Valdez had his castle in a rugged mountainous part of +Spain, where there were plenty of wild animals and of wilder and fiercer +men, bandits and free-booters without number. + +"His castle was a very powerful one, not only in construction but +likewise in location, as it was built on a shelf of rock above a deep +chasm, with precipitous cliffs behind it. However, Rodriquez de Valdez +spent but very little time behind the protection of its powerful walls. +It would take the forces of some strong Duke from the lowland to cause +him to seek the shelter of his castle and to raise his war banner of +crimson with a blue cross upon it, above the turret. + +"He spent his days hunting among the mountains for wild beasts or for +marauding bands of lawless men. Rodriquez was a man of wonderful +strength, even for those days, when there were giants in the land. In +stature six feet five and powerful in proportion and likewise very fleet +of foot. If I should tell you of some of the legends of his strength and +swiftness, you would probably laugh. + +"But the one that has to do with the coat-of-arms of my family I will +tell you. It chanced one day that he was out in the wilds of the +mountains and quite alone. Intent upon the trail of a deer that he was +following along a shelving mountain side, he did not see a lion half +grown, but nevertheless very dangerous, which was crouching on the +branch of a tree ready to spring upon him when he got beneath it. + +"When he had passed by under the tree a pace or two, the lion sprang +with distended claws. Some instinct of danger made Rodriquez turn and he +was just in time to grapple with the brute, clutching it by the throat. +The lion had some advantage in weight but not a great deal, for my brave +ancestor was probably three hundred pounds of sinew, bone and muscle. So +that the struggle was not such an unequal one, but it was terrific while +it did last. Finally, though torn and bleeding, the man subdued the +beast, and had it in abject fear of him. + +"Then instead of killing the lion as one would naturally expect, +Rodriquez took a strange humorous notion into his head. He would make a +pet of this same lion and it should be his dog to follow obediently at +its master's heels wherever he went. This idea he carried out and he +even had a heavy brass collar placed upon its neck, and it followed him +on all his trips, slouching with padded tread at his heel, or behind his +war horse as he rode abroad, like a powerful yellow dog. + +"I do not imagine that the beast ever had any great amount of affection +for his master, but he no doubt was in great fear of him, which seemed +to answer the purpose quite as well. So, my friends, you have a full and +complete explanation of the coat-of-arms of my family. My only fear is +that I have wearied you with what could not have the same interest for +you as it does for me." + +"Indeed, you have not wearied us, Senor," exclaimed Jo enthusiastically. + +"That is one of the most interesting accounts that I have ever listened +to," said Jim. "I only wish I could have lived in those days when there +was plenty of adventure." + +"I do not think that you have any reason to complain," remarked the +Spaniard laughingly. "Perhaps your descendants in future years will be +pointing out your daring deeds as emblazoned on their coat-of-arms." + +"No danger of that, I guess," laughed Jim, "though they might have a +picture of Jo and me tied to a mule. That was the way old Captain Broom +treated us." The Spaniard joined in the merriment at this unheroic +representation of Jo and Jim. + +"Now, Senor Valdez, you have told us a tale of old Spain, tell us +something of new Spain here in California," urged Jo. + +"It seems to me that it is now someone else's turn," said the Senor. "I +would not do all the talking. A host should sometimes listen. Perhaps +Senor Darlington will tell us of some of his experiences. They will be +much more stirring than any musty tales of mine." But Jim shook his head +firmly, not to say obstinately. + +"I would not think of telling our adventures," he replied. "Perhaps +after we have travelled more, we will have something worth while +relating." + +"That's right," said Jo, "we would much rather listen to you, Senor." + +The Senor Valdez sipped slowly at his coffee, looking out into the +semi-darkness beyond the verandah, where over the plain below stretched +the gray blanket of the fog-clouds. Then he rolled another cigarette, +lit it and took a few meditative puffs. The Senor now began his next +story at a peculiar angle, and did not commence with the stereotyped +form of "once upon a time," so dear to the days of one's childhood. + +"I see you do not take cream in your coffee," he said addressing Jim. + +"No, but I like some sugar, not too much." + +"It has seemed to me," said the Spaniard, "that the seasoning of coffee +is in a way an indication of character." + +"Where the party uses milk in his coffee that indicates weakness, does +it not, Senor?" inquired Jim with a sly look at Jo, but the subtle +Spaniard was not to be trapped. + +"Not necessarily," he replied, "only mildness." + +"And when it is taken straight and black that means a strong character," +remarked Jo. + +"You have stated it," replied the Spaniard. + +"But I would like to know how I would be sized up?" questioned Jim, "you +see I use a little sugar." + +"My friend," said the Spaniard with playful earnestness, putting his +hand lightly on Jim's knee, "that shows a character of great strength, +tempered with mercy and human kindness. All of which leads one to speak +of a man who was once famous in this part of the country, but not +popular. He always had the reputation for taking a strong liquor in his +coffee, Fernet, if I remember right. His name was Alverado, but I judge +that you are not acquainted with it." + +"No," replied Jim, "but I should say that he was a very fierce +character." + +"He was. He was a bandit." + +"I thought so," agreed Jim. + +"This Don Alverado came from a well known Spanish family, of ancient +lineage, but impoverished fortune. He was such a wild and unruly blade +that his family were decidedly relieved when he left Spain and came to +the new world to mend his fortune, if not his ways. He landed first in +Mexico, and after a series of more or less remarkable adventures, he +came to this part of California. I knew him, or rather I knew of his +family in Spain, and for their sake I made him welcome here at my home. + +"He was really a charming fellow in manner and appearance, tall, slight, +with dark eyes and hair, a typical cavalier. But the graces of his +manner did not reach down to his heart, and after a disagreeable episode +which I need not revive here, he left my rancho never to return except +as an enemy. I heard nothing further of him after his departure for +some six months. My next introduction to him was an unpleasant one. + +"It consisted in the loss of a band of horses and a herd of cattle which +were driven off by a gang of raiders, thirteen in number, at the head of +which was this fellow Alverado. His depredations went on for years among +the ranchmen in this part of California. So resourceful and crafty was +this desperado that he evaded trap after trap laid for his capture. + +"He had several very close calls and there were numerous battles between +the outlaws and the ranch owners, but though some of his men were shot, +he seemed to bear a charmed life. I remember one running fight over the +plain yonder, when, believing me to be absent from home, as I had been, +but returned unexpectedly from the north, this Alverado and his gang +made a bold dash to capture some horses from a field directly below the +house. + +"It did not take long to get my men together and I gave the bandits a +surprise indeed. Nothing but the speed of Alverado's horse, a splendid +black stallion, saved him from capture. We got several of his men +however. At last there came the turning of the lane. Through the +treachery of one of the band we found that their rendezvous was at the +head of a small canyon in a range of foot-hills several miles south of +here. + +"You will go through it tomorrow on your way south, if you carry out +your speed schedule, which with your remarkable horses you ought to be +able to. We came upon the gang about noon, where they were resting after +a long chase. In a corral near by were a number of stolen stock. They +were not expecting trouble of any kind. Some were playing cards, a few +cooking, most, however, were enjoying the siesta, their leader among the +number lay under the shadow of a tree, his head resting on a saddle, +sound asleep. + +"There were fifty of us, and we had them surrounded, so that there was +no chance of escape. Alverado himself made a desperate dash, but the +cordon was too strong. The rest surrendered. That afternoon we took the +bunch to the lower end of the canyon, where there was a giant sycamore +tree. There we hanged the whole thirteen, and by them no more were +troubled not even by their ghosts." + +Jim and Jo expressed their appreciation of their host's kindness in +entertaining them as he truly had done in relating his tales. Then they +said good night and went to their room. + +That night the boys slept in a comfortable bed in a quaint old bedroom +with roses nodding in at the half open casement windows. By the light of +the candles they could see the strange old and carved furniture and +tired as they were how they did sleep. + +The next morning they started hours before daylight. "I will be prepared +to welcome more of you in a few days," said the Senor Valdez, and the +boys thanked him heartily. Promising to return soon they galloped away +through the darkness. + +All day they rode, hardly drawing rein at all. At first through the +foot-hills and then over the wide plains. Jo had a fresh horse, a +powerful black, as his other mount could not stand the strain of the +long trip that meant three score and ten of miles before evening. + +Early in the afternoon they left the plain and rode into the deep and +rugged gorges of a mountain chain, running East and West. Thence into a +broad valley leading South-easterly, and about four P. M. they turned +directly South entering a Pass in the Southern side of the valley, from +which they emerged on a plain. Where the trail left the Pass stood a +large sycamore tree, when they reached it, the Indian messenger rose +from its shelter. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX + +A WONDERFUL LEAP + + +Now without hesitation we must take up the fortunes or rather +misfortunes of Tom and Juarez as they landed in the darkness upon the +mysterious island, for our narrative presses to its conclusion. Never +did they feel more hopeless than on this occasion, when they were going +to a dubious and uncertain fate. + +"You boys come with me," called the Captain gruffly. + +"How about me, Cap'n?" asked Jeems Howell, the lanky shepherd. + +"What's your business?" inquired Captain Broom briefly. + +"Looking after the sheeps." + +"Then attend to it," said the Captain grimly. + +"Certainly, Cap'n," replied the shepherd, who was incapable of taking +offense. + +"You come, Jake," called the Captain, to one of the sailors, "and be +quick about it, we haven't much time." Tom shivered, for in the gloom +and tired as he was he felt that his time too was short. + +Then with the Captain in the lead, carrying a lantern, which was muffled +in his great coat, they started, the sailor bringing up the rear. + +"Look out sharp, that these lads don't spring something on you, Jake. +They are a bad lot." + +"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor, "they'll have to be quick to get +the jump on me, sir." + +"It's the Injun one's the worst. Don't let him scalp you," warned the +Captain jocosely. + +"I'm no Indian," said Juarez, hoarsely and utterly reckless of his fate, +"I'm an American, and was proud of it, till I found you were one, you +cursed yankee barnacle." + +"Ho, ho, lad!" roared the Captain, "you won't talk so tall in a few +minutes. Nothing like a slow fire for stewing the nonsense out of a +fresh kid." + +"How far is this cave of yours, you are taking us to, old salt horse?" +said Juarez insolently, and utterly unwise. + +This was too much for Captain Broom, and with an imprecation he turned +to strike Juarez. This was what Juarez was looking for and as the +furious Skipper whirled facing him, Juarez dodged his huge fist, and +sent a fierce hook to the Captain's jaw. There was anger, desperation +and strength behind that blow and the Captain fell, striking his head on +a rock. That time the Frontier Boys scored. + +"Follow me, Tom," yelled Juarez, and he sprang away through the +darkness. It seemed like a hopeless undertaking to make an escape with +the sea on one side and the cliffs on the other, and a desperate enemy +near at hand. But Juarez thought it was best to take a chance. Anything +was better than captivity, that was seemingly just ahead of them. + +One thing he was determined on and that was, that he would not be taken +alive. He ran splashing through the water, leaping rocks, with the two +sailors in fast pursuit. Not far ahead to the right was the white dash +of the breakers that shut off escape in that direction, to the left was +the cliffs. + +Then before him rose a steep but not precipitous rock that had been +divided from the main cliff by the action of the water. Instantly Juarez +abandoned his desperate plan of plunging into the sea, and without +lessening his speed, he sprang up the rock, in his moccasined feet. + +The sailor who was following most closely, got up ten feet when he +slipped and rolled violently to the bottom, knocking down the one who +came after. Once Juarez came near falling but he caught himself, and +kept going up, driven by a desperation that seemed to carry him over +every obstacle. + +"We've got yer, ye little shrimp," exultantly cried the sailors at the +base of the rock, "Ye can't get away unless you fly." + +"Shoot the blasted little varmint," roared the Captain, who, still +dizzy, had struggled to his feet. In obedience to the order a flash +punctured the darkness and there was a roar like artillery echoing among +the hollow cliffs. A slug of lead whistled past Juarez's head. + +The boy had now reached the top of the rock and was at the crisis of his +fate, a distance of ten feet separated him from the main cliff, not an +impossible jump but the foothold was precarious and uncertain, and fifty +feet or more below were the jagged rocks, and enemies equally as hard, +but Juarez did not hesitate. + +He dodged down just as the sailors fired another shot, then he sprang to +the narrow pinnacle of the rock and bending slightly forward with bent +knees and swinging hand, poised for the leap. + +"The condemned fool is going to jump," roared the Captain. "Shoot him on +the wing." + +But the sailors were not ready and the skipper ran between the rock and +the cliff to be at hand to stamp the life out of Juarez when he should +fall as he knew he would. Then he leaped, a dark object flying through +space, his hands caught the edge of the cliff, the roots of a small bush +held him for a moment, then he slipped. Below him was certain death. + +Two strong hands caught his arms, and he was drawn in safety to the +cliff above. The Captain and the two sailors watched in open mouthed +wonder, all they could see was the dim figure of Juarez crawl in safety +over the top of the cliff, but they could not determine the means of his +escape. + +It struck a superstitious chord in their natures and the skipper became +moody and silent. + +Juarez breathlessly followed the lanky figure of the shepherd through +the darkness, for it was no other who had extended the rescuing hand. +Hardly a word was spoken, and they started off. After going a +considerable distance they came to a slab hut built at the foot of a +high range of hills that formed the backbone of the island. + +Two shepherd dogs rushed forth and gave their master a boisterous +welcome, and were soon good friends with Juarez. Everything in the hut +was neat; with Indian rugs on the floor which gave a warm touch of +color to the interior and one side of the hut was lined with books. + +"What am I thinking of," suddenly cried Juarez in dismay, "to leave Tom +in the hands of that crew? My head is wrong." With that, he grew pale +and slid unconscious to the floor. He had evidently not recovered from +the blow that the Mexican had dealt him a few days before, and the +strain he had been under brought on a relapse. The shepherd worked over +him a long time before he finally brought him around. + +Meanwhile what had become of Tom? He had not been quick enough to make +his escape, and his fate was in the balance when the Skipper came up to +him just after Juarez had disappeared over the cliff. + +"You don't get away, I promise you that, lad," growled the Captain. +Roughly seizing the boy by the shoulder he dragged him toward the cliff. +Then the two disappeared into the entrance of a cave, the Captain still +holding in one hand his battered leather satchel. + +The sailor who stood on guard at the entrance, saw just then the lights +of a steamer that was just entering the channel and he rushed into the +cave, called to the Captain, and in a few minutes that worthy appeared. +If he felt any alarm he showed none, but without any loss of time he +assembled his crew, got his boat free of land and rowed silently out to +sea. Whatever he had intended to do with Tom, evidently passed from his +mind, now awakened to the solution of some other problem. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX + +IN THE STRAIT + + +As Juarez and Tom were under the kindly escort of Captain Broom and his +sailors in the whale boat on their cruise to the mysterious island, Jo, +Jim and the Spaniard had stopped at an old sycamore tree, where, as had +been promised, the Indian messenger was awaiting their coming. + +"What news, Yaquis?" asked the Spaniard, who knew the Indian well. + +"I saw the boat by my own eyes," he replied, "heading for the Big +Island," pointing to the South. "By her smoke she stopped in the Bow +Harbor near the lower end." So spoke the Indian, standing straight and +tall. He was a picturesque sight with his coarse, black hair cut square +and long. + +"The trail is getting warm," exclaimed Jim eagerly. "Where can we get a +boat?" + +"There is a small boat at the Harbor of San Pedro," replied the +Spaniard, "that is the property of a friend of mine. I doubt not we can +have the use of it." + +"It is now a little after six," said Jim. "How far is it to the Harbor?" + +"A dozen miles," replied the Indian. + +"Is your horse too tired, Senor Sebastian, to make it by eight?" The +Spaniard's eyes flashed. + +"Senor, Don Fernando is never tired. Let us start." + +"We are ready," replied Jim. "Which is the shortest cut?" + +"I will guide you," was the Indian's response. + +"He knows this country like the foot does the shoe," assured the +Spaniard. + +Without more ado, the new guide took the lead and they rode at a rapid +gait in single file. At first they went down a gentle grade for several +miles until they came to a perfectly level plain that stretched in three +directions to the sea. At the end of the land was a perfectly rounded +rise like a huge long bolster. + +The party of rescuers left the Puebla de los Angeles several miles to +the East, taking the shortest way to the harbor. There was no let-up to +the speed, if anything, they seemed to be going faster, with sweaty +sides and shoulders, but with unaffected stamina. The going was fine, +over a springy turf and sometimes they tore through wide belts of tall +mustard. + +Jo and Jim were in fine fettle as the end of the journey came in sight +and there was promise of their coming to close quarters with the pirates +and possibly rescuing their oppressed brothers from captivity. Then, +too, the passage of the strait in an open boat appealed to their sense +of adventure. + +About eight o'clock, they came to a ranch two miles from the harbor, +where Senor Sebastian had a short talk with a man who owned the small +boat that had been referred to. He was perfectly willing to lend them +the boat and also sent a Mexican servant to bring back their horses and +put them up in his stables. Not forgetting to thank him for his great +kindness to them, the boys turned their horses' heads for the harbor, +the last lap of their long journey had begun. + +In a half hour, they stood on the shore of a long, narrow inlet, at a +point where a craft was moored. From a small boat-house, they got the +oars, the mast and the sail to be used if the wind was right. Then they +were ready to get aboard. Jim looked at his watch. "It lacks ten minutes +of nine," he said. + +Then they embarked. The boat was not a mere row-boat, but was found to +be of good size and about equal to a whale boat. It was staunch, too, +and sea worthy. The mooring was cast off. Jim was at the bow oar, and Jo +at the one back of him on the other side, while the Indian, Yaquis, +steered. The tide favored them as they glided quickly between the banks, +and they were not long in reaching the channel. + +At first, there was a slow, heavy swell, while in the lee of the land, +that did not bother the boys but within a half hour they were in a +choppy sea with breaking crests, and now the real work for Jo and Jim +began. Fortunately, the Indian was a most skillful oar, and he kept them +from being swamped. As yet there was no breeze to help them. + +"This is almost as good as running the Rapids in the Grand Canyon," +cried Jim joyously. + +The boys were in fine fettle for their work, notwithstanding their long +day in the saddle, and they buckled to it with a will, although wet +through with flying spray. They had enjoyed a good rest the night before +and after their long ride they were glad to get the kinks out of their +muscles. They really made remarkably good headway against the sea and +the stoical Indian grunted approval of their work. Ah, but it was fine, +battling with the waves through the darkness, while the boat thrashed +and beat its way ahead. + +The boys stood to their oars and put all the strength of their lithe +young bodies into the stroke and they seemed tireless. The Spaniard had +made himself comfortable in the bow, where, sheltered by a short +overhead deck, he was soon fast asleep. + +"Wake me when it is time to be drowned," he said. "I know it is my +fate." Jim remembered the Spaniard's melancholy of the day before, and +laughed heartily, as he promised. + +"There are the lights of a vessel," cried Yaquis, who, though silent, +was ever on the watch. "Ahead of us to the Southwest." + +"You are right," said Jim. The lights were like two faint, moving stars, +one aloft and the other below. + +"That isn't the Pirate ship," declared Jo. "She wouldn't be showing any +light." After a while, the lights of the vessel were suddenly eclipsed, +but by the dull light of the moon, now risen, the vessel's bulk could +still be made out. + +"She has gone into the further straits," said Yaquis, "between the two +islands." + +A gentle breeze sprang up, but blowing directly toward them, it lent no +aid. Before midnight, the westerly breeze had died absolutely down, and +in a not very long time, the sea followed suit, leaving a long swell and +the rowing became much easier. Nothing occurred to break the monotony +for a while. There was the steady grinding of the oars in the row-locks +and the lapping of the waves in the gloom, for the moon was now obscured +by clouds. Then, of a sudden, the Indian called a halt. + +"Do you hear footsteps?" inquired Jim, jocosely. + +"A steamer coming, I hear her, no lights. Pull hard." In a minute, even +the boys could hear the beat of her engines and saw the occasional flare +from her stacks, then a dark form took shape through the night. They +pulled lustily for they knew their danger and who it was. How quickly +they would be run down, if discovered, and left to drown in the wide +strait, when Captain Broom found out their identity. No wonder they +pulled. + +"Stop now, draw in your oars. Lie down," warned the Indian. + +Not a hundred yards to the Eastward came The Sea Eagle and she was on an +even line with the boat that lay a black patch on the dark water. If +Captain Broom was not on the Bridge they would be safe. + +"Boat ahoy," boomed out his voice. + +"Indian fishermen," cried Yaquis. "Stop, take me ashore." + +With a growl, the Captain sent his ship ahead, paying no attention to +the "Indian fisherman" in distress. There was a gleam of white teeth as +the Indian smiled at the hearty congratulations of the boys and their +glee at his stratagem. Then the Spaniard and Yaquis took the oars while +Jim steered and Jo slept. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI + +CONCLUSION + + +When morning came, they were but a few miles from the Northern end of +the longer Island and the fog was over the whole sky. The sea was glassy +with a sullen glaze. Nowhere was there sign of any steamer or ship. The +Sea Eagle had made good her escape. + +"I wish we had a stiff breeze to help us along," said the Spaniard, who +loved not manual labor, as did the boys. + +"It will come, the strong breeze, soon," said the Indian. + +"When we make the Island, what are we to do?" asked Jo. + +"Who can tell, maybe Tom and Juarez have been taken along with the +Skipper, instead of being marooned." + +"That's so," replied Jo, and gloom settled down upon his spirits, +heavier than the fog upon the sea. + +"We will keep after them," said the never despondent Jim, "even if we +have to chase them around the world." + +The boat seemed to crawl so slowly along, and the boys began to fret in +their eagerness to find out whether their comrades were on the island or +not, but they were not yet close enough to make out any object upon its +surface. Then from the West there came a breeze rippling the glassy +water. + +"Up with the sail," cried Jim. "Here's where we fly." + +As the breeze strengthened to a wind, they went towards the island at a +clipping gait. When they got within a half mile of the shore, they began +to look eagerly for some sign of a living being and they were +disappointed at first, but they drove their boat along as near the shore +as they dared. + +"Say, did you hear that?" cried Jim in excitement. "That was a rifle +shot, or my name is Dennis." + +"Three men on the shore," said the Indian, imperturbably. + +"I see them," cried Jo, "on that beach yonder. I believe it is Tom and +Juarez. Hurrah for the Frontier Boys." + +"It is they," declared Jim as they drew closer, "but how Tom has grown. +He looks over six feet." + +"That isn't Tom," said Jo. "It's some one else. The short one is Tom." +Then he saw Jim grin and realized that he had been kidded. + +"If this wasn't my busy day," said Jo, "I'd give you a punching for +being so smart." + +Five minutes later, the boat had grounded on the pebbly beach and The +Frontier Boys were again united. There was a great jubilee for a while +with the Spaniard, the Indian, and the lanky shepherd on the outskirts +of the family celebration, but in a short time they were all good +friends, each according to his different nature; the Spaniard, suave and +courteous, the Indian stolid, but with his share in the general +good-will, and Jeems Howell, the shepherd, lankily humorous. + +"We met our old friend Captain Broom in the channel, boys," said Jim, +"steaming along like the Devil was after him." + +"I'll give him reason to think so," growled Juarez sullenly, "if I ever +get on his trail." + +The Indian, Yaquis, grunted approval, for there seemed to be a bond of +sympathy between him and Juarez, as the reader can well understand. + +"How far is that cave, Tom, where the old codger left you?" inquired +Jo. + +"Just around the bend," said Tom. "Here's the rock where Juarez made his +famous jump." + +"How did you ever get up there?" asked Jo in wonder, looking up at the +pinnacle of rock. + +"You'd a done the same if those fellows had been chasing you," replied +Juarez, "but if it hadn't been for Jeems here catching me when I jumped +they would have got me after all." + +"I was afeard you might have fallen on the Skipper and a hurt him. He's +a kind of a tender plant you know." The Shepherd made this remark with a +perfectly sober face, in no wise disturbed by the hilarity of the boys, +over the idea of the tenderness of the Skipper. + +"Here's the cave," said Juarez, and he led the way through an arched +opening in the wall of the cliff. Picking up a lantern, he went ahead as +guide. + +"This is certainly a dry cave," said Jim. + +"It ought to be," said Jeems Howell. "It don't rain on this Island more +than twice a year, but I feel it in my bones that it is coming on to +storm today." + +"I hope you don't feel it in _all_ your bones," remarked Jim, +quizzically, "because it is liable to be a long drawn out storm if you +do." + +The lanky Shepherd gave himself over to spasms of silent mirth at Jim's +queer humor. + +"Here's where we found Tom," said Juarez. "Just discovered him a couple +of hours before you discovered us." + +When the Captain had made his sudden change of plans, Tom made himself +as comfortable as he could for the night, intending to search for Juarez +in the morning. + +"Sometime I hope that this wretched Captain will be captured and +imprisoned right here," said the Spaniard with a cold, vindictiveness. + +"If he comes snooping around here again, that is what will happen to +him," remarked Jim quietly. "I suppose, Tom, that he hid some of the +loot he took from us in this cave somewhere. I bet this is his safe +deposit vault, all right." + +"He went back in there with his small satchel," said Tom, indicating the +depths of the cave as yet unexplored. + +"It will keep," said Jim, "but before I leave this island for Hawaii, I +am going to search every corner of this cave and see if I cannot find +our property." + +"We discovered it in a cave and perhaps we will lose our treasure in a +cave," said Juarez, who was something of a fatalist. + +"Don't you believe that we won't find it," declared Jim stoutly, "but no +work for me for a while. I'm going to take a good rest." + +"So say we all of us," chanted the boys. + +"Gentlemen," said Jeems Howell oracularly, "If it pleases you, and +Christopher Columbus," with a wave of his hand toward Jim, "who +discovered this savage group, we will now adjourn to my castle on the +distant hillside." + +"We are with you," declared those assembled in unison, and in a short +time they were making their way up the slope towards the "castle" on the +hillside, where they made themselves at home. + +All the new arrivals at the island were soon fast asleep. + +Later after several hours of rest, they occupied themselves according to +their different ideas of comfort. + +The Spaniard amused himself thrumming on a guitar, that belonged to one +of the Mexican herders on the island. Tom got a book, and stretched out +on a rug forgetful of all his recent troubles, while Jim and Juarez +borrowed a couple of guns and went for an hour's hunting, in the woods +which at that time covered the mountain ridges of the island. + +That evening they were all gathered in the cabin before the blazing fire +on the stone hearth, while outside raged the Easterly storm that Jeems +Howell had predicted, with rush of wind and sweep of rain. But the slab +cabin was storm proof and comfortable. It is a good place to leave the +boys after their days of trial and bitter hardship. In our next book we +will meet "The Frontier Boys in Hawaii, or The mystery of The Hollow +Mountain." There, I feel confident they will cope with adventures as +unusual and as remarkable as they have heretofore encountered. I am sure +that the Reader will be anxious to accompany them on their journey. But +we must permit the Frontier Boys to have the last word, in this volume. + +"Do you think that Captain Broom, will return here, before we get away +for Hawaii, Jim?" inquired brother Jo. + +"I certainly do," replied Jim, "and we will be right here, to give him a +warm and hearty Welcome, you can rest assured of that." + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. + +Page 9, "hearn" changed to "heard" (I heard the mate) + +Page 136, "wierdly" changed to "weirdly" (almost weirdly beautiful) + +Page 148, "ever" changed to "over" (hanging over the) + +Page 158, "besiide" changed to "beside" (got ready beside) + +Page 170, text was both missing and repeated in the original. The +original read: + + on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal- + iente forged ahead by half a length. + + "Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. +"Don't + on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal- + horses up.+ There was Jo sitting quietly on his horse. + +The words between the ++ were removed to try to improve readability. + +Page 172, "supose" changed to "suppose" (I suppose you do) + +Page 213, "aint" changed to "ain't" (I ain't got) + +Page 231, "scycamore" changed to "sycamore" (sycamore tree, when) + +Page 232, "hestitation" changed to "hestitation" (without hesitation we) + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST *** + +***** This file should be named 25473-8.txt or 25473-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/4/7/25473/ + +Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/25473-8.zip b/25473-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..956438c --- /dev/null +++ b/25473-8.zip diff --git a/25473-h.zip b/25473-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5906a48 --- /dev/null +++ b/25473-h.zip diff --git a/25473-h/25473-h.htm b/25473-h/25473-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0a39f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/25473-h/25473-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8081 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + text-indent: 1.25em; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + img {border: 0;} + .tnote {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + ins {text-decoration:none; border-bottom: thin dotted gray;} + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + } /* page numbers */ + + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%; text-align: justify;} + + .bbox {border: solid 2px; margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .unindent {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + .right {text-align: right;} + .poem {margin-left: 30%; margin-right: 10%; text-align: left;} + .poem2 {margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 10%; text-align: left;} + .sig {margin-right: 10%; text-align: right;} + .hang1 {text-indent: -3em; margin-left: 3em;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Frontier Boys on the Coast + or in the Pirate's Power + +Author: Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +Release Date: May 15, 2008 [EBook #25473] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST *** + + + + +Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + +</pre> + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Title and frontispiece"> +<tr><td align='left'><h1>FRONTIER BOYS<br /> +ON THE COAST</h1> + +<h3>OR</h3> + +<h3><i>IN THE PIRATE'S POWER</i></h3> + +<h3>BY</h3> +<h2>CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT<br /><br /><br /><br /></h2> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 53px;"> +<img src="images/002.png" width="53" height="75" alt="Emblem" title="Emblem" /> +</div> +<div class='center'><br /><br /><br /> +<small>NEW YORK</small><br /> +HURST & COMPANY<br /> +<small>PUBLISHERS</small><br /> +</div> +</td><td align='left'><div class="figcenter" style="width: 301px;"> +<img src="images/illo-frontise.jpg" width="301" height="400" alt=""THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."—P. 204. Frontier Boys on the Coast." title=""THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."—P. 204. Frontier Boys on the Coast" /> +<span class="caption">"THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."—P. 204. Frontier Boys on the Coast.</span> +</div></td></tr> +</table></div> + + + + + + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><div class='bbox'> +<h2>THE FRONTIER BOYS</h2> + +<h3>By CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT</h3> + + +<p>This series tells the adventures of Jim, Joe, and +Tom Darlington, first in their camp wagon as they +follow the trail to the great West in the early days. +They are real American boys, resourceful, humorous, +and—but you must meet them. You will find them +interesting company. They meet with thrilling adventures +and encounters, and stirring incidents are +the rule, not exception.</p> + +<p>Historically, these books present a true picture of +a period in our history as important as it was picturesque, +when the nation set its face toward this vast +unknown West, and conquered it.</p> + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Frontier Boys Books"> +<tr><td align='right'>1.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys on Overland Trail</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>2.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Colorado</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>3.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Rockies</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>4.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Grand Canyon</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>5.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Mexico</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>6.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys on the Coast</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>7.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Hawaii</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>8.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Sierras</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>9.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the Saddle</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>10.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in Frisco.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>11.</td><td align='left'>Frontier Boys in the South Seas</td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<div class='center'> +<i>Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth</i><br /> +<i>Price per Volume, 50 Cents</i><br /> +</div></div> +<div class='center'> +<span class="smcap">Copyright, 1909, by<br /> +The Platt & Peck Co.</span><br /> +</div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + + + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<tr><td align='left' colspan='2'><small>CHAPTER</small></td><td align='center'><small>PAGE</small></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Captain Bill Broom</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_9">9</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Cove and the Cave</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Barbed Wire</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_23">23</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Pete's Yarn</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_30">30</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Four Boys</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Hunchback</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Farmer Broom</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Camp in the Pocket</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_60">60</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Attack</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">"Haul In"</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Missouri's Manœuvre</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_82">82</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Ranchero</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A New Friend</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XIV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Pursuit</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_109">109</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Jim and the Sea Eagle</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_118">118</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XVI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Boys Put on Style</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_127">127</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XVII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">On Board the Sea Eagle</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XVIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Day at Sea</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XIX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Passenger</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">To the Rescue</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_161">161</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Bandits</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_169">169</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Race with the Tide</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_177">177</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Enchanted Isle</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_184">184</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXIV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">In the White Boat</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_191">191</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">In Peril</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_198">198</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXVI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Two Lassoes</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_206">206</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXVII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Another Friend</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_214">214</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXVIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Tale of Yore</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_220">220</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXIX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Wonderful Leap</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_232">232</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">In the Strait</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_239">239</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='right'>XXXI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Conclusion</span></td><td align='right'><a href="#Page_246">246</a></td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> + +<h2>FRONTIER BOYS ON THE<br /> +COAST</h2> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>CAPTAIN BILL BROOM</h3> + + +<p>"What devilment has old Bill got on for tonight, +Pete?"</p> + +<p>The speaker was seated on an old scarred sea +chest in a dimly lighted forecastle.</p> + +<p>"I dunno," replied Pete, "maybe he's lookin' fer a +wreck."</p> + +<p>"I <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'hearn'">heard</ins> the mate say somethin' about a passel of +four boys," put in a third man who was laying back +in his bunk, "that the skipper was a-lookin' for."</p> + +<p>"Kidnapping, eh?" said Cales, the first speaker. +"Hold 'em for ransom, I suppose. Well, the old +man has been in worse games than that. I reckon +the kids' parents are rich and are willin' to pay a +high price for their darlings."</p> + +<p>"You're on the wrong tack, matey," said the man<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> +in the bunk. "Cap'n Brinks, who landed in San +Diego from a Mexican port put the old man wise. +He told him that those fellars had considerable +money and a raft of jewels with 'em that they +picked up in Mexico."</p> + +<p>"Ho, Ho, that's the game, is it," cried Cales, +thumping his knee with a gnarled fist, "that ought to +be easy then."</p> + +<p>"Looks so, but it ain't," replied the other, "those +four boys have got somethin' of a reputation in the +southwest. Hard fighters and good shots and their +leader is a husky lad and about as crafty as a red +Injun."</p> + +<p>"He ain't met the Old Man yet," said Cales significantly.</p> + +<p>"I don't see where you get all your news from, +Jake," growled Pete from his seat on the chest, +"you ought to be a reporter."</p> + +<p>"I keep my eyes open and my mouth shet," replied +Jake, "any man can get larned if he will do +that."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to have a picter of you with your mouth +shet," remarked Pete. "It's open even when you +are asleep." He dodged just in time to avoid a +heavy shoe flung from Jake's ready hand that +crashed against the wall.</p> + +<p>"Don't do that agin," he warned, a red light<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span> +showing in his eyes. "I'll larn you boys that I +ain't as old as I looks to be."</p> + +<p>Jake laughed harshly.</p> + +<p>"You mustn't keep your own mouth open so wide, +Pop, cause you'll have to swallow your own words +if you do."</p> + +<p>"I guess I'll never git choked," replied Pete, +truculently. "Kin you tell me what the skipper +means snooping down this coast with no lights +showing when it's plumb dark? We are liable to +sink ourselves or Californey all of a suddint."</p> + +<p>"Why don't you ask the Cap'n what he is up to?" +inquired Cales, "that is, if you want some real useful +information, Pop."</p> + +<p>Pop raised himself up and glared at the speaker.</p> + +<p>"I ain't done living," he replied.</p> + +<p>"We are navigating pretty careful," remarked +Jake. "You can hardly feel the Sea Eagle moving."</p> + +<p>"Running for the cove, I reckon," suggested +Cales, "I'm mighty pleased not to be the man at the +wheel. Well, I'm goin' to turn in for a snooze."</p> + +<p>In a brief time the two men were snoring loudly, +while old Pete sat smoking his pipe, as stolid as a +wooden Indian and the forecastle was fogged with +the smoke, through which the swinging lantern +shone dimly. The air is stifling so let us go up on +deck where we can breathe the salt ozone and inci<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span>dentally +get acquainted with Captain Bill Broom, +who is to occupy such a prominent place in this +narrative.</p> + +<p>He is well worth meeting, not only as the opponent +of our old friend, Jim Darlington, but because of +his own unworthy but interesting character. In +those days Skipper Bill Broom was known all up +and down the coast and beyond. His fame, such +as it was, comes down even to this recent day.</p> + +<p>On deck it is muffling dark, with the stars +obscured in some dim way by mist or fog. There +is a breeze blowing steadily from the broad wastes +of the ocean. The bulk of the California coast +looms dimly on the port bow. Not more than a +half mile distant can be seen the white rushing +forward of the breakers towards the rocky coast.</p> + +<p>Dangerous work this, navigating the Sea Eagle +through the thick gloom of the night but the old +man knew his business. He was on the bridge +pacing back and forth like some strange animal and +giving hoarse directions to the man at the wheel. +He knew every inch of that coast, the sunken reefs +and dangerous rocks.</p> + +<p>"Starboard your helm," he growled.</p> + +<p>The sailor spun the wheel obediently. And the +captain resumed his pacing back and forth upon the +bridge. Not much could be seen of him, except<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> +that he was a powerful man, with a peculiar crouching +stoop, as if he and the sea were engaged in a +mysterious game. One striving to get a dangerous +death-hold upon the other, both wary and using +unceasing watchfulness.</p> + +<p>There was a strange softness in Captain Broom's +tread like that of a padding panther, but his arms +had the loose forward powerful swing of a gorilla's. +Once he stepped into the chart house to +look at something and the light of the lamp will +give us a square look at him.</p> + +<p>"That man a pirate!" you exclaim at the first +glance; one who carried the blackest name along +the coast as a smuggler and wrecker, who had +brought cargoes of wretched slaves from Africa in +the days before the Civil War and who had had +more marvelous escapes than any man in the history +of piracy with the exception of Black Jack +Morgan! Impossible!</p> + +<p>"Why that man is nothing but an old farmer," +you exclaim in disappointment, when you see him. +"He ought to be peddling vegetables on market +day." But just wait.</p> + +<p>True, Skipper Broom had come from a long line +of New England farmers, hard, close-fisted, close-mouthed +men. Young Broom had broken away from +the farm and followed his bent for sea-faring, but<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> +to the end of his days, he kept his farmerlike appearance +and he affected many of the traits of the +yeoman which he found to be on more than one occasion +a most useful disguise.</p> + +<p>Let's look at him. That heavy winter cap pulled +down on his grizzled head gives him a most "Reuben" +like appearance. Jeans pants are thrust into +heavy cowhide boots. The deadly gray eyes soft +as granite have become red rimmed from fits of +fury and hard through many scenes of coldly calculated +cruelty. A most dangerous customer and +I for one, and I ought to know, consider that he +will have the better of Jim Darlington in their approaching +encounter—and yet Jim is never beaten +until the last shot is fired and so it is impossible for +me to foretell how this contest of wit and daring +will come out.</p> + +<p>After examining his chart closely, Captain Broom +crouched out through the door and on to the deck. +He took one keen look towards the shore, then he +approached the helmsman. "Git below, Bill. I'll +fetch her in."</p> + +<p>The helmsman relinquished the wheel gladly +enough and under the Captain's masterful hand the +Sea Eagle swung slowly around and pointed +in towards the curving shore.</p> + +<p>The dark form of the mate could be seen on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span> +deck below waiting for the order that he knew must +come soon. The crew of the Sea Eagle though +subordinate enough were necessarily partners in +Captain Broom's wicked enterprises so that the +discipline was somewhat different than in ordinary +vessels.</p> + +<p>"Call 'em up, Mr. Haffen," roared the skipper to +the mate. "It's chore time."</p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," replied Mr. Haffen.</p> + +<p>The watch was called on deck and the dark forms +of the men could be seen in the bow. The pulsing +of the Sea Eagle had stopped and with scarcely a +sound the anchor was dropped into the water.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>THE COVE AND CAVE</h3> + + +<p>The starboard boat was lowered into the water. +First the mate, then Captain Broom and two men +got in. The latter were Cales and Pete who pulled +noiselessly at the oars. The boat glided quietly +through the silent darkness towards the shore. +The Captain was seated in the stern, his great bulk +crouched forward, but there was nothing inert in +his posture. His big hands clasped either side of +the craft.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the boat grounded softly on +the sand of the beach and all hands got ashore. +Scarcely a word was spoken, though the cove was +so hidden that there seemed to be no possible chance +that the landing of the free-booters would be observed. +However, Captain Bill Broom took no +risk of being discovered. He had many enemies +upon the coast and inland as well. Besides, the +State of California had set a price upon his head.</p> + +<p>Two thousand dollars was the reward for his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> +capture, and so profitable an investment was apt to +be realized on sooner or later by some enterprising +citizen. So Captain Broom took due care whenever +he went abroad not to attract undue attention.</p> + +<p>This cove was a favorite lurking place of his +when close pressed, where he would take refuge +after some daring adventure upon the high seas, until +such a time as the hubbub along the coast had +died down. Sometimes he lay in hiding there, with +the Sea Eagle screened behind the encircling cliffs, +waiting like a black spider to rush out and capture +some unsuspecting craft.</p> + +<p>"Pick her up, boys," said the Captain, "you know +where she belongs," pointing to the boat.</p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," they replied, and putting it on +their shoulders they carried the boat along a narrow +path that divided the thick undergrowth; until, after +going several hundred yards, they reached a thick +screen of brush through which they shoved, and +came to a cave.</p> + +<p>Although so well hidden, the entrance to the +cavern was quite high, so that the men gained admission +without stooping, and going a short distance +into the dark interior, they placed the boat +gently down against the wall. There was a constant<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span> +and heavy drip of water, so that there was no +chance for the boat to warp, as it would have surely +done if placed outside in the dry California air.</p> + +<p>"I don't like this yere cave," remarked Pete, +when left alone with Cales.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter with it? It's dark and damp, +but that is the nature of caves."</p> + +<p>"It makes me feel creepy, that's all," replied Pete, +"and it takes considerable to do that."</p> + +<p>"Whatever happened?" inquired Cales, grinning, +"something terrible, I reckon, to make your thick +hide chilly."</p> + +<p>"It were before your time," replied Pete somewhat +reluctantly, "we raided a ranch back thar +agin the mountings. Senor Sebastian owned it +and it was said that he could ride all day and never +git off his place, and that he had more sheep and +cattle than thar is folks in Frisco."</p> + +<p>"The Captain shanghied him, I reckon," cut in +Cales.</p> + +<p>"You hold your windlass," commanded the old +man in a querulous tone, "I'm telling this yarn."</p> + +<p>"All right, Pop," said Cales in a conciliating +manner, "have it yer own way." He was really +anxious to hear the story the old man had referred +to.</p> + +<p>"Young fry is always flapping," the older speaker<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span> +mumbled,—then he took up the course of his narrative. +"Waal, as I was telling ye, this Senor had +lots of money and the Cap'n being short of funds +thought that he could use some of it. So one night +we ran into the cove, it was blacker even than this. +I don't see how the old man ever got the craft past +the sharks' teeth at the entrance but he did."</p> + +<p>"He could have brought her in with his eyes +shut," declared Cales. "I never have seen his equal +for navigating."</p> + +<p>"Waal, we made camp here that night, and the +next day, the Cap'n with some of the gang, left for +the ranch and I stayed to look after things. Nothing +happened that day, and I was dozing by the fire +about midnight when I heard them coming back. +They had the Senor, a fine-looking old man with a +gray mustache and as cold and proud-looking as +they make them.</p> + +<p>"The Cap'n was furious because he had not been +able to lay his hand on the coin, and he swore that +he would make the old Senor tell where his money +was or there would be trouble. He took him into +this cave and I don't know what happened there, +and I don't want to know. All I'm sure of is that +I never saw him come out.</p> + +<p>"The Cap'n sent me to the ship to get some +chains on the second day and he took 'em into the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> +cave. We sailed a couple of days later, but not a +sign did I see of the Senor. That's why this cave +makes me creepy, Cales."</p> + +<p>They were standing near the entrance, when there +came a distinct low moan from the interior. It +was not a ghostly sound, either. There was no +mistaking it.</p> + +<p>"Did you hear that, Cales?" asked old Pete in a +quavering voice.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Cales, "I heard it all right. It +can't be the Senor?"</p> + +<p>"No," replied Pete. "He has been dead these +years."</p> + +<p>"Let's find out," said his comrade.</p> + +<p>"There's nothing in this world could make me go +in thar," declared Pete solemnly, "besides, it's agin +the Captain's orders."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'm going," said Cales either more brave +or less experienced than the other. "It sounds to +me like a woman's voice."</p> + +<p>"And I'm goin' to git," declared old Pete, tottering +towards the path.</p> + +<p>"You're a brave old pirate," said Cales contemptuously, +and with that he went slowly back into the +cave. He had to go cautiously, for beyond a certain +point he was not acquainted with the interior. +He could feel the moist ground under foot<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> +and he kept his hand stretched out, not knowing +what he might run against in the dense damp darkness.</p> + +<p>Then, suddenly, his hand struck a stone wall. +Groping his way, he turned a sharp corner and followed +along a low narrow passageway that obliged +him to stoop. Then came the sound of the moaning +just ahead. Jack Cales was a brave man but +it was all that he could do, to keep from turning +and running in panic for the mouth of the cave. +But though his determination had received a severe +shock, it did not turn to flight.</p> + +<p>He saw a faint light ahead, spreading a glow at +the end of the passage as he came nearer. Then he +saw something that held him stone still with a +clutch of weird fear. He had reached the end of +the narrow passage, and dimly made out a domed +room in the rock, white with translucent encrustation.</p> + +<p>He struck a match. About him, before, to the +right and to the left he could see forms all of +ghostly white, some crouching, others standing. +Hardly had the light flared up than it sizzled out. +Some drops of water falling from the roof had extinguished +the blaze. Then was repeated that +awful sound of distress.</p> + +<p>Cales groped around almost in a frenzy of terror.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span> +Where was the exit from that awful room? Round +and round he went, and all the time there were +strange whisperings in his ears, and unseen hands +seemed to clutch his clothes. Once he slipped and +was trembling so that he was hardly able to get to +his feet. Just as he did so, something swept past +him like a breath of wind. Rendered desperate he +made another dash, and this time if he had not +found a passageway, he felt that he could have +knocked a hole through the wall. Then he stood +at the mouth of the cave.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>THE BARBED WIRE</h3> + + +<p>Just at that moment was heard the hoarse voice +of Captain Broom booming through the darkness +outside.</p> + +<p>As Cales turned about, some furry animal sprang +past him dashing between his legs and nearly upsetting +him.</p> + +<p>"On deck, you scoundrel, come out of there," +called the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," came the reply of Cales in a +strangely weak tone, though he was now more concerned +by the possible penalty to be meted out by +the Captain for disobedience of orders, than by +thought of the undetermined occupants of the cave. +If it were a cat it was certainly a good joke on old +Pete. This was, had they but known it, the swift +solution of the mystery.</p> + +<p>Oddly enough the Captain said not another word, +a fact suggestive to Cales that there was something +amiss in the cave and the little company at once +took up their line of march. Captain Broom was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> +in the lead, followed by the mate, then Cales, with +old Pete bringing up the rear. Just as they started +Captain Broom extinguished the lantern and they +took up the trail in total darkness. Every precaution +would now be necessary for they would soon +be in a region where the very name of Broom was +execrated with bitter hatred, and every bush would +grow a poniard if his whereabouts were known.</p> + +<p>It was evident that the skipper was as good a +guide on land as he was a pilot at sea, for he led +his little party at a steady gait by a winding cow-path +through the thick undergrowth. He doubtless +knew this region thoroughly, for he had made +more than one raid in this locality.</p> + +<p>It was soon to be determined, however, that they +were not the only ones abroad that night.</p> + +<p>They had walked in silence for some time, well +on to two hours, when they came to an open space, +with the irregular form of a live oak on the southeast +corner. Then Captain Broom stopped suddenly, +his keen eyesight which no darkness could +baffle had discerned some object moving out from +the shelter of the oak tree.</p> + +<p>It came slowly with uplifted black arms and +white hair falling around its face. There was a +terrible intensity in its advance across the open<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> +space, withal that it moved so slowly. The figure +stopped directly in front of Captain Broom.</p> + +<p>"Get out of my way, you hag," he roared, but for +the first time in his life a certain tremor crept into +his voice. Perhaps he was growing old. He drew +back his arm as though to strike the woman in his +path.</p> + +<p>As he did so Jack Cales stooped and picked up a +round rock at his feet, intending to hurl it, not at +the woman but at the skipper, for he alone of the +party divined the possible cause of this poor +woman's dementia. But his interference was not +necessary for it seemed as though the Captain's +arm was paralyzed. He declared afterwards that +some invisible hand had seized his arm.</p> + +<p>Then, in a loud, wailing voice the woman put a +curse upon the slayer of her husband, for this spectre +was none other than the Senora Sebastian. It +was terrible to hear her and it must have sent a +shiver into the soul of the hardy skipper.</p> + +<p>When she had finished, the woman moved past +them and vanished in the direction of the ranch. +For a full minute the line of men stood without +moving a step and in absolute silence, Captain +Broom with his arm upraised as he had lifted it to +strike.</p> + +<p>Then, without saying a word, he took the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span> +forward step and the others followed him through +the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Say, Cales," growled Pete in a low voice, "what +was it you found in that cave? My old timbers are +shaking yet."</p> + +<p>"Keep your old jaws shut," yelled the Captain, +who had wonderfully keen hearing, when anything +was spoken that concerned him.</p> + +<p>"How do you suppose the old man heard me?" +mumbled Pete to himself. He dropped back a pace +or two, then whispered, "The old man must be crazy. +He is making direct for the Sebastian ranch."</p> + +<p>"Do you reckon that these four boys he is looking +after, are located there?" asked Jack.</p> + +<p>"I dunno," replied Pete, "you can calkerlate on +one thing though and that is that the skipper knows +pretty nigh where those lads are. One of his messengers, +a one-eyed, twisted greaser, came aboard +the other day, and was gabbling in the Captain's +cabin. Then the next thing I knew we was under +sail, and came kiting down to the cove."</p> + +<p>Just then the party halted at the confines of a four +strand barbed wire fence. This was the first indication +that they were entering the great ranch property +that formerly belonged to the Senor Sebastian, +the elderly man the Captain had made captive, +and which was now the property of his only son.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Now, lads," said the leader of the expedition, +"Here's a chance to make yourself small. This yere +barb is like a devil fish if it once gits a holt of your +panties—it won't let go."</p> + +<p>"That's so, Captain," said the mate, a generally +silent and saturnine man.</p> + +<p>"I reckon you know, mate," said the Captain. +"The last time we was through these parts, and that +some considerable years ago, this same fence got +a holt of yer pants and wouldn't let go. I never +heard you talk so much and so earnestly in my life +before. You want to be more keerful this time."</p> + +<p>The mate simply grunted by way of reply and, +lying close to the ground, he very gingerly and +carefully worked his way under the wire and thus +escaped his mentioned former unpleasant detention. +He then held the lower wire up as high as he +could until his chief had wiggled under.</p> + +<p>Pete was the only one of the party who was seriously +detained, for Jack Cales had slid under as +slick as an eel. But Pete's joints were old and +rusty and the venomous wire got a clutch on his +coat and his pants.</p> + +<p>"What's keeping you back?" inquired the Captain, +gruffly, as Cales and his comrade did not put +in an immediate appearance.</p> + +<p>"Pete has got caught, sir," said Jack.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What are you doing there, you old barnacle?" +inquired the Captain as he came back to the fence.</p> + +<p>There was a certain odd comradeship between the +skipper and the old salt who had been with him +since his African days. Both were New Englanders +and had come from neighboring homesteads.</p> + +<p>"Just resting, sir," replied the captive.</p> + +<p>It certainly did have something of that appearance, +for Pete had kept a decisive grip on his old +black pipe with his stubby teeth and was puffing at +it in apparent peace and resignation.</p> + +<p>"Want me to git you a piller?" inquired the +skipper, sarcastically.</p> + +<p>"Thank ye, sir," replied Pete imperturbably.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile the mate had been at work with deft +fingers and he finally succeeded in extricating the +old man and putting him upon his pins.</p> + +<p>"Now if ye are sufficiently rested," proposed the +skipper, "we will hike along."</p> + +<p>This they did. Their way now lay between two +stretches of fence that enclosed a road not much +traveled for there were only faint traces of wheels +in the turf. It was probably not a public highway +but belonged to the great ranch.</p> + +<p>Everything seemed smooth sailing now, as there +was no more barbed wire to be immediately met but +Pete soon made himself prominent again. He was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> +rolling along with that gait peculiar to a sailor when +aboard land, when he gave a sudden spring and +clutched Cales convulsively in the back, giving that +individual a big scare.</p> + +<p>"Dad burn it, boys. I've stepped on a rattler." +An investigation was made very carefully and Captain +Broom quickly picked up a short piece of rope.</p> + +<p>"I'll rattle you," he cried, touching up the old +man with the rope's end.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>PETE'S YARN</h3> + + +<p>They went along steadily through the darkness +in an almost directly easterly direction. Being now +clear of the brush they could make good time on the +springy turf.</p> + +<p>"How far are we now from the ranch, Pete?" inquired +Jack.</p> + +<p>"Too durn close to suit me," replied Pete. "I +can't tell exactly for these ranches are as big as all +outside creation, but I guess we must be as close as +a mile to the buildings."</p> + +<p>"I reckon the Captain is going to walk up to the +front door and ask for accommodations."</p> + +<p>"Wouldn't s'prise me a bit, if he done that," replied +Pete querulously. "The old man ain't lacking +in nerve. Back thar was the first time I ever seen +him hang back in my long experience with him."</p> + +<p>"When the old lady was speaking her piece? +Suppose I ask him how much he made when he +captured the Senor," suggested Cales, who had recovered +his flippant humor.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wouldn't git gay, lad," said old Pete, warningly. +"She is just as liable to haunt you in your +black spells."</p> + +<p>"Don't have 'em, uncle," replied Cales.</p> + +<p>"You collect the material for 'em when you are +young," said the old man wisely, "and they come +out of your bones like rheumatiz when you git old."</p> + +<p>"Somebody is coming back of us," suddenly whispered +Cales.</p> + +<p>"Take to cover, lads," ordered the skipper, who +was as quick to hear as the younger man. The only +cover was a high and thick growth of wild mustard +growing alongside the fences.</p> + +<p>Quickly they stepped from the open road into the +shelter of the tall mustard. They had not long to +wait. There was the jingle of spurs and the thud +of horses' feet walking slowly along. Next came +the voices of men talking.</p> + +<p>"It is useless, Senor, to try and find her, I fear," +replied one man to the other.</p> + +<p>"It seems so," replied the other sadly. "My +mother always seems to be worse when the time of +the year approaches that my father disappeared. +In spite of all our care she will escape."</p> + +<p>They had now arrived at a point opposite where +the free-booters were hidden. The man who had +last spoken struck a light and lit a cigarette; the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> +instantaneous glare showed the dark handsome face +of the Spanish type. There was the high-peaked +sombrero, the striking clothes, the intent face and +then the light died suddenly out.</p> + +<p>"Ah, Manuel," said the young man to his companion, +"if I could only once lay hands on that +cursed Gringo," and he ground his teeth in fury, +unable to express himself.</p> + +<p>"Humph, Gringo," grunted the Captain, disdainfully.</p> + +<p>"Did you hear anything, Senor?" asked Manuel.</p> + +<p>"Nothing."</p> + +<p>"I was sure I heard something," asserted his +companion. They had reined in their horses and +sat listening quietly for a few seconds.</p> + +<p>"It was probably nothing but a calf by the roadside," +said the Senor.</p> + +<p>The other shook his head doubtfully, then they +turned and rode on towards the rancho.</p> + +<p>When they were safely out of range, the party +of pirates took up their line of march once more.</p> + +<p>"So the greaser took me for a calf," remarked +Captain Broom. "If it had been you, Jack Cales, +there might be some excuse fer such a mistake."</p> + +<p>"Aye, sir," replied Cales, glumly.</p> + +<p>"Getting kind of close to the ranch, ain't you, +Cap'n?" ventured old Pete.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I thought of leaving you there, Pete, while the +rest of us corralled those kids. You are getting too +old for these long tramps."</p> + +<p>No more remarks were heard coming from the +direction of Pete, for he was not at all sure but +that the Captain might, in a moment of irresponsible +humor, do just as he threatened without +regard to the consequences.</p> + +<p>After they had gone on for a mile from the +point where the two men had overtaken them, Captain +Broom led his party away from the road in a +southerly direction, once more undergoing the harrowing +experience of getting through the barbed +wire fence. But this time Jack Cales was especially +detailed by the Captain to get old Pete through so +there would not be any unnecessary delay.</p> + +<p>It was evident that they were getting into a different +section, a short time after they left the road, for +they began going up and winding among little +rocky hills. At last they came to a stopping place. +They climbed up an elevation and sat on some rocks +among a group of dark trees.</p> + +<p>"Now, lads, take it easy," said the Captain, "ye +have had quite a footin' and when morning comes, +there will be some more ahead and at a faster gait."</p> + +<p>"Gosh, Cap'n," declared old Pete, "It's the most +walking we've done together since the time we cor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span>ralled +the last bunch of niggers on the west coast of +Africa."</p> + +<p>"We certainly made money that trip when we sold +that cargo of coons to the traders on that Palmetto +Island below Charleston. But we will clean up +about as much money when we round up those four +boys and twice as easy. Tell the two lads about +that trip, Pete."</p> + +<p>The old sailor sat on a rock, and taking out his +bag of tobacco filled his short black pipe with one +thorny thumb, then he commenced his narrative, +with the glow of his pipe lighting up his weatherbeaten +face.</p> + +<p>"Well, orders is orders, and the Cap'n wants me +to tell this yarn. I might just as well begin it, +lads. I never knew any good to come to sailormen +cruising around on dry land any more than on this +trip." He cast a wary eye at Captain Broom, but +that worthy merely grunted and Pete resumed his +story.</p> + +<p>"Our clipper lay at anchor in a wide bay with +only a couple of men on board and the Captain, +myself and six men trailing inland for to find a +village of naygurs that our guides had told us of.</p> + +<p>"It certainly was hot and steamy going through +the jungles and every once in a while a big snake as +large as my leg would crawl across our path and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> +rustle away into the undergrowth. Once I felt one +of 'em a-twisting and rolling under my foot like a +big log that had came to life. I guess I must have +jumped twice as high as my own head and I lit on +the back of one of the naygurs that was guiding us.</p> + +<p>"He didn't know what struck him; probably +thought it was a tiger for I sunk my hooks into his +hide. He let out a yell and went ripping and snorting +through that jungle and me not having sense +enough to let go, until a grape vine about as thick +as a manilla rope chucked me under the chin and I +fell flat on my back and I guess that naygur is still +running."</p> + +<p>Here the captain who was evidently enjoying the +narrative hugely, burst into a volcanic roar of +laughter.</p> + +<p>"I can see yer yet, Pete, on that bounding buck +of a nigger, and him a-hiking through the jungle +and a-yelling like a wild Injun."</p> + +<p>"I remember you got out of the way mighty +quick," said Pete, "when you heard us a-coming behind +you."</p> + +<p>"It certainly was a curious spectacle," said the +Captain, "but go on with your yarn, Pete."</p> + +<p>"The further we went into the jungle the worse +it got. The mosquitoes fairly ate us alive and they +wern't the only cannibals in those woods by any<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span> +means. There was a tribe of man-eaters beyond the +Big River and we didn't try to capture any of them. +They wern't our stripe of bacon.</p> + +<p>"We went on for six days, with the monkeys chattering +over our heads all day and the mosquitoes +serenading us at night. Talk about birds, there +was a whole menagerie of them and their colors +beat the handkerchiefs that these greasers wear +around their throats and you can't get ahead of that +for color.</p> + +<p>"One night we got in range of the village we +were after and there was a great pow-wow going +on. There was a big fire in the circle of the grass +huts and some big black bucks were doing a dance +around it. Just then I saw—"</p> + +<p>"Hold on, Pete," said the Captain in a low, gruff +voice, "somebody is coming our way."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>THE FOUR BOYS</h3> + + +<p>"Hey, Jim, where are we going to make camp?" +It was his brother Jo's genial voice.</p> + +<p>"Not until we can strike water," replied Jim. +"No more dry camps for me."</p> + +<p>"I don't think much of the coast range, or the +Sierras, either." It was Juarez Hoskins' well-remembered +voice, with its rather low, deep tones.</p> + +<p>"Give me the Rockies every time."</p> + +<p>Juarez was nothing if not loyal to his mountains.</p> + +<p>"I don't think any of the mountains are much to +brag of."</p> + +<p>It is hardly necessary to say that it is Tom Darlington +who is now speaking, for the discerning +reader is pretty well acquainted with his style by +this time.</p> + +<p>"There's always something to look out for," continued +Tom, "if it isn't Indians it's rattlesnakes, +and you have got to choose between a cloudburst or +no water at all. Give me the East every time."</p> + +<p>"You make me exhausted talking about the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span> +East," said Jim. "Why didn't you stay there when +you were there? I had just as soon take a chance +with a rattlesnake as with an ice cream soda."</p> + +<p>"Tom would like to <i>play</i> Indian," cut in Jo, +"with turkey feathers sticking up from a red flannel +band around his head. And creeping upon a flock +of sheep pretending that they are antelope and that +cows are real live bears."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Jim, "you have lined it out all right, +Jo. Then when they were tired of playing Injun, +Tom and his little playmates could pretend that +they were Daniel Boone's men with wildskin panties +on."</p> + +<p>"Shut up, boys," said Juarez, coming to Tom's +rescue. "What's the use in rubbing it in? The +East is all right for some folks and if the boys back +there can't have real adventures they have to do the +best they can. After all, Jim, you are an Eastern +boy. You can't get away from that." Jim writhed +under the implication but replied good humoredly.</p> + +<p>"You're right, Juarez, old chap, but I can't help +stirring up Tom once in a while. It is good for him +too. It keeps his liver active, so he won't get +bilious."</p> + +<p>"Juarez has got more sense than you two put together," +said Tom.</p> + +<p>"Forget all about it now, Tommy," urged Juarez<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span> +good-naturedly, getting the aforesaid Tommy by +the nape of the neck with one vigorous brown hand +and giving him a shake.</p> + +<p>Thus under Juarez's straightforward management +the family quarrel was abated.</p> + +<p>"We might just as well ride now, boys," said +Jim. "The horses are good and rested and we will +soon be going down grade instead of up."</p> + +<p>The horses had been following in single file back +of the four boys. They were to be trusted not to +cut up any shindigs or to wander from the narrow +mountain trail. The boys had had them a long time +and together they had gone through the numerous +hardships and adventures. They were as perfectly +trained as Uncle Sam's cavalry horses.</p> + +<p>The horses halted as the boys dropped back to +their sides, and they swung into the saddle simultaneously. +Jim rode in the lead on a splendid gray, +with a powerful arching neck, strong shoulders and +hindquarters made for speed. Him, he called +Caliente. Next rode Tom on a pretty bay. Then +Jo on a black of medium size but finely built for +speed and endurance. Juarez brought up the rear +on his roan, a sinewy animal with a broncho strain +in him which was liable to crop out at unexpected +moments.</p> + +<p>It is to be noticed that there was a certain forma<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span>tion +in the way the column rode. Jim, the strong and +resourceful in front, and Tom, the less experienced +and capable, following, forming the first division. +The second division was composed of Jo and Juarez.</p> + +<p>Juarez having an equally important position with +the leader, for he was rear guard, a more trying +position sometimes than being in front for in their +travels through dangerous regions, it was the man +in the rear who was more apt to be cut off by the +wily Indians. But the cool and crafty Juarez was +not likely to be caught napping.</p> + +<p>Even now you notice as they ride along through +the comparatively safe region of the coast range +that Jim and Juarez are ever on the alert, glancing +this way and that, halting to examine some peculiar +mark on the trail, and not a motion of tree or +bush upon either mountain slope escapes their +attention. They had lived too long in the midst +of treacherous enemies, Indians and outlaws, to be +taken off their guard. They had been in Mexico +on a venture the outcome of which was all their +fondest dreams could wish for. Their expedition +over, Tom was for going home, to at least deposit +the treasure they had gained, but the others had +outvoted him, and now the long pleasure trip to +Hawaii was their object.</p> + +<p>Now, if they but had known it, they were riding<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> +to meet the most deadly danger that they had yet +encountered. For as you know, Captain Broom +and his party were advancing to meet them. In an +open or running fight, we know perfectly well that +the boys could take care of themselves, but in the +skipper of the Sea Eagle, they were to meet a far +more dangerous opponent than in Eagle Feather, +described in "The Frontier Boys in Colorado" or +Cal Jenkins in Kansas and in Mexico as detailed in +"Overland Trail" and in "Mexico." In compliance +with a determined plan, they were now on their way +to Hawaii.</p> + +<p>Not only had Captain Broom the craftiness and +cruelty of the Indian, but the cool, hard judgment +of the New England Yankee, coupled with a knowledge +of their possessions, supposedly limited to +themselves alone. The Mexican spy, who had reported +the route the boys were going to take, had +given the game into his master's hands.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what has become of our one-eyed +greaser friend," said Jim, "we haven't seen any +sign of him since he gave us the shake a week ago +at the hunting camp. I kind of thought we might +run across him again."</p> + +<p>"It's good riddance to bad rubbish," said Juarez +in a surly tone. "If I had my way I'd hang him to +the first oak tree on general principles and on ac<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span>count +of his personal appearance. I bet he is a +treacherous little rat."</p> + +<p>"He isn't very pretty, that's a fact," admitted Jim, +"but he is a useful little beast about the camp and +can do a lot of chores."</p> + +<p>"I kind of like to hear him play his guitar," put +in Jo, "and sing those Mexican tunes. They certainly +sound pretty."</p> + +<p>"He's a picturesque beggar too," remarked Tom. +"Just the kind that in the old days would have been +made a king's jester. They dressed 'em up in a +blazing bright style then. That hump would have +made his fortune."</p> + +<p>Tom, as you remember, was an authority on +Romance, and as pertaining to which he always +carried two favorite volumes, much worn by hard +travel and frequent usage, but which no amount of +ridicule by his brothers could make him give up.</p> + +<p>"Have it your own way," acceded Juarez, "but +he is not the sort of animal that I would recommend +for a household pet."</p> + +<p>"Well, he is gone," said Jim, "so we don't need +to worry about him."</p> + +<p>"I don't know but that I would a little rather have +him in sight," said Juarez. "Then you know where +he is."</p> + +<p>Jim laughed good-naturedly at the prejudice that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> +Juarez showed against the little greaser and put it +down to his darkly suspicious nature acquired by his +life among the Indians. It would have been better +if Jim had taken more stock in his comrade's suspicions. +Now, Jim was not to be caught napping +when once an enemy had declared himself, but it +was his nature to be open-minded and unsuspicious.</p> + +<p>The four Frontier Boys were riding up a winding +trail through a narrow mountain valley, having +reached a point almost level with the summits, +which rose several thousand feet above the eastern +plain. It had been a hard, all day climb, and the +horses were tired and the gray dust was caked upon +their sweaty riders.</p> + +<p>Let us take a look at our old acquaintances, Jim, +Tom, Jo and Juarez, to see if they have changed +any since we saw them last. They are dressed +about as we have always known them. In gray +flannel shirts and pants of the same color, moccasins +on their feet and on their heads battered sombreros +with the flaps turned back.</p> + +<p>Their coats are tied back of the saddles, and their +shirts open at the throat for the air is hot and dry +in that California mountain valley. Their rifles are +swung across their shoulders held by straps, revolvers +in the holsters at their hips.</p> + +<p>Jim sits in the saddle tall and sinewy, grown<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> +somewhat thinner by constant exercise and by the +drying effect of the desert air. His skin is baked +to an absolute brown. Juarez, too, is black as an +Indian and he rather looks like one with his hair +quite long and of a coarse black fibre. The boys +look a little fine-drawn but sinewy and strong and +fit for any adventure.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>THE HUNCHBACK</h3> + + +<p>The shadows were already falling on that side of +the range as the boys rode slowly into a narrow +pass. The shade was a decided relief from the +glare of the California sun that they had encountered +all day.</p> + +<p>"Gosh, but I should like to have a cool breath +from the Rockies," declared Juarez with emphasis, +"This sort of a climate makes me tired. Nothing +but the sun staring at you all the time. It goes +down clear and comes up with the same kind of a +grin on its face."</p> + +<p>"It will be cooler when we get on the other side," +said Jim, encouragingly, "and it won't be long +now."</p> + +<p>"I hope we will strike water on the other side," +remarked Jo. "I'm tired of looking at that bald-headed +stream down there," indicating the dry +blistered bed of a former water-course.</p> + +<p>Nothing more was said until of a sudden they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span> +rode to the top of the Pass, and saw a new landscape +spread out before them.</p> + +<p>It was a broad and beautiful view, with the sun +striking the wide Pacific, with a blazing glare of +silver and below the wooded slope of the mountains, +stretched an apparently level plain, where roamed +countless cattle, and innumerable sheep. It had all +the breadth characteristic of the Californian landscape.</p> + +<p>"That's a pretty good looking view," remarked +Jim admiringly. He would have been still more interested +if he could have seen a trim-looking black +vessel in a small cove directly west but a good many +miles distant.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if it isn't going to rain," said Tom. +"See those clouds rolling in over the ocean."</p> + +<p>"Rain!" ejaculated Jim with superior wisdom, +a wisdom that appertains particularly to older +brothers, "I guess not. Those are fog clouds. +That's a sure sign in this country that it won't +rain."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'm glad to see them, anyway," said +Juarez. "It looks sort of stormy even if it isn't."</p> + +<p>It was restful, there was no question about that, +the change from the constant glare of a white sun +in a blue sky, to the soft damp grayness of the fog. +It was already rolling over the level plain towards<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> +the mountains and, in a short time, a high fog was +spread over the whole sky.</p> + +<p>The boys had ridden down the western side of +the range for a distance of a half mile, when Jim +suddenly waved his hand backward in a sign of caution +for the column to halt. He leaned forward, +looking intently in a northwesterly direction to a +point on the opposite side of the mountain valley. +Juarez followed the direction of the leader's look +with a keen gaze.</p> + +<p>"I was sure that I saw some one slipping through +the undergrowth on the opposite side over there," +Jim finally said, "but I could not make sure whether +it was a man or some sort of animal."</p> + +<p>"I noticed the bushes shaking," said Juarez, "but +I did not see anything."</p> + +<p>"Might have been a brown bear," hazarded Jo.</p> + +<p>"They do have them in this range," put in Tom.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps it is the bear that we hunted for two +days on the other slope," said Juarez, "and he has +come to give himself up."</p> + +<p>"We had better keep our eyes open," advised +Jim, though he did not take the trouble to unsling +his rifle. "Jo, you and Tom watch the upper side, +Juarez will take care of the trail in front."</p> + +<p>"All right, boss," said Juarez, cheerfully.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span></p> + +<p>"How much reward, captain, for the first glimpse +of the lost child?" inquired Jo.</p> + +<p>Jim paid no attention to this sally, but kept his +eye on the trail ahead. The trees were quite thick +on either side of the trail and as dusk was coming +on, it was difficult to make out any object clearly.</p> + +<p>Just as Jim rode around a turn in the trail, +Caliente reared and leaped to one side and a less +skillful rider would have been thrown.</p> + +<p>"Easy, old boy," said the rider, patting his horse's +neck. Caliente stood trembling and snorting and +watching a curious object that was struggling up +the bank towards the trail.</p> + +<p>It was hard to tell what it was, whether man or +beast and the dusk only served to make it more obscure. +Then the object scrambled up on to the +trail and Jim at once recognized the dwarf Mexican +with his high-crowned sombrero and his velvet +suit richly slashed. With his crooked back and one +eye, he was anything but a prepossessing-looking +creature. Caliente, when he, too, recognized who +it was, put back his ears and rushed with bared +teeth for the Mexican.</p> + +<p>Spitting out a curse, the greaser jumped to one +side with a marked agility, and Jim succeeded after +a struggle in bringing his furious steed to terms,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span> +but he had his hands full and there were not very +many men who could manage Caliente when he got +into one of his rages.</p> + +<p>"Hi! Manuel," (every Mexican was Manuel to +the boys), cried Jim, "look out for my Tiger, he +wants to eat that velvet suit of yours."</p> + +<p>"Si, Senor," called Manuel from a safe station +on a granite rock. "He is a tiger as your Honor +says."</p> + +<p>One would have expected to hear the crooked +little greaser speak in a harsh croaking voice, but +instead it had a rich sonorous quality.</p> + +<p>"Do you know where there is any water in this +country?" asked Jo. "We are as dry as a desert."</p> + +<p>"Certainly, Senor, I will show you," replied +Manuel. (It was true that Manuel spoke in Spanish +of which language the boys had a working +knowledge, due to their sojourn in the southwest. +But I shall put his words in English.) "Where is +Senor Juarez?" inquired the dwarf. "I do not see +him."</p> + +<p>"The Senor is still with us," replied Jim, gravely, +"but you cannot see him on account of the dusk, +but you might hear him," he added in a lower +tone.</p> + +<p>It was true that Juarez was growling to himself +about the greaser for whom you know he had a cor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span>dial +antipathy, a feeling which was reciprocated by +the Mexican.</p> + +<p>"Lead on, Manuel," urged Jim, "we want to +make camp before morning."</p> + +<p>"But, Senor, the tiger will eat me up," objected +the Mexican.</p> + +<p>"I will take care of Caliente. He won't bite you. +Go ahead."</p> + +<p>"Si, Senor," assented Manuel.</p> + +<p>Then he jumped down from the rock and took +the trail at a discreet distance ahead of Jim's +horse, who was held in check by his rider though his +temper seemed in no wise abated. There was +something sinister in the figure of the Mexican as +he led the way down the trail.</p> + +<p>All in black, except the gray of his hat with its +golden cord and the tinsel of his clothes. There +was something malignant in his make-up and even +the unimaginative Jim was affected by the presence +of the Mexican, while Juarez was very uneasy, and +asked Jo and Tom to allow him to move up next +to the Captain. This they did, though it left Jo as +rear guard on that rocky trail.</p> + +<p>He seemed quite isolated but he had become sufficiently +enured to danger and though he kept a +wary eye, he was not nervous. The boys had unholstered +their pistols and Juarez kept a straight<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> +eye on the moving shadow in the darkness ahead. +At the first sign of attack or treachery, he was +going to get that particular Manuel.</p> + +<p>"I've got my eye on the little varmint," said +Juarez in a low voice to Jim. "He may be leading +us into an ambush."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I guess not," said Jim, with a note of hesitation +in his voice. "We have got to find water anyway. +The horses are suffering for it, and this +beggar can show us where we can locate it."</p> + +<p>Just then Manuel threw up his hand with a shrill +whistle that had every malignant intention in it. +Juarez raised his pistol just ready to fire, when +the Mexican laughed shrilly.</p> + +<p>"Senor Juarez very nervous. I just stretch and +whistle a little and he want to shoot."</p> + +<p>A peculiar smile came over Juarez's face, but he +said nothing. All the stolid Indian in his nature +came to the surface. He merely grunted contemptuously +at the Mexican's remark and this made +the volatile Manuel uneasy in his turn, for he +wanted to realize that his malice had struck home, +but Juarez did not give him that satisfaction. +There was a sort of hidden duel between these two, +the subtle Mexican and the crafty Indian nature of +Juarez. It remained to be seen who would win.</p> + +<p>The four Frontier Boys went silently along down<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> +the dark canyon, each one occupied with his own +thoughts and the ill-omened Mexican guide in the +lead. Juarez kept a sharp lookout on either side +of the trail expecting an ambush. His horse seemed +to feel something of the strain his rider was under, +as a horse will. Once he shied at something he saw +in a clump of bushes, and nearly went off the trail. +It was only with the aid of Juarez's horsemanship +that he clawed his way back to safety. The Mexican +was much amused at this incident, and Jim +gave him a sharp call down.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>FARMER BROOM</h3> + + +<p>We must now return to Captain Broom and his +escort, whom we left sitting on a hill covered with +trees near the Sebastian rancho. Old Pete's story +had been interrupted by the skipper's warning,—"Somebody +is coming our way."</p> + +<p>There was no question about that, they could +hear the someone coming towards the hill whistling +cheerfully. Then the form of a man could be seen, +coming up the slope of the elevation.</p> + +<p>"I wonder where those altogether blessed cows +are," he was heard saying in Spanish, but of course, +this is a free and not a literal translation.</p> + +<p>"They are generally hiding under these trees," +he continued. The sailors kept absolutely still and +old Pete covered the bowl of his pipe with his hand +so that its light might not discover them.</p> + +<p>"Carambe!" cried the Mexican as he stopped +about three feet from the recumbent Captain, "I +fear my good master's cows have been smoking,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span> +not like nice Mexican cows, a cigarette, but a pipe +like a vile gringo. Come, get up, you black +brute," noticing the big bulk of the Captain for the +first time, and he hauled off and gave the skipper a +hearty kick on the haunch.</p> + +<p>Never was there a more surprised greaser in the +whole ungainly length of California for this apparently +gentle cow that he kicked, (not for the first +time either) suddenly turned and grabbed him with +a powerful hand before he could yell, though he +was so frightened that he probably could not utter +a squeak. Another hand got him by the throat.</p> + +<p>"Take me for a cow, did you, you bespangled +Manuello?" roared the Captain, and he waved the +aforesaid Manuello about in his great grip as +though he had been a rag.</p> + +<p>"No use killing the beggar, Captain," said the +mate. "Maybe he can tell us something." The +Captain let the Mexican drop and he lay on the +ground perfectly inert.</p> + +<p>"He won't be able to say much right away," said +the Skipper.</p> + +<p>It was now getting light, the first signs of dawn +showing above the mountains. As the darkness +was drawn away, they could see their position more +clearly and there came the sounds of the morning +from the direction of the ranch houses. The bark<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span>ing +of dogs, the crowing of roosters, and the call +of human voices.</p> + +<p>"I guess, lads, it's about time for us to have +something to eat," said the Captain, "because we +have got to do some tall climbing today and I want +to get an early start."</p> + +<p>An expression of disgust showed itself on old +Pete's face at the idea of more walking, which the +Captain was quick to note.</p> + +<p>"How would you like to stay here, Old Bones, +and look after Manuello?" said the skipper. But +Pete shook his head.</p> + +<p>"I'll stay by the ship, Cap'n," said the old fellow +stoutly.</p> + +<p>"Durn my buttons," said the Captain, whose +oaths were as mild as his actions were vicious, +"if you ain't a good old barnacle, Pete. I +wouldn't think of leaving you in such company as +this," and he gave the prostrate Mexican a shove +with his foot. Manuello looked up at the Captain +with an evil eye and a muttered curse.</p> + +<p>This roused the fury of Captain Broom and he +held him off from the ground as if he had been +a rat, his jaws working ominously and a look in his +eyes that made the Mexican shrivel.</p> + +<p>Nothing was said, not even by the Skipper, and +the others watched him fascinated as he glared at<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> +his victim, and even the iron composure of the +saturnine mate seemed to be moved partially aside. +The Mexican began to whimper and moan as his +eyes shifted to avoid the terrible ones of the Captain. +He was not suffering any special violence, +but a strange tremor filled the soul of the Mexican, +in the grip of the grizzled giant.</p> + +<p>As the greaser began to cry, the Captain gave a +roar of laughter and threw him aside upon the +ground, about all the humanity he had shriveled +out of him. He lay there absolutely without any +power of motion in his body.</p> + +<p>Just then the crew of the Sea Eagle became +aware of the fact that a horned animal with big +brown eyes was looking at them. All the farmer +in the nature of Captain Broom came to the surface.</p> + +<p>"By Gum," he exclaimed, "if here ain't a bovine +cow looking at us. I ain't milked one for forty +years, but I'm not afeard to try. 'Member, Pete, +when we used to milk the cows back in old Connecticut +on the farm. After working in the hay all +day, I'd go down in the side hill pasture, that was +so steep that you had to hold on with your toes and +your teeth to keep from sliding down to the +brook."</p> + +<p>"You bring it back to me just like it was a liv<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span>ing +picture," said Pete, his hard face softening under +the gentle showers of memory.</p> + +<p>"Then I'd drive the black and white one that +was breechy, and the red mooley, the yaller and +white that gave the richest milk. I'd drive them +into the stanchions in the old barn, with the ground +floor stoned up on the side, where it was sunk into +the hill."</p> + +<p>"But it was winter, Cap'n," said Pete, "that it was +interesting doing the chores," and he blew reminiscently +on his fingers, "snow two feet on the level +and the sun a piece of blue ice in the sky. A condemned +sight better place than Californey, where +you don't feel no more alive than a enbalmed +corpse."</p> + +<p>The Captain began now a series of manœuvres to +get within range of one of the cows so that they +might have fresh milk for breakfast. He managed +it finally, and he certainly looked like a peaceful +old farmer as with his gray head against a fat red +cow's flank, he milked into a large tin cup. Pete selected +a black mooley and soothed by the man's +persuasive manner, she consented finally to give +down a thin blue stream. But the saturnine mate +was less successful as he knew much more about +navigating a ship than he did about cows.</p> + +<p>Finally after much awkward manœuvring, he got<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> +a cow cornered and began operations upon the left +side with the result that the cow landed upon him +with her hoof and sent him sprawling on his back +to the great delight of the Captain.</p> + +<p>"Hurt bad, Bill?" inquired the Skipper with mock +sympathy, "I'm afeard that you will never make a +farmer."</p> + +<p>"I never calkerlated to," replied the mate. "It +ain't my line of business."</p> + +<p>"Don't tell me that," said the Captain, "I can see +that for myself. Come up here and I'll give you a +drink."</p> + +<p>They had scarcely finished their simple breakfast +when Jack Cales gave a sudden alarm.</p> + +<p>"Cap'n," he cried, "I see two men legging it our +way. They are making straight for the hill."</p> + +<p>"I guess they are coming to see why Manuello +doesn't show up with the cows," remarked the Captain, +"we don't want to stir up this hen roost as +we've got other chicken to fry. So we'll git."</p> + +<p>"Take the greaser?" inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>"You and the mate fetch him," said the Captain.</p> + +<p>Just as the two men were mounting the hill, the +Captain and his crew made a swift sneak down the +opposite slope, and were soon making their way +through the bush towards the foot-hills. In a minute +they heard the cries of the two men as they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> +drove the herd of cows towards the home ranch for +the morning milking. The sun had now risen +above the eastern range just in front of them and +was blazing down upon the plain and the sea +beyond. There was something exhilarating in the +air in spite of the heat.</p> + +<p>"We don't need the company of that greaser any +further," said Captain Broom, after they had made +some headway up a canyon back of the ranch buildings. +So they took some rope grass, tough as +manilla, and tied him firmly, and, after having +gagged him, they left him to be found later by +some of his countrymen.</p> + +<p>Then they toiled steadily up the trail of the +canyon, until about noon they reached a pocket in +the canyon where there was a pool of clear water +fed by an invisible spring. Coming to meet them +were four boys riding up the trail on the other +side of the range.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>THE CAMP IN THE POCKET</h3> + + +<p>Under the guidance of the Mexican dwarf, the +four boys came at last to a halt. It seemed as if +the canyon down which they had been riding had +come to an end for there was a wall of rock directly +in front of them.</p> + +<p>"Down there, Senor, is a pool of clear water," +announced the Mexican.</p> + +<p>"Glad to hear it, Manuel," said Jim heartily.</p> + +<p>"Did you ever see a picture, Jim," put in Juarez +significantly, "of a pool where the thirsty animals +have to come to drink and before they get their +noses in the water the hunter shoots them?"</p> + +<p>But nothing of this dire nature happened and in +a few minutes the famished animals were pumping +the delicious water down their long, baked +throats.</p> + +<p>"My Gracious, but that tastes good!" cried Tom, +drawing in a long, gasping breath, after he had +been drinking steadily for about a minute. "It +makes my head swim."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I should think it would," said Jo, sarcastically, +"considering the amount you have drunk."</p> + +<p>"You weren't far behind," grumbled Tom. "I +thought that you were not going to leave enough +for the horses."</p> + +<p>"I don't especially like this place to camp in," +said Jim. "We are not accustomed to get in a +pocket like this. But it is too late to pull out tonight +and the horses need a rest, so we will keep +guard."</p> + +<p>"Better drown the brown rat first," remarked +Juarez to Jim. But the latter only shook his head +and laughed.</p> + +<p>The camp was made about twenty feet east of +the spring in a small grove of slender trees backed +by a high wall of steep granite, down which poured +a waterfall in the rainy season.</p> + +<p>The fire was built upon a flat rock in the centre +of the grove where there was no danger of it catching +in the grass and bushes which were dry as tinder. +If once a mountain fire was started at the end +of the dry season there would be no stopping it +until it had devastated the whole country.</p> + +<p>The light of the fire showed the usual cheery and +active scene that goes with making camp. How +many times the Frontier Boys had gone through +these preparations it is impossible to say. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> +had camped on the plains of Kansas, in the mountains +of Colorado, on the Mesas of New Mexico, +the banks of the Colorado river, and the Pampas +of Mexico. Now we find them in the coast range +of California.</p> + +<p>It was not an especially dangerous country in +which they were camped, nothing to compare with +parts of Colorado and Mexico, but never were they +in greater danger than at the present moment and +this camp promised to be their last together, except +they had unusual luck.</p> + +<p>There was a traitor in the company, and even +now four pairs of hostile eyes were watching them +as they moved in the light of the fire. The Captain +of the Sea Eagle and his three trusty men were +hidden in some bushes at the top of the pocket on +the western side.</p> + +<p>Juarez and Jim busied themselves first in looking +after their horses. Removing the saddles they +rubbed down each animal thoroughly, clear to the +fetlocks and then gave them a good feed of grain. +Jo and Tom were on the supper committee and busying +themselves making preparations for a square +meal. Manuello, who had been with the boys on +the other side of the range and was accustomed to +help in odd chores about camp, now offered to aid +in getting the supper.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I will make the coffee with your permission, +Senor Jo," he proposed.</p> + +<p>"Do you savvy it all right, Manuello?" inquired +Jo.</p> + +<p>"Ah, yes, Senor. I can make such coffee as the +Holy Father would be pleased to drink," he replied +with fervor.</p> + +<p>"Not too strong because it keeps me awake," protested +Tom.</p> + +<p>"No, no, Senor Thomas," replied Manuello +with a sweeping bow, "the coffee I make is very +soothing. It will give you a long, soft sleep." +There was an undertone of subtle irony that was +entirely lost upon the two straightforward boys.</p> + +<p>"That's a good fellow, Manuello," said Jo, cordially, +and he handed the coffee pot filled with +water to the Mexican, who went about the preparation +of it with a deftness that showed that he knew +what he was about. Not one of the boys saw him +slip a white powder into the coffee pot. It quickly +dissolved and the coffee began to bubble innocently +enough under the eyes of the hunchback Manuello.</p> + +<p>Juarez and Jim just then came back from looking +after the horses which were fastened near the wall +of rock. As soon as Juarez saw the Mexican +watching over the coffee pot, his eyes narrowed +with suspicion.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Who made the coffee?" he asked Jo, bluntly.</p> + +<p>"Manuello," replied Jo.</p> + +<p>"The Senor will find the coffee truly delicious," +said the hunchback with a bow, "only the Mexican +knows how to keep its aroma when boiling it."</p> + +<p>"Humph," grunted Juarez, and he went deliberately +to the fire and lifted the coffee pot off and +poured its contents on the ground.</p> + +<p>"The American does not care for the aroma of +your Mexican coffee," he said coolly.</p> + +<p>The Mexican merely gave a peculiar hitch to his +shoulder, spat on the ground and turned away apparently +mortally offended as he, no doubt, was. +That part of his scheme had been blocked by the +craftiness of Juarez, but the Captain might make +good where his spy had failed.</p> + +<p>The Mexican sat back in the shadow on a rock +smoking a cigarette, while the boys ate their +supper of beans, meat, bread and coffee. He was +the skeleton at the feast as it were, not only his +malignant humor made itself felt, but there was a +sense of depression that they could not shake off, +try as they would.</p> + +<p>This was so unusual that they could not account +for it. As a rule, they were jolly and even when +danger was impending, they felt a certain confidence +and assurance, but not so tonight.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What makes us feel so on the bum tonight, do +you suppose?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"Maybe this canyon is haunted," proposed Jo, +who had an imaginative streak in him.</p> + +<p>"I tell you the way I figure it," said Jim. "We +are not used to camping in a hollow like this, for +before this we have always selected a place that +we could defend, and though there is no particular +danger from outlaws or Indians in these mountains, +we can't shake off our old habits."</p> + +<p>"I believe there is something in that," acquiesced +Jo.</p> + +<p>"It's that rat over there," said Juarez loudly.</p> + +<p>The Mexican laughed coolly and insolently, and +lighted another cigarette. This would have maddened +an excitable person, but Juarez was in a +stoical mood and he contented himself with flinging +a bone that he had been gnawing at, carelessly +over his shoulder, almost striking the Mexican in +the face.</p> + +<p>This set that peppery individual wild and he tore +around considerably, tearing his hair, stamping his +feet and sputtering with maledictions at the insult +that had been offered him.</p> + +<p>"I am no dog that you can throw a bone to," +and he sizzled off into a string of unpleasant remarks.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Here you, Manuello," roared Jim, rising to his +feet and standing over the Mexican, "not another +yelp out of you."</p> + +<p>Manuello had a respect for this big American +lad much as he despised his simplicity and he +sobered down. Besides he had not finished his +work for the night. He had failed to get the sleeping +drug to the boys in the coffee and now he must +be ready to help his master, Captain Broom of the +Sea Eagle, in some other way.</p> + +<p>There was a person whom he feared and admired +absolutely and he had been a most useful spy and +agent for the Skipper in certain nefarious plots. +It was well for the little hunchback that no one +knew of his share in the betraying of old Juan Sebastian +some years before.</p> + +<p>"You will have the first watch, Jo," ordered Jim. +"It is now nine o'clock. I will relieve you at +eleven and stand guard until two. Juarez from +two until five and Tom can have the short watch."</p> + +<p>According to this arrangement, Jim and Juarez +would be on guard during the danger hours.</p> + +<p>How many times in the past had the boys stood +guard over their camp. Was this to be the last +guard? There were the old Kansas days, when +they had to be on the watch against horse thieves. +Then came the dangerous crisis in their Colorado<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> +experiences, when they had to guard against the +wiles of the Indians. And most exciting of all, +perhaps, the night in old Mexico when they camped +on the trail of the outlaws. I wonder if Jo, the +first on duty, thought of these old times that night. +Probably not, his mind being fully occupied with +the business in hand.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>THE ATTACK</h3> + + +<p>So the three boys rolled into their blankets with +the saddles for pillows and dropped immediately to +sleep as they were very tired from the long, hard +ride. They lay at different points around the fire, +which was allowed to die down as the fog seemed +like a warm gray blanket over the whole landscape.</p> + +<p>Jo sat on a log by the slowly dying fire, with his +rifle on his knees looking into the darkness and not +far from him lay the Mexican a mere dark lump +on the ground, apparently asleep, but keeping a +wary eye on all around. Imperceptibly he crept +nearer to where Jo was sitting, but he did not have +the weapon he would have preferred in his hand, +the stiletto, which was as natural to him as the +fangs to a rattlesnake.</p> + +<p>But it did not suit the long-headed Captain +Broom to have the boys killed. He wanted their +life as well as their money, but in a different sense +than the adage has it. From what he had heard of +them, they were boys of unusual mettle and varied<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span> +acquirements. If caught young, he could train +them to good purpose. If they proved worthless, +he would hold them for ransom.</p> + +<p>So Captain Broom had told Manuello briefly and +to the point that there was to be no rib-sticking and +the Mexican would have thought as soon of disobeying +the commands of the Evil One as of going +contrary to the instructions of the Captain. So as +he crept towards Jo, he held not a poniard in his +clenched hand, but a heavy weapon like a black-jack, +made of leather with a weight at the end.</p> + +<p>Jo, however, spoiled his first attempt, for when +the greaser had got within striking distance, Jo got +up and went down to the pool to get a drink. If it +had not been so dark, when they arrived, the boys +would have seen tracks around the pool that would +have aroused their suspicions. But everything +seemed to work against them this time.</p> + +<p>Jo stooped down at the brink and scarcely put +his thirsty lips to the water when some instinct of +warning made him look quickly around and he saw +a small dark object directly back of him.</p> + +<p>"Pardon, Senor, for startling you;" it was the +voice of the dwarf, "but I, too, was very thirsty. It +is in the air."</p> + +<p>"You needn't have been so quiet about it," said +Jo, crossly. This little rat always had a way of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> +baffling and irritating him, because he did not have +Jim's force, which could beat down the dwarf when +occasion demanded it, or the stoicism of Juarez, +which blocked the hunchback.</p> + +<p>"I came softly, Senor," said the Mexican, imperturbably, +"because I did not wish to disturb the +slumbers of the Senors who are resting."</p> + +<p>"Get down and drink, then," said Jo, who, +though he realized that the Mexican was up to +some hidden deviltry, did not know how to meet +him. Jim and Juarez would have knocked him out +of the camp if they had discovered him trailing +them, with a warning that he would be shot if he +put in an appearance again.</p> + +<p>While the Mexican was pretending to drink, Jo +satisfied his thirst at a point of the pool where he +would be safe from a sudden attack by the hunchback. +For Jo was not a fool by any means. Then +he got to his feet and with the Mexican ahead of +him, he saw to that, he made his way back to the +camp.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had Jo seated himself upon the rock +again than he heard a stick snap upon the mountain +side above the horses, so he got to his feet to investigate.</p> + +<p>"You can stay where you are, Manuello," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span> +Jo. "I don't need your company this time." The +Mexican laughed softly to himself.</p> + +<p>"I hope the Senor Americano will not get lonesome," +he said.</p> + +<p>Jo made a careful search in the direction of the +sound but found no sign of a human being lurking +among the trees. Though he felt exceedingly +nervous, he was unable to account therefor or give +a reason.</p> + +<p>Very quietly he went the rounds, so as not to +awake the boys, who, however, were sleeping heavily. +He found the horses all right standing with +drooping heads as though dozing, Jo's black with +his neck over Tom's bay, as these horses were +great chums. But Caliente and Juarez's roan were +not sociable and kept strictly to themselves.</p> + +<p>Then Jo returned to the rock where he had been +sitting. He stirred the dying fire so that it sent up +a feeble spurt of flame by the aid of which he +looked at his watch. It lacked a few minutes of +ten. The Mexican had taken up his old place on +the ground watching for his chance. He was +anxious that the attack should take place during +Jo's watch for he had his doubts in regard to +Juarez or the redoubtable Jim proving easy victims.</p> + +<p>All this time, Captain Bill Broom and his crew +had been keeping watch upon their intended victims<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span> +from the top of the cliff above the pool. They +could see every move from the time the Frontier +Boys had arrived until they lay down near the +smouldering fire.</p> + +<p>"They are a husky lot," was the Captain's first +comment. "That tall fellar, I guess, is a horse +tamer and Injun fighter."</p> + +<p>Some time later when the altercation occurred +about the coffee and Juarez expressed his opinion +about the Mexican, the Captain could scarcely keep +from haw-hawing right out.</p> + +<p>"Them fellars have got some dis'pline," commented +the saturnine mate.</p> + +<p>"You're right they hev," said the Captain.</p> + +<p>"That lad don't know how to handle my pet +rattlesnake," was the Captain's comment when the +Mexican trailed Jo to the drinking pool. After +Jo had returned from making his rounds and had +resumed his guard again, the Captain decided that +the time had come for action.</p> + +<p>"Now, lads," he ordered, "pull off your shoes +and the first man that makes a sound will get his +neck cracked. Knock 'em out, if necessary, but +no killing this time."</p> + +<p>Then they started, the Captain in the lead, and +old Pete bringing up the rear. They had had a +good many hours in that vicinity and had made a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span> +path from their hiding place to the soft dust trail. +So they moved in their sock feet without a sound. +There was an oppressive stillness in that dark canyon +under the heavy blanket of fog.</p> + +<p>Already it had began to lower and as the sailors +advanced with snail-like slowness the heavy white +fog settled down, filling the canyon with its white +opaqueness. You could not see five feet in front, +and the moisture beaded itself upon the eyebrows +and mustaches of the men.</p> + +<p>This dense fog was a great help to the attacking +party. They had now crawled half way down +the main trail, when Pete came near putting all the +fat in the fire, for his eyesight was not overly keen, +and the fog made it more difficult for him. He did +not see a round stone poised on the edge of the +trail until it rolled down towards the pool.</p> + +<p>Although every sound was deadened by the fog, +still the watchful Jo heard it distinctly. He got +quickly to his feet and, with soft moccasined tread +he went in the direction of the sound, his pistol in +his hand.</p> + +<p>No sooner had the stone fallen than the Captain +motioned the mate to halt. This signal was repeated +to Jack Cales, who was so hidden by the +fog that he could not see the Captain. He stopped<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> +suddenly so that old Pete tumbled over him, making +some noise.</p> + +<p>The Captain almost had a fit of apoplexy because +he did not dare express himself at this interesting +juncture. Jo had heard the noise on the trail and +his suspicions centered in that direction. Noiselessly +he went up with slight footprints in the +damp dust of the trail. The Captain waited his +coming, crouched behind a bend in the trail.</p> + +<p>Then Jo saw a huge figure rising suddenly out +of the fog in front of him and, before he could fire, +a great hand gripped for his throat, but if he could +not shoot in defense, at least he could give his comrades +warning. He fired one shot, and then he was +overpowered.</p> + +<p>Jim and Juarez heard it instantly. Then Manuello +got in some of his work. Before Juarez +could rise, he struck him a vicious blow upon the +head that stunned him, rendering him unconscious. +Cold with fury, Jim picked up the rat of a Mexican +before he could land a blow upon him, whirled +him over his head and dashed him upon the ground.</p> + +<p>Then he sprang through the fog in the direction +of the shot. He heard Jo groan as the ruffians +overpowered him and he leaped up the trail blind +with a fighting rage. The Captain had just got up<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> +from the struggle with Jo, who lay as good as dead +in the trail.</p> + +<p>Then Jim hurled himself upon him. Powerful +though he was, the Captain could not withstand the +sinewy lurch of that sudden attack and together +boy and man crashed from the trail over rocks +and through brush until with a fearful impact they +struck the trunk of a pine tree.</p> + +<p>The mate sprang swiftly down to the rescue of +his fallen master. He was a strong, sinewy man +and knew how to act in an emergency.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>"HAUL IN"</h3> + + +<p>The jar of the fall had knocked out the Captain +partially and Jim had risen to give him the coup +de grace, when he heard the rush of the mate coming +down through the fog. It was a strange sensation +hearing your enemy but not able to see him.</p> + +<p>Then the mate plunged into view, a dark ball +through the opaqueness. He could not have +stopped if he had so desired and it was evident that +he did not wish to. For, with lowered head, he +came for Jim as he would for an ugly sailor.</p> + +<p>Jim stopped him with his shoulder and ripped in +a right uppercut with his keen hard fist that would +have stopped the heart action of an ordinary man, +and it sent the seasoned mate back upon his +haunches, partially dazed. Feeling the Captain +squirming back to life, he planted a back blow with +his heel in the latter's stomach that took the wind +out of the Captain's sails for the time being. The +mate, a really hardy individual, had made good use<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span> +of the brief respite and, picking up a heavy stick, +came for Jim with it.</p> + +<p>The latter dodged the blow aimed at his head +and it glanced off his shoulder. Then he closed +with the sailor, struggling to put him out. Three +seconds more and Jim would have landed the +proper blow, had not Jack Cales arrived upon the +scene under cover of the mêlée. Before Jim could +turn to meet this new assailant, a stone crashed +against his head—and the frontier boys had lost.</p> + +<p>The Captain had now recovered sufficiently to +get on his feet, and the fallen Jim was kicked until +the Captain himself called a halt.</p> + +<p>"Wait till we get him on board ship, lads," he +said, "and we will finish this job."</p> + +<p>"Better get the other two, Cap'n," advised the +mate.</p> + +<p>So they dragged the prostrate Jim to the foot of +the trail near where the drinking pool was and went +to look for Juarez and Tom. They saw a small +black object crawling towards them through the +fog.</p> + +<p>"What's this a coming?" asked Jack Cales.</p> + +<p>"Why, it's my Mexican ferret," said the Captain. +"What's the matter, Manuello?" he asked as he +turned him over none too gently with his foot.</p> + +<p>"The big Senor throw me over his head and on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> +the ground. I think I crack the world open," he +explained. The Captain roared with laughter.</p> + +<p>"Where is the rest of this dangerous gang?" he +asked.</p> + +<p>"I will show you," he said, struggling to his feet. +The presence of his master gave him strength and +confidence. "This way, Senor Captain."</p> + +<p>He brought them to where Juarez lay upon the +ground, partially held up by Tom, who had been +crying and endeavoring to bring his comrade back +to consciousness from the ugly blow that the Mexican +had given him. I am sure that none could +blame Tom for tears upon this occasion for it was +calculated to try the heart of the stoutest.</p> + +<p>"Why, this boy looks like an Indian," said the +Captain regarding Juarez closely.</p> + +<p>"He lived with the Indians when a boy, Senor +Captain," volunteered the dwarf, who by subtle +means of his own had become possessed of the +history of the four boys.</p> + +<p>"He don't seem to be much more than a boy, +now," said the Captain. They had not paid much +attention to Tom because he seemed a mere kid, +but the hunchback was not to be caught napping, +for he had worked around back of Tom, and as +the latter aimed his revolver at the Captain, having +worked it cautiously out of his holster, the dwarf<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> +grabbed him in the nick of time else the expedition +would have lost its head.</p> + +<p>Instead of being infuriated as one might have +expected, the Captain was decidedly amused at the +temerity of the youngster, for that is all Tom +appeared to him, and, therefore, he did not hand +him a beating.</p> + +<p>"The nerve of the little rooster," guffawed the +Captain. "I'll make a real pirate out of you."</p> + +<p>Tom struggled wildly, but it was no use, as +Jack Cales and the mate disarmed him. Just then +there came a loud yell from up the trail.</p> + +<p>"Haul in, Cap'n!" It was Old Pete's well known +and melodious voice.</p> + +<p>"Jack, go and see what the old cuss wants," ordered +the Captain. "I expect that the lad up there +is trying to kidnap Pete."</p> + +<p>When Jack arrived on the scene, he found that +the Skipper had guessed right. For Jo had been +playing possum and was not nearly so badly hurt +as he had appeared to be.</p> + +<p>He came near escaping from his keeper and it +was only by a quick forward lunge that Pete had +grabbed him and then occurred a short struggle +in which Pete had called for help and just as Jo +had wrestled himself loose, Cales appeared and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> +grabbed him. It took both Pete and Cales quite a +while to subdue him.</p> + +<p>Finally it was accomplished and they made him +go down the trail, one on either side. At the foot +of the incline he saw the bruised and battered form +of Jim lying on the ground and a big lump came +into his throat.</p> + +<p>"You fellows will pay for this," he said, rendered +desperate by the sight of Jim. But his captors +only laughed, not realizing that the Frontier Boys +were apt to keep their word.</p> + +<p>Then they joined the main gang and Jo saw to +his dismay that Tom and Juarez were in the coils +as well as himself and that Juarez, too, had been +laid out and appeared dazed and only partially +conscious of what was going on. Thus there was +little hope of escape with the two leaders, Jim and +Juarez, done for.</p> + +<p>"Better search these beggars for their money, +Captain," suggested the mate.</p> + +<p>"It hadn't slipped my mind," replied the Skipper.</p> + +<p>Now the money and the jewels that the boys +had found in Mexico were in leather belts around +their bodies. These were soon in the possession +of the Captain, but the crew knew full well that +they would receive their share and thus it was that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span> +the Skipper gave promise of living to a ripe old +age instead of being murdered for his money.</p> + +<p>"It's about time to make a start, Cap'n," announced +the mate, and the Captain consulted his +watch by the light of a lantern. He found that +it was half-past eleven.</p> + +<p>"We won't be so long going back," he said. +"We will use their horses."</p> + +<p>This was easier said than done, for when any of +the crew approached Caliente, that noble animal +became transformed into a tiger and as he came +for them with bared teeth or whirled and kicked +out with his heels, they decided that discretion +was the better part of valor and they left him alone. +Sailors at best are not very clever horsemen.</p> + +<p>"Let me have a chance and I'll quiet him for +you," volunteered Jim gruffly. "I don't want to +see you poor fellows eaten alive."</p> + +<p>"My lad," said the Skipper solemnly, "I'm no +spring chicken and you can't catch me with any +such chaff."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>MISSOURI'S MANŒUVRE</h3> + + +<p>The other three horses proved more tractable than +Caliente, and after some skirmishing they managed +to get their new ships rigged up with the saddles +and other tackle. Now as soon as they got their +cargo aboard, they would be prepared to set sail +and to cruise over the plains. (I must use this +nautical language out of respect for Captain +Broom and his crew.)</p> + +<p>As I have said before, sailors are poor horsemen +and when it came to making fast the double +cinches, they were quite at sea, where sailors should +be, perhaps. Old Pete came near getting his head +kicked off by pulling the back cinch too tight, but +he and Captain Broom profited by their youthful +experience on a New England farm, so the horses +were finally all saddled and bridled and ready for a +flight—except Caliente. He was to be left marooned +in the lonely canyon.</p> + +<p>It was surprising to Jim and his comrades how +quietly Juarez's roan took matters, but there is no +relying on a broncho, because he always does the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span> +unexpected, and the Captain was so pleased with +his behavior that he decided to ride the animal +himself.</p> + +<p>"Now, that's what I call a well broken hoss," +he said. "I ain't so sure of the black so I will let +you cruise on him, Jack, being the most active. +I don't know what I shall do for Pete, unless I +can find him a rocking-horse."</p> + +<p>"What are you going to do with the boys?" +inquired the mate. "Have 'em walk?"</p> + +<p>"They can ride their pack mule," said the Captain +grimly.</p> + +<p>So Jo, Juarez and Jim were securely fastened +on the patient mule, while Tom rode behind the +mate upon his own horse, but no longer as master. +Then the queer procession started up the trail +through the dense fog. The Captain was in the lead, +followed by the mate with Tom, then the mule with +Pete and the Mexican dwarf guarding the animal +and its cargo, while the active Jack Cales was the +rear guard. It was exactly twelve o'clock when +they weighed anchor and sailed from the harbor +or cove in the mountain canyon.</p> + +<p>The three boys said little to each other. They +did not waste their breath with threats of what +they would do to their captors later on, but accepted +the situation with true western stoicism. But you<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span> +may be sure that their minds were active even if +their tongues said little.</p> + +<p>They were so securely tied that there was no +chance for them to make a move as their arms +were corded tight to their bodies and their feet +were tied under the belly of the mule. Unless they +had been experienced riders they would have had +a difficult time of it. But it was terribly humiliating, +especially under the insolence of the malignant +Mexican. But he did not dare do them any actual +injury, because the Skipper had given him a warning +which he did not dare to disregard. Finally, +old Pete put an end to his slurring remarks to the +prisoners, so he had to content himself with ugly +looks and frequent expectoration wherewith to +express his disgust.</p> + +<p>Before they reached the foot of the trail, Jack +Cales changed with Pete, though the latter demurred +at first, at boarding the strange black craft +with four legs, but finally consented under the urging +of Jack and the warm recommendation of the +boys, who had taken somewhat of a fancy to the +old sailor, since he had shut up the Mexican in +their behalf.</p> + +<p>"He won't hurt you, Pop," said Jim, "he is a +good horse. Any lady could ride him."</p> + +<p>"I ain't no lady," replied the old fellow suspi<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span>ciously, +as he slowly and stiffly mounted, while +Jack held his head, that is to say, the horse's +head, not Pete's.</p> + +<p>"What did he do that for?" inquired Pete, +anxiously, preparing to dismount.</p> + +<p>"Stay on, you old Barnacle," roared the Captain +from the head of the procession, for though he +could not see anything in the rear, still he seemed +able to keep an instinctive tab on his old comrade +Pete.</p> + +<p>"That horse is all right, Pop," said Jo, "and I +ought to know. I've ridden him a good many +hundred miles. Don't tickle him with your heels, +that's all."</p> + +<p>"I guess that's what I've done," admitted Pete.</p> + +<p>Then the procession resumed its march with +Pete as rear guard, riding with due caution and +circumspection as though his craft was loaded with +dynamite and liable to explode at any time. Jack +Cales tried to quiz the prisoners on the mule in a +friendly way, but they would not relax in their +attitude of grim, if not sullen, defiance towards +their captors.</p> + +<p>Captain Broom need not think that his prisoners +would ever accept any conditions from him. +Doubtless, he thought that these boys might be +trained to help him in his business for he appre<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span>ciated +their courage and fighting ability, but he did +not fully understand what stuff the frontier boys +were made of.</p> + +<p>The procession of pirates and their prisoners had +now reached the foot of the range and were in close +proximity to the ranch, but everything favored the +plans of the Skipper of the Sea Eagle. The fog +became denser when they reached the level plain +so that it was scarcely possible for the rider to see +the ears of his horse.</p> + +<p>Every sound was deadened, so that they could +have gone directly past the ranch houses and not +even the dogs would have heard them. But the +Captain was determined to take no chances, and +as soon as the party were free of the canyon, he +bore off toward the south, making quite a circuit.</p> + +<p>Anybody but an experienced navigator would +have been lost in the fog upon the plain, but you +could not lose Captain Broom either on the high +seas or the low plains. They passed between two +wooded hills, which the reader will have to take +on faith as he cannot see them. Then across a +gully, on the other side of which they came to a +barb wire fence.</p> + +<p>This did not stop them long, as the Captain cut +it and they rode through. From the footing which +was about all that could be observed, they appeared<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span> +to be in a pasture land with a gentle slope towards +the sea. The fog did not diminish in thickness and +the boys determined to escape. Here was their +chance, if they could be said to have one.</p> + +<p>"Here's where we make a break," said Jim to +Juarez. "Guide the mule alongside of Tom. Then +we will run for it." Jim did not say this in so many +words, but he had ways and means of indicating to +Juarez, who was tied directly back of him, by a sign +and poke language which Juarez was quick to seize.</p> + +<p>It seemed at every turn that his experience with +the Indians was a help to him. The mule was a +protégé of Juarez and with a word he could guide +it in any direction that he wished it to go. The +fog was one thing that favored them. The Mexican +could scarcely be seen and Jack Cales stalked +along looking like a giant through the mist.</p> + +<p>He had grown somewhat lax through the long +march. This was the time, if ever. Jim gave +Juarez the signal that all was ready. A quick word +to the mule and he trotted out from his place in +the column, knocking over the Mexican and before +Cales was fairly awake to the situation, he was +obscured by the fog.</p> + +<p>In about two seconds he had hove alongside of +the horse that the mate was on. Tom was foot-loose, +and no sooner did he see Missouri's long<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span> +ears through the fog, than he was ready for action.</p> + +<p>"Jump, Tom," urged Jim. It took only about +two seconds for Tom to execute the manœuvre.</p> + +<p>"Halt!" roared the Captain, and he tried to turn +the roan to capture the runaways, but right here, +the broncho strain in the animal showed itself.</p> + +<p>He began to buck and never in all his experience +had the redoubtable Captain Broom ever been on +so choppy a sea. It was hard to distinguish fog +from whiskers. At the second hunch upward, the +Captain shot into space. The boys did not tarry to +watch for his descent. A word from Juarez to the +mule, and Missouri turned directly south just as +Jack Cales came rushing up.</p> + +<p>"Touch him with your foot, Tom," said Juarez, +meaning the mule, not Cales. Tom's heel reached +the right spot and up flew the mule's hind feet with +the rapidity of a rapid fire-gun.</p> + +<p>One foot struck Cales on the shoulder with a +sufficient impact to send him down and out. The +mate had been involved in the cyclone of which +Captain Broom was the centre. Tom's horse, considered +the gentlest of the four, had become infected +with the roan's example and he started in +to do a little bucking on his own account. Never +since the mate had rounded Cape Horn, had he +known so much action in so short a time.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p> + +<p>The only one left was Old Pete and he came on +right gallantly, but by dodging and turning they +got away in the fog. After putting what they considered +a safe distance between themselves and +their former captors, Juarez persuaded Missouri +to halt, and Tom went to work and with great +difficulty first untied, then lifted, them to the +ground for the boys were as stiff as boards from +being tied hard and fast for so long a time.</p> + +<p>"My, but it certainly hurts," said Jo, stamping +around in an endeavor to get the blood to circulating +again. "It's just like it used to be back home +in the winter when we would go skating and get +our hands numb."</p> + +<p>"What is the matter, Juarez?" asked Jim in +alarm.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'm all right, I guess," he said in a voice +that sounded faint to the boys and far away to himself. +Then, without warning, he fell over on the +ground and stiffened out.</p> + +<p>"It's from the blow that the greaser gave him," +said Tom. "It would have killed him if it had +struck him fair."</p> + +<p>"Wait until I get my hands on him," cried Jim, +significantly.</p> + +<p>What should they do now? It was not an easy +question to decide.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>THE RANCHERO</h3> + + +<p>They could not desert Juarez and they could not +get far with him. It was enough to stagger them +and it seemed that they had reached the end of their +resources.</p> + +<p>"If it wasn't such an open country," said Jo, +"we might hide until they had got out of range and +then get to the nearest ranch."</p> + +<p>"If they overtake us we can stand them off," +saying this Jim reached for his revolver. To his +astonishment it was gone. Then he remembered +he had been disarmed by Captain Broom, and they +were absolutely defenseless unless they could depend +on Missouri's heels which had furnished them +such active protection.</p> + +<p>Finally they brought Juarez around so that he +was able to sit up.</p> + +<p>"Where am I?" he asked in a sort of daze.</p> + +<p>"You will be all right in a minute, old chap," encouraged +Jim, speaking cheerfully, but he did not +feel so.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You bet I will," he assented feebly, but with +invincible determination. "What are you holding +me for, Jim? Let's get at those fellows." It was +evident that his mind was not exactly clear yet. +They got him on his feet and he seemed better, +though still very wabbly.</p> + +<p>"There come those fellows," cried Jim, suddenly, +with more of despair in his tone than he had +ever spoken before, no matter how hard pressed +they had been. But before there had always been +something to do, but now they were helpless. Jim +looked hastily around for some weapon. All he +found was a small round stone.</p> + +<p>With a yell of exultation, Jack Cales and the +mate dashed down upon them, followed by the Captain +and old Pete. They had been able to follow +the distinctive mark of the mule's shoes in the soft +earth until they came in hearing of the boys' voices. +Then they jumped upon them. They were out for +blood this time, for they had the boys' revolvers in +their hands, probably because they were better than +their own.</p> + +<p>Missouri, finding himself free, made off. Tom +halted when covered by one of the sailor's revolvers, +but Jim dodged as the mate fired at him. The +lug of lead spattered the mud between his feet, the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span> +next second he was off full speed through the fog, +followed by fleet Jo.</p> + +<p>The sailors soon gave up the useless chase, for +there was no trail to guide them, so they had to +content themselves with half of their original capture +and they started for the cove where the Sea +Eagle was anchored as fast as they could go, +though they were hampered by Juarez.</p> + +<p>"Better leave him, Captain," urged old Pete. +"He is nothing but a nuisance."</p> + +<p>"I'll have use for that fellow yet," said the Captain. +"As for the other lad, he won't feel so lively +after a few days on shipboard."</p> + +<p>This did not have a very cheerful sound for Tom +and he was in anything but a happy frame of mind. +Still he had great confidence in Jim and did not +give up hope of being rescued before the coast was +reached. It was now getting towards daybreak, +and the fog began to lift somewhat so that they +could see a distance of thirty or forty yards.</p> + +<p>Captain Broom's gang had now left the region +of the level pasture and were coming to the brush +section, fringing the coast, and beyond that they +reached the sand dunes. The nearer they came to +the sea the more depressed Tom became. The only +thing that encouraged him was the fact that Juarez +began to seem like himself.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p> + +<p>Let us now return to Jo and Jim, who had been +so fortunate as to make their escape. As soon as +they were sure that the pursuit was at an end, they +slowed down to a walk.</p> + +<p>"Well, they didn't give us much of a chase," +remarked Jim.</p> + +<p>"Plenty to suit me. What are we going to do +now?"</p> + +<p>"This fog is beginning to lift," said Jim, "and +then we can take our bearings. I want to locate +this ranch the first thing, and then we can get +help."</p> + +<p>"Here's a wire fence," announced Jo, "I reckon +it's the one the old geser cut."</p> + +<p>"It surely is and a straight course north is our +direction," remarked Jim.</p> + +<p>"Here are hills that look like those we rode +through," said Jo.</p> + +<p>"We will soon be there now," was Jim's cheerful +comment "What's that? It sounds like a dog +barking." They stopped, listening intently, as the +sound came faint, but there was no mistaking it.</p> + +<p>"I suppose it's some big hound, that they usually +keep on these ranches," said Jo, who was beginning +to feel depressed from hunger and fatigue, "and +he will jump at us because we haven't any +weapons."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span></p> + +<p>But in spite of Jo's fear they hurried on in the +direction of the sound. In a short time, they came +to a road between two barb wire fences, which the +reader will remember that the Captain and his crew +took when they were coming through the Sebastian +ranch. But the boys struck it higher up, and were +soon in the pasture that sloped down from the ranch +houses toward the road.</p> + +<p>Jim and Jo now heard the voices of men as well +as the baying of the dogs. The men were talking +excitedly about the finding of one of their number +in the canyon tied and gagged, and it was evident +that it was not a good time for strangers to +visit the ranch of the Sebastians.</p> + +<p>But Jim and Jo were dulled to danger and did +not care what risk they ran and so they called to the +men in a friendly Spanish greeting. There was +instantly a great hubbub, and two men charged +down upon them, preceded by a couple of fierce-looking +mongrels. These came dashing for them +with red, gaping mouths. The boys defended +themselves gallantly with two stout sticks that they +had picked up. Then the two Mexicans took a +hand.</p> + +<p>"Look out, Jo," cried Jim, who was ever on the +alert. "That fellow is going to throw his lasso." +Jo dodged just in the nick of time, but this gave<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> +one of the dogs a chance, and if Jim had not +stunned him by a resounding crack on the head it +would have gone hard with his brother.</p> + +<p>Just then another man appeared on the scene, attracted +from the vicinity of the house by the noise +of the encounter. He came full speed on a splendid +sorrel. It was Juan Sebastian, a dark, handsome +young man, a true son of Spain.</p> + +<p>"What's all this?" he cried as he rode up. "Here, +Sancho, Jan, you brutes, come off." The dogs +slunk obediently to heel.</p> + +<p>"We found those insolent Gringoes," said one of +the men, "coming straight for the Senor's house. +We undertook to stop them."</p> + +<p>"Senor," said Jim, bowing low and speaking in +his best Spanish, "we are sorry, my brother and I, +to have caused this disturbance. We are strangers +and unfortunate, and we have heard of your +hospitality, Senor"—Jim bowed again. He was +not so simple, after all.</p> + +<p>The Senor Sebastian returned the bow with +more grace than Jim could command.</p> + +<p>"I regret, Senor—" he hesitated.</p> + +<p>"Darlington," added Jim.</p> + +<p>"Senor Darlington, that you have been attacked +in this manner, but there has been a party +of desperadoes that have been overrunning this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> +part of the country for the past two days, and +they took one of my men and bound and gagged +him and so you see, Senors," a smile and bow +completed the Spanish gentleman's apology perfectly.</p> + +<p>"We have just escaped, not more than an hour +ago, from these same desperadoes," said Jim. +"They have taken my brother and friend with +them towards the coast."</p> + +<p>"We will saddle and overtake them," promised +the Senor, "after we have had breakfast."</p> + +<p>Jim was stunned by this gentle sort of procrastination.</p> + +<p>"But, Senor," he said gravely, "we will not be +able to overtake them if we do not start immediately. +Pardon my abruptness, but I cannot rest +while there are two of my party prisoners in the +hands of this gang of cut-throats."</p> + +<p>"It is to be perfectly understood," replied the +Spaniard with no less gravity, "we will make +haste, but first we will eat while the servants are +getting two of the horses ready for you and your +brother."</p> + +<p>This was not Jim's idea of making haste by a +long shot, but he was enough of a traveler to +recognize that the ways of men and nations differed +and that nothing was to be gained by going<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span> +against the grain of a national characteristic. So +while fuming inwardly, he was outwardly quiet +and composed. He argued, too, that it was not +likely the pirate gang would retain the captured +prisoners. Later, when they were themselves at +a safe distance they would set free the others.</p> + +<p>As they went towards the house, the Spaniard +dismounted and walked with them, giving his +horse into the charge of one of the men, with directions +to bring two other horses to the house. +There was an unmistakable courtesy in doing this +and the boys appreciated it. They could not help +but contrast their appearance with that of the +Spaniard. He was not gaudily dressed like a +vaquero, but everything he wore was possessed +of a certain richness and was not lacking in color. +He truly was a Prince of the South in appearance +as well as in courtesy.</p> + +<p>Jim and Jo were disreputable beyond words. +Their clothes were muddy, torn and disheveled, +their faces so grimed that it was hard to tell their +original color, and there were blotches of blood +upon their clothes as well as faces and hands. +But, though they looked worse than tramps, there +was something straightforward in their manner +and their way of speech that the Spaniard was +quick to recognize.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span></p> + +<p>As they walked along the Spaniard explained +that his household had been unusually disturbed +that morning. His mother, he said, was an invalid, +and had escaped from her attendant. Some +mental trouble, he briefly mentioned as the cause +of the elderly lady's worriment. Evidently, he did +not connect the tragedy in his own life, in which +his father's life was sacrificed, with the boys' antagonist. +His mother, he assured them, had been +found and was returned to her home.</p> + +<p>The boys now had a good view of the house, +as they approached it. The fog having lifted, +they could take in the whole situation. The structure +itself was of adobe, of the early California +type, low, with broad verandas, and built on four +sides around a court with a fountain in the centre, +with fish in the basin, and grass around it. +There were beautiful rose-tree bushes with gold +and red clusters growing over the corners of the +house.</p> + +<p>From the verandah there was a beautiful view +looking off over the surrounding country. The +house itself stood on a rise of ground that sloped +gently from the plain below. Back of it rose the +mountains of the coast range, while in the distance +glittered the broad breadths of the Pacific, shining<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> +like an azure floor. As far as eye could see was +the domain of this great ranch. It was, indeed, a +princely estate, and one of which the Senor Sebastian +might well be proud. Those were the days +of romance and of charm in the land of Southern +California.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>A NEW FRIEND</h3> + + +<p>The servants eyed the two boys curiously as +they stepped upon the verandah and the brothers +were not reassured by any looks of friendliness, +though they were outwardly courteous. A withered +looking old woman, who looked to Jim as +though she had Indian blood showed the boys to +a room, where they could wash up.</p> + +<p>"Jove! Doesn't it dazzle your eyes, Jo?" exclaimed +Jim, "to see a real room, with a bed and +a white spread, with those starched things where +the pillows ought to be."</p> + +<p>"This room would certainly please Aunt +Maria," remarked Jo. "That four poster bed +with the canopy over it, is an old timer, I'll warrant +you."</p> + +<p>"If I slept in this room," said Jim, "I would +make a low bow to the bed and then roll up in my +blanket and go to sleep on the floor."</p> + +<p>"How do I look?" asked Jo, after he had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> +rubbed and scrubbed his face for a long time.</p> + +<p>"You have got off the first layer," replied Jim, +"and look about the color of a half-breed. Let +me try my hand at polishing up."</p> + +<p>"It will take you a week," remarked Jo discouragingly.</p> + +<p>It cannot be truly said that they looked ornamental +even when they were clean, for Jim's face +was badly torn, one side of it being scraped raw. +He got this memento when he tackled the Captain +and fell down into the canyon with him. One +eye was blackened and the other cheek bruised. +These disadvantages were not to be overcome in +a short time.</p> + +<p>Jo was somewhat more presentable, but he, too, +showed signs of the rough time that they had had +with the Captain and his "merry" crew. But in +spite of all this, there was something in their bearing, +an honest hardihood and manliness that could +not be discounted by torn clothes and bruised +faces.</p> + +<p>"This room looks dirty, now," said Jo, "I'm +ashamed to leave it like this."</p> + +<p>"We will go outside to brush off our clothes," +proposed Jim, "and I'm going to empty this dirty +water myself." He started out with it when he +met one of the servants in the hall. With many<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> +explanations, numerous gestures and much excitement, +she took the pail from Jim and disappeared +with it.</p> + +<p>"They won't let you do anything for yourself +here, Jo," reported Jim, returning to the room.</p> + +<p>This was correct and the boys noticed afterwards +that the servants regarded them with odd +expressions of amusement and it was evident to +the sensitive Jo that they were being "guyed" by +them, to use a modern expression. The boys +being American lads, were self-reliant, and were +accustomed to do everything for themselves, and, +unknowingly they had gone counter to a custom +of constant service of the Spaniards. It was to +demean oneself, according to their code, to do any +menial work.</p> + +<p>"Might as well start for the dining room," proposed +Jo. "I hate leaving Tom and Juarez to +their fate this way."</p> + +<p>"I more than hate it," protested Jim, "but as +you can't hurry these people, we will make the +best time by falling in with their way of doing +business."</p> + +<p>Then they went out into a passageway and, taking +the wrong turn, which was quite easy in the +rambling old house, they came to a door that entered +into the courtyard.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span></p> + +<p>"My, but this is beautiful," exclaimed Jo. "It +makes you appreciate California better when you +see a place like this."</p> + +<p>"That hammock looks good to me," said Jim. +"I would like to stretch out in it right now."</p> + +<p>Just then the door opened on the verandah and a +really beautiful young girl stepped out. She was +probably seventeen years of age, dressed in white, +with a black mantilla over her equally black hair +and her dark cheeks glowed with color. A very +romantic meeting, Messieurs, the gallant young +Americans at one end of the verandah and the +Senorita at the other. Then she saw Jim and +Jo with their scarred and bruised faces. With a +little shriek, and clasping her hand to her eyes, +she retreated quickly to her room.</p> + +<p>"What did you do to scare that girl, Jo?" inquired +Jim severely of his brother.</p> + +<p>"Nothing," declared Jo, stoutly. "It was the +sight of your face. It would give a wooden Injun +a chill." Jim felt of the said face reflectively.</p> + +<p>"I guess you are right, Jo," he admitted, "but +you ain't so charming in appearance that you +would do any damage."</p> + +<p>"Let's walk along this side," proposed Jo. +"Perhaps we will locate the breakfast."</p> + +<p>"All right," agreed Jim.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p> + +<p>So they stalked along, more or less conscious +that a pair of dark blue eyes were regarding them, +and they thought they heard a trill of +laughter, but it might have been one of the maids. +They need not have felt embarrassed for there +was the grace in their movements that goes with +strength and youth and suppleness.</p> + +<p>They were walking under a perfect bower of +flowers anyway. For this side was beautifully latticed +and over the lattice work grew vines with +purple and golden flowers, that would give a +grateful shade when the California sun would +drive the fog away.</p> + +<p>Under foot there was a double flagging of +stone with trodden dirt on either side.</p> + +<p>"I don't see a broom anywhere," said Jo.</p> + +<p>Just then they heard the voice of Senor Sebastian +behind them and they turned quickly.</p> + +<p>"I had begun to fear, Senors, that you had become +lost again."</p> + +<p>"We were, partially, Senor."</p> + +<p>"Our simple breakfast is ready now if you are," +he said.</p> + +<p>"We will have to brush the dirt off before we +can go in," protested Jim.</p> + +<p>"Antonio bring a brush," called the Senor. In +a moment a gray-haired, bent Mexican came with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> +a big kitchen broom. Instantly the Senor flushed +with anger.</p> + +<p>"Stupid one, my guests are not my horses. +Have a care."</p> + +<p>A suspicion flashed through Jim's mind that +the ancient servitor had brought the broom on +purpose. It was clear that the servants did not +have a very high opinion of their American visitors. +The next time he returned he had gotten +the right brush, and made a point of sneezing as +the dust flew from their mud-dried clothes. This +made Jim laugh in spite of himself.</p> + +<p>"More dust than the Sirocco brings," said Jim. +The old servitor regarded him with a cunning eye.</p> + +<p>"Si, Senor," he said, then he was seized with a +perfect convulsion of sneezing. This aroused his +master's ire.</p> + +<p>"No more of that, Antonio," he commanded, +"or it will be the lash." Antonio's cold was cured +from that moment. Jim's mouth twitched at the +corners with the humor of it but he did not laugh +now for that would be discourteous to his host.</p> + +<p>Finally the brushing was finished to the regret +of the servants, who had kept an amused eye on +Antonio's performance, while pretending to be +busy on some trivial tasks near the Patio or +court. In her own room, the Senorita was faint<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> +with laughter as she watched Antonio dusting the +two American lads.</p> + +<p>It was a simple breakfast that the boys found +prepared for them in a long, low dining-room, +with its dark beams and white plastered walls. +The coffee was excellent, with a delicate aroma, +and was probably the best that Mexico could +afford. There was a large plate of meat garnished +with peppers, and a mixed dish of vegetables +that looked odd, but that tasted deliciously. +You may be sure that Jim and Jo appreciated their +meal, and they felt invigorated when it was finished, +wishing all the while, however, that they +were on the trail of their captured comrades.</p> + +<p>"Now, Senors, the horses are at the door. They +are spirited, but I am sure that you ride well."</p> + +<p>This was a mere expression of courtesy on his +part, for he did not expect any such thing and +thought to see his guests fall off if the horses +should rise on their hind legs, as they no doubt +would, for there was not a horse on the big rancho +but what was peppery and spirited. No sooner +had the Senor spoke than Jim jumped to his feet, +putting his hand to his head.</p> + +<p>"I have forgotten about Caliente!" he exclaimed. +"It is my horse, Senor," he explained to his host.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span> +"He is up the canyon because the gang that attacked +us last night were afraid of him."</p> + +<p>"I will send for him," said the Senor.</p> + +<p>"By the pool in the pocket," said Jim. "But I +think I ought to get him myself, though I appreciate +your offer, but one's horse, you know—"</p> + +<p>"I understand perfectly."</p> + +<p>"I cannot leave him without food and water," +said Jim.</p> + +<p>"I will attend to that. I will send a trustworthy +man," and he spoke to the servant who was waiting +on the table. In a short time he returned +with a tall, sinewy man, with straight black hair +and dark skin. He gave this man the necessary +instructions and with a "Si, Senor," the man went +out.</p> + +<p>"A good reliable fellow," remarked Jim. "He +looks like an Indian."</p> + +<p>"He is an Indian," replied their host, "but of +the right kind. Your horse is in good hands."</p> + +<p>"Tell him to bring him down to the ranch," said +Jim. "I'll trust Caliente with him." The Indian +was called back and under his stolid demeanor +was an appreciation of Jim's confidence.</p> + +<p>Breakfast over they went out on the verandah, +where they could see the horses. They were spirited +looking beasts all right. One was a bay, the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> +two front legs white stockinged, very trimly built, +with a flashing eye, that he kept rolling around. +The boy who was holding him had his hands full, +as the bay would rise on his hind legs and strike +out viciously with his forefeet.</p> + +<p>The other animal was much heavier than the +bay. A brilliant black, whose coat fairly shone +with careful grooming. He had been standing +comparatively quiet until the three appeared upon +the verandah of the house, then, with a sudden +surge backward, he dragged the Mexican boy off +his feet, shaking his head viciously.</p> + +<p>"We ought to be armed, Senor," advised Jim. +"If we should overtake those men, they will put +up a desperate fight."</p> + +<p>"Certainly, Senor," he answered. "Come into +this room and select your weapon."</p> + +<p>After both Jim and Jo were armed, they went +out to the horses.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>THE PURSUIT</h3> + + +<p>All the servants seemed just now to find duties +of importance in front of the house or near it. +They had no idea of missing the chance of seeing +these Gringoes, whom they held in contempt, +thrown from their horses.</p> + +<p>Jim took the black and Jo was left the red, the +easiest to manage even if he seemed the liveliest. +Jo was too quick for his horse and before he +could whirl to one side, he was in the saddle. +Then his animal reared and plunged but Jo sat +on him as easily as a cowboy does his steed. There +was no mistaking his horsemanship. The servants +were duly and deeply disappointed.</p> + +<p>But their hopes revived when they saw Jim +tackle the black. He began that steady sideways +movement which Jim knew so well, whenever he +tried to put his foot in the stirrup. The servants +began to smile, here would be some fun. The +"Black Devil," as they called the horse, had been +known to kill men, so they had pleasant anticipa<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span>tions. +When Jim found that he could not mount +by the stirrup, he made a quick, powerful leap +and was in the saddle.</p> + +<p>"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian, but he +knew that the fight had just begun.</p> + +<p>Jo looked on with interest and perfect confidence +in brother Jim's ability. The black stood +perfectly stunned for a moment or two at being +so suddenly mounted, then he sprang into action. +With his back in a hump he shot into the air and +came down stiff-legged.</p> + +<p>Without loss of a second he went into the air +again, higher than before. From the corral the +Mexican cowboys were looking at the duel between +the horse and the boy with lively interest.</p> + +<p>"The Diablo will kill him," said one nonchalantly, +blowing a puff of smoke from his cigarette.</p> + +<p>"Five dollars that the Gringo stays on," said a +second. The wager was made and others followed, +for the Mexicans are inveterate gamblers. +The third time the horse pitched into the air, +Jim swaying with the animal's every motion as the +trained cowboy does. Finding that he could not +dislodge his rider that way, the black rose on his +hind legs to a perpendicular position.</p> + +<p>Jim knew the trick of old, and was prepared for +it. As the horse started to fall backwards, Jim<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> +who had been sticking like a leech, leaped lightly +to the ground and with all his strength, pulling +upon the bridle, slammed him to the ground. No +sooner was the horse upon his feet again than Jim +was in the saddle.</p> + +<p>Once more he tried that falling back trick and +this time Jim brought him down upon the damp +earth with a thud that jarred things. The black +devil had had enough. He stood quivering and +sweating, but for the time being subdued.</p> + +<p>"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian again, and +he shook his guest by the hand warmly. "You +are a true horseman. Now we shall go. We +shall eat up the miles."</p> + +<p>The crowd of cowboys swung their hats in a +salute to the Gringo, who could conquer the black +devil, while the house servants, disappointed at +the stranger's triumph, went back to their different +tasks.</p> + +<p>The three horsemen galloped away down the +sloping pasture, the Spaniard in advance as he +knew the country and the most direct way to the +coast. His horse was a splendid sorrel, somewhat +taller than the horse that Jim rode. And he was +a gallant figure in his leather riding suit and +peaked sombrero with a brilliant colored band +around it.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span></p> + +<p>Jim and Jo rode few yards behind the Spaniard +and side by side. Jim felt a certain exultation +in his victory over the Black before people +who would have liked to have seen him defeated. +It was exhilarating, too, this plunging gallop +ahead with a chance to rescue Tom and Juarez +and to get even with Captain Broom and his gang, +who had taken away their valuables and had given +the boys such a cruel defeat.</p> + +<p>"This is a fine horse," said Jim, "though he +hasn't the stride of Caliente."</p> + +<p>"He is a beauty, when it comes to bucking," +Jo commented. "There is nothing the matter +with this bay but my black can beat him for +speed."</p> + +<p>So they flew on, the speed of their steeds blowing +back their horses' manes, and the fresh air from +the sea bringing a feeling of hope to their +hearts, that they would yet be able to overtake +the pirates, and rescue their comrades in distress. +Their horses' feet were devouring the +miles.</p> + +<p>"We stand a chance to get 'em at this rate," +shouted Jim.</p> + +<p>"Won't it be fine if we can all sit down to +dinner tonight?" replied Jo. "I bet that Tom and +Juarez would enjoy a square meal with the Senor<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> +at the ranch house. Ifs kind of nice to be civilized +once in a while."</p> + +<p>"You're right, it is," declared Jim emphatically.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if there isn't a store around here +where we could buy some clothes," inquired Jo, +anxiously. "We look too disreputable to appear +in polite society."</p> + +<p>"Thinking about that girl, I suppose?" remarked +Jim with brotherly intuition.</p> + +<p>"I wouldn't be so sure if I were you," replied +Jo evasively. "How about the Senorita down +in Mexico who threw you the rose at the castle?" +This reference to the Senorita Cordova whom +the Frontier Boys had rescued in Mexico, checked +Jim from getting too gay for he still had a tender +place in his memory for her.</p> + +<p>The fog by this time was entirely dissipated, +and they could see by certain white or rather light +spots in the clouds where the sun was going to +break through and an absolutely clear day would +result. The three riders had now reached the +brush region that began a few miles from the +coast and they were compelled to go more +slowly.</p> + +<p>But if they had only known what was going on +not more than two miles away from where they +were, they would not have slackened speed no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> +matter what risk they ran. For Captain Broom +and his crew with the two captives had arrived at +the cove and old Pete and Jack Cales were going +into the cave for the boat.</p> + +<p>There was a chance, but the Senor and his companions +must hurry. Some mishap to the pirates' +expedition just at this point and the frontier boys +would win. Tom and Juarez might have sung the +tune that they had often sung before in camp.</p> + +<div class='poem'> +"Tramp, tramp, tramp, the boys are marching,<br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Cheer up, comrades, they will come,</span><br /> +And beneath the starry flag<br /> +We will breathe the air again<br /> +<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Of freedom in our own beloved home."</span><br /> +</div> + +<p>But they did not know and they sat miserable +and dejected upon the damp sand of the beach, +not knowing that Jim and Jo were coming nearer +every second. Then there came an accident, +though a slight one, that gave the pursuers a +chance.</p> + +<p>Old Pete was carrying one end of the boat. He +was nervous, anyway, in regard to the cave and +its grewsome contents, thought he saw some dark +spectre coming for him out of the blackness of the +cave and he dropped his end of the boat and +scudded for the beach.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p> + +<p>The Captain was furious, giving him a blow +that sent him spinning half way down to the +water, and he and the mate rushed back to see +what damage the boat had suffered. It was only +slightly stove in, but every second was precious. +The pursuers were only a mile away.</p> + +<p>Jim began to grow restless as they neared the +coast. He seemed to feel that they were nearing +the enemy, and at his urging, the Spaniard, who +had an increased respect and liking for Jim ever +since he had conquered Black Diablo, put his horse +to the gallop, and away they went along the narrow +winding path through the bushes.</p> + +<p>The branches whipt them, but they paid no attention, +but on they went; it was evident that they +made considerable racket and Captain Broom, +with a fierce burst of energy for which he was +famous, got the boat launched, the two prisoners +in, and with himself and the mate at the oars, +made the boat leap forward over the lazy rolling +swell towards the graceful Sea Eagle.</p> + +<p>When they had reached a point half-way to the +vessel, the horsemen came tearing through the +last screen of brush onto the yellow sand. The +enemy had escaped by the skin of its teeth and it +was heart-rending to see Tom and Juarez being<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> +carried away from them at every stroke of the +oars towards their black prison. Jim put up his +hands to his mouth and yelled:</p> + +<p>"We will rescue you, boys. Don't give up. +We'll get 'em yet."</p> + +<p>A derisive yell greeted this challenge and one of +the men in the boat fired at the group on the +shore, but the bullet fell harmlessly short. They +did not dare to fire in return lest they hit either +Tom or Juarez.</p> + +<p>"They have steam up on board," observed Jim. +"But I see one chance to do some execution."</p> + +<p>It was this. The Sea Eagle was anchored close +under a cliff on the northern side of the cove. So +Jim slipped off his horse, for the way on that side +was impracticable except on foot. It was hard +going at that, especially as there were a good +many cacti with their wretched thorns.</p> + +<p>Jim stepped gingerly along over the rocks, gliding +through the bushes until at last he reached +a point above the vessel where he could almost +look down upon her decks. The boat from the +shore had just come alongside and the prisoners +were hustled into the cabin and the door locked. +Tom and Juarez were a dejected-looking pair and +it made Jim's heart ache to see them.</p> + +<p>The Captain went upon the quarter-deck and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span> +gave an order to the man at the wheel. The +anchor had already been weighed. Slowly and +gracefully the Sea Eagle turned, and there stood +Captain Broom, as big as life upon the bridge. +Why did not Jim fire? Because he had come to +a certain wise conclusion.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE</h3> + + +<p>As Jim had raised his revolver to fire, a sudden +idea came to him. In the first place he rebelled +instinctively from shooting a man down in cold +blood from ambush, even if he was as desperate +and crime-stained a character as Captain Bill +Broom, besides it would not save Tom and Juarez +and only make their captivity harder to endure, +if any injury was done the Captain.</p> + +<p>Another thing, Jim was sure that if he began +the attack that his two comrades would be used +as shields to protect the man at the wheel, so that +the Sea Eagle could be navigated safely out of the +cove. He saw with interest the narrow place between +two lines of foam above hidden ledges +where the boat must pass in order to reach the +open sea. He marvelled at the temerity of Captain +Broom in daring to bring his ship through +such a place.</p> + +<p>Then a brilliant thought came to him, a sudden +stroke that might turn defeat into victory. The<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span> +Sea Eagle was now making straight for the narrow +channel. Jim slipped back for a short distance +an ran as rapidly as he could to a point +a little to the west of where he had first hidden. +He did not have long to wait. The Sea Eagle +was almost directly opposite his place of ambush, +and was just sticking her nose into the narrow +passage.</p> + +<p>Jim raised his revolver and took careful aim +and fired. The man at the wheel gave a yell and +clapped his hand to the shoulder, letting go the +wheel and the nose of the little steamer swung +toward the rock. A swell lifted her bow clear +by a few inches, and the Captain caught the +steamer by the wheel and brought her to a course.</p> + +<p>"Bring those boys up on deck and shoot them +if that black-haired devil," (meaning Jim) "fires +another shot," he called to the mate.</p> + +<p>That worthy was not slow to obey the order, +he had them on deck in full sight in a jiffy and +held a pistol at Tom's head. Jim had raised his +arm to fire at the Captain when he heard his order +and it was as if he had been paralyzed. He knew +that Tom and Juarez would have been killed to a +certainty if he fired another shot.</p> + +<p>Luck had broken against him again, for that +was all that had kept the Sea Eagle from going on<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> +the reef, where if she had not been wrecked, she +and her crew would have been at the mercy of the +men on shore. Just the lifting of the wave had +saved the vessel by a few inches, that, and Captain +Broom's quick and skillful action.</p> + +<p>The second round of the contest had gone in +favor of the pirate and his crew, but only by a +shade as it were. But it would not surprise me a +bit if Jim evened up matters in the third and final +round. Let us hope so, at least, for that will give +a silver lining to the black cloud that had rolled +over the boys' fortunes at this particular time.</p> + +<p>Jim made his way slowly back to where Jo and +the Senor were waiting for him on the beach. He +was despondent over the failure of his plans by so +close a margin, and the sight of Tom and Juarez +helpless on the deck in the hands of these sea-coast +pirates, was always before his eyes.</p> + +<p>"What were you trying to do, Jim?" inquired +Jo, "Sink the ship?" Before Jim could reply, the +Spaniard gave a cry of warning.</p> + +<p>"Look out, they are going to shoot."</p> + +<p>Glancing toward the Sea Eagle, which was now +a half mile from shore, they saw a puff of smoke, +and then a shell struck into the beach below them +and exploding, sent a shower of sand over them +and the horses. The latter, frightened, reared and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> +plunged, but the boys soon got their animals under +control, as they quickly tired of acting up in the +heavy sand. Jim shook his fist in the direction of +the Sea Eagle.</p> + +<p>"Curse your insolence!" he yelled. "I'll make +every one of you eat crow, you miserable +hounds!"</p> + +<p>Jim looked ugly, his eyes glared with concentrated +fury and the veins on his temple were swollen +and throbbing. Unthinkingly, he pulled back +hard upon the bit, sending his horse up in the air.</p> + +<p>"Easy, boy," he said, soothingly. "Easy. It +was my fault for yanking you."</p> + +<p>When the horse was quieted, Jim was cooled +down to his normal temperature, and he told his +comrades of his attack upon the Sea Eagle and +how it had turned out.</p> + +<p>"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard impressively, +"I will take off my hat to you. You are a +natural General. Take my advice, my friend, +and go to Spain. There you might head a revolution +and in time rise to high mark."</p> + +<p>"I appreciate your praise deeply, Senor Sebastian," +responded Jim, "but my own country, +Senor, I could not leave it for another."</p> + +<p>"Right, Senor," replied the Spaniard, "you have +the true spirit."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Which way will she turn, do you suppose?" +asked Jo, pointing to the vessel that was moving +steadily out on the Pacific in a straight line from +the shore.</p> + +<p>"To the North, doubtless," replied the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"Wherever she goes we must find her out," +said Jim, with grim determination.</p> + +<p>"I wish we could follow them," sighed Jo. "If +we could only hire a boat."</p> + +<p>"They have our money," replied Jim, briefly.</p> + +<p>"I had forgotten that," said Jo, and his face +showed his disappointment.</p> + +<p>"Permit me to help you," said the Spaniard, "I +am to blame for detaining you at breakfast."</p> + +<p>"That is generous of you, Senor," replied Jim, +"but I do not favor going to the expense of chartering +a steamer. Even if it were possible, my +plan would be to follow along the coast on horseback +and see what can be done when they make a +landing."</p> + +<p>"As you are the General," replied the Spaniard, +"we will allow you to make the plans."</p> + +<p>"Look!" exclaimed Jo, "they are turning South +instead of North."</p> + +<p>"Impossible!" cried the Spaniard. "There is +only one port within two hundred miles. I do<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> +not understand. Yes, they are surely going +South."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps they have a secret landing place," +hazarded Jim.</p> + +<p>"Not so," replied the Spaniard. "Not a harbor +where they could land save one and there they +would not dare to go."</p> + +<p>The three watchers on horseback gazed until +there was little to be seen other than a smudge of +smoke upon the horizon. It was no use, the Sea +Eagle was holding to her southerly course to some +mysterious port. The sun had now come out and +was shining with sheer brilliance upon the sparkling +ocean.</p> + +<p>"We must return now," said the Spaniard. +"There is nothing more for us to do at present."</p> + +<p>"I think that my brother and I will start this +afternoon and take the trail to the south," announced +Jim, "wherever those fellows set foot, I +want to be waiting for them."</p> + +<p>"I fear it is impossible to start so soon," replied +the Spaniard, "I must go with you as I know the +country to the South, every foot of it."</p> + +<p>"The Senor is right, Jim," put in Jo, quickly, +as he saw a frown on Jim's face and was afraid +that he was going to say something abruptly. +"You will want to give Caliente a good rest, so<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> +that when we start, we will make the distance +without delay. Then we have to make some preparations +ourselves."</p> + +<p>Jim looked at his brother with a moment's dark +suspicion, but it was evident that Jo was perfectly +sincere in what he said.</p> + +<p>"I will promise, Senor," said the Spaniard with +a peculiar smile, "that when we start which will +be early tomorrow morning, that we will travel +far and fast enough to suit you and your horse." +There was a challenge in his voice that Jim met +smilingly.</p> + +<p>"So be it, Senor," he said, "I will try to be in +sight at the finish."</p> + +<p>"My horse is a remarkable animal for speed +and endurance, I must tell you frankly," said the +Senor gravely. "He has no equal in this country +of California. He has proved it more than once +and against all comers."</p> + +<p>"He is certainly a fine horse," admitted Jim, +looking at the sorrel with admiring eyes. "He +has a splendid stride."</p> + +<p>"Ah, no, Senor," laughed the Spaniard with a +gleam of his white teeth, "I did not mean him," +patting the horse on the neck, "a good animal, indeed, +but more for my little sister to ride than for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> +me. Wait, my friend, until I introduce you to +Don Fernando and then you will see a horse for +the first time."</p> + +<p>"I should be very much pleased to see him," +said Jim, frankly curious and interested.</p> + +<p>"Tomorrow," said the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>They had now turned into the narrow trail +among the bushes and had only ridden a few steps +when Jo called a sudden halt.</p> + +<p>"What do you think, Jim, there's my horse and +Tom's tied in that thicket."</p> + +<p>Sure enough there they were, utterly worn out, +but with spirit enough to recognize their old comrades +Jim and Jo, and if ever horses expressed a +welcome these two did when they first caught +sight of their two friends.</p> + +<p>"They have cut the saddles to pieces, the +brutes," exclaimed Jo.</p> + +<p>"I'm glad to get the horses," said Jim, "I am +surprised that they didn't cut their throats."</p> + +<p>"They will follow us all right," said Jo, in reply +to the Spaniard's suggestion that they would have +to be led, and they trotted along behind Jo, who +was the last one in line.</p> + +<p>"Do you know of any place where we could buy +things?" asked Jim. "We need a new outfit."</p> + +<p>"But we have no money," put in Jo quickly.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I will get the money or its equivalent today," +said Jim. "If there is a store where the Senor can +get me credit."</p> + +<p>"Yes, there is a store where a Portugee sells +about everything that we need in this country," +replied the Spaniard. "It is some distance to the +north. We will ride there before we return to +the ranch. There will be no difficulty about the +credit," he concluded, with a bow to Jim.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE</h3> + + +<p>"You do not know my ability to spend," said Jim, +"I may have to plunge to the extent of several hundred +dollars. You see my brother has very expensive +tastes. It will cost quite a small fortune when +I buy him a complete trousseau including diamonds."</p> + +<p>"I will pledge my lands if necessary to get the +young Senor diamonds," said the Spaniard laughingly.</p> + +<p>In about an hour's time they came to a large one +story frame building painted a rather light blue, +which color had weathered a good deal. It had a +square, false front with a sign on it that read, "Mr. +Gonsalves, General Trader."</p> + +<p>They hitched their horses to some well graveled +posts, and went inside leaving Jo's and Tom's horses +free to graze at will around, or to stand under +the shelter of some drooping pepper tree across the +road. The proprietor, a short, thick-set Portugee +with a close trimmed black beard, and a gray slouch<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> +hat which he always wore, apparently, received them +graciously. The contents of the store were entirely +at their service,—if they paid for them.</p> + +<p>"We will miss poor Tom here," said Jo, "he was +always our purchasing agent."</p> + +<p>"And a mighty good one," added Jim. "Not even +a Connecticut Yankee could get the best of him in a +bargain."</p> + +<p>The Spaniard sat in a round armed wooden chair, +gracefully smoking a cigarette, while his guests +busied themselves making purchases. First the boys +bought some new clothes, which they retired behind +a counter to put on, and emerged in proper apparel +for the plains.</p> + +<p>Blue flannel shirts, and pants of the same color, +held up by leather belts, with much glitter of silver +on them, then they bought a sombrero apiece, +not after the Mexican style, but of the American +type. Jim had a red band around his and Jo had a +blue.</p> + +<p>"Now we want some handkerchiefs to tie around +our necks," said Jo.</p> + +<p>"Of course," remarked Jim with a wink, "something +that will catch the eyes of the ladies."</p> + +<p>So M. Gonsalves brought out a brilliant assortment +of handkerchiefs.</p> + +<p>"Here's a very fine article, gents," he said hold<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span>ing +out a red silk handkerchief, clustered with white +horseshoes.</p> + +<p>"Nothing the matter with that," admitted Jim admiringly, +with a droll look at Jo. "But this plain red +one will suit me. My brother would probably like +the horseshoe one." But Jo also declined.</p> + +<p>"I will take the dark blue one," he said, "it +matches my costume better."</p> + +<p>"Gee! but you will look like a color scheme," +laughed Jim, "blue eyes, blue pants, shirt, tie and +socks, and hat band, you ought to be a sailor on the +blue Pacific."</p> + +<p>"The next things are boots," remarked Jo.</p> + +<p>"Not for me," said Jim briefly, "I want moccasins. +Worn 'em all my life, and I am not going to +change to boots now."</p> + +<p>"Fine line of moccasins," said the accommodating +Mr. Gonsalves in his best trade manner. You see he +had been in business in San Francisco and knew +something of the ways of customers.</p> + +<p>"But it gives us more style to wear boots. You +notice that all the inhabitants wear them, we can +buy moccasins too. You wear them all the time and +they will set you down for an Indian."</p> + +<p>"When a fellow once gets the idea of style in his +head," said Jim resignedly, "nothing this side of +matrimony is going to stop him. So lay on Mac<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span>Duff +and cursed be he who first cries hold, enough."</p> + +<p>"I feel like I was anchored," commented Jim, +stepping across the floor with heavy tread. "I +should like to stalk a deer or an Indian in these +things. He could tell you were arriving before you +got above the horizon."</p> + +<p>"But you look fine in 'em," said Jo.</p> + +<p>It was true that he made a striking figure in his +blue togs. The lithe powerful physique, and the +strong, resolute face.</p> + +<p>"Better look out, Jo," grinned Jim. "No Senorita +would look at you, when they see me dashing +over the landscape."</p> + +<p>"I'm a pretty stylish looking guy myself," responded +Jo, confidently. He did make a good appearance, +there was no doubt of that. Though +slighter than his brother he was well set up, and his +frame was well muscled. He was handsomer than +Jim. But there was no nonsense about either of +the two boys and they never gave an unnecessary +thought to their appearance.</p> + +<p>"Now, Mr. Gonsalves," said Jim, "we would like +to look at some of your man-killers."</p> + +<p>"Revolvers?" he questioned, "just step this way. +I can fit you out all right."</p> + +<p>He did have a fine collection and Jim examined<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span> +the different ones carefully, noting their action and +how easily they worked.</p> + +<p>"I see you are no tenderfoot," complimented the +proprietor. "You have handled shooting irons before."</p> + +<p>"I'll be a tenderfoot before long, if I wear these +condemned boots you sold me," said Jim gruffly +ignoring the compliment. He did not care especially +for M. Gonsalves' style. "Now let's have a look at +your rifles." The proprietor actually took off his +hat and bowed.</p> + +<p>It was evident that the distinguished gentlemen +from nowhere in particular were going to buy out +his entire stock.</p> + +<p>"Would you be so gracious as to step this way?" +he said, "I have the rifles in the back of the store."</p> + +<p>They were so gracious, and after due examination +they selected a couple of well balanced guns and +purchased enough ammunition to stand off a few +Indian raids. All the stuff besides what they had +on their backs they packed upon Tom's horse, as +Tom was not present to resent the indignity.</p> + +<p>"Now the last things are some saddles," said +Jim, "seeing that our kind friends, the pirates, cut +up those we owned."</p> + +<p>"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard coming +forward and touching Jim lightly on the arm, "Do<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> +not speak of buying saddles. I will see to that." +Jim did not know exactly what their host meant but +he thanked him and deferred to his request.</p> + +<p>Now behold the frontier boys in complete costume, +with glittering revolvers at their hips and +rifles swung across their backs, upon their hands +were fringed buckskin gloves. They had gone the +whole hog as Jim said.</p> + +<p>"I'll take the shine off this costume in about one +day," said Jim grimly, "when I get in the open, I +would rather break a broncho, than a new suit of +clothes." There was no doubt about his impressive +appearance, as the sun flashed on the metal of the accoutrements +and he swung himself into the saddle. +Even their host seemed to hold them in higher regard. +Different people, different manners.</p> + +<p>When they reached the house ranch the first thing +Jim did was to find Caliente. He was in the long +adobe stable that was a half-mile from the house, at +the beginning of a wide mountain valley, where the +air drew through from the sea.</p> + +<p>"How are you, Caliente old fellow," cried Jim, as +he opened the box stall and went in to shake hands +with his old comrade. But the horse leaped to one +side, and then reared up as if to strike Jim.</p> + +<p>"He don't know you," cried Jo who was on the +outside of the stall. "Take off your hat."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span></p> + +<p>Jim whirled it out of the stall, and a change came +over Caliente. He recognized his master, and nickering +in recognition he rubbed his head against +Jim's shoulder, and took playful nips at his fine new +shirt, while Jim fairly hugged him, and gave him +resounding whacks with his open hand upon his +splendid sides and shoulders.</p> + +<p>"A magnificent animal, Senor Darlington," said +Senor Sebastian to Jim, "I congratulate you."</p> + +<p>It was a true word. Caliente with his proud neck, +small but shapely head, powerful but not too heavy +frame, and color of mottled gray was magnificent.</p> + +<p>All that afternoon Jim busied himself grooming +his horse until his coat fairly glistened. He looked +carefully to his feed, and saw to his watering. For +Jim was determined that his horse should not be +beaten by the Spaniard's. He knew that the latter's +horse must be an unusual animal. It was not a short +race, instead, one of two hundred miles that lay before +them on the morrow.</p> + +<p>That evening the American boys presented a better +appearance than they did at breakfast. It was a +pretty scene that evening in the long dining room. +The snowy table lit by light of candles and set with +ancient silver brought from Spain. The young +Senorita was seated at her brother's right, and on +the other side were James Darlington and his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span> +brother Joseph. As to the impression she made +upon them, we will say nothing, as this is not a romance, +but they had a merry and delightful evening.</p> + +<p>Their host and the young Senorita were much +interested in hearing of the adventures of the boys +in Mexico, especially that part that referred to +the rescue of the Senorita Cordova from the hands +of Cal Jenkins and his gang. I do not know that +The Frontier Boys told it with any less fervor +because the eyes of the young girl, seated opposite, +were fixed intently upon them. It appeared +that their host knew of the Senor Cordova, who was +a man of prominence in his country, though he had +not actually met him. So there was one more +bond of sympathy between the Senor Sebastian +and James and Jo Darlington.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<h3>ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE</h3> + + +<p>Let us now turn our interest and attention for +a time to the cruise of the Sea Eagle, under the +guidance of that redoubtable free-booter, Captain +Broom. It was a mystery to the three who +watched the ship turn to the South, what her port +could be. We will soon be in a position to solve +that problem.</p> + +<p>No sooner had the Sea Eagle cleared the cove +than Captain Broom went to his cabin to go over +his spoils which he had taken from the frontier +boys. He placed all the belts upon the table, took +up one, and with a keen knife slit the first pouch. +A large heavy Spanish coin rolled out and then +clinked down upon the table.</p> + +<p>The Captain's eyes glistened. "By Gosh!" he exclaimed, +"it was worth while rounding up those +fellows. They must have struck it rich down in +Mexico. I bet the boys will be tickled to death +to get their share." For whatever crimes and +shortcomings Captain Broom could be charged<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span> +with, at least he always divided fairly with his crew. +Thereby he held their loyalty. It was not all +policy, either, for there was a sterling streak in +the bad old fellow.</p> + +<p>Out of the next pouch there glittered upon the +table several diamonds and a small palm full of +rubies, with their rich color and radiance. "The +boys will have enough to start a jewelry store," +commented the Captain. "But I am not surprised +at this haul. I know something about the hidden +treasures myself, and they do say Mexico is the +the place for them."</p> + +<p>Out of another belt he got some ingots of gold +and a girdle that caused the Captain to open his +eyes. At first he did not know what to make of +it. When he held it up he saw that it was formed +of golden disks linked with strings of rubies and +sapphires. In the third belt was a necklace that +might have been worn by some Princess of the +Incas. It was oddly, almost <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'wierdly'">weirdly</ins> beautiful.</p> + +<p>The fourth belt that he picked up chanced to belong +to Jim.</p> + +<p>"This seems lighter than the others," remarked +the Captain. "Three of the pouches are empty." +His face got black with rage. For instantly his +mind leaped to the suspicion that one of his men +had rifled it. If such had been the case, the guilty<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> +party would have got short shift at the end of a +rope from the yard arm.</p> + +<p>But the second examination showed that the +cut was an old one.</p> + +<p>"So!" he cried, "one of the boys has cached part +of his share. I bet it was that long-legged, black-haired +guy. That fellow would give the best of +us trouble. I wish I had him to train. Maybe, +I can make something of the Injun boy," meaning +Juarez.</p> + +<p>As to the belts, the shrewd old fellow, to make +sure, measured them to see where the worn holes +of the leather came, and the partially empty belt +had been worn two inches longer than any of the +others.</p> + +<p>"It was the big fellow's," said the Captain.</p> + +<p>Then he went upon deck and called the crew +forward.</p> + +<p>"Now, lads, choose your man to get your share +of the goods," he said.</p> + +<p>"It's Jack Cales, sir," they said, knowing that +they would be called upon to select a man to take +their share.</p> + +<p>"All right! Come, lad," said the Captain, and +led the way to his cabin. When Jack Cales saw +the treasures on the table, he opened his eyes and +mouth in astonishment.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why, Sir," he exclaimed, "we haven't seen +anything like this since the day two years ago +when—" he stopped suddenly, seeing from a look +in the Captain's eyes that no reminiscences were +desired.</p> + +<p>"This is your share, lad," said the Captain, +gruffly.</p> + +<p>"Thank you, sir," responded Cales, as he swept +the small pile of gold and jewels into the palm of +his big hands.</p> + +<p>"And mind ye, lad," warned the Captain, "I +don't want any quarreling among yourselves or +ye will hear from me."</p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor and backed +out of the cabin.</p> + +<p>There was an interesting gathering in the forecastle +when Jack Cales deposited his handful of +treasures on the top of a sea chest that had been +hauled out for the purpose.</p> + +<p>For once it was not necessary to have the lantern +lit, for a broad band of sunshine shone down +the steep ladder and cut a golden swath through +the dingy gloom and fell athwart the chest and illuminated +the group: the tall and swaggering +Cales, the rugged, grizzled Pete, and the other +sailormen; a typical group and not to be matched +for picturesqueness anywhere; with their faces<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> +intent upon the center of the old black sea chest, +where glowed and glittered the gold and jewels in +the band of light that shone upon some of the +faces of the intent group, while others were in the +shadow. It was a scene such as Rembrandt—pardon, +kind reader, I forgot for a moment, this +is a simple narrative of Adventure.</p> + +<p>"Pete," said Cales, "how the ladies will love you +when they see a chain of glittering diamonds +around your throat."</p> + +<p>"One thing is certain, lad," replied the grizzled +Pete, "I won't be givin' none of my diamonds +away to the ladies. I'll keep the stones safe in my +jeans."</p> + +<p>"You'll have to be keerful, Pete," rallied another, +"they'll be marrying you for your ill-gotten +wealth, when they find out that you are an heiress. +You can't help yourself, Pete. It won't make any +difference because you are a pirate, that won't +scare 'em. Not when they see them jewels."</p> + +<p>"What's the use of you boys a talkin' to me," +he said with a wise wink, "you're only kittens. I'm +sixty year old and I'm a free man yit."</p> + +<p>"Here's a pill for you, Pop," said Cales, +dropping a diamond into his horny hand.</p> + +<p>"Gee! I'm just as well pleased to get this as I +was to get a bunch of popcorn when I was a kid<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> +back in New England, off the Christmas tree."</p> + +<p>"Better have it sot in one of your front teeth, +Pop," said Jack. This produced a roar of laughter, +for Pete's front teeth were conspicuous by +their absence.</p> + +<p>So the distribution went on without any bickering +at first, only jovial jokes, but at last there +came a bone of contention over the last diamond. +And in a jiffy Jack Cales and a short, stocky sailor +were all tangled up in a fierce encounter. Their +comrades, none too gently, hoisted them up on +deck. There they continued their fight.</p> + +<p>No sooner did Captain Broom see them than he +cluttered down from the bridge at a furious rate. +The two combatants ought to have taken warning +but they were deaf to everything except their own +struggle. He was livid with anger, and his +wrath was in a large measure justified.</p> + +<p>"I'll larn you!" he yelled, grabbing each by the +back of the neck. "You won't fight any more this +trip."</p> + +<p>They were like children in his hands. He had +not only the arms of a gorilla, but the strength of +one when he was aroused and it was a caution the +way he slammed them around, flaying the deck +with them, and dashing their heads together. It +seemed as if every bone in their bodies would be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span> +broken. Finally he flung them unconscious on the +deck.</p> + +<p>"Put them in the Sagenette," he ordered the +mate.</p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," he replied, and with the aid of +one of the sailors, they were chained in a narrow +cell.</p> + +<p>Here was where Juarez and Tom came in. As +the two fighters were knocked out and locked up, +it made the crew short and they were ordered out +on deck from the cabin where they had been kept. +Almost famished though they were, they had to +jump in and work like nailers, not to say, sailors.</p> + +<p>Fortunately for them, they had experienced a +hard schooling in many different ways since they +came west and were practical masters of several +lines of industry, but this was their first experience +sailoring. It was a hard school, but they +learned more in a few days, than they would have +under months of more gentle tuition. This was +to stand them in good stead when they started on +their cruise to Hawaii.</p> + +<p>"I'll get even with those fellows," growled Tom +as he passed near Juarez who was busy polishing +some brass work. "Yes, if it takes the rest of my +life."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What do you mean, stopping and gabbing, you +little shrimp?" roared the mate who chanced to see +Tom stop.</p> + +<p>And he rushed up and grabbing Tom by the +back of the neck, shook him ferociously, landing +him a couple of kicks at the same time. This was +too much for Juarez, who poised a stone that he +was using and was about to brain the mate with it +when the Captain's iron grip fell on his arm. He +didn't throw that brick.</p> + +<p>"Easy, lad," said the Captain. "No more fighting +on board this ship, or I'll take a hand again +and don't you two lads pass the time of day either. +You won't be killed if you work hard and keep +cheerful." Then he gave the mate a look, which +that worthy understood and Tom was allowed to +go about his work without further molestation.</p> + +<p>But this was a new and hard doctrine that the +Captain had laid down that the boys had to take +hard usage and unceasing work and keep cheerful +about it. They soon found that the Skipper +meant what he said. It was a bitter lesson, but +perhaps they were the manlier for learning it so +young. For it's something that life hands out to +everyone sooner or later.</p> + +<p>Often the boys looked longingly over the rail +towards the faint, far outline of the California<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span> +coast. The Skipper was keeping his ship far out +from the land for reasons best known to himself. +One thing was favorable in that the sea air had +braced up Juarez so that he felt more like himself +though his head was queer at times. And no +wonder for that blow the Mexican dwarf had +given him was sufficient to have stunned an ox.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII</h2> + +<h3>A DAY AT SEA</h3> + + +<p>The Sea Eagle was steaming steadily South to her +mysterious harbor. The day was a brilliant one and +as the afternoon wore on the wind from the Northwest +began to blow with fresher force and the white +caps began to jump, here, there and everywhere +over the broad surface of the ocean, and then slide +down on the back of the waves.</p> + +<p>There was a good deal of motion on the part of +the Sea Eagle now, as she plunged into the waves +and threw the spray back over her decks. Both +Juarez and Tom proved themselves good sailors, +which was just as well for if they had been sea sick +together with their other miseries they might have +succumbed.</p> + +<p>Finally the long afternoon wore away and the +time came for supper. The boys being neither +flesh, fish or fowl, were not allowed to eat with the +crew, and they did not mind in the least. When +their rations did arrive, or rather when they went<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> +to the ship's galley and got their share, they +found the fare not lacking in quality and abundance. +There was a heaping plate of Mexican beans, a big +hunk of bread and a bowl of hot tea. After the +boys had stowed this below in their hatches they felt +a hundred per cent better and more fit to meet any +fate that might await them.</p> + +<p>An hour before sunset a heavy bank of fog began +to roll up from the West, soon covering the +whole sky with its gracious softness, and decided +restfulness, after the glittering blue-diamond beauty +of the day.</p> + +<p>It is the fogs alone that make the climate of California, +especially in the Southern part endurable. +Too much sunshine becomes as unbearable as too +much cloudiness.</p> + +<p>The sea went down, when the fog came up and the +waters took on a steely color under their blanket of +gray, rolling on, in that monotonous meditation +that holds the mystery of forgotten ages in its +brooding.</p> + +<p>"Here's where you will sleep, boys," said Old Pete, +who had been appointed by the Captain to have +special charge over their education. "The men won't +have you in the fo'castle, and it's pretty crowded +there anyway."</p> + +<p>"This will suit us, sir," replied Juarez. He did<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> +not call him Pop, as he would have on the land. This +was the sea and had its own rules and customs, +therefore Old Pete received his due of respect. But +in his rough way he was not unfriendly towards the +boys, for he remembered that they had given him +friendly advice, when he was aboard that strange +craft, a horse, the night before.</p> + +<p>The place where the boys were to sleep was a sort +of cubby hole in the bow of the boat, that was roofed +over and where anchor chains and other junk was +sometimes kept. It was not over four feet high, +five in width at the broadest and narrowing to the +bow.</p> + +<p>A rude place to sleep in, but what did the Frontier +Boys care for that? They could scarcely count the +nights that they had slept out on the ground, and in +bad weather too. They had a blanket apiece, and a +tarpaulin to pull over them.</p> + +<p>The blankets they had spread out on the floor of +the cubby hole and they found that the tarpaulin +made a mighty warm protective covering, +keeping out the damp sea air in fine style.</p> + +<p>"Where do you suppose we are heading for, +Juarez?" inquired Tom.</p> + +<p>"Maybe a port in Mexico or South America and +then again we may head for Hawaii before we intend +to."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We are going South now, though," said Tom.</p> + +<p>"If we run in close to the coast, we'll jump overboard, +and swim for it," said Juarez.</p> + +<p>"We could do it if we get within a mile," said +Tom, "if it is not too rough."</p> + +<p>Just then Juarez put his hand over Tom's mouth, +he felt sure that someone was listening or was preparing +to. Juarez ran his fingers carefully over the +boards until he found where a hole had been bored +through the planking a little back of their heads. It +was just as he had suspected, someone was listening +to hear what plans they would make.</p> + +<p>With the noiselessness characteristic of him when +scouting, Juarez crept out partially and cautiously +raised his head until he caught sight of the sole of +a man's boot. Then he crept back to his place and +gave Tom a nudge. Forthwith they began talking in +rather loud tones.</p> + +<p>"Say Tom, do you know I rather like this ship. +These fellows are rough in their way but that is to +be expected."</p> + +<p>"Of course," said Tom, in an equally loud voice, +"but we might as well make the best of it. There is +no chance for the boys to find us."</p> + +<p>"You're right there, Tom."</p> + +<p>Then in a short time they appeared to fall into a +deep and sonorous sleep. This was no fake on the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span> +part of Tom who was actually and thoroughly +tired. But Juarez was more of a veteran and he +kept his eyes open and he was rewarded in a few +minutes by seeing a man's feet hanging <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'ever'">over</ins> the +edge of their bunk house and then he saw the figure +of the mate slouch aft.</p> + +<p>"You sly old rascal, you," remarked Juarez. "We +will 'larn' you to try and be too smart with the +Frontier Boys. We may be young but we are not +fools."</p> + +<p>Nothing happened for a while and the gentle +plunge of the Sea Eagle into the long rolling swell +soon lulled the tired Juarez into a sound sleep, so +that neither he nor Tom were aware that the ship +had suddenly changed her course.</p> + +<p>By and by however, Juarez waked with a start. +Something had happened, he knew not what. He sat +up and struck his head upon the planking overhead. +Fortunately however he did not hit the place where +the Mexican had struck him but at the best his head +was a tender place with him and the blow stunned +him, but as he was now more his rugged self, he +soon recovered.</p> + +<p>He found what had wakened him was the stopping +of the ship. He saw several dark forms moving +aft and he crept out to see what was afoot. He +had to move very carefully but managed to reach the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> +hood of the forecastle, where he crouched looking +and listening.</p> + +<p>He saw that they were lying to, close in to shore +and could see the white splash of the breakers as +they rolled towards the shore and could hear their +monotonous thunder upon the beach. Here perhaps +was their chance. Just then he heard the heavy +voice of the Captain from the bridge.</p> + +<p>"Lower away there." Then the starboard boat +slid noiselessly down from the davits into the +water.</p> + +<p>Juarez got up and glided back into the cubby hole +to tell Tom the good news. It was their opportunity +to escape and seemingly a good one. The sea was +smooth and the night was dark. They could slip +over the side of the vessel and pull for the shore, +and not a soul on the Sea Eagle would be the wiser +until they looked into their nest in the morning to +find it empty.</p> + +<p>Once they got to the shore it would be an easy +matter to make their way North until they met Jim +and Jo.</p> + +<p>The anticipation of the escape had already thrilled +through every nerve in Juarez's body. But he had +just started to wake Tom, when something made +him look down the deck. There was the tall figure<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> +of one of the sailors coming directly towards the +bow.</p> + +<p>Juarez lay down quickly as though asleep. Then +the man reached down and caught hold of Tom's +foot and Juarez's and gave them a rough yank. "So +you are here, you young brats. You had better +make a move or the Cap'n will finish you."</p> + +<p>Juarez was fairly sizzling with rage especially as +Tom was really frightened by being wakened in such +rough fashion and after all Tom was but a boy and +it pained Juarez to see him so scared, but he was +helpless, and all he could do was to add one more +black mark to the score he was charging up to the +free-booters.</p> + +<p>Instead of moving away, the man sat on a capstan +a few feet distant from the boys' den, watching for +the slightest move on their part, a marlin spike dangling +playfully in his hands. Juarez had not taken +the crafty and keen sighted Captain Broom into account.</p> + +<p>From the Bridge, that worthy, although he was +watching the launching of the boat, had chanced to +catch sight out of the tail of his eye of a dark +shadow flitting back to the forecastle. He was not +sure it was one of the boys, but he was taking no +chances, for he had a real respect for their prowess +and audacity as he might well have.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span></p> + +<p>So he had sent one of his crew to guard this +young lions' den, while the ship was so close in +shore. He did not intend to stay longer than was +necessary right at this point, and he waited with +some anxiety for the return of the mate and Pete +in the boat.</p> + +<p>It was now two o'clock in the morning and Captain +Broom wanted to be out at sea a good safe +distance before the light broke. The mate's boat +had now been gone over a half-hour, and the Captain +stood at the end of the Bridge looking towards +the shore. There was not a light upon the vessel to +show her position. She lay silent and black upon the +dark waters.</p> + +<p>Then the Captain straightened up. He saw a +moving body approaching the ship and heard the +slight dip of oars. Then the boat was alongside and +instead of two men, there were three in the boat. +The Captain went down to the main deck to meet +them.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XIX</h2> + +<h3>THE PASSENGER</h3> + + +<p>They met without any formality. The new +passenger was a tall, slightly stooped man, with +long hair falling down to his shoulders. Juarez +was exceedingly anxious to see him, but could +make out only a dark form moving along the deck.</p> + +<p>"Come to the cabin, Jeems," called the Captain. +"I've got something to tell ye."</p> + +<p>They were soon seated in the Captain's cabin. +This was a good-sized room, panelled in light +wood and very neatly kept. There was quite a +broad table of the same wood as the walls and a +swivel chair in front of it. The Captain seated +himself in this chair and whirled to talk to the +visitor from the shore.</p> + +<p>It was evident that he was not a temporary visitor +for scarcely had they seated themselves in the +cabin than the Sea Eagle slowly and gently turned +and they felt the pulsation of her engines as she +headed once more for sea. The man was seated +on a sea chest opposite the Captain.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span></p> + +<p>He wore long cowhide boots, with jeans pants +thrust into their tops, flannel shirt of a nondescript +color and a corduroy jacket. His hat was +of a battered gray. The face was smooth-shaven, +deeply lined and burnt to a dull brown. The hair +which came down to his shoulders had that peculiar +sun-burnt weathered tinge that comes from +continual exposure to the weather. He was not +an old man, probably on the sunny side of forty.</p> + +<p>"Well, Jeems, what is your news?" inquired the +Captain.</p> + +<p>"The government boat is in the harbor, that's +all." The Captain gave a low, peculiar whistle.</p> + +<p>"When did she show up?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Two days ago, Cap'n," he replied.</p> + +<p>"Come from the South?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied the man. "Put in for coal, I +reckon."</p> + +<p>"Then put out for us," said the Captain briefly.</p> + +<p>"Any 'baccy, Cap'n? Been out two days," remarked +Jeems.</p> + +<p>"Lift your lanky frame off that chest," replied +the Captain, "and I'll git you some."</p> + +<p>The man sprang up with remarkable alacrity, +and as he unfolded length after length of his long +figure, it seemed as if his head would touch the +ceiling of the cabin. In fact, he did not miss it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span> +by many inches. It was a comical contrast between +the short stooping figure of the Captain and +the tall stranger.</p> + +<p>"Waal, Jeems, I wouldn't advise you to grow +any more, or I'll have to raise the roof of my +cabin."</p> + +<p>"That's what, Cap'n," replied Jeems imperturbably. +"That's what happens when you grow up in +Californy. You grow all the year around, and not +like in New England where the winters makes you +stubby."</p> + +<p>Then the native philosopher seated himself on +the chest again and took long and delightful pulls +at his recently staked pipe.</p> + +<p>"Hum!" he said. "This tastes right. Did yer +ever know what it war to be starved for yer +'baccy, Cap'n?"</p> + +<p>"No," replied the Captain, "I can't say that I +ever did."</p> + +<p>"Well, I want to tell you, Cap'n, that it is worse +than going without water and I know what that is. +Been on a desert till my tongue was as thick as a +cow's, and hung out between my teeth, black."</p> + +<p>"How long have you been away?" inquired the +Captain.</p> + +<p>"Three weeks, Cap'n."</p> + +<p>"How are the sheep lookin'?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Pretty fair, Cap'n," he replied. "I think that +they had a whiff of rain over there a few days +ago."</p> + +<p>"It won't be long till we git the rains," suggested +the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I don't know, Cap'n," remarked the lanky one. +"The climate of Californy is a curious proposition. +It's built on the bias down at this end."</p> + +<p>"How's that?" asked the Captain curiously. +He had a certain interest in this particular courier's +theories, however he might laugh at their peculiarities. +For there was apt to be a basis of +reason in them.</p> + +<p>"Well, it's this way, Cap'n," said James Howell, +to give him his correct name, thrusting one lanky +hand deep into his jeans pocket and bending forward +awkwardly. "It's this way. You see the +storms come down from the North to the Tehatchipei +mountains, where there isn't any way for them +to get through to the south. Then the clouds +shift around to Arizony, and if the wind is right +they are blown through the passes of the Sierra +Madre into Southern Californy, then we get the +rain. That's why I said, Cap'n, that this dazzling +climate is built on the bias."</p> + +<p>"Waal, Jeems, as a weather prophet you can't +be beat," said the Skipper.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span></p> + +<p>"In my business I get plenty of time to think, +Cap'n," he remarked, "and as they ain't much to +see except climate I think about that."</p> + +<p>"Waal, I have a good sight more than that to +consider," replied the Skipper. "I'm thinking +right now about that government boat. I'm going +on deck. You can turn in."</p> + +<p>The Captain showed him to an empty cabin and +the lanky stranger proceeded to make himself +comfortable for the balance of the night, while the +Captain went up on the Bridge.</p> + +<p>"Where are you heading this boat to?" he +asked gruffly of the man at the wheel.</p> + +<p>Then he took the helm himself and immediately +the Sea Eagle's prow pointed to the Westward as +if she were heading directly for Japan. However, +she held this course for only an hour and a +half when the Skipper swung her bow once more +to the South.</p> + +<p>Long before the morning broke, Tom and +Juarez, hauled out of their resting place, were set +to scrubbing the decks and rubbing them down +with holy-stone. They waited eagerly for the first +break of day to see where they were.</p> + +<p>Then the light came slowly through the fog-covered +sky, showing a glossy sea with a slight +swell and not a sign of land anywhere. The boys'<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span> +hearts sank within them and they felt sure that +they would not see their native land again.</p> + +<p>Once in a while they would glance up at the +Bridge where stood the Captain with his powerful +stooped figure. He was evidently on the lookout, +for with his eye at a long glass, he kept scanning +the sky-line to the east. What was he looking +for? Juarez knew instinctively that he was afraid +of pursuit.</p> + +<p>If only they could be overtaken and captured, +his heart thrilled at the thought and he watched +the Captain eagerly for the first sign of excitement. +About ten o'clock he saw by the Skipper's +actions that something of interest had come under +his observation.</p> + +<p>There were a number of quick, sharp orders +given and Juarez noticed the increased volume of +smoke pouring from the stack. The Sea Eagle +began to show the speed that was in her trim, +black form. Juarez worked around the port side +of the boat as rapidly as he dared, and his heart +leaped with hope.</p> + +<p>He saw low upon the eastern horizon a smudge +of black smoke. If he only had known what the +Skipper knew, his hopes would have risen still +higher. Certain preparations were going on upon +deck. The three cannon, one in the stern,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span> +that had fired the salute to the group on the shore, +one on either side of the quarter-deck, were divested +of their canvas jackets.</p> + +<p>They certainly gleamed bravely in their polished +brass. Then the ammunition was got ready <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'besiide'">beside</ins> +each separate gun. It begin to look like +business. The Sea Eagle began to justify her +name and fly through the water. Still the spot +upon the horizon grew bigger.</p> + +<p>Then Juarez began to have a paralyzing feeling +of doubt. The steamer, though coming up +fast, did not seem to be steering the proper course +to head the Sea Eagle, bearing on her port-quarter +instead of across her bows as would have been +the natural course if she wished to intercept her.</p> + +<p>Then the doubt in his mind was changed to disappointed +certainty for the Skipper waved his +hand to the mate, who was busy on the deck below. +It was after he had taken a pull at the spyglass, +which this time seemed to have an intoxicating +effect upon the Captain.</p> + +<p>"It's all right, Bill," he yelled, "It's nothing but +a steamer bound for 'Frisco. It looks like the +Panama."</p> + +<p>Juarez and Tom resumed their work doggedly. +That was all that was left for them to do. They<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span> +scarcely glanced at the big steamer as she appeared, +growing constantly larger above the horizon, +and then diminishing as she steamed North +towards San Francisco.</p> + +<p>Juarez was scrubbing the deck near a cabin door +when it suddenly opened, and a tall, long-legged +figure stepped out and fairly over him. He came +to the conclusion that it was the man who had +come aboard the night before.</p> + +<p>He took in the tall, gaunt man with the smooth-shaven +face and long hair at two glances—one +not being sufficient to his height.</p> + +<p>"Well, who are you?" he inquired lounging on +the rail and regarding Juarez with mild-eyed interest.</p> + +<p>"I'm Juarez Hopkins, deck scrubber. Who are +you?"</p> + +<p>"I'm James Howell, sheep farmer. I'll add +you two lambs to my flock," he replied, whimsically, +glancing at Tom who was down the deck +a way.</p> + +<p>"You are more apt to find us wolves in lamb's +hide," retorted Juarez. "Where's your farm?"</p> + +<p>"There," said the stranger, pointing with a long, +bony finger on the port-quarter, "that nigh island."</p> + +<p>Then Juarez saw to his surprise, two islands<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> +that seemed to have sprung like magic upon the +South-eastern horizon. The further one lay long +and low and dark but distant beneath the fog-lined +sky, the "nigh one" was more short and dumpy in +appearance.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XX</h2> + +<h3>TO THE RESCUE</h3> + + +<p>During the afternoon, everything had been made +ready for the journey of the morrow. There was +not a great deal to be done for the three rescuers +would travel light. There would be no need of a +pack animal, because the Senor had assured the +boys that they would find hospitality on the way.</p> + +<p>Jo however was in mourning because when he +gave his black a trial gallop, it was discovered that +he was badly lamed in the right knee. It would not +have been safe for any of the pirate gang to come +within range of Jo's wrath.</p> + +<p>"The cursed brutes stove him up for fair," he declared +grinding his teeth.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid it will take a month's rest before he +will be fit," determined Jim.</p> + +<p>"Then I'm out of it," exclaimed Jo sorrowfully.</p> + +<p>"Not so, my friend," interrupted the Spaniard. +"Take the bay. He is not as good a horse as yours, +but he has great endurance. He is yours to use as +long as you wish."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span></p> + +<p>Jo thanked the Spaniard heartily for his kindness +and generosity. Then he spoke in a low voice to his +brother. "How about that money, Jim? Don't forget +to pay the Spaniard for those goods we bought +at the store." Jim spoke up.</p> + +<p>"Senor, I wish to show you a little something of +interest."</p> + +<p>Then Jim got his heavy saddle, on which he had +ridden so many hundred miles. And the Senor regarded +it with interest, because of the carved leather +workmanship which was of the finest and he was a +connoisseur of such matters.</p> + +<p>"How much would you give for it, Senor Sebastian," +inquired Jim, "if it were put up for purchase?"</p> + +<p>"It is a beautiful saddle. I would be willing to +give a hundred dollars. It is worth it."</p> + +<p>"That saddle is worth several thousand, Senor," +replied Jim confidently.</p> + +<p>"I do not understand," replied the Spaniard. "It +is the personal value, I suppose."</p> + +<p>"I will show you," said Jim.</p> + +<p>Then he took from his hip pocket a heavy bone +handled knife which he had bought at the store and +pulled back the hoof cleaner, an instrument attached +to the knife that was used to get a pebble or +anything that had got into the horse's hoof.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span></p> + +<p>With this he worked at the leather that covered +the high and rather thick horn of the saddle. Finally +he pried the top leather flap off. There was a heavy +piece fitted into the top of the horn. With some +difficulty Jim got this out disclosing a hollow, in +which was concealed most of the jewels he had +found in Mexico.</p> + +<p>"Hold your hands, Jo. Tight now." And with +the word he emptied the contents of the horn into +Jo's palms. Diamonds, rubies, turquoises and some +heavy gold pieces.</p> + +<p>"That is what you might call a horn of plenty," +said Jim jocosely.</p> + +<p>"But!" cried the Spaniard in amazement, "where +did you get these?"</p> + +<p>"In Mexico," replied Jim. "This was what the +Pirates were after. And they got all but this. +Sometime I will tell you the story of its discovery. +Now take this to reimburse you, Senor, for the +money we spent at the store." And he held out the +diamond.</p> + +<p>"That is far too much. That stone is worth five +hundred dollars at least," said the Spaniard. "These +three rubies would be more exact and I will take +them."</p> + +<p>Jim, handing over the three stones selected, said,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span> +"Now, Senor, you shall take the diamond as a token +of good will from my brother and myself."</p> + +<p>"We insist upon it," chimed in Jo.</p> + +<p>Finally the Spaniard accepted the gifts with many +protestations of obligation and appreciation. Jo +was about to urge him to accept a jewel for his +sister, but Jim stopped him, knowing that the proud +Spaniard would not hear to such a present.</p> + +<p>The next morning they were up an hour before +daylight and ate a hearty breakfast by the light of +the candles. Veterans though they were, the boys +felt a thrill go through their pulses as they thought +of the expedition that lay before them. Outside they +could hear the pawing of the impatient horses.</p> + +<p>"To the success of our expedition and the rescue +of our friends!" was the toast the Spaniard proposed +as they rose from the table. The Frontier Boys +drank it, but not in wine. They felt just a little +foolish too, but such is the reward that often comes +with doing what is right. But they were sturdy in +their determination to stick to their principles.</p> + +<p>If they had only known it, down in his heart the +Spaniard respected them the more, even though it +seemed odd to him.</p> + +<p>Then they went out on the verandah, fully armed +and ready to take their departure. Two oil lamps +near the door and fastened to the wall, backed by<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span> +shining reflectors sent a strong light across the +verandah and into the darkness outside.</p> + +<p>There stood the three horses, eager to be off, each +one held by a Mexican groom. Caliente we already +know, and the horse that Jo is to ride also. So let +us take a glance at the third animal, Don Fernando. +He evidently justified all the enthusiasm of his master, +a truly splendid creature.</p> + +<p>A dark chestnut, as large as Caliente and built on +something the same lines. They were beautifully +matched except in color. It was with a thrill of +pleasure that Jim swung himself into the saddle. His +mount was in fine fettle and ready for the long pull +ahead.</p> + +<p>They started from the home ranch with a thunder +of hoofs in unison, the riders checking their +horses to a slow gallop with a heavy hand. Together +they pressed through the waning darkness. There +was a wonderful exhilaration, as they leaped forward, +the horses powerful and fresh.</p> + +<p>Instead of following in the direction of the morning +before, the Spaniard turned to the East until +they came near the foot of the range. In a short time +they came to a gate, which seemed to open mysteriously +as they approached, but the motive power +proved to be a small Mexican boy, whom the Senor +had sent on ahead.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span></p> + +<p>Now they were on a turf road with bushes on +either side and down this they thundered, Caliente +the gray, and Don Fernando the dark, matching +stride for stride, with Jo well in the rear. For he +found if he rode close up he was blinded and stung +by sods and stones thrown back from the flying +hoofs of the two horses in the front.</p> + +<p>It was a bit lonely for Jo and he wished that one +of the other boys was here to keep him company. As +they rode, the bushes seemed to fly by as they do +when you look from a railroad train and Jo was +afraid lest his horse would be unable to keep the +pace indefinitely. One thing in Jo's favor was that +he was the lightest of the three and what is more to +the purpose a very light rider.</p> + +<p>So like the good horseman he was, he determined +to save his horse all he could and make him last out. +For eight miles or more they rode without a stop +until they came to another gate. This the Spaniard +unfastened and swung open without dismounting, +then closed it after Jo.</p> + +<p>The morning light was now distinct, although +the fog was over the sky. Before them stretched a +long level plain that broke into sand dunes near the +sea. They could see the ocean lying dark in its +monotonous level of color, to the Western horizon.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We have just left the Sebastian ranch," called +the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"It is immense," commented Jim. "May I ask +how many acres it embraces?"</p> + +<p>"It was immense in the old days," replied the +Spaniard. "Before your people took possession of +the land. It was held by no fences then. But your +laws were not ours and we lost many square miles. +Now there are fifty thousand acres under fence."</p> + +<p>"Fifty thousand acres!" exclaimed Jo.</p> + +<p>"Ah, but it was double that before the Americans +came," replied the Spaniard. Then he glanced critically +at Caliente. "Your horse looks as cool as +though he had been standing in the stable. The pace +does not affect his wind either. Splendid condition!"</p> + +<p>"Caliente is as hard as nails," said Jim proudly. +"But your horse has wonderful speed."</p> + +<p>The chestnut seemed more on edge than the old +warrior, Caliente, and tossed the foam from his bit, +until his dark coat was speckled with it.</p> + +<p>"He is high strung," said the Spaniard, "but I +would back him against any horse flesh in California. +We can let them out here for a half dozen miles."</p> + +<p>"Let her go, Senor. I won't let you lose me."</p> + +<p>At the word the Spaniard gave his chafing horse +his head and away the chestnut sprang in the lead.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span> +It was slightly down grade for a mile, then there +was a gulch twelve feet wide and of considerable +depth. It was a good jump and to make it saved a +little distance. Going at top speed the chestnut took +the jump in fine style. His rider half turned in his +saddle to watch Jim's effort. Caliente had faced +worse leaps than that, he rose to it and swept over +it as gracefully as a bird.</p> + +<p>"Good fellow!" exclaimed Jim patting him affectionately +on the neck.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXI</h2> + +<h3>THE BANDITS</h3> + + +<p>When Jo saw the gulch ahead, he decided that +discretion was the better part of valor as he did not +know his mount well enough to risk the leap, so he +galloped a few hundred feet below, where the gulch +narrowed and then he took the jump nicely, and +scampered after the other two riders who were quite +a way ahead.</p> + +<p>Jim purposely held Caliente in check, keeping a +hundred yards in the rear of the Spaniard. Ahead +a few miles, there was a perfect sea of yellow where +the tall mustard covered the plain for a great distance. +Into this they charged full tilt, the mustard +reaching as high as their heads.</p> + +<p>There was a swish of its blossoms in their faces as +the powerful horses charged into it and in spite of +their strength they began to tire after going some +distance.</p> + +<p>"Where is Jo?" inquired Jim suddenly after they +had slowed down, "I don't see a sign of him." And<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> +he rose in his stirrups looking over the level lake of +mustard.</p> + +<p>"Hello, Jo," he yelled at the top of his voice. No +answer came. Could he be drowned in this lake? +There was not a motion to indicate his whereabouts, +no waving of the yellow tops.</p> + +<p>"It is very strange," said the Spaniard. "Did he +cross the gully all right?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, I saw him take the jump below us a ways." +Then Jim raised his revolver above his head and +fired.</p> + +<p>"That ought to fetch him," he said. Then they +listened intently. Suddenly about a quarter of a +mile ahead of them they saw a sombrero rise like +a gray mushroom above the yellow surface of the +mustard, and Jo's voice came back to them.</p> + +<p>They both gave their horses the rein, this time Jim +did nothing to hold Caliente back, and with their +powerful speed the two great horses tore forward, +on even terms until in the last hundred yards Caliente +forged ahead by half a length.<sup>[<a name="tn" id="tn"></a><a href="#note">1</a>]</sup></p> + +<p>"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. There was Jo sitting +quietly on his horse.</p> + +<p>"That's how you beat us," exclaimed Jim, pointing +to a cow trail running diagonally through the +growth of mustard.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes," laughed Jo, "I struck it further down after +I jumped the gully. Otherwise you fellows would +have lost me."</p> + +<p>"Good work, Jo," said Jim. "Now we will have it +easier going."</p> + +<p>So in single file they galloped along the path, until +they found themselves by noon, at the foot of a spur +of mountains that extended from the main coast +range to the ocean. Jim regarded this barrier in +their way with a practised eye.</p> + +<p>"This will slow us down, Senor," he said. "It +looks like a pass below there, about two miles."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the Senor, "we can get through there +all right, but it is pretty rough going."</p> + +<p>They had to advance more slowly now, as the +ground was broken into stony ravines, and there was +a good deal of brush. In this kind of country Jo's +horse more than held its own with the bigger animals, +for he was as nimble as a goat.</p> + +<p>"I hope we will find water, Senor," remarked Jim. +"Our horses are pretty dry now."</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied the Spaniard, "there is a good +spring at the foot of the Pass."</p> + +<p>They found it all right, in the entrance to the +Pass, where there was a small green cove, surrounded +with bushes, and on one side was a sheep +herder's shanty. Jo investigated this immediately<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> +and found nothing in it but the charred remnants +of a fire and a pair of discarded overalls.</p> + +<p>Jim, who had himself been looking around, made +a more important find.</p> + +<p>"There has been somebody here recently," he announced. +"Here are some tracks around the spring +and not over twelve hours old."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I have no doubt," said the Spaniard carelessly +puffing at his cigarette. "This Pass is used +occasionally by ranchmen and herders."</p> + +<p>"There have been five or six horses here," said +Jim, whose experiences had made him suspicious.</p> + +<p>"There are no Indians," said Jo, "in this section, +at least none who are on the warpath."</p> + +<p>"I <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'supose'">suppose</ins> you do have cattle rustlers, Senor?" +inquired Jim.</p> + +<p>"Yes, there is a band of outlaws," replied the +Spaniard, "that raids from as far north as our +ranch, south to San Diego, but we have seen no +trace of them for many months."</p> + +<p>"Then, Senor," remarked Jim, "it is about time +that they paid you another visit."</p> + +<p>"Ah, Senor Darlington," exclaimed the Spaniard. +"We Castilians do not reason so. We say that there +is no trouble today, why worry about tomorrow. +Perhaps these bandits may have starved to death, or +been hung, or the good Padres may have persuaded<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span> +them by the fear of Hell, to become quiet, sheep raising +citizens. God knows."</p> + +<p>"I fear that they are raising sheep in their old +style," grinned Jo. The pun glanced off the Spaniard +harmlessly.</p> + +<p>"The theory that they may be hung, sounds plausible, +Senor," admitted Jim. "But before we advance +into the Pass, I will scout a little."</p> + +<p>"If the Senor pleases," responded the Spaniard +courteously.</p> + +<p>"Do you chance to know of a small, hunchbacked +Mexican who is more or less in this section of the +country, Senor?" Jim suddenly inquired.</p> + +<p>The Spaniard flushed with red anger and spit emphatically +on the ground.</p> + +<p>"You give him into my hands and I will reward +you well," cried the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>Jim made no immediate reply but gazed thoughtfully +at the ground. He was considering the case. +This was not the time to turn aside in a chase for +even so desperate a criminal as the hunchbacked +greaser. So he made no definite reply to the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>After the horses were fed, and watered, and while +Jo was looking after the coffee, Jim started off, to +do a little scouting up the Pass. The first thing that +he did was to slip off his heavy riding boots, which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> +the stylish Jo had forced him to buy, and to put on +his noiseless footed moccasins.</p> + +<p>Then with his revolver loaded and ready to his +hand, he went swiftly and silently up the trail that +followed through thick brush, gradually working up +the side of the mountain. It was no difficult task to +follow the tracks of the horses. In a half hour's +swift climbing he came to the top of a stony ridge, +over which the trail curved, and dipped down the +other side.</p> + +<p>Jim now saw that the Pass was an irregular one +with recurrent spurs, thrusting out from the +mountains on either side, at quite frequent intervals. +There were innumerable chances for ambuscades. +Jim did not stand in the trail but to one side +partially hidden in a thicket.</p> + +<p>All the time his keen eyes were taking in the canyon +below, not however admiring the scenery. In +fact there was nothing particularly beautiful, or interesting +in the view. In the Rockies and further +South too he had seen canyons incomparable to the +rather ordinary ones that he had seen in California.</p> + +<p>Jim was watching for some slight movement of a +living creature in the canyon. Finally he gave it up, +and was about to turn away, then he gave a start, +he saw one, two, three, men crouch across the trail, +a quarter of a mile below, and disappear into the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span> +thick brush. He was almost certain that the first +one was the hunchback.</p> + +<p>That was all that Jim wanted to see. He noiselessly +took the back trail, thinking over the best +course to pursue. He would have liked nothing better +under ordinary circumstances than to fight it out +with the outlaws and to capture the hunchback. +But their first object must be the rescue of Tom and +Juarez.</p> + +<p>Was there not some way by which they could get +to the South without going through this bandit infested +Pass?</p> + +<p>"Well brother, what didst thou find?" inquired Jo, +who was at times pleased to be dramatic.</p> + +<p>"Very few specimens in the way of bandits," replied +Jim.</p> + +<p>"As I said, Senor," remarked the Spaniard, "they +have become good citizens."</p> + +<p>"Not yet, I am sure, because they are alive."</p> + +<p>"That is a good one, Jim," remarked Jo, appreciatively, +but the Spaniard was politely mystified. +"Same as Indians."</p> + +<p>"I found one thing out," said the diplomatic Jim, +"and that is, that the Pass is a hard one on horses. +Are you sure, Senor, that there is no easier way +than this to get through?"</p> + +<p>"Positive," briefly responded the Spaniard.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span></p> + +<p>Jim who was seated on a rock digging his heel +into the soft earth, looked up as a sudden idea struck +him,—but without knocking him out.</p> + +<p>"How far is it from here to the sea, Senor?" he +asked.</p> + +<p>"Not over five miles."</p> + +<p>"Can we not get around that way?" Jim inquired +eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Why, yes," replied the Spaniard slowly, "if the +tide is not coming in. In that case we should be +drowned." Jim glanced hastily at his watch.</p> + +<p>"We can try for it and make it, if we do not +waste any time," he said. "The horses have had a +good rest."</p> + +<p>"Very well, Senor," said the Spaniard resignedly. +He regarded Jim as an amiable hurricane whom it +was not worth while battering to resist. Jim hastily +swallowed his coffee and a hunk of bread and in five +minutes the three musketeers were in the saddle +again.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXII</h2> + +<h3>RACE WITH THE TIDE</h3> + + +<p>In spite of the rough going, they made good +time for the five miles, spurred on by the constant +anxiety lest they should not reach the beach before +the tide began coming in. There were several +gathered to see them off when they left the mouth +of the Pass, but not to give them a send off.</p> + +<p>A short explanation will prove this. It is not +to be supposed that the hunchbacked Mexican +and the bandits did not know that the three horsemen +were coming over the plain of the mustard +growth. Indeed, their scout, the Mexican dwarf, +saw Jim, Jo and the Spaniard when they first +landed in the entrance to the canyon.</p> + +<p>He had gone back to report to the bandits +their coming, and after Jim had returned, they +had prepared the nicest trap imaginable near +where Jim had been hiding. They had had numerous +experiences in that line and were perfectly +qualified experts. The spider and the fly was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span> +nothing to the arrangements they had made to receive +their supposably unsuspicious guests.</p> + +<p>You can imagine the surprise and disgust of the +bandits and their scout when they saw the three +horsemen ride in an entirely different direction +than that they had looked for. Talk about convulsions, +you should have seen these desperadoes +express their disappointment. It was terrific. +Not a saint in the long calendar was left unscathed.</p> + +<p>How Jim would have enjoyed the performance. +But entirely oblivious to this, Jo, Jim and the +Spaniard were riding rapidly towards the sea. +Before an hour had passed, they had ridden between +the rounded sand dunes and then out upon +the hard, smooth sand of the beach.</p> + +<p>"This is splendid going, Senor Sebastian," exclaimed +Jim.</p> + +<p>"It is all right," he replied, "if the sea does not +get hungry too soon." But the sea appeared to be +in a very pleasant mood and the white breakers +had withdrawn as far out as it was possible to get. +It was such a smooth smiling sea with the laugh +of its little sparkling waves that it seemed that +there could be no possible harm in it.</p> + +<p>"I never saw a road that was better than this!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span> +exclaimed Jo in delight. "It is perfectly springy +and no dust or mud."</p> + +<p>It deserved all of Jo's praises, this broad, firm +California beach. The brown sand, that had been +pounded down by the force of the great rollers +some hours before, showed scarcely a sign of the +shoes of the horses.</p> + +<p>There was plenty of width and the three horses +pressed on abreast, the powerful sweep of the +gray Caliente and the chestnut Don Fernando, +and the snappy, nervous leaps of the little bay that +Jo was riding. With the bracing sea air and the +exhilarating speed, the three musketeers were invigorated.</p> + +<p>The Spaniard hummed a gay ballad, while at +times Jim's heavy bass and Jo's lighter treble +were joined in a rollicking American song. They +laughed without reason, for the simple joy of being +alive and on the move; but as pride sometimes +goes before destruction, so happiness often goes +before disaster.</p> + +<p>It was a small matter too, but it made for +trouble. The Spaniard's horse stepped between +two small rocks that were close together and +wrenched one of his hind shoes nearly off. Jim +and Senor Sebastian hastily dismounted. Of +course they carried with them the necessary things<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span> +to fix the shoe on again, but even then it was a +question of a number of minutes.</p> + +<p>"You had better ride ahead, Jo," urged Jim. +"Your horse is beginning to tire and we will overtake +you, when we once get started."</p> + +<p>"It is a good idea," joined in the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"All right," acquiesced Jo readily enough, and +he gave his bay the rein, riding slowly down the +beach.</p> + +<p>Then the two began operations on Don Fernando's +hind foot. Here they found their first real +delay. At the point where the accident happened, +the mountains came down quite close to the sea, +so that they were crowded in much closer than +they had been. The nearness of the water made +the big chestnut restless and hard to handle.</p> + +<p>The Spaniard had great difficulty in getting +near enough to his horse to get hold of his hind +foot. When he did succeed in doing this, and +was just starting to peg the shoe on, an extra big +wave slapped down upon the beach, though at a +safe distance and caused the big chestnut to jump +and hurl his master to a distance of a dozen feet.</p> + +<p>"This won't do," cried Jim. "I'll take my horse +around to the sea side of yours and close up. Perhaps +that will give your animal confidence."</p> + +<p>It worked like a charm, for though Caliente was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span> +high-spirited, he was not flighty and he steadied +his comrade so that the two workers were able to +fasten the shoe.</p> + +<p>"We have lost a good half hour," said Jim, looking +at his watch with a grave face.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we shall have to turn back," remarked +the Spaniard with gravity. "We may not escape +the incoming tide if we go on."</p> + +<p>"Don't you believe it," cried Jim, impetuously. +"I've got business ahead and must go."</p> + +<p>"Have it your way," said the Spaniard with a +peculiar smile. He knew what dangers lay ahead +with a rising tide and Jim did not or he probably +would not have been so insistent.</p> + +<p>"I see no sign of Jo," remarked Jim, as they +swung into the saddles.</p> + +<p>"Ah, we will not catch him. He is safe," replied +the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>Then with tremendous speed, they swept down +the beach, the splendid horses responding to the +crisis. It was their fleetness against the steadily +rising rush of the inexorable sea. They actually +gained ten minutes on the first two miles and a +half. Then Jim saw ahead the dark form of a +headland thrusting out towards the sea.</p> + +<p>Already the rush of a long wave would send the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span> +water lapping around their horses' feet. Jim +recognized the danger. They must get around +that promontory or give up beaten. Then he gave +Caliente a touch with a spur, the first that day. +With a snort, the spirited animal sprang forward +faster than before and at his shoulder was the +chestnut with flaming nostril.</p> + +<p>None too soon had they reached the headland, +for the recurrent waves were beginning to surge +against it, with full force and gnawing foam. In +the fierce fury of their charge, they sent their +horses against the sea. It was at the long withdrawal +that made bare the scattered black rocks, +that they rounded the headland.</p> + +<p>But too soon a great thundering wave with the +force of the Pacific behind it came roaring in +and swelled to the horses' throats, almost submerging +the riders. But the animals held against +its withdrawing power and before the ocean could +return to the attack, they had got beyond the headland +to a safe place on the beach.</p> + +<p>The horses were trembling and quivering with +their exertions and with the fear of the sea +which is the most terrible and paralyzing of +all fears. Jim drew a long breath of relief and +looked ahead to see if there was any sign of Jo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span> +Then to his consternation he saw that the beach +curved inland and at the further end of the curve +was another frowning headland thrusting itself +out somewhat further than the one they had but +just rounded.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII</h2> + +<h3>THE ENCHANTED ISLE</h3> + + +<p>Let us now return to the Sea Eagle, and find out +what is happening there.</p> + +<p>You recollect that Juarez had just discovered two +islands lying on the South-eastern horizon, the one, +long and low, the other comparatively short and +dumpy. He had been conversing with the tall shepherd +of the island, who seemed to take an interest in +Juarez. But because of his isolated life during a +greater part of the year, he would have taken an +interest in a stone idol, if he had chanced to discover +one.</p> + +<p>"Which of these islands are we making for?" inquired +Juarez.</p> + +<p>"The one where we land," replied the sheep farmer +oracularly. "I might ask the Cap'n, only I never +pester him with questions. You aren't a Yankee, +are you?"</p> + +<p>"No," replied Juarez, "I'm not. My folks live in +Western Kansas."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I'm glad to hear it, son. But what are you doing +here?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"You aren't a Yankee, are you?" inquired Juarez, +quizzically. The man laughed softly to himself.</p> + +<p>"You've got me there, lad," he said. "It looks to +me," he continued, "that the old man is going to +steer for the further island."</p> + +<p>"Then you will have to swim for your home," remarked +Juarez.</p> + +<p>"I can wade," he replied whimsically, looking +down at his long legs.</p> + +<p>"You are a humorist," said Juarez.</p> + +<p>"No, you can put me down for a philosopher, +that is to say, a man who has much time to think +and nothing to do."</p> + +<p>"I should like to be one," said Juarez. "Suppose +you holy-stone these decks while I try it."</p> + +<p>"No, my friend," replied the shepherd, "I am too +much of a philosopher to make any such swap."</p> + +<p>"Is Captain Broom one?" asked Juarez.</p> + +<p>"Well, he is a sort of a philosopher till he gets +mad, then he becomes a living active volcano, belching +out a lava of hot language and scorching things +generally. I guess that I had better be moving along. +I see that he is eyeing me from the Bridge, and he is +likely to get active any moment if I keep you from +working." With this the lanky shepherd strolled<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span> +forward and seating himself upon the top of the +boys' sleeping place in the bow, smoked his pipe in +meditative comfort.</p> + +<p>His estimate in regard to the destination of the +Sea Eagle proved to be correct. For in the early +afternoon the ship passed under the lee of the long +island and was steaming up the channel between it +and the mainland, which was distant some thirty-five +miles.</p> + +<p>The fog had cleared by noon, and there was that +complete transition to brilliant, sunny weather. +There was a sort of a white haze along the distant +coast and beyond far inland, rose the faint summits +of the high mountains.</p> + +<p>Fortunately Juarez and Tom had a chance to +observe their new surroundings for they had been +set to work sewing on a small sail that was to be +used in one of the boats. They sat upon the top of +one of the hatches, under the watchful eyes of old +Pete and the philosophic gaze of the shepherd. +Sewing was one of the accomplishments of the +Frontier Boys. They had been obliged to learn.</p> + +<p>"What is that particular bronze looking weed, +floating in these waters?" asked Tom. It was as +Tom phrased it, bronze and a most beautiful color.</p> + +<p>It was indeed a giant among weeds; just such as +the garden of the ocean would grow. The stems<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span> +were fifty to eighty feet long, with peculiar colored +leaves eight to ten inches in length, growing on little +boughs from the parent stem. The whole structure +was held up by small bronze buoys, of a round shape.</p> + +<p>"Well as ye seem likely boys and want to learn, +I'll tell you about this plant," said the shepherd. +"The scientific fellows call it Algae. When the +world was first made this algae covered the whole +surface of the ocean."</p> + +<p>"How did you learn this?" asked Juarez.</p> + +<p>"You know that the Captain is quite a collector, +and in his travels has gotten together among many +other things some interesting books. He gives them +to me when convenient." The face of the lanky +shepherd was perfectly grave when he spoke of +Captain Broom as a collector.</p> + +<p>"What makes the water so clear around here?" +asked Juarez. "I never saw anything like it."</p> + +<p>"Well, you see," replied their mentor, "this island +is placed peculiarly, I mean this side of it. You +see how quiet the water is?"</p> + +<p>"It is certainly smooth and blue," said Juarez. +"More like a lake than the ocean."</p> + +<p>"That's only true of this side," resumed the +shepherd, "the other is rough enough, but you see +the prevailing winds are from the Northwest and +this shore is never disturbed. So on the beaches<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span> +you will find not sand, but smooth round pebbles, +because there is no action of the water, no breakers +or waves to grind them into sand."</p> + +<p>About four o'clock the Sea Eagle came into a perfectly +beautiful little harbor, at the South-eastern +end of the island. There was a small level plot +back from the beach and on all sides rose steep hills +and back of them the mountains. It was the most +picturesque scene the boys had ever beheld in all +their travels.</p> + +<p>What would they not have given to have been free +to roam that island, hunting inland, or fishing or +bathing along those quiet, enchanted shores. But this +was no pleasure excursion. Far from it. Captain +Broom had his own ideas, and he did not intend +to make a landing at all.</p> + +<p>"Get the whale boat ready, lads!" he ordered. +"And put her over, we've got no time to lose."</p> + +<p>They lost no time either, under Captain Broom's +commanding eye.</p> + +<p>What was necessary for the cruise was already in +the boat. Two casks of water, several guns, and a +lot of provisions. Then the boat was hove overboard +into the quiet bay. The captain was ready +with a much battered satchel in his hand. Not for +one second did he entrust it to any one else.</p> + +<p>"Now over with you, you two lads," he com<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span>manded +and Juarez and Tom, with a sinking of the +heart, got into the boat. This was the last leg of their +mysterious journey, and it boded them no good +they felt sure of that. The mate they noticed stayed +aboard in charge of the ship.</p> + +<p>They were put in the stern where old Pete had the +steering oar. Near them sat the shepherd on one of +the casks of water, his long legs getting uncertain +accommodation. The captain had his position in the +bow and two powerful sailors were at the oars, one +on either side. They did not sit down, but stood up +to their work.</p> + +<p>Without any loss of time the boat got under way +proceeding seaward from the shelter of the beautiful +little harbor. In spite of their depression, the two +boys could not help being interested in the absolutely +clear water in which they could look down for +eighty feet.</p> + +<p>They could see the straight slender columns of the +Algae rising to the surface, starting from where +they were rooted in the bottom of the bay and swaying +to the slow pulsation of the tide. These strange +plants of this marine garden were marvels indeed. +Between their stalks and among the encrusted rocks +swam in absolute unconsciousness of being watched, +many beautiful, and strange fishes.</p> + +<p>Some were small of golden hue, with little spots<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span> +of a marvelous blue (poetry) that flashed like keen +electric dew, (that will do). Others were like gold +fishes, a foot in length and of corresponding +breadth. There were long mackerel, and innumerable +minnows, and over the rocks a peculiar little +fish crawled or rather walked on thin rat-like feet.</p> + +<p>Before they had time to observe further the boat +had got out of the harbor where the water sunk away +to blue unfathomed depth. When clear of the harbor, +they turned to the South, passing near a cove +with a symmetrical pebbly beach, built up for five +feet, above the level of the water. The ocean was +perfectly smooth, with not a ripple upon its surface. +They were evidently making to round the Southern +extremity of the Island.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV</h2> + +<h3>IN THE WHITE BOAT</h3> + + +<p>Ahead of them was a rock rising fifty or sixty +feet out of the water. It was evident that the rock +was inhabited for there could be seen dark forms +moving around upon it. Nothing had been said +since they started, for the Captain was not in a +talkative mood. Jeems Howell, the shepherd, had +sat silently smoking his pipe in philosophic contentment.</p> + +<p>"What are those things on that rock?" inquired +Tom, his curiosity getting the best of his reserve.</p> + +<p>"Two yankees in this boat," commented the +shepherd. "Those are seals, son. Didn't you ever +see any before?"</p> + +<p>"No!" admitted Tom.</p> + +<p>"You didn't know that seals, next to humans, are +the smartest animals, in the world."</p> + +<p>"Is that so?" inquired Juarez. "They certainly +are sleek."</p> + +<p>"They have got the most brain room, that's a +fact."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys regarded the seals with peculiar interest +as the boat passed near the rock. They were moving +about awkwardly by means of their flippers, moving +their sinuous necks this way and that and regarding +the strange boat with their soft brown eyes. +Then they dived headlong into the sea, swimming +about with a peculiar grace.</p> + +<p>"Queer animals," remarked Tom, "belong half to +the sea and half to the land."</p> + +<p>"Something like sailors," remarked the shepherd.</p> + +<p>"What's the Captain going to do with us?" asked +Juarez in a low voice. The shepherd's face took on +a solemn expression, but before he could reply the +Captain's voice roared.</p> + +<p>"None of that, you'll find out soon enough. You +can talk about the flory and fauny, with long shanks, +but don't let me hear anything else out of you," such +was the Captain's ultimatum.</p> + +<p>But soon matters grew so interesting that they lost +all inclination for talking. When they got near the +Southern end of the island they began to notice +white caps to the Southward, dotting the darkness +of the sea.</p> + +<p>"You lads will have to hold tight now in a few +minutes," remarked Howell. "Do you get seasick?"</p> + +<p>"No," replied the boys.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, you will have a chance soon, and if it don't +fetch you, nothing will."</p> + +<p>So far they had been rowing under the sheltering +lee of the island whose huge rocky bulk had shouldered +off the charge of the wind-driven seas. Now +before they had fairly rounded the island the character +of the water began to change. The boat began to +toss on the great rollers. Then as they cleared the +land for good and were in the channel, a fresh gust +of wind struck them, drenching the occupants of the +boat with spray.</p> + +<p>The Captain stood up in the bow of the boat and +steadying himself took in the conditions of the sea +and wind. There was nothing in his grim weatherbeaten +face to show what he felt. The men at the +oars now made hard work of it against the headwind +and the running sea.</p> + +<p>They would climb up a steep wave and then with +a sickening slide, go down into the hollow, then with +a lusty pull the sailors would bring the heavy boat +over the toppling crest of wave to find another rushing +to meet them. No rest, this was what made it +such heart breaking work.</p> + +<p>The early fog had come, covering the sea with +gloom, and the waves did not go down perceptibly. +At times, they shipped a good deal of water and +Tom and Juarez were kept busy bailing out. After<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span> +an hour's hard struggle the sailors were about all +in and seemed hardly able to hold their own against +the sea and wind. The Captain was quick to notice +this.</p> + +<p>"Can you row, lad?" he inquired of Juarez. Now +the latter's experience had been confined to his work +going down the Grand Canyon of Colorado, on the +raft-boat that the Frontier Boys had built.</p> + +<p>Even the old ocean itself could not show anything +worse than some of the rapids that the boys had run. +As for rocks, nothing could beat the canyon for +them.</p> + +<p>"I'll try, sir," he replied, "I've never rowed on the +ocean."</p> + +<p>"Humph!" grunted the Captain, "take the starboard. +And you, you lazy long shanks, you take the +other oar."</p> + +<p>"All right, sir," replied cheerfully, the one addressed.</p> + +<p>"Get out of here, Pete," he cried, giving that +worthy a lift with his foot that landed him on top of +Tom, "I'll do the steering. You boys will only have +to pull, that's all. I'll keep her headed up right."</p> + +<p>Fortunately Juarez was in fine condition, or he +could never have stood the gruelling work ahead. +He weighed one hundred and sixty pounds and there +was not an ounce of fat on him. Likewise he had<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span> +had a sound night's sleep and three square meals +so that he was fortified for what was ahead.</p> + +<p>Juarez buckled to the task with all his strength, +and he was glad of the chance to get his blood in +circulation for he was chilled to the bone by the flying +spray, and then too, anything was better than +thinking of the fate ahead. He was surprised to +find out that the shepherd who appeared rather +frail in physique was able to keep up the pace.</p> + +<p>But he had that sinewy length of muscles that +counts for more than mere bunchy thickness. +Juarez was crafty enough not to spend all of his +strength in the first fifteen minutes of work. He +liked this, fighting the sea and standing on his feet +he was able to put the whole leverage of his body into +the stroke.</p> + +<p>The change in speed was noticeable right away, +and the boat began to pull ahead steadily. The two +sailors who had been laid off from exhaustion, had +watched Juarez with a sneering grin as he took the +oar. They were sure that the first wave that came +along would wrench the oar out of his hand. Great +was their surprise when they saw him buckle to the +oar, rising and pulling at the right time to meet +the toppling, rustling seas.</p> + +<p>"That little shrimp will last about ten minutes," +said one of them to his mate.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Sure, Bill," replied the other.</p> + +<p>Juarez choked back a hot reply, for he knew that +it would not be good for him to say anything to them. +They were in the majority and would get him if he +did, besides making it bad for Tom. The ten minutes +passed and Juarez was just beginning to warm to +his work. This took the wind out of their sails +completely.</p> + +<p>The powerful hand of the Skipper at the steering +oar was a great help, for now all that the two men +at the oars had to do was to pull and not to worry +about keeping her headed right. Juarez kept +steadily at it for an hour and then darkness began +to fall over the channel but not until the island that +they were approaching had begun to loom up, dead +ahead.</p> + +<p>They were now getting in the lee of the strange +island and the sea was moderating perceptibly. At +this juncture the two sailors who had become +thoroughly rested took the oars from Juarez and his +co-worker and pulled steadily through the gathering +gloom. In a short time the bulk of the island +loomed above them in the darkness.</p> + +<p>Not a word was said, only the swish of the sea +was heard and the groaning of the oars in the locks. +Tom and Juarez were deeply depressed and gloomy. +They felt exactly as though they were being taken<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span> +to prison and could sympathize with sailors who had +been marooned on lonely and desolate islands.</p> + +<p>"Easy now, lads," called the Captain, as he brought +the boat's head squarely around towards the shore.</p> + +<p>"Two strokes," he yelled, "and let her run."</p> + +<p>With great force they pulled the oars in succession, +then they shipped them in a hurry. Juarez +could see the dashing of foam on either side of the +boat where the waves smote the rocks. There was a +roar in his ears as the boat rushed toward seeming +sure destruction. It was going with great speed +from the impetus of the sailors' strokes.</p> + +<p>The Captain was standing taut at the steering +oars, his eyes piercing the darkness ahead, then the +foam of the breakers dashed in their faces, there +was a quick sliding past of dark rocks and before +they could draw breath again the boat was in quiet +water, under some black cliffs. At last they had +reached the mysterious goal of their mysterious +journey.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXV</h2> + +<h3>IN PERIL</h3> + + +<p>We must now go back in our narrative to where +we left Jim Darlington and the Spaniard, Senor +Sebastian, in a position of extreme peril, between +the cliffs and the deep sea, with the white-fanged +tide coming in like a devouring monster eager for +its prey.</p> + +<p>"Is there a chance, Senor?" cried Jim as soon +as his horse gained his footing.</p> + +<p>"It is the fatal day, I fear," replied the Spaniard +with resigned hopelessness. "The sea is hungry."</p> + +<p>"As for that, so am I," declared Jim coolly. "So +let us try to get around the headland and after that, +supper."</p> + +<p>"As you please," acquiesced the Spaniard quietly.</p> + +<p>Then Jim turned Caliente's head and with a +quick touch of the spur sent him full stride along +the curving beach, followed closely by the Spaniard. +Already the heavy waves were licking far<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> +up the slant of the sand. Even the veteran Caliente +seemed nervous at its approach, while Don +Fernando would jump and shy as the hissing water +crept around his feet.</p> + +<p>In about two minutes the two horsemen reached +the base of the rocky headland that barred their +way. It was a desperate moment, there was +but one thing to do and that was to take the +chance.</p> + +<p>"Better be drowned quick, Caliente, old boy," +cried Jim, "than slowly, but we'll beat you yet," +and he shook his clenched fist at the ocean, and +whirled his horse to meet a wave that struck +Caliente breast high. So for a moment, the two, +boy and horse, stood facing their powerful enemy, +The Sea, that came with the recurring charge, +its evenly separated files robed in blue with white +crests. Thus they stood getting a full free breath +before they leaped into the ranks of the foe.</p> + +<p>Jim's strained, keen gaze took in every detail of +the situation, noting the position of the rocks that +a receding wave left bare, so that he might find a +clear path or trail in his dash for life. Nor did +his gaze flinch as he saw the advancing wave +break against the front of the cliff.</p> + +<p>"Now, Caliente," yelled Jim, with a sense of +fierce determination and exultation that communi<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span>cated +itself to his horse, and lifting his feet free +from the stirrups so that he would not be entangled, +if Caliente should fall, he headed him +seaward, galloping fast down the beach upon the +heels of the withdrawing wave.</p> + +<p>Meeting a smaller inrush of water and dashing +through its foaming crest, his gallant horse swam +until he got a foothold upon the rocks at the base +of the cliff. Now was the crucial moment. With +absolute recklessness, Jim urged his powerful +horse over the foam-covered rocks, striving to +get around the prow of the headland before the +charge of the next wave. Not one look did Jim +give seaward, all his energies were bent upon +using every precious second, and Caliente was +filled with his rider's indomitable spirit.</p> + +<p>Then above them towered the fatal wave, and +with a confused roar, it broke over them in sweltering +foam and they were swept towards the +black front of the cliff. Then came the impact +against the rock and the next moment, stunned +and bruised, Jim holding to the pommel of the +saddle, with a death-grip, was carried out to sea +with Caliente in the grasp of the retreating wave.</p> + +<p>It was all over, as like pieces of drift, horse +and rider were swept away, but fortune does +sometime favor the brave and, being caught in a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> +powerful current, Caliente was carried South of +the headland and his progress towards the sea was +stayed by a rock that rose high, an outer-guard of +the headland. So then the next great wave bore +them toward the beach, and once Caliente got his +feet upon the sandy bottom he braced himself +against the fierce pull of the retreating sea, striving +to drag him back again.</p> + +<p>Though almost unconscious, Jim clung to the +saddle with his body half-drooping over the pommel. +Then Caliente plunged blindly forward until +he stood with head bent down and nose almost +touching the sand, his great sides heaving, but +safe at last.</p> + +<p>In the distance, a horseman could be seen coming +at full gallop along the straight line of the +beach. It was Jo, who finally had become frightened +by the non-appearance of his two comrades +and had turned back. His fright had been increased +by seeing a horse and rider coming apparently +out of the sea.</p> + +<p>When he came up, he found his brother Jim +sitting on the sand still half dazed but slowly coming +to himself.</p> + +<p>"Where's the Senor, Jim?" cried Jo. This +question served to bring Jim completely to himself. +He got up, looking pale, with one side of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span> +his face bruised to a real blackness, and the flesh +of his left hand badly torn, where it had struck +the cliff, but he was not thinking of these matters.</p> + +<p>"Why, Jo, the Senor came after me. Where is +he?" Then it came over him all at once, that his +companion was even now caught between the jaws +of the black cliff.</p> + +<p>"We must get to him, Jo," he cried.</p> + +<p>"But how did you ever get around that cliff?" +asked Jo.</p> + +<p>Already it was an awesome sight as the waves +crashed in foam against its front and rushed shoreward +along its black sides. It seemed impossible +that only fifteen minutes before Jim had actually +come around that foaming headland.</p> + +<p>In reply to Jo's question, Jim threw his arms +around Caliente's neck with warm affection.</p> + +<p>"This is the old fellow that pulled me through," +he cried. "But we must go to the help of our +Spanish friend."</p> + +<p>"How can we?" inquired Jo. "We can't get +around the headland unless we become fishes."</p> + +<p>Jim considered the problem carefully. One +thing he was determined on and that was not to +leave the Spaniard who had been so hospitable +and helpful to them.</p> + +<p>"No, we can't go around by the headland," he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span> +determined, "but we might be able to find a way +over the rocks and down on the other side."</p> + +<p>"All right, I'm ready."</p> + +<p>"Let's find a place for Caliente first," advised +his owner. Back a short distance from the beach +there were some trees on a lower spur of the +mountain. Here Jim brought Caliente and took +off the saddle and bridle.</p> + +<p>"Now make yourself comfortable," said Jim.</p> + +<p>Caliente, in seeming recognition of what was +said, took immediate advantage of the invitation +and rolled heartily in a dry and dusty spot.</p> + +<p>"Get your lasso, Jo," urged Jim, "and we will +start."</p> + +<p>So together they made for the steep rock and +soon reached the base of it, and now began a hard +climb, but no more difficult than they had encountered +before in their travels.</p> + +<p>"Do you recollect, Jim," inquired Jo, "that day +you got stalled in our first canyon in Colorado, +when you tried to imitate an eagle and fly up +a precipitous cliff and we had to get you +down?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, yes, I remember," replied Jim, "and how +I scared you and Tom by pretending that an Injun +was after me, when I went down to the creek +for water."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Poor Tom," said Jo sadly, "I wonder when we +will see him again."</p> + +<p>"In a couple of days," stoutly declared the optimistic +Jim.</p> + +<p>They were now going up the face of the cliff, +the lariats over their shoulders, and searching +with careful feet for a foothold, while their hands +clutched some piece of projecting rock.</p> + +<p>"Lucky this rock isn't rotten," cried Jo, "or we +would find ourselves stuck headfirst in the sand +below."</p> + +<p>"Like an ostrich," said Jim. "We couldn't do +much in a place like this without our moccasins, +that's certain."</p> + +<p>The moccasins did make them nimble as goats, +and they not only made possible a secure hold, +but they protected as well the feet. At first they +were not in any grave danger of a fall because the +drifted sand at the bottom of the cliff would have +made a soft landing. But after a while they were +forced to work their way out over the rushing water, +then if they had slipped and fallen it would +have been all up with them.</p> + +<p>It seemed as if the sea, furious at having lost +Jim a short while ago, was making fierce efforts +to get at them now. The great waves foamed +against the cliff and the spray dashed over the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span> +boys, making the surface of the rock treacherous +and slippery.</p> + +<p>"I can't bear to look down," said Jo. "It makes +me dizzy."</p> + +<p>"Look up, then," Jim called back.</p> + +<p>"That's almost as bad," replied Jo.</p> + +<p>"Keep 'em shut then," was Jim's command.</p> + +<p>Finally they came to a place that stopped Jo entirely. +Jim was able to get over it, because of his +superior height and reach, and he attained a point +of safety above Jo.</p> + +<p>"What am I going to do now?" cried Jo. "I +can't go any higher and it is impossible for me to +go back."</p> + +<p>"You wait," urged Jim, "till I get a secure foothold +above here."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I'll wait," said Jo grimly, "you don't observe +any anxiety on my part to move, do you?"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI</h2> + +<h3>TWO LASSOES</h3> + + +<p>Finally Jim reached a broad ledge, that gave +him an excellent foothold, and he got his lariat +ready and dangled the loop under Jo's nose.</p> + +<p>"What are you going to hang me for?" inquired +Jo.</p> + +<p>"For a horse thief, I reckon," replied Jim, "that +bay don't belong to you does it, Mister?"</p> + +<p>"Meaning this ocean bay?" queried Jo.</p> + +<p>"I certainly will hang you for that," retorted +Jim, "Now get the loop under your armpits."</p> + +<p>"All ready," cried Jo.</p> + +<p>Then Jim, bracing himself, kept a taut line on +his brother, and with this help he was able quite +easily to get over the slippery, bare belt of rock, +and in a few moments was safe with Jim on the +ledge.</p> + +<p>"It won't take us long now," said Jo, "to get +to the other side."</p> + +<p>"Let's give him a yell," suggested Jim, "to let +him know that we are coming."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span></p> + +<p>Then Jim put his hands to his lips and cried:</p> + +<p>"Senor, ahoy." They listened breathlessly and +in a few moments came a faint reply. This put +renewed energy into the boys and as the way was +now easier, they leaped ahead, agile as goats, and +had soon reached the top of the cliff. They looked +eagerly down.</p> + +<p>There was the deep short semi-circle of the +little bay with the waves heaving in against the +cliffs and at the point midway between the two +head-lands, where the beach was highest, they saw +the Spaniard on Don Fernando. Already the encroaching +waves were gnawing at them.</p> + +<p>It was only a question of minutes now, and +horse and rider would be carried out to sea. The +Spaniard sat like a statute. It was seemingly possible +for him to have made his escape up the cliffs, +which were not overly precipitous, like those Jim +and Jo had just scaled, but he was a fatalist and +believed that his day had come. Perhaps he did +not want to abandon his horse, in which his pride +was centered.</p> + +<p>"Cheer up, Senor, we'll be there," yelled Jim.</p> + +<p>Then followed by Jo, he sprang forward, leaping +from rock to rock, and from jutting point to +opportune foothold. It was dangerous and daring +work, but the life of their friend was at stake and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span> +the boys were not the kind to consider their own +safety at such a time.</p> + +<p>It was only their sure-footedness and varied experience +in climbing that saved them from broken +limbs or possible death. In a remarkably short +time, they stood upon a ledge above the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"Here, Senor," yelled Jim, "catch the rope."</p> + +<p>He did as ordered but called up, "Is there no +way to save my horse?"</p> + +<p>Jim considered a moment, then shouted: "All +right, yes, we will save your horse, too. Tie the +ends of the lasso to the iron rings at the ends of the +front cinch." This was a broad, strong band, +which would furnish a good purchase, when Jim +tossed down the lariat. The Spaniard caught it +and made it fast as ordered.</p> + +<p>"Now, fasten this under your arms," ordered +Jim, as he cast down the second lariat, which belonged +to Jo. They then drew up the Spaniard to +safety and he appeared to be pleased in a quiet way +but not at all enthusiastic.</p> + +<p>"I am your eternal debtor, Senors," he said with +a courteous bow.</p> + +<p>"How was it you did not follow me, Senor?" +questioned Jim, "when I sailed around the headland?"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Don Fernando balked," replied the Senor. "I +thought, too, that you had been drowned."</p> + +<p>"Came near it," replied Jim. "I would, too, if +it had not been for Caliente."</p> + +<p>"But my poor Fernando, he will be drowned," +cried the Spaniard, now much more excited about +the safety of his steed than he had been for his +own. It did look rather bad for the big chestnut, +as a large wave swelling in, almost took him off +his feet. He began to neigh wildly.</p> + +<p>"Don't worry, Don, old boy," cried Jim to the +frightened horse. "If you will help yourself." +There was something in his voice that seemed to +reassure the animal.</p> + +<p>"Now, Jo, we will let you down by the lariat +and get the bridle reins over his head and help +him get a foothold on that ledge below us. He +will be safe enough there, even if he does get +somewhat damp."</p> + +<p>"Let me go. It is my risk for my horse," urged +the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"It is no risk, Senor," replied Jim. "You are +heavier than my brother and stronger and can do +more good on this ledge with me."</p> + +<p>"The commands of the General!" said the Spaniard +with a low bow. "I see your plan is good."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We will tie this end of the lasso to the tree," +said Jim, "so you will feel perfectly safe, Jo."</p> + +<p>The tree referred to was a sturdy, gnarled cedar, +growing on the ledge. Then Jim swung his +brother off and with every confidence in the +strength of the lariat to hold, Jo made his way +quickly and safely down, while if he had been +without the rope he would have doubtless fallen +into the water below.</p> + +<p>A wave surged in, submerging him, and then +started triumphantly to carry him out to sea, but +when the lariat pulled taut Jo struggled safely +back on the rock, while the wave went grumbling +back.</p> + +<p>"Catch the bridle now, Jo," urged Jim. "Don't +waste any more time swimming."</p> + +<p>Thus adjured, Jo grabbed the bridle reins and +pulled them over Don Fernando's head, and braced +himself on the rock above. All was ready now, +and the two above held the loop of the lasso that +had been tied at the cinch, with both hands, and +they pulled together. Again a big wave swelled +in towards the cliff, which gave the frightened +horse a big boost.</p> + +<p>Then, with Jim and the Spaniard pulling mightily +from the ledge above, and Jo giving the big +chestnut a purchase by a steady pull upon his<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> +bridle, the horse scrambled with a mighty clatter +and all his frightened energy up the sloping rock. +The lariat and Jo's work helped a whole lot. +Without the three, he would never have made it.</p> + +<p>Before the next wave swept in, Don Fernando +stood, trembling and dripping, but safe, upon the +lower ledge. He seemed above the danger point +now, though an unusually big wave welled up +around the horse's fetlocks and the spray was continually +dashing upwards.</p> + +<p>"He is all right now," cried Jim, "better come +up, Jo, where it is dryer."</p> + +<p>"Haul in then," replied Jo, and then he was +landed safely on the ledge.</p> + +<p>"Caught a speckled trout," exclaimed Jim in +happy humor again.</p> + +<p>"Referring to my freckles, I suppose," grinned +Jo. "If I'm a fish, I reckon Don Fernando is a +whale."</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose he is safe?" inquired the Spaniard +anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Who, Jo?"</p> + +<p>"Ah, no," said the Spaniard smilingly. "I mean +the Don. The water seems to be rising."</p> + +<p>"You may rest assured that he is safe," replied +Jim. "It is the turn of the tide now, and it is only<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span> +a westerly wind that makes it appear higher. All +we will have to do now is to wait."</p> + +<p>"It is a great pity, this delay," said the Spaniard +warmly. "You are anxious to be on to the +rescue of your brother and his friend. Anyway, +I hope you will succeed as well in their case as +you did in mine."</p> + +<p>"In another hour we will be able to start," said +Jim, "the tide will then commence to run out."</p> + +<p>"Where shall we stop tonight?" inquired Jo.</p> + +<p>"Camp in the open as usual," replied Jim.</p> + +<p>"I hope we will get up above the sea so high +that it won't come within a mile of us," said Jo, +fervently.</p> + +<p>"As to a place to stop, I will see to that," said +the Spaniard. "Do not give yourselves any uneasiness +on that score."</p> + +<p>"It's getting kind of chilly roosting up here," +remarked Jo, plaintively, "especially as the fog is +coming in."</p> + +<p>"I'll warm you," said Jim. "Put up your +Dukes."</p> + +<p>"You'll take the counts if I put up my Dukes," +said Jo, who was an inveterate punnist.</p> + +<p>"Shut up," yelled Jim, giving his brother a +hearty chug in the chest. Then they went at it +hammer and tongs, giving and receiving good<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span> +hard blows, and after ten minutes of whaling at +each other, both were plenty warm. The Spaniard +looked on in mild wonder.</p> + +<p>"You Americans love the hard exercise," he +said. "I should think you would have great pleasure +in resting awhile."</p> + +<p>"I got the best of the bout," declared Jo. "See +how black and blue your face is on this side."</p> + +<p>"You didn't do that," protested Jim. "That +was a wallop that old Neptune handed me when he +bumped my head against yonder cliff."</p> + +<p>"Neptune! Yonder cliff!" jeered Jo. "You +ought to be a story writer and use fine words."</p> + +<p>"Me a story writer!" growled Jim. "I <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'aint'">ain't</ins> got +so low as that, not so long as I have got two hands +to steal chickens with."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII</h2> + +<h3>ANOTHER FRIEND</h3> + + +<p>"Do you not think, Senor Darlington, that it is +now safe to start?" inquired the Spaniard, who was +fearful of bloodshed, not quite understanding the +boys.</p> + +<p>"Certainly," responded Jim, "we will get Don +Fernando down from his perch and proceed."</p> + +<p>This proved to be an easier task than getting him +up. His master lowered by the rope to his side, one +scrambling leap and the horse was on the firm wet +sand of the beach, almost knocking his master over +in his eagerness to be on safe footing again. Don +Sebastian now showed the gay side of his nature, as +he vaulted into the saddle.</p> + +<p>He swung his hat wildly, the blood mounting to +his face, and the horse seemed to feel the sting and +excitement of his master's mood, as he pranced, +danced and caracoled upon the sand and ended up +by bowing in unison with his master to the two +American lads, who were looking on with interest +and amusement.</p> + +<p>Then the party made their way quickly along the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span> +curve of the beach and went around the fateful +headland with perfect safety, while quite a distance +out among the hidden rocks snarled the defeated +ocean. Then Caliente heard them coming and he +quickly raised his head, neighing in welcome to Jim +and his comrade, Don Fernando.</p> + +<p>Jim gave him a vigorous hug for more than ever +he was fond of his faithful horse. In a few minutes +he had him saddled and away the three horsemen +thudded in a swift gallop down the beach. The +horses fairly flew, the wind of their speed tossing +their manes back. It was cool beneath the fog +laden sky and the refreshing sea air seemed to +give the horses tireless endurance.</p> + +<p>Soon three miles had spun backwards under their +hoofs and the boys were filled with the joyous excitement +of the run. It seemed now that every stride +of the horses was bringing them nearer to the +hoped-for rescue of Tom and Juarez. And this was +an incentive to their energy.</p> + +<p>"Here, friends, is where we branch off from the +beach," cried the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>Then he turned his horse to the left and headed +straight for a wooded spur that extended from the +range to the shore. In a short time the three came +to a well-traveled trail and were soon riding through<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span> +the semi-dusk of the woods. For two miles they +went up a steady grade.</p> + +<p>Then they rounded the summit of the wooded +ridge and saw stretching far below them in the indistinct +dusk, a wide plain bounded on the West by +the blue darkness of the level sea with its rim of +yellow sand.</p> + +<p>"We will soon be at the home of my friend, Senor +Valdez," said the Spaniard, "where we will spend +the night."</p> + +<p>"I'm a lovely looking object to present itself in a +civilized home," protested Jim, "I look like a tough +who has been in a bar-room rush."</p> + +<p>"You are my brave friend," said Senor Sebastian, +quietly, "and will be welcome."</p> + +<p>Jim blushed, at least one side of his face did, the +other was already too deeply colored to show any +emotion, and he grinned sheepishly. Before he had +time to reply they swept into an open driveway, +carefully sanded, and drew rein in front of a long, +low white adobe house, that from its mountain terrace +looked over Plain and Sea.</p> + +<p>Out came Senor Valdez to receive them, a stately +Spaniard, who furnished the boys with an ideal of +perfect courtesy ever after. To the end of their +days they remembered their first visit to the home +of Senor Valdez. How they did enjoy their dinner<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span> +that evening in the long, pleasantly lighted dining-room.</p> + +<p>It was an excellent meal, with delicious soup, a +salad garnished with peppers of the Spanish style, +and garlic. Jim and Jo had never tasted anything +equal to it. Besides there were frijoles and lamb, +while the dessert was some slight and delicate confection +of jelly and cream, made by the hands of +the Senora Valdez.</p> + +<p>"I feel wicked sitting here and eating this fine +meal," said Jo, addressing Jim in a low voice, +"when Tom and Juarez are being ill used and probably +starved."</p> + +<p>"Well," replied Jim, who was always practical, +"I think it is better to eat, and to keep my strength +up."</p> + +<p>"I guess it won't fail," commented Jo slyly.</p> + +<p>The boys bore themselves well, and without any +diffidence though Jim had a whimsical recollection +of his bruised side face and blackened eye, and he +tried to keep it turned from the Senora Valdez, the +fragile little woman who sat at the end of the table +opposite her husband. She had snow white hair, +parted low over her ears and the pallid face was +lined with years. Very gentle was the Senora Valdez, +but she had in her time beheld scenes of car<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span>nage +and terror, so Jim need not have worried +about his bruised face. But the wise old lady +noticed his solicitude and understanding, was the +more gracious to the young Americano because +of it.</p> + +<p>That evening they sat on the piazza, that looked +out towards the sea, the Spaniards smoking and +Jim and Jo enjoying the music of a guitar played +by a Mexican in a dim corner of the verandah and +the boys heard a bit of important news.</p> + +<p>"There was a mysterious ship put into shore +several miles South of here, late last night, Senor," +said their host, "one of my shepherds brought me +word."</p> + +<p>"The first scent of the trail," cried Jim eagerly. +Then the Senor Sebastian explained to his friend +more fully the objects of their search. Immediately +the listener was deeply interested. Then he sent for +an Indian, one of his trusted men, to come to him, +and gave him minute instructions about some matters. +Without a word the Indian turned and disappeared +in the darkness, and in a short time there +came the sound of a horse galloping full speed down +the road.</p> + +<p>"Tomorrow, Senor Darlington, this Indian will +meet you at a point near the Puebla de los Angeles,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span> +which my friend knows and he will have all the information +there is obtainable as to the location of +this ship and its crew," thus spoke the Senor Valdez. +Jim thanked him with deep fervor for his unusual +kindness, but the Spaniard made light of it.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII</h2> + +<h3>A TALE OF YORE</h3> + + +<p>As they sat there in the dusk of the verandah, +Jim would have liked to ask his host to relate +some of his experiences in southern California +for he felt sure that the Senor Valdez had +known something of adventure not only because +those early days were full of marvels of interest, +but there was something in the bearing of the +old Spaniard that spoke of former days of romance +and of stirring incidents.</p> + +<p>Then, too, there was something in the after-dinner +content and quiet, following the perilous +adventure which they had been through that predisposed +the boys to listen to a good story of adventure. +Their friend, the Senor Sebastian, seemed +to divine what was passing through Jim's mind, +for he suddenly spoke, breaking the meditative +spell that had fallen upon the group on the piazza.</p> + +<p>"It just occurred to me, Senor Valdez, that our +friends here might like to hear something of the +early days in this part of the country, for you of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span> +all men know it thoroughly and I am sure it would +interest them."</p> + +<p>"Indeed, it would, Senor," cried Jim enthusiastically, +"it was in my mind to ask Senor Valdez to +tell us of the early days but I was afraid to impose +upon him."</p> + +<p>"I feel greatly honored to think that you young +men would care to hear anything my poor tongue +could relate. It would hardly be worth your distinguished +attention." Jim made due allowance +for the courteous exaggeration characteristic of the +Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"Try us, Senor," he said briefly, "we would +want nothing better."</p> + +<p>"I will have the coffee brought first," replied +the Senor, "that may serve to stimulate my dull +imagination."</p> + +<p>In a short time a softly moving servant brought +out a tray of coffee cups, and placed one before +each guest on a small wicker table. Jim noticed +these cups with immediate interest. They were +certainly beautiful and he had never seen anything +like them before. They were of a wonderful +blue, each one, and had a coat of arms +in gold with raised figures on it; a scroll above +with a Latin motto, and beneath the representation +of a wild animal couchant. The Senor Valdez was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span> +quick to see Jim's interest and respond to it. "That +is the coat of arms of my family," he explained.</p> + +<p>"I am not a scholar, Senor," said Jim, "and +all I can make of the motto is that it has something +to do with a lion."</p> + +<p>"You are quite right," the ghost of a smile +hovered around the white-fringed lips of the +Spaniard, at Jim's innate boyishness.</p> + +<p>"That figure does not look exactly like a lion," +remarked Jo frankly.</p> + +<p>"Not like an African lion certainly," replied the +Spaniard, "but a lion nevertheless, such as one finds +yet in the mountain fastnesses of Spain, something +like a panther only larger and much more fierce."</p> + +<p>"The lion seems to have a rope or chain around +his neck," commented Jim, "and fastened to a +collar."</p> + +<p>"Quite so," responded the Spaniard, "likewise +the motto translated reads, 'Gentle as a Lion.'"</p> + +<p>"Rather strange way of putting it," said Jim curiously.</p> + +<p>"I will explain, for you would naturally be +puzzled by the phrase, 'Gentle as a Lion,' as it +seems to contradict common knowledge," said +Senor Valdez. "You see my family has the distinction, +if such it can be called, in these modern<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span> +days, the distinction of being old. This coat-of-arms +dates back to the eleventh century."</p> + +<p>Jo was about to give a prolonged whistle of surprise +when Jim gripped his knee to enforce silence, +for though Jo might mean all right, the Spaniard +might not understand.</p> + +<p>"The founder of the family who flourished at +that time was a rather rugged character, and I am +afraid would regard the family representatives of +this day as very puny and unworthy specimens. +This Rodriquez de Valdez had his castle in a +rugged mountainous part of Spain, where there +were plenty of wild animals and of wilder and +fiercer men, bandits and free-booters without number.</p> + +<p>"His castle was a very powerful one, not only +in construction but likewise in location, as it was +built on a shelf of rock above a deep chasm, with +precipitous cliffs behind it. However, Rodriquez +de Valdez spent but very little time behind the protection +of its powerful walls. It would take the +forces of some strong Duke from the lowland to +cause him to seek the shelter of his castle and to +raise his war banner of crimson with a blue cross +upon it, above the turret.</p> + +<p>"He spent his days hunting among the mountains +for wild beasts or for marauding bands of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span> +lawless men. Rodriquez was a man of wonderful +strength, even for those days, when there were +giants in the land. In stature six feet five and +powerful in proportion and likewise very fleet of +foot. If I should tell you of some of the legends +of his strength and swiftness, you would probably +laugh.</p> + +<p>"But the one that has to do with the coat-of-arms +of my family I will tell you. It chanced one day +that he was out in the wilds of the mountains +and quite alone. Intent upon the trail of a deer +that he was following along a shelving mountain +side, he did not see a lion half grown, but nevertheless +very dangerous, which was crouching on +the branch of a tree ready to spring upon him when +he got beneath it.</p> + +<p>"When he had passed by under the tree a pace +or two, the lion sprang with distended claws. +Some instinct of danger made Rodriquez turn and +he was just in time to grapple with the brute, +clutching it by the throat. The lion had some +advantage in weight but not a great deal, for my +brave ancestor was probably three hundred pounds +of sinew, bone and muscle. So that the struggle +was not such an unequal one, but it was terrific +while it did last. Finally, though torn and bleed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span>ing, +the man subdued the beast, and had it in abject +fear of him.</p> + +<p>"Then instead of killing the lion as one would +naturally expect, Rodriquez took a strange humorous +notion into his head. He would make a pet of +this same lion and it should be his dog to follow +obediently at its master's heels wherever he went. +This idea he carried out and he even had a heavy +brass collar placed upon its neck, and it followed +him on all his trips, slouching with padded tread +at his heel, or behind his war horse as he rode +abroad, like a powerful yellow dog.</p> + +<p>"I do not imagine that the beast ever had any +great amount of affection for his master, but he +no doubt was in great fear of him, which seemed +to answer the purpose quite as well. So, my +friends, you have a full and complete explanation +of the coat-of-arms of my family. My only fear is +that I have wearied you with what could not have +the same interest for you as it does for me."</p> + +<p>"Indeed, you have not wearied us, Senor," exclaimed +Jo enthusiastically.</p> + +<p>"That is one of the most interesting accounts +that I have ever listened to," said Jim. "I only +wish I could have lived in those days when there +was plenty of adventure."</p> + +<p>"I do not think that you have any reason to com<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span>plain," +remarked the Spaniard laughingly. "Perhaps +your descendants in future years will be +pointing out your daring deeds as emblazoned on +their coat-of-arms."</p> + +<p>"No danger of that, I guess," laughed Jim, +"though they might have a picture of Jo and me +tied to a mule. That was the way old Captain +Broom treated us." The Spaniard joined in the +merriment at this unheroic representation of Jo and +Jim.</p> + +<p>"Now, Senor Valdez, you have told us a tale +of old Spain, tell us something of new Spain here +in California," urged Jo.</p> + +<p>"It seems to me that it is now someone else's +turn," said the Senor. "I would not do all the +talking. A host should sometimes listen. Perhaps +Senor Darlington will tell us of some of his experiences. +They will be much more stirring than +any musty tales of mine." But Jim shook his head +firmly, not to say obstinately.</p> + +<p>"I would not think of telling our adventures," +he replied. "Perhaps after we have travelled more, +we will have something worth while relating."</p> + +<p>"That's right," said Jo, "we would much rather +listen to you, Senor."</p> + +<p>The Senor Valdez sipped slowly at his coffee, +looking out into the semi-darkness beyond the ve<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span>randah, +where over the plain below stretched the +gray blanket of the fog-clouds. Then he rolled +another cigarette, lit it and took a few meditative +puffs. The Senor now began his next story at a +peculiar angle, and did not commence with the +stereotyped form of "once upon a time," so dear +to the days of one's childhood.</p> + +<p>"I see you do not take cream in your coffee," +he said addressing Jim.</p> + +<p>"No, but I like some sugar, not too much."</p> + +<p>"It has seemed to me," said the Spaniard, "that +the seasoning of coffee is in a way an indication +of character."</p> + +<p>"Where the party uses milk in his coffee that +indicates weakness, does it not, Senor?" inquired +Jim with a sly look at Jo, but the subtle Spaniard +was not to be trapped.</p> + +<p>"Not necessarily," he replied, "only mildness."</p> + +<p>"And when it is taken straight and black that +means a strong character," remarked Jo.</p> + +<p>"You have stated it," replied the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>"But I would like to know how I would be sized +up?" questioned Jim, "you see I use a little sugar."</p> + +<p>"My friend," said the Spaniard with playful +earnestness, putting his hand lightly on Jim's knee, +"that shows a character of great strength, tempered +with mercy and human kindness. All of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span> +which leads one to speak of a man who was once +famous in this part of the country, but not popular. +He always had the reputation for taking a strong +liquor in his coffee, Fernet, if I remember right. +His name was Alverado, but I judge that you are +not acquainted with it."</p> + +<p>"No," replied Jim, "but I should say that he was +a very fierce character."</p> + +<p>"He was. He was a bandit."</p> + +<p>"I thought so," agreed Jim.</p> + +<p>"This Don Alverado came from a well known +Spanish family, of ancient lineage, but impoverished +fortune. He was such a wild and unruly blade +that his family were decidedly relieved when he +left Spain and came to the new world to mend his +fortune, if not his ways. He landed first in Mexico, +and after a series of more or less remarkable adventures, +he came to this part of California. I +knew him, or rather I knew of his family in Spain, +and for their sake I made him welcome here at my +home.</p> + +<p>"He was really a charming fellow in manner and +appearance, tall, slight, with dark eyes and hair, a +typical cavalier. But the graces of his manner did +not reach down to his heart, and after a disagreeable +episode which I need not revive here, he left +my rancho never to return except as an enemy.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span> +I heard nothing further of him after his departure +for some six months. My next introduction to him +was an unpleasant one.</p> + +<p>"It consisted in the loss of a band of horses and +a herd of cattle which were driven off by a gang +of raiders, thirteen in number, at the head of which +was this fellow Alverado. His depredations went +on for years among the ranchmen in this part of +California. So resourceful and crafty was this desperado +that he evaded trap after trap laid for his +capture.</p> + +<p>"He had several very close calls and there were +numerous battles between the outlaws and the ranch +owners, but though some of his men were shot, +he seemed to bear a charmed life. I remember +one running fight over the plain yonder, when, believing +me to be absent from home, as I had been, +but returned unexpectedly from the north, this +Alverado and his gang made a bold dash to capture +some horses from a field directly below the house.</p> + +<p>"It did not take long to get my men together +and I gave the bandits a surprise indeed. Nothing +but the speed of Alverado's horse, a splendid +black stallion, saved him from capture. We got +several of his men however. At last there came +the turning of the lane. Through the treachery of +one of the band we found that their rendezvous was<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span> +at the head of a small canyon in a range of foot-hills +several miles south of here.</p> + +<p>"You will go through it tomorrow on your way +south, if you carry out your speed schedule, which +with your remarkable horses you ought to be able +to. We came upon the gang about noon, where +they were resting after a long chase. In a corral +near by were a number of stolen stock. They +were not expecting trouble of any kind. Some +were playing cards, a few cooking, most, however, +were enjoying the siesta, their leader among the +number lay under the shadow of a tree, his head +resting on a saddle, sound asleep.</p> + +<p>"There were fifty of us, and we had them surrounded, +so that there was no chance of escape. +Alverado himself made a desperate dash, but the +cordon was too strong. The rest surrendered. +That afternoon we took the bunch to the lower +end of the canyon, where there was a giant sycamore +tree. There we hanged the whole thirteen, +and by them no more were troubled not even by +their ghosts."</p> + +<p>Jim and Jo expressed their appreciation of their +host's kindness in entertaining them as he truly +had done in relating his tales. Then they said +good night and went to their room.</p> + +<p>That night the boys slept in a comfortable bed in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span> +a quaint old bedroom with roses nodding in at the +half open casement windows. By the light of the +candles they could see the strange old and carved +furniture and tired as they were how they did +sleep.</p> + +<p>The next morning they started hours before daylight. +"I will be prepared to welcome more of you +in a few days," said the Senor Valdez, and the boys +thanked him heartily. Promising to return soon +they galloped away through the darkness.</p> + +<p>All day they rode, hardly drawing rein at all. At +first through the foot-hills and then over the wide +plains. Jo had a fresh horse, a powerful black, as +his other mount could not stand the strain of the +long trip that meant three score and ten of miles before +evening.</p> + +<p>Early in the afternoon they left the plain and rode +into the deep and rugged gorges of a mountain +chain, running East and West. Thence into a broad +valley leading South-easterly, and about four <span class="smcap">p. m.</span> +they turned directly South entering a Pass in the +Southern side of the valley, from which they +emerged on a plain. Where the trail left the Pass +stood a large <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'scycamore'">sycamore</ins> tree, when they reached it, +the Indian messenger rose from its shelter.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIX</h2> + +<h3>A WONDERFUL LEAP</h3> + + +<p>Now without <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'hestitation'">hesitation</ins> we must take up the fortunes +or rather misfortunes of Tom and Juarez as +they landed in the darkness upon the mysterious +island, for our narrative presses to its conclusion. +Never did they feel more hopeless than on this occasion, +when they were going to a dubious and uncertain +fate.</p> + +<p>"You boys come with me," called the Captain +gruffly.</p> + +<p>"How about me, Cap'n?" asked Jeems Howell, +the lanky shepherd.</p> + +<p>"What's your business?" inquired Captain Broom +briefly.</p> + +<p>"Looking after the sheeps."</p> + +<p>"Then attend to it," said the Captain grimly.</p> + +<p>"Certainly, Cap'n," replied the shepherd, who was +incapable of taking offense.</p> + +<p>"You come, Jake," called the Captain, to one of +the sailors, "and be quick about it, we haven't<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span> +much time." Tom shivered, for in the gloom and +tired as he was he felt that his time too was +short.</p> + +<p>Then with the Captain in the lead, carrying a +lantern, which was muffled in his great coat, they +started, the sailor bringing up the rear.</p> + +<p>"Look out sharp, that these lads don't spring +something on you, Jake. They are a bad lot."</p> + +<p>"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor, "they'll have to +be quick to get the jump on me, sir."</p> + +<p>"It's the Injun one's the worst. Don't let him +scalp you," warned the Captain jocosely.</p> + +<p>"I'm no Indian," said Juarez, hoarsely and utterly +reckless of his fate, "I'm an American, and was +proud of it, till I found you were one, you cursed +yankee barnacle."</p> + +<p>"Ho, ho, lad!" roared the Captain, "you won't +talk so tall in a few minutes. Nothing like a slow +fire for stewing the nonsense out of a fresh kid."</p> + +<p>"How far is this cave of yours, you are taking us +to, old salt horse?" said Juarez insolently, and utterly +unwise.</p> + +<p>This was too much for Captain Broom, and with +an imprecation he turned to strike Juarez. This +was what Juarez was looking for and as the furious +Skipper whirled facing him, Juarez dodged his huge +fist, and sent a fierce hook to the Captain's jaw.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span> +There was anger, desperation and strength behind +that blow and the Captain fell, striking his head on +a rock. That time the Frontier Boys scored.</p> + +<p>"Follow me, Tom," yelled Juarez, and he sprang +away through the darkness. It seemed like a hopeless +undertaking to make an escape with the sea on +one side and the cliffs on the other, and a desperate +enemy near at hand. But Juarez thought it +was best to take a chance. Anything was better +than captivity, that was seemingly just ahead of +them.</p> + +<p>One thing he was determined on and that was, +that he would not be taken alive. He ran splashing +through the water, leaping rocks, with the two +sailors in fast pursuit. Not far ahead to the right +was the white dash of the breakers that shut off +escape in that direction, to the left was the cliffs.</p> + +<p>Then before him rose a steep but not precipitous +rock that had been divided from the main cliff by +the action of the water. Instantly Juarez abandoned +his desperate plan of plunging into the sea, +and without lessening his speed, he sprang up the +rock, in his moccasined feet.</p> + +<p>The sailor who was following most closely, got up +ten feet when he slipped and rolled violently to the +bottom, knocking down the one who came after.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span> +Once Juarez came near falling but he caught himself, +and kept going up, driven by a desperation that +seemed to carry him over every obstacle.</p> + +<p>"We've got yer, ye little shrimp," exultantly +cried the sailors at the base of the rock, "Ye can't +get away unless you fly."</p> + +<p>"Shoot the blasted little varmint," roared the Captain, +who, still dizzy, had struggled to his feet. In +obedience to the order a flash punctured the darkness +and there was a roar like artillery echoing +among the hollow cliffs. A slug of lead whistled +past Juarez's head.</p> + +<p>The boy had now reached the top of the rock and +was at the crisis of his fate, a distance of ten feet +separated him from the main cliff, not an impossible +jump but the foothold was precarious and uncertain, +and fifty feet or more below were the jagged rocks, +and enemies equally as hard, but Juarez did not hesitate.</p> + +<p>He dodged down just as the sailors fired another +shot, then he sprang to the narrow pinnacle of the +rock and bending slightly forward with bent knees +and swinging hand, poised for the leap.</p> + +<p>"The condemned fool is going to jump," roared +the Captain. "Shoot him on the wing."</p> + +<p>But the sailors were not ready and the skipper +ran between the rock and the cliff to be at hand to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span> +stamp the life out of Juarez when he should fall as +he knew he would. Then he leaped, a dark object +flying through space, his hands caught the edge of +the cliff, the roots of a small bush held him for a +moment, then he slipped. Below him was certain +death.</p> + +<p>Two strong hands caught his arms, and he was +drawn in safety to the cliff above. The Captain and +the two sailors watched in open mouthed +wonder, all they could see was the dim figure of +Juarez crawl in safety over the top of the cliff, but +they could not determine the means of his escape.</p> + +<p>It struck a superstitious chord in their natures +and the skipper became moody and silent.</p> + +<p>Juarez breathlessly followed the lanky figure of +the shepherd through the darkness, for it was no +other who had extended the rescuing hand. Hardly +a word was spoken, and they started off. After going +a considerable distance they came to a slab hut built +at the foot of a high range of hills that formed the +backbone of the island.</p> + +<p>Two shepherd dogs rushed forth and gave their +master a boisterous welcome, and were soon good +friends with Juarez. Everything in the hut was +neat; with Indian rugs on the floor which gave a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span> +warm touch of color to the interior and one side of +the hut was lined with books.</p> + +<p>"What am I thinking of," suddenly cried Juarez +in dismay, "to leave Tom in the hands of that crew? +My head is wrong." With that, he grew pale and +slid unconscious to the floor. He had evidently not +recovered from the blow that the Mexican had dealt +him a few days before, and the strain he had been +under brought on a relapse. The shepherd worked +over him a long time before he finally brought him +around.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile what had become of Tom? He had +not been quick enough to make his escape, and his +fate was in the balance when the Skipper came up +to him just after Juarez had disappeared over the +cliff.</p> + +<p>"You don't get away, I promise you that, lad," +growled the Captain. Roughly seizing the boy by +the shoulder he dragged him toward the cliff. Then +the two disappeared into the entrance of a cave, the +Captain still holding in one hand his battered leather +satchel.</p> + +<p>The sailor who stood on guard at the entrance, +saw just then the lights of a steamer that was just +entering the channel and he rushed into the cave, +called to the Captain, and in a few minutes that +worthy appeared. If he felt any alarm he showed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span> +none, but without any loss of time he assembled his +crew, got his boat free of land and rowed silently +out to sea. Whatever he had intended to do with +Tom, evidently passed from his mind, now awakened +to the solution of some other problem.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXX</h2> + +<h3>IN THE STRAIT</h3> + + +<p>As Juarez and Tom were under the kindly escort +of Captain Broom and his sailors in the whale +boat on their cruise to the mysterious island, Jo, +Jim and the Spaniard had stopped at an old sycamore +tree, where, as had been promised, the Indian +messenger was awaiting their coming.</p> + +<p>"What news, Yaquis?" asked the Spaniard, +who knew the Indian well.</p> + +<p>"I saw the boat by my own eyes," he replied, +"heading for the Big Island," pointing to the +South. "By her smoke she stopped in the Bow Harbor +near the lower end." So spoke the Indian, +standing straight and tall. He was a picturesque +sight with his coarse, black hair cut square and +long.</p> + +<p>"The trail is getting warm," exclaimed Jim +eagerly. "Where can we get a boat?"</p> + +<p>"There is a small boat at the Harbor of San +Pedro," replied the Spaniard, "that is the property +of a friend of mine. I doubt not we can have +the use of it."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span></p> + +<p>"It is now a little after six," said Jim. "How +far is it to the Harbor?"</p> + +<p>"A dozen miles," replied the Indian.</p> + +<p>"Is your horse too tired, Senor Sebastian, +to make it by eight?" The Spaniard's eyes +flashed.</p> + +<p>"Senor, Don Fernando is never tired. Let us +start."</p> + +<p>"We are ready," replied Jim. "Which is the +shortest cut?"</p> + +<p>"I will guide you," was the Indian's response.</p> + +<p>"He knows this country like the foot does the +shoe," assured the Spaniard.</p> + +<p>Without more ado, the new guide took the lead +and they rode at a rapid gait in single file. At +first they went down a gentle grade for several +miles until they came to a perfectly level plain +that stretched in three directions to the sea. At +the end of the land was a perfectly rounded rise +like a huge long bolster.</p> + +<p>The party of rescuers left the Puebla de los +Angeles several miles to the East, taking the +shortest way to the harbor. There was no let-up +to the speed, if anything, they seemed to be +going faster, with sweaty sides and shoulders, but +with unaffected stamina. The going was fine,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span> +over a springy turf and sometimes they tore +through wide belts of tall mustard.</p> + +<p>Jo and Jim were in fine fettle as the end of the +journey came in sight and there was promise of +their coming to close quarters with the pirates and +possibly rescuing their oppressed brothers from +captivity. Then, too, the passage of the strait in +an open boat appealed to their sense of adventure.</p> + +<p>About eight o'clock, they came to a ranch two +miles from the harbor, where Senor Sebastian had +a short talk with a man who owned the small boat +that had been referred to. He was perfectly +willing to lend them the boat and also sent a +Mexican servant to bring back their horses and +put them up in his stables. Not forgetting to +thank him for his great kindness to them, the boys +turned their horses' heads for the harbor, the last +lap of their long journey had begun.</p> + +<p>In a half hour, they stood on the shore of a +long, narrow inlet, at a point where a craft was +moored. From a small boat-house, they got the +oars, the mast and the sail to be used if the wind +was right. Then they were ready to get aboard. +Jim looked at his watch. "It lacks ten minutes of +nine," he said.</p> + +<p>Then they embarked. The boat was not a +mere row-boat, but was found to be of good size<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span> +and about equal to a whale boat. It was staunch, +too, and sea worthy. The mooring was cast off. +Jim was at the bow oar, and Jo at the one back of +him on the other side, while the Indian, Yaquis, +steered. The tide favored them as they glided +quickly between the banks, and they were not long +in reaching the channel.</p> + +<p>At first, there was a slow, heavy swell, while in +the lee of the land, that did not bother the boys +but within a half hour they were in a choppy sea +with breaking crests, and now the real work for Jo +and Jim began. Fortunately, the Indian was a +most skillful oar, and he kept them from being +swamped. As yet there was no breeze to help +them.</p> + +<p>"This is almost as good as running the Rapids +in the Grand Canyon," cried Jim joyously.</p> + +<p>The boys were in fine fettle for their work, notwithstanding +their long day in the saddle, and they +buckled to it with a will, although wet through +with flying spray. They had enjoyed a good rest +the night before and after their long ride they +were glad to get the kinks out of their muscles. +They really made remarkably good headway +against the sea and the stoical Indian grunted +approval of their work. Ah, but it was fine, bat<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span>tling +with the waves through the darkness, while +the boat thrashed and beat its way ahead.</p> + +<p>The boys stood to their oars and put all the +strength of their lithe young bodies into the stroke +and they seemed tireless. The Spaniard had made +himself comfortable in the bow, where, sheltered +by a short overhead deck, he was soon fast asleep.</p> + +<p>"Wake me when it is time to be drowned," he +said. "I know it is my fate." Jim remembered +the Spaniard's melancholy of the day before, and +laughed heartily, as he promised.</p> + +<p>"There are the lights of a vessel," cried Yaquis, +who, though silent, was ever on the watch. +"Ahead of us to the Southwest."</p> + +<p>"You are right," said Jim. The lights were like +two faint, moving stars, one aloft and the other +below.</p> + +<p>"That isn't the Pirate ship," declared Jo. "She +wouldn't be showing any light." After a while, +the lights of the vessel were suddenly eclipsed, but +by the dull light of the moon, now risen, the vessel's +bulk could still be made out.</p> + +<p>"She has gone into the further straits," said Yaquis, +"between the two islands."</p> + +<p>A gentle breeze sprang up, but blowing directly +toward them, it lent no aid. Before midnight, +the westerly breeze had died absolutely<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span> +down, and in a not very long time, the sea followed +suit, leaving a long swell and the rowing became +much easier. Nothing occurred to break the +monotony for a while. There was the steady +grinding of the oars in the row-locks and the lapping +of the waves in the gloom, for the moon was +now obscured by clouds. Then, of a sudden, the +Indian called a halt.</p> + +<p>"Do you hear footsteps?" inquired Jim, jocosely.</p> + +<p>"A steamer coming, I hear her, no lights. Pull +hard." In a minute, even the boys could hear +the beat of her engines and saw the occasional +flare from her stacks, then a dark form took shape +through the night. They pulled lustily for they +knew their danger and who it was. How quickly +they would be run down, if discovered, and left to +drown in the wide strait, when Captain Broom +found out their identity. No wonder they pulled.</p> + +<p>"Stop now, draw in your oars. Lie down," +warned the Indian.</p> + +<p>Not a hundred yards to the Eastward came The +Sea Eagle and she was on an even line with the +boat that lay a black patch on the dark water. If +Captain Broom was not on the Bridge they would +be safe.</p> + +<p>"Boat ahoy," boomed out his voice.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Indian fishermen," cried Yaquis. "Stop, take +me ashore."</p> + +<p>With a growl, the Captain sent his ship ahead, +paying no attention to the "Indian fisherman" in +distress. There was a gleam of white teeth as +the Indian smiled at the hearty congratulations of +the boys and their glee at his stratagem. Then +the Spaniard and Yaquis took the oars while Jim +steered and Jo slept.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXI</h2> + +<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> + + +<p>When morning came, they were but a few miles +from the Northern end of the longer Island and +the fog was over the whole sky. The sea was +glassy with a sullen glaze. Nowhere was there +sign of any steamer or ship. The Sea Eagle +had made good her escape.</p> + +<p>"I wish we had a stiff breeze to help us along," +said the Spaniard, who loved not manual labor, as +did the boys.</p> + +<p>"It will come, the strong breeze, soon," said the +Indian.</p> + +<p>"When we make the Island, what are we to do?" +asked Jo.</p> + +<p>"Who can tell, maybe Tom and Juarez have been +taken along with the Skipper, instead of being +marooned."</p> + +<p>"That's so," replied Jo, and gloom settled down +upon his spirits, heavier than the fog upon the +sea.</p> + +<p>"We will keep after them," said the never de<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span>spondent +Jim, "even if we have to chase them +around the world."</p> + +<p>The boat seemed to crawl so slowly along, and +the boys began to fret in their eagerness to find +out whether their comrades were on the island or +not, but they were not yet close enough to make +out any object upon its surface. Then from the +West there came a breeze rippling the glassy water.</p> + +<p>"Up with the sail," cried Jim. "Here's where +we fly."</p> + +<p>As the breeze strengthened to a wind, they went +towards the island at a clipping gait. When they +got within a half mile of the shore, they began to +look eagerly for some sign of a living being and +they were disappointed at first, but they drove +their boat along as near the shore as they dared.</p> + +<p>"Say, did you hear that?" cried Jim in excitement. +"That was a rifle shot, or my name is +Dennis."</p> + +<p>"Three men on the shore," said the Indian, imperturbably.</p> + +<p>"I see them," cried Jo, "on that beach yonder. +I believe it is Tom and Juarez. Hurrah for the +Frontier Boys."</p> + +<p>"It is they," declared Jim as they drew closer,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span> +"but how Tom has grown. He looks over six +feet."</p> + +<p>"That isn't Tom," said Jo. "It's some one else. +The short one is Tom." Then he saw Jim grin +and realized that he had been kidded.</p> + +<p>"If this wasn't my busy day," said Jo, "I'd give +you a punching for being so smart."</p> + +<p>Five minutes later, the boat had grounded on +the pebbly beach and The Frontier Boys were +again united. There was a great jubilee for a +while with the Spaniard, the Indian, and the +lanky shepherd on the outskirts of the family celebration, +but in a short time they were all good +friends, each according to his different nature; the +Spaniard, suave and courteous, the Indian stolid, +but with his share in the general good-will, and +Jeems Howell, the shepherd, lankily humorous.</p> + +<p>"We met our old friend Captain Broom in the +channel, boys," said Jim, "steaming along like the +Devil was after him."</p> + +<p>"I'll give him reason to think so," growled +Juarez sullenly, "if I ever get on his trail."</p> + +<p>The Indian, Yaquis, grunted approval, for there +seemed to be a bond of sympathy between him +and Juarez, as the reader can well understand.</p> + +<p>"How far is that cave, Tom, where the old +codger left you?" inquired Jo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Just around the bend," said Tom. "Here's the +rock where Juarez made his famous jump."</p> + +<p>"How did you ever get up there?" asked Jo in +wonder, looking up at the pinnacle of rock.</p> + +<p>"You'd a done the same if those fellows had +been chasing you," replied Juarez, "but if it +hadn't been for Jeems here catching me when I +jumped they would have got me after all."</p> + +<p>"I was afeard you might have fallen on the +Skipper and a hurt him. He's a kind of a tender +plant you know." The Shepherd made this remark +with a perfectly sober face, in no wise disturbed +by the hilarity of the boys, over the idea +of the tenderness of the Skipper.</p> + +<p>"Here's the cave," said Juarez, and he led the +way through an arched opening in the wall of the +cliff. Picking up a lantern, he went ahead as +guide.</p> + +<p>"This is certainly a dry cave," said Jim.</p> + +<p>"It ought to be," said Jeems Howell. "It don't +rain on this Island more than twice a year, but I +feel it in my bones that it is coming on to storm +today."</p> + +<p>"I hope you don't feel it in <i>all</i> your bones," remarked +Jim, quizzically, "because it is liable to be +a long drawn out storm if you do."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span></p> + +<p>The lanky Shepherd gave himself over to +spasms of silent mirth at Jim's queer humor.</p> + +<p>"Here's where we found Tom," said Juarez. +"Just discovered him a couple of hours before you +discovered us."</p> + +<p>When the Captain had made his sudden change +of plans, Tom made himself as comfortable as he +could for the night, intending to search for Juarez +in the morning.</p> + +<p>"Sometime I hope that this wretched Captain +will be captured and imprisoned right here," said +the Spaniard with a cold, vindictiveness.</p> + +<p>"If he comes snooping around here again, that +is what will happen to him," remarked Jim quietly. +"I suppose, Tom, that he hid some of the loot he +took from us in this cave somewhere. I bet this +is his safe deposit vault, all right."</p> + +<p>"He went back in there with his small satchel," +said Tom, indicating the depths of the cave as yet +unexplored.</p> + +<p>"It will keep," said Jim, "but before I leave this +island for Hawaii, I am going to search every corner +of this cave and see if I cannot find our property."</p> + +<p>"We discovered it in a cave and perhaps we will +lose our treasure in a cave," said Juarez, who was +something of a fatalist.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Don't you believe that we won't find it," declared +Jim stoutly, "but no work for me for a while. I'm +going to take a good rest."</p> + +<p>"So say we all of us," chanted the boys.</p> + +<p>"Gentlemen," said Jeems Howell oracularly, "If +it pleases you, and Christopher Columbus," with a +wave of his hand toward Jim, "who discovered this +savage group, we will now adjourn to my castle on +the distant hillside."</p> + +<p>"We are with you," declared those assembled in +unison, and in a short time they were making +their way up the slope towards the "castle" on the +hillside, where they made themselves at home.</p> + +<p>All the new arrivals at the island were soon fast +asleep.</p> + +<p>Later after several hours of rest, they occupied +themselves according to their different ideas of comfort.</p> + +<p>The Spaniard amused himself thrumming on a +guitar, that belonged to one of the Mexican herders +on the island. Tom got a book, and stretched out +on a rug forgetful of all his recent troubles, while +Jim and Juarez borrowed a couple of guns and went +for an hour's hunting, in the woods which at that +time covered the mountain ridges of the island.</p> + +<p>That evening they were all gathered in the cabin +before the blazing fire on the stone hearth, while<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span> +outside raged the Easterly storm that Jeems Howell +had predicted, with rush of wind and sweep of rain. +But the slab cabin was storm proof and comfortable. +It is a good place to leave the boys after their days +of trial and bitter hardship. In our next book we +will meet "The Frontier Boys in Hawaii, or The +mystery of The Hollow Mountain." There, I feel +confident they will cope with adventures as unusual +and as remarkable as they have heretofore encountered. +I am sure that the Reader will be anxious to +accompany them on their journey. But we must +permit the Frontier Boys to have the last word, in +this volume.</p> + +<p>"Do you think that Captain Broom, will return +here, before we get away for Hawaii, Jim?" inquired +brother Jo.</p> + +<p>"I certainly do," replied Jim, "and we will be +right here, to give him a warm and hearty Welcome, +you can rest assured of that."</p> + +<hr style='width: 65%;' /> +<div class='tnote'><h3>Transcriber's Notes:</h3> +<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired.</p> + +<p><a name="note" id="note"></a><a href="#tn">Page 170</a>, text was both missing and +repeated in the original. The original read:<br /></p> + +<div class='blockquot'>on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-<br /> +iente forged ahead by half a length.<br /> +<br /> +<p>"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. <i>"Don't<br /> +on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal-<br /> +horses up.</i> There was Jo sitting quietly on his horse.<br /></p></div> + +<p>The italicized text was removed to try to assist readability.</p> +<p>The remaining corrections made are indicated by dotted lines under the corrections. Scroll the mouse over the word and the original text will <ins title="Transcriber's Note: original reads 'apprear'">appear</ins>.</p></div> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST *** + +***** This file should be named 25473-h.htm or 25473-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/4/7/25473/ + +Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/25473-h/images/002.png b/25473-h/images/002.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..53ca2c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/25473-h/images/002.png diff --git a/25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg b/25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0da1df --- /dev/null +++ b/25473-h/images/illo-frontise.jpg diff --git a/25473.txt b/25473.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6f1d3c --- /dev/null +++ b/25473.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6365 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Frontier Boys on the Coast + or in the Pirate's Power + +Author: Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +Release Date: May 15, 2008 [EBook #25473] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST *** + + + + +Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: "THEY WERE NOW GOING UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF."--P. 204. + +_Frontier Boys on the Coast._] + + + + +FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST + +OR + +_IN THE PIRATE'S POWER_ + +BY CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT + + NEW YORK + HURST & COMPANY + PUBLISHERS + + + + +THE FRONTIER BOYS + +By CAPT. WYN ROOSEVELT + + +This series tells the adventures of Jim, Joe, and Tom Darlington, first +in their camp wagon as they follow the trail to the great West in the +early days. They are real American boys, resourceful, humorous, and--but +you must meet them. You will find them interesting company. They meet +with thrilling adventures and encounters, and stirring incidents are the +rule, not exception. + +Historically, these books present a true picture of a period in our +history as important as it was picturesque, when the nation set its face +toward this vast unknown West, and conquered it. + + 1. Frontier Boys on Overland Trail + 2. Frontier Boys in Colorado + 3. Frontier Boys in the Rockies + 4. Frontier Boys in the Grand Canyon + 5. Frontier Boys in Mexico + 6. Frontier Boys on the Coast + 7. Frontier Boys in Hawaii + 8. Frontier Boys in the Sierras + 9. Frontier Boys in the Saddle + 10. Frontier Boys in Frisco. + 11. Frontier Boys in the South Seas + + _Illustrated, 12mo, Cloth_ + _Price per Volume, 50 Cents_ + + + COPYRIGHT, 1909, BY + THE PLATT & PECK CO. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER PAGE + I. CAPTAIN BILL BROOM 9 + II. THE COVE AND THE CAVE 16 + III. THE BARBED WIRE 23 + IV. PETE'S YARN 30 + V. THE FOUR BOYS 37 + VI. THE HUNCHBACK 45 + VII. FARMER BROOM 53 + VIII. THE CAMP IN THE POCKET 60 + IX. THE ATTACK 68 + X. "HAUL IN" 76 + XI. MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE 82 + XII. THE RANCHERO 90 + XIII. A NEW FRIEND 100 + XIV. THE PURSUIT 109 + XV. JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE 118 + XVI. THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE 127 + XVII. ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE 135 + XVIII. A DAY AT SEA 144 + XIX. THE PASSENGER 152 + XX. TO THE RESCUE 161 + XXI. THE BANDITS 169 + XXII. RACE WITH THE TIDE 177 + XXIII. THE ENCHANTED ISLE 184 + XXIV. IN THE WHITE BOAT 191 + XXV. IN PERIL 198 + XXVI. TWO LASSOES 206 + XXVII. ANOTHER FRIEND 214 + XXVIII. A TALE OF YORE 220 + XXIX. A WONDERFUL LEAP 232 + XXX. IN THE STRAIT 239 + XXXI. CONCLUSION 246 + + + + +FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST + + + + +CHAPTER I + +CAPTAIN BILL BROOM + + +"What devilment has old Bill got on for tonight, Pete?" + +The speaker was seated on an old scarred sea chest in a dimly lighted +forecastle. + +"I dunno," replied Pete, "maybe he's lookin' fer a wreck." + +"I heard the mate say somethin' about a passel of four boys," put in a +third man who was laying back in his bunk, "that the skipper was +a-lookin' for." + +"Kidnapping, eh?" said Cales, the first speaker. "Hold 'em for ransom, I +suppose. Well, the old man has been in worse games than that. I reckon +the kids' parents are rich and are willin' to pay a high price for their +darlings." + +"You're on the wrong tack, matey," said the man in the bunk. "Cap'n +Brinks, who landed in San Diego from a Mexican port put the old man +wise. He told him that those fellars had considerable money and a raft +of jewels with 'em that they picked up in Mexico." + +"Ho, Ho, that's the game, is it," cried Cales, thumping his knee with a +gnarled fist, "that ought to be easy then." + +"Looks so, but it ain't," replied the other, "those four boys have got +somethin' of a reputation in the southwest. Hard fighters and good shots +and their leader is a husky lad and about as crafty as a red Injun." + +"He ain't met the Old Man yet," said Cales significantly. + +"I don't see where you get all your news from, Jake," growled Pete from +his seat on the chest, "you ought to be a reporter." + +"I keep my eyes open and my mouth shet," replied Jake, "any man can get +larned if he will do that." + +"I'd like to have a picter of you with your mouth shet," remarked Pete. +"It's open even when you are asleep." He dodged just in time to avoid a +heavy shoe flung from Jake's ready hand that crashed against the wall. + +"Don't do that agin," he warned, a red light showing in his eyes. "I'll +larn you boys that I ain't as old as I looks to be." + +Jake laughed harshly. + +"You mustn't keep your own mouth open so wide, Pop, cause you'll have to +swallow your own words if you do." + +"I guess I'll never git choked," replied Pete, truculently. "Kin you +tell me what the skipper means snooping down this coast with no lights +showing when it's plumb dark? We are liable to sink ourselves or +Californey all of a suddint." + +"Why don't you ask the Cap'n what he is up to?" inquired Cales, "that +is, if you want some real useful information, Pop." + +Pop raised himself up and glared at the speaker. + +"I ain't done living," he replied. + +"We are navigating pretty careful," remarked Jake. "You can hardly feel +the Sea Eagle moving." + +"Running for the cove, I reckon," suggested Cales, "I'm mighty pleased +not to be the man at the wheel. Well, I'm goin' to turn in for a +snooze." + +In a brief time the two men were snoring loudly, while old Pete sat +smoking his pipe, as stolid as a wooden Indian and the forecastle was +fogged with the smoke, through which the swinging lantern shone dimly. +The air is stifling so let us go up on deck where we can breathe the +salt ozone and incidentally get acquainted with Captain Bill Broom, who +is to occupy such a prominent place in this narrative. + +He is well worth meeting, not only as the opponent of our old friend, +Jim Darlington, but because of his own unworthy but interesting +character. In those days Skipper Bill Broom was known all up and down +the coast and beyond. His fame, such as it was, comes down even to this +recent day. + +On deck it is muffling dark, with the stars obscured in some dim way by +mist or fog. There is a breeze blowing steadily from the broad wastes of +the ocean. The bulk of the California coast looms dimly on the port bow. +Not more than a half mile distant can be seen the white rushing forward +of the breakers towards the rocky coast. + +Dangerous work this, navigating the Sea Eagle through the thick gloom of +the night but the old man knew his business. He was on the bridge pacing +back and forth like some strange animal and giving hoarse directions to +the man at the wheel. He knew every inch of that coast, the sunken reefs +and dangerous rocks. + +"Starboard your helm," he growled. + +The sailor spun the wheel obediently. And the captain resumed his pacing +back and forth upon the bridge. Not much could be seen of him, except +that he was a powerful man, with a peculiar crouching stoop, as if he +and the sea were engaged in a mysterious game. One striving to get a +dangerous death-hold upon the other, both wary and using unceasing +watchfulness. + +There was a strange softness in Captain Broom's tread like that of a +padding panther, but his arms had the loose forward powerful swing of a +gorilla's. Once he stepped into the chart house to look at something and +the light of the lamp will give us a square look at him. + +"That man a pirate!" you exclaim at the first glance; one who carried +the blackest name along the coast as a smuggler and wrecker, who had +brought cargoes of wretched slaves from Africa in the days before the +Civil War and who had had more marvelous escapes than any man in the +history of piracy with the exception of Black Jack Morgan! Impossible! + +"Why that man is nothing but an old farmer," you exclaim in +disappointment, when you see him. "He ought to be peddling vegetables on +market day." But just wait. + +True, Skipper Broom had come from a long line of New England farmers, +hard, close-fisted, close-mouthed men. Young Broom had broken away from +the farm and followed his bent for sea-faring, but to the end of his +days, he kept his farmerlike appearance and he affected many of the +traits of the yeoman which he found to be on more than one occasion a +most useful disguise. + +Let's look at him. That heavy winter cap pulled down on his grizzled +head gives him a most "Reuben" like appearance. Jeans pants are thrust +into heavy cowhide boots. The deadly gray eyes soft as granite have +become red rimmed from fits of fury and hard through many scenes of +coldly calculated cruelty. A most dangerous customer and I for one, and +I ought to know, consider that he will have the better of Jim Darlington +in their approaching encounter--and yet Jim is never beaten until the +last shot is fired and so it is impossible for me to foretell how this +contest of wit and daring will come out. + +After examining his chart closely, Captain Broom crouched out through +the door and on to the deck. He took one keen look towards the shore, +then he approached the helmsman. "Git below, Bill. I'll fetch her in." + +The helmsman relinquished the wheel gladly enough and under the +Captain's masterful hand the Sea Eagle swung slowly around and pointed +in towards the curving shore. + +The dark form of the mate could be seen on the deck below waiting for +the order that he knew must come soon. The crew of the Sea Eagle though +subordinate enough were necessarily partners in Captain Broom's wicked +enterprises so that the discipline was somewhat different than in +ordinary vessels. + +"Call 'em up, Mr. Haffen," roared the skipper to the mate. "It's chore +time." + +"Aye, aye, sir," replied Mr. Haffen. + +The watch was called on deck and the dark forms of the men could be seen +in the bow. The pulsing of the Sea Eagle had stopped and with scarcely a +sound the anchor was dropped into the water. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE COVE AND CAVE + + +The starboard boat was lowered into the water. First the mate, then +Captain Broom and two men got in. The latter were Cales and Pete who +pulled noiselessly at the oars. The boat glided quietly through the +silent darkness towards the shore. The Captain was seated in the stern, +his great bulk crouched forward, but there was nothing inert in his +posture. His big hands clasped either side of the craft. + +In a few minutes the boat grounded softly on the sand of the beach and +all hands got ashore. Scarcely a word was spoken, though the cove was so +hidden that there seemed to be no possible chance that the landing of +the free-booters would be observed. However, Captain Bill Broom took no +risk of being discovered. He had many enemies upon the coast and inland +as well. Besides, the State of California had set a price upon his head. + +Two thousand dollars was the reward for his capture, and so profitable +an investment was apt to be realized on sooner or later by some +enterprising citizen. So Captain Broom took due care whenever he went +abroad not to attract undue attention. + +This cove was a favorite lurking place of his when close pressed, where +he would take refuge after some daring adventure upon the high seas, +until such a time as the hubbub along the coast had died down. Sometimes +he lay in hiding there, with the Sea Eagle screened behind the +encircling cliffs, waiting like a black spider to rush out and capture +some unsuspecting craft. + +"Pick her up, boys," said the Captain, "you know where she belongs," +pointing to the boat. + +"Aye, aye, sir," they replied, and putting it on their shoulders they +carried the boat along a narrow path that divided the thick undergrowth; +until, after going several hundred yards, they reached a thick screen of +brush through which they shoved, and came to a cave. + +Although so well hidden, the entrance to the cavern was quite high, so +that the men gained admission without stooping, and going a short +distance into the dark interior, they placed the boat gently down +against the wall. There was a constant and heavy drip of water, so that +there was no chance for the boat to warp, as it would have surely done +if placed outside in the dry California air. + +"I don't like this yere cave," remarked Pete, when left alone with +Cales. + +"What's the matter with it? It's dark and damp, but that is the nature +of caves." + +"It makes me feel creepy, that's all," replied Pete, "and it takes +considerable to do that." + +"Whatever happened?" inquired Cales, grinning, "something terrible, I +reckon, to make your thick hide chilly." + +"It were before your time," replied Pete somewhat reluctantly, "we +raided a ranch back thar agin the mountings. Senor Sebastian owned it +and it was said that he could ride all day and never git off his place, +and that he had more sheep and cattle than thar is folks in Frisco." + +"The Captain shanghied him, I reckon," cut in Cales. + +"You hold your windlass," commanded the old man in a querulous tone, +"I'm telling this yarn." + +"All right, Pop," said Cales in a conciliating manner, "have it yer own +way." He was really anxious to hear the story the old man had referred +to. + +"Young fry is always flapping," the older speaker mumbled,--then he +took up the course of his narrative. "Waal, as I was telling ye, this +Senor had lots of money and the Cap'n being short of funds thought that +he could use some of it. So one night we ran into the cove, it was +blacker even than this. I don't see how the old man ever got the craft +past the sharks' teeth at the entrance but he did." + +"He could have brought her in with his eyes shut," declared Cales. "I +never have seen his equal for navigating." + +"Waal, we made camp here that night, and the next day, the Cap'n with +some of the gang, left for the ranch and I stayed to look after things. +Nothing happened that day, and I was dozing by the fire about midnight +when I heard them coming back. They had the Senor, a fine-looking old +man with a gray mustache and as cold and proud-looking as they make +them. + +"The Cap'n was furious because he had not been able to lay his hand on +the coin, and he swore that he would make the old Senor tell where his +money was or there would be trouble. He took him into this cave and I +don't know what happened there, and I don't want to know. All I'm sure +of is that I never saw him come out. + +"The Cap'n sent me to the ship to get some chains on the second day and +he took 'em into the cave. We sailed a couple of days later, but not a +sign did I see of the Senor. That's why this cave makes me creepy, +Cales." + +They were standing near the entrance, when there came a distinct low +moan from the interior. It was not a ghostly sound, either. There was no +mistaking it. + +"Did you hear that, Cales?" asked old Pete in a quavering voice. + +"Yes," replied Cales, "I heard it all right. It can't be the Senor?" + +"No," replied Pete. "He has been dead these years." + +"Let's find out," said his comrade. + +"There's nothing in this world could make me go in thar," declared Pete +solemnly, "besides, it's agin the Captain's orders." + +"Well, I'm going," said Cales either more brave or less experienced than +the other. "It sounds to me like a woman's voice." + +"And I'm goin' to git," declared old Pete, tottering towards the path. + +"You're a brave old pirate," said Cales contemptuously, and with that he +went slowly back into the cave. He had to go cautiously, for beyond a +certain point he was not acquainted with the interior. He could feel the +moist ground under foot and he kept his hand stretched out, not knowing +what he might run against in the dense damp darkness. + +Then, suddenly, his hand struck a stone wall. Groping his way, he turned +a sharp corner and followed along a low narrow passageway that obliged +him to stoop. Then came the sound of the moaning just ahead. Jack Cales +was a brave man but it was all that he could do, to keep from turning +and running in panic for the mouth of the cave. But though his +determination had received a severe shock, it did not turn to flight. + +He saw a faint light ahead, spreading a glow at the end of the passage +as he came nearer. Then he saw something that held him stone still with +a clutch of weird fear. He had reached the end of the narrow passage, +and dimly made out a domed room in the rock, white with translucent +encrustation. + +He struck a match. About him, before, to the right and to the left he +could see forms all of ghostly white, some crouching, others standing. +Hardly had the light flared up than it sizzled out. Some drops of water +falling from the roof had extinguished the blaze. Then was repeated that +awful sound of distress. + +Cales groped around almost in a frenzy of terror. Where was the exit +from that awful room? Round and round he went, and all the time there +were strange whisperings in his ears, and unseen hands seemed to clutch +his clothes. Once he slipped and was trembling so that he was hardly +able to get to his feet. Just as he did so, something swept past him +like a breath of wind. Rendered desperate he made another dash, and this +time if he had not found a passageway, he felt that he could have +knocked a hole through the wall. Then he stood at the mouth of the +cave. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE BARBED WIRE + + +Just at that moment was heard the hoarse voice of Captain Broom booming +through the darkness outside. + +As Cales turned about, some furry animal sprang past him dashing between +his legs and nearly upsetting him. + +"On deck, you scoundrel, come out of there," called the Captain. + +"Aye, aye, sir," came the reply of Cales in a strangely weak tone, +though he was now more concerned by the possible penalty to be meted out +by the Captain for disobedience of orders, than by thought of the +undetermined occupants of the cave. If it were a cat it was certainly a +good joke on old Pete. This was, had they but known it, the swift +solution of the mystery. + +Oddly enough the Captain said not another word, a fact suggestive to +Cales that there was something amiss in the cave and the little company +at once took up their line of march. Captain Broom was in the lead, +followed by the mate, then Cales, with old Pete bringing up the rear. +Just as they started Captain Broom extinguished the lantern and they +took up the trail in total darkness. Every precaution would now be +necessary for they would soon be in a region where the very name of +Broom was execrated with bitter hatred, and every bush would grow a +poniard if his whereabouts were known. + +It was evident that the skipper was as good a guide on land as he was a +pilot at sea, for he led his little party at a steady gait by a winding +cow-path through the thick undergrowth. He doubtless knew this region +thoroughly, for he had made more than one raid in this locality. + +It was soon to be determined, however, that they were not the only ones +abroad that night. + +They had walked in silence for some time, well on to two hours, when +they came to an open space, with the irregular form of a live oak on the +southeast corner. Then Captain Broom stopped suddenly, his keen eyesight +which no darkness could baffle had discerned some object moving out from +the shelter of the oak tree. + +It came slowly with uplifted black arms and white hair falling around +its face. There was a terrible intensity in its advance across the open +space, withal that it moved so slowly. The figure stopped directly in +front of Captain Broom. + +"Get out of my way, you hag," he roared, but for the first time in his +life a certain tremor crept into his voice. Perhaps he was growing old. +He drew back his arm as though to strike the woman in his path. + +As he did so Jack Cales stooped and picked up a round rock at his feet, +intending to hurl it, not at the woman but at the skipper, for he alone +of the party divined the possible cause of this poor woman's dementia. +But his interference was not necessary for it seemed as though the +Captain's arm was paralyzed. He declared afterwards that some invisible +hand had seized his arm. + +Then, in a loud, wailing voice the woman put a curse upon the slayer of +her husband, for this spectre was none other than the Senora Sebastian. +It was terrible to hear her and it must have sent a shiver into the soul +of the hardy skipper. + +When she had finished, the woman moved past them and vanished in the +direction of the ranch. For a full minute the line of men stood without +moving a step and in absolute silence, Captain Broom with his arm +upraised as he had lifted it to strike. + +Then, without saying a word, he took the first forward step and the +others followed him through the darkness. + +"Say, Cales," growled Pete in a low voice, "what was it you found in +that cave? My old timbers are shaking yet." + +"Keep your old jaws shut," yelled the Captain, who had wonderfully keen +hearing, when anything was spoken that concerned him. + +"How do you suppose the old man heard me?" mumbled Pete to himself. He +dropped back a pace or two, then whispered, "The old man must be crazy. +He is making direct for the Sebastian ranch." + +"Do you reckon that these four boys he is looking after, are located +there?" asked Jack. + +"I dunno," replied Pete, "you can calkerlate on one thing though and +that is that the skipper knows pretty nigh where those lads are. One of +his messengers, a one-eyed, twisted greaser, came aboard the other day, +and was gabbling in the Captain's cabin. Then the next thing I knew we +was under sail, and came kiting down to the cove." + +Just then the party halted at the confines of a four strand barbed wire +fence. This was the first indication that they were entering the great +ranch property that formerly belonged to the Senor Sebastian, the +elderly man the Captain had made captive, and which was now the property +of his only son. + +"Now, lads," said the leader of the expedition, "Here's a chance to make +yourself small. This yere barb is like a devil fish if it once gits a +holt of your panties--it won't let go." + +"That's so, Captain," said the mate, a generally silent and saturnine +man. + +"I reckon you know, mate," said the Captain. "The last time we was +through these parts, and that some considerable years ago, this same +fence got a holt of yer pants and wouldn't let go. I never heard you +talk so much and so earnestly in my life before. You want to be more +keerful this time." + +The mate simply grunted by way of reply and, lying close to the ground, +he very gingerly and carefully worked his way under the wire and thus +escaped his mentioned former unpleasant detention. He then held the +lower wire up as high as he could until his chief had wiggled under. + +Pete was the only one of the party who was seriously detained, for Jack +Cales had slid under as slick as an eel. But Pete's joints were old and +rusty and the venomous wire got a clutch on his coat and his pants. + +"What's keeping you back?" inquired the Captain, gruffly, as Cales and +his comrade did not put in an immediate appearance. + +"Pete has got caught, sir," said Jack. + +"What are you doing there, you old barnacle?" inquired the Captain as he +came back to the fence. + +There was a certain odd comradeship between the skipper and the old salt +who had been with him since his African days. Both were New Englanders +and had come from neighboring homesteads. + +"Just resting, sir," replied the captive. + +It certainly did have something of that appearance, for Pete had kept a +decisive grip on his old black pipe with his stubby teeth and was +puffing at it in apparent peace and resignation. + +"Want me to git you a piller?" inquired the skipper, sarcastically. + +"Thank ye, sir," replied Pete imperturbably. + +Meanwhile the mate had been at work with deft fingers and he finally +succeeded in extricating the old man and putting him upon his pins. + +"Now if ye are sufficiently rested," proposed the skipper, "we will hike +along." + +This they did. Their way now lay between two stretches of fence that +enclosed a road not much traveled for there were only faint traces of +wheels in the turf. It was probably not a public highway but belonged to +the great ranch. + +Everything seemed smooth sailing now, as there was no more barbed wire +to be immediately met but Pete soon made himself prominent again. He +was rolling along with that gait peculiar to a sailor when aboard land, +when he gave a sudden spring and clutched Cales convulsively in the +back, giving that individual a big scare. + +"Dad burn it, boys. I've stepped on a rattler." An investigation was +made very carefully and Captain Broom quickly picked up a short piece of +rope. + +"I'll rattle you," he cried, touching up the old man with the rope's +end. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +PETE'S YARN + + +They went along steadily through the darkness in an almost directly +easterly direction. Being now clear of the brush they could make good +time on the springy turf. + +"How far are we now from the ranch, Pete?" inquired Jack. + +"Too durn close to suit me," replied Pete. "I can't tell exactly for +these ranches are as big as all outside creation, but I guess we must be +as close as a mile to the buildings." + +"I reckon the Captain is going to walk up to the front door and ask for +accommodations." + +"Wouldn't s'prise me a bit, if he done that," replied Pete querulously. +"The old man ain't lacking in nerve. Back thar was the first time I ever +seen him hang back in my long experience with him." + +"When the old lady was speaking her piece? Suppose I ask him how much he +made when he captured the Senor," suggested Cales, who had recovered his +flippant humor. + +"I wouldn't git gay, lad," said old Pete, warningly. "She is just as +liable to haunt you in your black spells." + +"Don't have 'em, uncle," replied Cales. + +"You collect the material for 'em when you are young," said the old man +wisely, "and they come out of your bones like rheumatiz when you git +old." + +"Somebody is coming back of us," suddenly whispered Cales. + +"Take to cover, lads," ordered the skipper, who was as quick to hear as +the younger man. The only cover was a high and thick growth of wild +mustard growing alongside the fences. + +Quickly they stepped from the open road into the shelter of the tall +mustard. They had not long to wait. There was the jingle of spurs and +the thud of horses' feet walking slowly along. Next came the voices of +men talking. + +"It is useless, Senor, to try and find her, I fear," replied one man to +the other. + +"It seems so," replied the other sadly. "My mother always seems to be +worse when the time of the year approaches that my father disappeared. +In spite of all our care she will escape." + +They had now arrived at a point opposite where the free-booters were +hidden. The man who had last spoken struck a light and lit a cigarette; +the instantaneous glare showed the dark handsome face of the Spanish +type. There was the high-peaked sombrero, the striking clothes, the +intent face and then the light died suddenly out. + +"Ah, Manuel," said the young man to his companion, "if I could only once +lay hands on that cursed Gringo," and he ground his teeth in fury, +unable to express himself. + +"Humph, Gringo," grunted the Captain, disdainfully. + +"Did you hear anything, Senor?" asked Manuel. + +"Nothing." + +"I was sure I heard something," asserted his companion. They had reined +in their horses and sat listening quietly for a few seconds. + +"It was probably nothing but a calf by the roadside," said the Senor. + +The other shook his head doubtfully, then they turned and rode on +towards the rancho. + +When they were safely out of range, the party of pirates took up their +line of march once more. + +"So the greaser took me for a calf," remarked Captain Broom. "If it had +been you, Jack Cales, there might be some excuse fer such a mistake." + +"Aye, sir," replied Cales, glumly. + +"Getting kind of close to the ranch, ain't you, Cap'n?" ventured old +Pete. + +"I thought of leaving you there, Pete, while the rest of us corralled +those kids. You are getting too old for these long tramps." + +No more remarks were heard coming from the direction of Pete, for he was +not at all sure but that the Captain might, in a moment of irresponsible +humor, do just as he threatened without regard to the consequences. + +After they had gone on for a mile from the point where the two men had +overtaken them, Captain Broom led his party away from the road in a +southerly direction, once more undergoing the harrowing experience of +getting through the barbed wire fence. But this time Jack Cales was +especially detailed by the Captain to get old Pete through so there +would not be any unnecessary delay. + +It was evident that they were getting into a different section, a short +time after they left the road, for they began going up and winding among +little rocky hills. At last they came to a stopping place. They climbed +up an elevation and sat on some rocks among a group of dark trees. + +"Now, lads, take it easy," said the Captain, "ye have had quite a +footin' and when morning comes, there will be some more ahead and at a +faster gait." + +"Gosh, Cap'n," declared old Pete, "It's the most walking we've done +together since the time we corralled the last bunch of niggers on the +west coast of Africa." + +"We certainly made money that trip when we sold that cargo of coons to +the traders on that Palmetto Island below Charleston. But we will clean +up about as much money when we round up those four boys and twice as +easy. Tell the two lads about that trip, Pete." + +The old sailor sat on a rock, and taking out his bag of tobacco filled +his short black pipe with one thorny thumb, then he commenced his +narrative, with the glow of his pipe lighting up his weatherbeaten face. + +"Well, orders is orders, and the Cap'n wants me to tell this yarn. I +might just as well begin it, lads. I never knew any good to come to +sailormen cruising around on dry land any more than on this trip." He +cast a wary eye at Captain Broom, but that worthy merely grunted and +Pete resumed his story. + +"Our clipper lay at anchor in a wide bay with only a couple of men on +board and the Captain, myself and six men trailing inland for to find a +village of naygurs that our guides had told us of. + +"It certainly was hot and steamy going through the jungles and every +once in a while a big snake as large as my leg would crawl across our +path and rustle away into the undergrowth. Once I felt one of 'em +a-twisting and rolling under my foot like a big log that had came to +life. I guess I must have jumped twice as high as my own head and I lit +on the back of one of the naygurs that was guiding us. + +"He didn't know what struck him; probably thought it was a tiger for I +sunk my hooks into his hide. He let out a yell and went ripping and +snorting through that jungle and me not having sense enough to let go, +until a grape vine about as thick as a manilla rope chucked me under the +chin and I fell flat on my back and I guess that naygur is still +running." + +Here the captain who was evidently enjoying the narrative hugely, burst +into a volcanic roar of laughter. + +"I can see yer yet, Pete, on that bounding buck of a nigger, and him +a-hiking through the jungle and a-yelling like a wild Injun." + +"I remember you got out of the way mighty quick," said Pete, "when you +heard us a-coming behind you." + +"It certainly was a curious spectacle," said the Captain, "but go on +with your yarn, Pete." + +"The further we went into the jungle the worse it got. The mosquitoes +fairly ate us alive and they wern't the only cannibals in those woods by +any means. There was a tribe of man-eaters beyond the Big River and we +didn't try to capture any of them. They wern't our stripe of bacon. + +"We went on for six days, with the monkeys chattering over our heads all +day and the mosquitoes serenading us at night. Talk about birds, there +was a whole menagerie of them and their colors beat the handkerchiefs +that these greasers wear around their throats and you can't get ahead of +that for color. + +"One night we got in range of the village we were after and there was a +great pow-wow going on. There was a big fire in the circle of the grass +huts and some big black bucks were doing a dance around it. Just then I +saw--" + +"Hold on, Pete," said the Captain in a low, gruff voice, "somebody is +coming our way." + + + + +CHAPTER V + +THE FOUR BOYS + + +"Hey, Jim, where are we going to make camp?" It was his brother Jo's +genial voice. + +"Not until we can strike water," replied Jim. "No more dry camps for +me." + +"I don't think much of the coast range, or the Sierras, either." It was +Juarez Hoskins' well-remembered voice, with its rather low, deep tones. + +"Give me the Rockies every time." + +Juarez was nothing if not loyal to his mountains. + +"I don't think any of the mountains are much to brag of." + +It is hardly necessary to say that it is Tom Darlington who is now +speaking, for the discerning reader is pretty well acquainted with his +style by this time. + +"There's always something to look out for," continued Tom, "if it isn't +Indians it's rattlesnakes, and you have got to choose between a +cloudburst or no water at all. Give me the East every time." + +"You make me exhausted talking about the East," said Jim. "Why didn't +you stay there when you were there? I had just as soon take a chance +with a rattlesnake as with an ice cream soda." + +"Tom would like to _play_ Indian," cut in Jo, "with turkey feathers +sticking up from a red flannel band around his head. And creeping upon a +flock of sheep pretending that they are antelope and that cows are real +live bears." + +"Yes," said Jim, "you have lined it out all right, Jo. Then when they +were tired of playing Injun, Tom and his little playmates could pretend +that they were Daniel Boone's men with wildskin panties on." + +"Shut up, boys," said Juarez, coming to Tom's rescue. "What's the use in +rubbing it in? The East is all right for some folks and if the boys back +there can't have real adventures they have to do the best they can. +After all, Jim, you are an Eastern boy. You can't get away from that." +Jim writhed under the implication but replied good humoredly. + +"You're right, Juarez, old chap, but I can't help stirring up Tom once +in a while. It is good for him too. It keeps his liver active, so he +won't get bilious." + +"Juarez has got more sense than you two put together," said Tom. + +"Forget all about it now, Tommy," urged Juarez good-naturedly, getting +the aforesaid Tommy by the nape of the neck with one vigorous brown hand +and giving him a shake. + +Thus under Juarez's straightforward management the family quarrel was +abated. + +"We might just as well ride now, boys," said Jim. "The horses are good +and rested and we will soon be going down grade instead of up." + +The horses had been following in single file back of the four boys. They +were to be trusted not to cut up any shindigs or to wander from the +narrow mountain trail. The boys had had them a long time and together +they had gone through the numerous hardships and adventures. They were +as perfectly trained as Uncle Sam's cavalry horses. + +The horses halted as the boys dropped back to their sides, and they +swung into the saddle simultaneously. Jim rode in the lead on a splendid +gray, with a powerful arching neck, strong shoulders and hindquarters +made for speed. Him, he called Caliente. Next rode Tom on a pretty bay. +Then Jo on a black of medium size but finely built for speed and +endurance. Juarez brought up the rear on his roan, a sinewy animal with +a broncho strain in him which was liable to crop out at unexpected +moments. + +It is to be noticed that there was a certain formation in the way the +column rode. Jim, the strong and resourceful in front, and Tom, the less +experienced and capable, following, forming the first division. The +second division was composed of Jo and Juarez. + +Juarez having an equally important position with the leader, for he was +rear guard, a more trying position sometimes than being in front for in +their travels through dangerous regions, it was the man in the rear who +was more apt to be cut off by the wily Indians. But the cool and crafty +Juarez was not likely to be caught napping. + +Even now you notice as they ride along through the comparatively safe +region of the coast range that Jim and Juarez are ever on the alert, +glancing this way and that, halting to examine some peculiar mark on the +trail, and not a motion of tree or bush upon either mountain slope +escapes their attention. They had lived too long in the midst of +treacherous enemies, Indians and outlaws, to be taken off their guard. +They had been in Mexico on a venture the outcome of which was all their +fondest dreams could wish for. Their expedition over, Tom was for going +home, to at least deposit the treasure they had gained, but the others +had outvoted him, and now the long pleasure trip to Hawaii was their +object. + +Now, if they but had known it, they were riding to meet the most deadly +danger that they had yet encountered. For as you know, Captain Broom and +his party were advancing to meet them. In an open or running fight, we +know perfectly well that the boys could take care of themselves, but in +the skipper of the Sea Eagle, they were to meet a far more dangerous +opponent than in Eagle Feather, described in "The Frontier Boys in +Colorado" or Cal Jenkins in Kansas and in Mexico as detailed in +"Overland Trail" and in "Mexico." In compliance with a determined plan, +they were now on their way to Hawaii. + +Not only had Captain Broom the craftiness and cruelty of the Indian, but +the cool, hard judgment of the New England Yankee, coupled with a +knowledge of their possessions, supposedly limited to themselves alone. +The Mexican spy, who had reported the route the boys were going to take, +had given the game into his master's hands. + +"I wonder what has become of our one-eyed greaser friend," said Jim, "we +haven't seen any sign of him since he gave us the shake a week ago at +the hunting camp. I kind of thought we might run across him again." + +"It's good riddance to bad rubbish," said Juarez in a surly tone. "If I +had my way I'd hang him to the first oak tree on general principles and +on account of his personal appearance. I bet he is a treacherous little +rat." + +"He isn't very pretty, that's a fact," admitted Jim, "but he is a useful +little beast about the camp and can do a lot of chores." + +"I kind of like to hear him play his guitar," put in Jo, "and sing those +Mexican tunes. They certainly sound pretty." + +"He's a picturesque beggar too," remarked Tom. "Just the kind that in +the old days would have been made a king's jester. They dressed 'em up +in a blazing bright style then. That hump would have made his fortune." + +Tom, as you remember, was an authority on Romance, and as pertaining to +which he always carried two favorite volumes, much worn by hard travel +and frequent usage, but which no amount of ridicule by his brothers +could make him give up. + +"Have it your own way," acceded Juarez, "but he is not the sort of +animal that I would recommend for a household pet." + +"Well, he is gone," said Jim, "so we don't need to worry about him." + +"I don't know but that I would a little rather have him in sight," said +Juarez. "Then you know where he is." + +Jim laughed good-naturedly at the prejudice that Juarez showed against +the little greaser and put it down to his darkly suspicious nature +acquired by his life among the Indians. It would have been better if Jim +had taken more stock in his comrade's suspicions. Now, Jim was not to be +caught napping when once an enemy had declared himself, but it was his +nature to be open-minded and unsuspicious. + +The four Frontier Boys were riding up a winding trail through a narrow +mountain valley, having reached a point almost level with the summits, +which rose several thousand feet above the eastern plain. It had been a +hard, all day climb, and the horses were tired and the gray dust was +caked upon their sweaty riders. + +Let us take a look at our old acquaintances, Jim, Tom, Jo and Juarez, to +see if they have changed any since we saw them last. They are dressed +about as we have always known them. In gray flannel shirts and pants of +the same color, moccasins on their feet and on their heads battered +sombreros with the flaps turned back. + +Their coats are tied back of the saddles, and their shirts open at the +throat for the air is hot and dry in that California mountain valley. +Their rifles are swung across their shoulders held by straps, revolvers +in the holsters at their hips. + +Jim sits in the saddle tall and sinewy, grown somewhat thinner by +constant exercise and by the drying effect of the desert air. His skin +is baked to an absolute brown. Juarez, too, is black as an Indian and he +rather looks like one with his hair quite long and of a coarse black +fibre. The boys look a little fine-drawn but sinewy and strong and fit +for any adventure. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE HUNCHBACK + + +The shadows were already falling on that side of the range as the boys +rode slowly into a narrow pass. The shade was a decided relief from the +glare of the California sun that they had encountered all day. + +"Gosh, but I should like to have a cool breath from the Rockies," +declared Juarez with emphasis, "This sort of a climate makes me tired. +Nothing but the sun staring at you all the time. It goes down clear and +comes up with the same kind of a grin on its face." + +"It will be cooler when we get on the other side," said Jim, +encouragingly, "and it won't be long now." + +"I hope we will strike water on the other side," remarked Jo. "I'm tired +of looking at that bald-headed stream down there," indicating the dry +blistered bed of a former water-course. + +Nothing more was said until of a sudden they rode to the top of the +Pass, and saw a new landscape spread out before them. + +It was a broad and beautiful view, with the sun striking the wide +Pacific, with a blazing glare of silver and below the wooded slope of +the mountains, stretched an apparently level plain, where roamed +countless cattle, and innumerable sheep. It had all the breadth +characteristic of the Californian landscape. + +"That's a pretty good looking view," remarked Jim admiringly. He would +have been still more interested if he could have seen a trim-looking +black vessel in a small cove directly west but a good many miles +distant. + +"I wonder if it isn't going to rain," said Tom. "See those clouds +rolling in over the ocean." + +"Rain!" ejaculated Jim with superior wisdom, a wisdom that appertains +particularly to older brothers, "I guess not. Those are fog clouds. +That's a sure sign in this country that it won't rain." + +"Well, I'm glad to see them, anyway," said Juarez. "It looks sort of +stormy even if it isn't." + +It was restful, there was no question about that, the change from the +constant glare of a white sun in a blue sky, to the soft damp grayness +of the fog. It was already rolling over the level plain towards the +mountains and, in a short time, a high fog was spread over the whole +sky. + +The boys had ridden down the western side of the range for a distance of +a half mile, when Jim suddenly waved his hand backward in a sign of +caution for the column to halt. He leaned forward, looking intently in a +northwesterly direction to a point on the opposite side of the mountain +valley. Juarez followed the direction of the leader's look with a keen +gaze. + +"I was sure that I saw some one slipping through the undergrowth on the +opposite side over there," Jim finally said, "but I could not make sure +whether it was a man or some sort of animal." + +"I noticed the bushes shaking," said Juarez, "but I did not see +anything." + +"Might have been a brown bear," hazarded Jo. + +"They do have them in this range," put in Tom. + +"Perhaps it is the bear that we hunted for two days on the other slope," +said Juarez, "and he has come to give himself up." + +"We had better keep our eyes open," advised Jim, though he did not take +the trouble to unsling his rifle. "Jo, you and Tom watch the upper side, +Juarez will take care of the trail in front." + +"All right, boss," said Juarez, cheerfully. + +"How much reward, captain, for the first glimpse of the lost child?" +inquired Jo. + +Jim paid no attention to this sally, but kept his eye on the trail +ahead. The trees were quite thick on either side of the trail and as +dusk was coming on, it was difficult to make out any object clearly. + +Just as Jim rode around a turn in the trail, Caliente reared and leaped +to one side and a less skillful rider would have been thrown. + +"Easy, old boy," said the rider, patting his horse's neck. Caliente +stood trembling and snorting and watching a curious object that was +struggling up the bank towards the trail. + +It was hard to tell what it was, whether man or beast and the dusk only +served to make it more obscure. Then the object scrambled up on to the +trail and Jim at once recognized the dwarf Mexican with his high-crowned +sombrero and his velvet suit richly slashed. With his crooked back and +one eye, he was anything but a prepossessing-looking creature. Caliente, +when he, too, recognized who it was, put back his ears and rushed with +bared teeth for the Mexican. + +Spitting out a curse, the greaser jumped to one side with a marked +agility, and Jim succeeded after a struggle in bringing his furious +steed to terms, but he had his hands full and there were not very many +men who could manage Caliente when he got into one of his rages. + +"Hi! Manuel," (every Mexican was Manuel to the boys), cried Jim, "look +out for my Tiger, he wants to eat that velvet suit of yours." + +"Si, Senor," called Manuel from a safe station on a granite rock. "He is +a tiger as your Honor says." + +One would have expected to hear the crooked little greaser speak in a +harsh croaking voice, but instead it had a rich sonorous quality. + +"Do you know where there is any water in this country?" asked Jo. "We +are as dry as a desert." + +"Certainly, Senor, I will show you," replied Manuel. (It was true that +Manuel spoke in Spanish of which language the boys had a working +knowledge, due to their sojourn in the southwest. But I shall put his +words in English.) "Where is Senor Juarez?" inquired the dwarf. "I do +not see him." + +"The Senor is still with us," replied Jim, gravely, "but you cannot see +him on account of the dusk, but you might hear him," he added in a lower +tone. + +It was true that Juarez was growling to himself about the greaser for +whom you know he had a cordial antipathy, a feeling which was +reciprocated by the Mexican. + +"Lead on, Manuel," urged Jim, "we want to make camp before morning." + +"But, Senor, the tiger will eat me up," objected the Mexican. + +"I will take care of Caliente. He won't bite you. Go ahead." + +"Si, Senor," assented Manuel. + +Then he jumped down from the rock and took the trail at a discreet +distance ahead of Jim's horse, who was held in check by his rider though +his temper seemed in no wise abated. There was something sinister in the +figure of the Mexican as he led the way down the trail. + +All in black, except the gray of his hat with its golden cord and the +tinsel of his clothes. There was something malignant in his make-up and +even the unimaginative Jim was affected by the presence of the Mexican, +while Juarez was very uneasy, and asked Jo and Tom to allow him to move +up next to the Captain. This they did, though it left Jo as rear guard +on that rocky trail. + +He seemed quite isolated but he had become sufficiently enured to danger +and though he kept a wary eye, he was not nervous. The boys had +unholstered their pistols and Juarez kept a straight eye on the moving +shadow in the darkness ahead. At the first sign of attack or treachery, +he was going to get that particular Manuel. + +"I've got my eye on the little varmint," said Juarez in a low voice to +Jim. "He may be leading us into an ambush." + +"Oh, I guess not," said Jim, with a note of hesitation in his voice. "We +have got to find water anyway. The horses are suffering for it, and this +beggar can show us where we can locate it." + +Just then Manuel threw up his hand with a shrill whistle that had every +malignant intention in it. Juarez raised his pistol just ready to fire, +when the Mexican laughed shrilly. + +"Senor Juarez very nervous. I just stretch and whistle a little and he +want to shoot." + +A peculiar smile came over Juarez's face, but he said nothing. All the +stolid Indian in his nature came to the surface. He merely grunted +contemptuously at the Mexican's remark and this made the volatile Manuel +uneasy in his turn, for he wanted to realize that his malice had struck +home, but Juarez did not give him that satisfaction. There was a sort of +hidden duel between these two, the subtle Mexican and the crafty Indian +nature of Juarez. It remained to be seen who would win. + +The four Frontier Boys went silently along down the dark canyon, each +one occupied with his own thoughts and the ill-omened Mexican guide in +the lead. Juarez kept a sharp lookout on either side of the trail +expecting an ambush. His horse seemed to feel something of the strain +his rider was under, as a horse will. Once he shied at something he saw +in a clump of bushes, and nearly went off the trail. It was only with +the aid of Juarez's horsemanship that he clawed his way back to safety. +The Mexican was much amused at this incident, and Jim gave him a sharp +call down. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +FARMER BROOM + + +We must now return to Captain Broom and his escort, whom we left sitting +on a hill covered with trees near the Sebastian rancho. Old Pete's story +had been interrupted by the skipper's warning,--"Somebody is coming our +way." + +There was no question about that, they could hear the someone coming +towards the hill whistling cheerfully. Then the form of a man could be +seen, coming up the slope of the elevation. + +"I wonder where those altogether blessed cows are," he was heard saying +in Spanish, but of course, this is a free and not a literal translation. + +"They are generally hiding under these trees," he continued. The sailors +kept absolutely still and old Pete covered the bowl of his pipe with his +hand so that its light might not discover them. + +"Carambe!" cried the Mexican as he stopped about three feet from the +recumbent Captain, "I fear my good master's cows have been smoking, not +like nice Mexican cows, a cigarette, but a pipe like a vile gringo. +Come, get up, you black brute," noticing the big bulk of the Captain for +the first time, and he hauled off and gave the skipper a hearty kick on +the haunch. + +Never was there a more surprised greaser in the whole ungainly length of +California for this apparently gentle cow that he kicked, (not for the +first time either) suddenly turned and grabbed him with a powerful hand +before he could yell, though he was so frightened that he probably could +not utter a squeak. Another hand got him by the throat. + +"Take me for a cow, did you, you bespangled Manuello?" roared the +Captain, and he waved the aforesaid Manuello about in his great grip as +though he had been a rag. + +"No use killing the beggar, Captain," said the mate. "Maybe he can tell +us something." The Captain let the Mexican drop and he lay on the ground +perfectly inert. + +"He won't be able to say much right away," said the Skipper. + +It was now getting light, the first signs of dawn showing above the +mountains. As the darkness was drawn away, they could see their position +more clearly and there came the sounds of the morning from the direction +of the ranch houses. The barking of dogs, the crowing of roosters, and +the call of human voices. + +"I guess, lads, it's about time for us to have something to eat," said +the Captain, "because we have got to do some tall climbing today and I +want to get an early start." + +An expression of disgust showed itself on old Pete's face at the idea of +more walking, which the Captain was quick to note. + +"How would you like to stay here, Old Bones, and look after Manuello?" +said the skipper. But Pete shook his head. + +"I'll stay by the ship, Cap'n," said the old fellow stoutly. + +"Durn my buttons," said the Captain, whose oaths were as mild as his +actions were vicious, "if you ain't a good old barnacle, Pete. I +wouldn't think of leaving you in such company as this," and he gave the +prostrate Mexican a shove with his foot. Manuello looked up at the +Captain with an evil eye and a muttered curse. + +This roused the fury of Captain Broom and he held him off from the +ground as if he had been a rat, his jaws working ominously and a look in +his eyes that made the Mexican shrivel. + +Nothing was said, not even by the Skipper, and the others watched him +fascinated as he glared at his victim, and even the iron composure of +the saturnine mate seemed to be moved partially aside. The Mexican began +to whimper and moan as his eyes shifted to avoid the terrible ones of +the Captain. He was not suffering any special violence, but a strange +tremor filled the soul of the Mexican, in the grip of the grizzled +giant. + +As the greaser began to cry, the Captain gave a roar of laughter and +threw him aside upon the ground, about all the humanity he had shriveled +out of him. He lay there absolutely without any power of motion in his +body. + +Just then the crew of the Sea Eagle became aware of the fact that a +horned animal with big brown eyes was looking at them. All the farmer in +the nature of Captain Broom came to the surface. + +"By Gum," he exclaimed, "if here ain't a bovine cow looking at us. I +ain't milked one for forty years, but I'm not afeard to try. 'Member, +Pete, when we used to milk the cows back in old Connecticut on the farm. +After working in the hay all day, I'd go down in the side hill pasture, +that was so steep that you had to hold on with your toes and your teeth +to keep from sliding down to the brook." + +"You bring it back to me just like it was a living picture," said Pete, +his hard face softening under the gentle showers of memory. + +"Then I'd drive the black and white one that was breechy, and the red +mooley, the yaller and white that gave the richest milk. I'd drive them +into the stanchions in the old barn, with the ground floor stoned up on +the side, where it was sunk into the hill." + +"But it was winter, Cap'n," said Pete, "that it was interesting doing +the chores," and he blew reminiscently on his fingers, "snow two feet on +the level and the sun a piece of blue ice in the sky. A condemned sight +better place than Californey, where you don't feel no more alive than a +enbalmed corpse." + +The Captain began now a series of manoeuvres to get within range of +one of the cows so that they might have fresh milk for breakfast. He +managed it finally, and he certainly looked like a peaceful old farmer +as with his gray head against a fat red cow's flank, he milked into a +large tin cup. Pete selected a black mooley and soothed by the man's +persuasive manner, she consented finally to give down a thin blue +stream. But the saturnine mate was less successful as he knew much more +about navigating a ship than he did about cows. + +Finally after much awkward manoeuvring, he got a cow cornered and +began operations upon the left side with the result that the cow landed +upon him with her hoof and sent him sprawling on his back to the great +delight of the Captain. + +"Hurt bad, Bill?" inquired the Skipper with mock sympathy, "I'm afeard +that you will never make a farmer." + +"I never calkerlated to," replied the mate. "It ain't my line of +business." + +"Don't tell me that," said the Captain, "I can see that for myself. Come +up here and I'll give you a drink." + +They had scarcely finished their simple breakfast when Jack Cales gave a +sudden alarm. + +"Cap'n," he cried, "I see two men legging it our way. They are making +straight for the hill." + +"I guess they are coming to see why Manuello doesn't show up with the +cows," remarked the Captain, "we don't want to stir up this hen roost as +we've got other chicken to fry. So we'll git." + +"Take the greaser?" inquired Jack. + +"You and the mate fetch him," said the Captain. + +Just as the two men were mounting the hill, the Captain and his crew +made a swift sneak down the opposite slope, and were soon making their +way through the bush towards the foot-hills. In a minute they heard the +cries of the two men as they drove the herd of cows towards the home +ranch for the morning milking. The sun had now risen above the eastern +range just in front of them and was blazing down upon the plain and the +sea beyond. There was something exhilarating in the air in spite of the +heat. + +"We don't need the company of that greaser any further," said Captain +Broom, after they had made some headway up a canyon back of the ranch +buildings. So they took some rope grass, tough as manilla, and tied him +firmly, and, after having gagged him, they left him to be found later by +some of his countrymen. + +Then they toiled steadily up the trail of the canyon, until about noon +they reached a pocket in the canyon where there was a pool of clear +water fed by an invisible spring. Coming to meet them were four boys +riding up the trail on the other side of the range. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE CAMP IN THE POCKET + + +Under the guidance of the Mexican dwarf, the four boys came at last to a +halt. It seemed as if the canyon down which they had been riding had +come to an end for there was a wall of rock directly in front of them. + +"Down there, Senor, is a pool of clear water," announced the Mexican. + +"Glad to hear it, Manuel," said Jim heartily. + +"Did you ever see a picture, Jim," put in Juarez significantly, "of a +pool where the thirsty animals have to come to drink and before they get +their noses in the water the hunter shoots them?" + +But nothing of this dire nature happened and in a few minutes the +famished animals were pumping the delicious water down their long, baked +throats. + +"My Gracious, but that tastes good!" cried Tom, drawing in a long, +gasping breath, after he had been drinking steadily for about a minute. +"It makes my head swim." + +"I should think it would," said Jo, sarcastically, "considering the +amount you have drunk." + +"You weren't far behind," grumbled Tom. "I thought that you were not +going to leave enough for the horses." + +"I don't especially like this place to camp in," said Jim. "We are not +accustomed to get in a pocket like this. But it is too late to pull out +tonight and the horses need a rest, so we will keep guard." + +"Better drown the brown rat first," remarked Juarez to Jim. But the +latter only shook his head and laughed. + +The camp was made about twenty feet east of the spring in a small grove +of slender trees backed by a high wall of steep granite, down which +poured a waterfall in the rainy season. + +The fire was built upon a flat rock in the centre of the grove where +there was no danger of it catching in the grass and bushes which were +dry as tinder. If once a mountain fire was started at the end of the dry +season there would be no stopping it until it had devastated the whole +country. + +The light of the fire showed the usual cheery and active scene that goes +with making camp. How many times the Frontier Boys had gone through +these preparations it is impossible to say. They had camped on the +plains of Kansas, in the mountains of Colorado, on the Mesas of New +Mexico, the banks of the Colorado river, and the Pampas of Mexico. Now +we find them in the coast range of California. + +It was not an especially dangerous country in which they were camped, +nothing to compare with parts of Colorado and Mexico, but never were +they in greater danger than at the present moment and this camp promised +to be their last together, except they had unusual luck. + +There was a traitor in the company, and even now four pairs of hostile +eyes were watching them as they moved in the light of the fire. The +Captain of the Sea Eagle and his three trusty men were hidden in some +bushes at the top of the pocket on the western side. + +Juarez and Jim busied themselves first in looking after their horses. +Removing the saddles they rubbed down each animal thoroughly, clear to +the fetlocks and then gave them a good feed of grain. Jo and Tom were on +the supper committee and busying themselves making preparations for a +square meal. Manuello, who had been with the boys on the other side of +the range and was accustomed to help in odd chores about camp, now +offered to aid in getting the supper. + +"I will make the coffee with your permission, Senor Jo," he proposed. + +"Do you savvy it all right, Manuello?" inquired Jo. + +"Ah, yes, Senor. I can make such coffee as the Holy Father would be +pleased to drink," he replied with fervor. + +"Not too strong because it keeps me awake," protested Tom. + +"No, no, Senor Thomas," replied Manuello with a sweeping bow, "the +coffee I make is very soothing. It will give you a long, soft sleep." +There was an undertone of subtle irony that was entirely lost upon the +two straightforward boys. + +"That's a good fellow, Manuello," said Jo, cordially, and he handed the +coffee pot filled with water to the Mexican, who went about the +preparation of it with a deftness that showed that he knew what he was +about. Not one of the boys saw him slip a white powder into the coffee +pot. It quickly dissolved and the coffee began to bubble innocently +enough under the eyes of the hunchback Manuello. + +Juarez and Jim just then came back from looking after the horses which +were fastened near the wall of rock. As soon as Juarez saw the Mexican +watching over the coffee pot, his eyes narrowed with suspicion. + +"Who made the coffee?" he asked Jo, bluntly. + +"Manuello," replied Jo. + +"The Senor will find the coffee truly delicious," said the hunchback +with a bow, "only the Mexican knows how to keep its aroma when boiling +it." + +"Humph," grunted Juarez, and he went deliberately to the fire and lifted +the coffee pot off and poured its contents on the ground. + +"The American does not care for the aroma of your Mexican coffee," he +said coolly. + +The Mexican merely gave a peculiar hitch to his shoulder, spat on the +ground and turned away apparently mortally offended as he, no doubt, +was. That part of his scheme had been blocked by the craftiness of +Juarez, but the Captain might make good where his spy had failed. + +The Mexican sat back in the shadow on a rock smoking a cigarette, while +the boys ate their supper of beans, meat, bread and coffee. He was the +skeleton at the feast as it were, not only his malignant humor made +itself felt, but there was a sense of depression that they could not +shake off, try as they would. + +This was so unusual that they could not account for it. As a rule, they +were jolly and even when danger was impending, they felt a certain +confidence and assurance, but not so tonight. + +"What makes us feel so on the bum tonight, do you suppose?" asked Tom. + +"Maybe this canyon is haunted," proposed Jo, who had an imaginative +streak in him. + +"I tell you the way I figure it," said Jim. "We are not used to camping +in a hollow like this, for before this we have always selected a place +that we could defend, and though there is no particular danger from +outlaws or Indians in these mountains, we can't shake off our old +habits." + +"I believe there is something in that," acquiesced Jo. + +"It's that rat over there," said Juarez loudly. + +The Mexican laughed coolly and insolently, and lighted another +cigarette. This would have maddened an excitable person, but Juarez was +in a stoical mood and he contented himself with flinging a bone that he +had been gnawing at, carelessly over his shoulder, almost striking the +Mexican in the face. + +This set that peppery individual wild and he tore around considerably, +tearing his hair, stamping his feet and sputtering with maledictions at +the insult that had been offered him. + +"I am no dog that you can throw a bone to," and he sizzled off into a +string of unpleasant remarks. + +"Here you, Manuello," roared Jim, rising to his feet and standing over +the Mexican, "not another yelp out of you." + +Manuello had a respect for this big American lad much as he despised his +simplicity and he sobered down. Besides he had not finished his work for +the night. He had failed to get the sleeping drug to the boys in the +coffee and now he must be ready to help his master, Captain Broom of the +Sea Eagle, in some other way. + +There was a person whom he feared and admired absolutely and he had been +a most useful spy and agent for the Skipper in certain nefarious plots. +It was well for the little hunchback that no one knew of his share in +the betraying of old Juan Sebastian some years before. + +"You will have the first watch, Jo," ordered Jim. "It is now nine +o'clock. I will relieve you at eleven and stand guard until two. Juarez +from two until five and Tom can have the short watch." + +According to this arrangement, Jim and Juarez would be on guard during +the danger hours. + +How many times in the past had the boys stood guard over their camp. Was +this to be the last guard? There were the old Kansas days, when they had +to be on the watch against horse thieves. Then came the dangerous crisis +in their Colorado experiences, when they had to guard against the wiles +of the Indians. And most exciting of all, perhaps, the night in old +Mexico when they camped on the trail of the outlaws. I wonder if Jo, the +first on duty, thought of these old times that night. Probably not, his +mind being fully occupied with the business in hand. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE ATTACK + + +So the three boys rolled into their blankets with the saddles for +pillows and dropped immediately to sleep as they were very tired from +the long, hard ride. They lay at different points around the fire, which +was allowed to die down as the fog seemed like a warm gray blanket over +the whole landscape. + +Jo sat on a log by the slowly dying fire, with his rifle on his knees +looking into the darkness and not far from him lay the Mexican a mere +dark lump on the ground, apparently asleep, but keeping a wary eye on +all around. Imperceptibly he crept nearer to where Jo was sitting, but +he did not have the weapon he would have preferred in his hand, the +stiletto, which was as natural to him as the fangs to a rattlesnake. + +But it did not suit the long-headed Captain Broom to have the boys +killed. He wanted their life as well as their money, but in a different +sense than the adage has it. From what he had heard of them, they were +boys of unusual mettle and varied acquirements. If caught young, he +could train them to good purpose. If they proved worthless, he would +hold them for ransom. + +So Captain Broom had told Manuello briefly and to the point that there +was to be no rib-sticking and the Mexican would have thought as soon of +disobeying the commands of the Evil One as of going contrary to the +instructions of the Captain. So as he crept towards Jo, he held not a +poniard in his clenched hand, but a heavy weapon like a black-jack, made +of leather with a weight at the end. + +Jo, however, spoiled his first attempt, for when the greaser had got +within striking distance, Jo got up and went down to the pool to get a +drink. If it had not been so dark, when they arrived, the boys would +have seen tracks around the pool that would have aroused their +suspicions. But everything seemed to work against them this time. + +Jo stooped down at the brink and scarcely put his thirsty lips to the +water when some instinct of warning made him look quickly around and he +saw a small dark object directly back of him. + +"Pardon, Senor, for startling you;" it was the voice of the dwarf, "but +I, too, was very thirsty. It is in the air." + +"You needn't have been so quiet about it," said Jo, crossly. This little +rat always had a way of baffling and irritating him, because he did not +have Jim's force, which could beat down the dwarf when occasion demanded +it, or the stoicism of Juarez, which blocked the hunchback. + +"I came softly, Senor," said the Mexican, imperturbably, "because I did +not wish to disturb the slumbers of the Senors who are resting." + +"Get down and drink, then," said Jo, who, though he realized that the +Mexican was up to some hidden deviltry, did not know how to meet him. +Jim and Juarez would have knocked him out of the camp if they had +discovered him trailing them, with a warning that he would be shot if he +put in an appearance again. + +While the Mexican was pretending to drink, Jo satisfied his thirst at a +point of the pool where he would be safe from a sudden attack by the +hunchback. For Jo was not a fool by any means. Then he got to his feet +and with the Mexican ahead of him, he saw to that, he made his way back +to the camp. + +Scarcely had Jo seated himself upon the rock again than he heard a stick +snap upon the mountain side above the horses, so he got to his feet to +investigate. + +"You can stay where you are, Manuello," said Jo. "I don't need your +company this time." The Mexican laughed softly to himself. + +"I hope the Senor Americano will not get lonesome," he said. + +Jo made a careful search in the direction of the sound but found no sign +of a human being lurking among the trees. Though he felt exceedingly +nervous, he was unable to account therefor or give a reason. + +Very quietly he went the rounds, so as not to awake the boys, who, +however, were sleeping heavily. He found the horses all right standing +with drooping heads as though dozing, Jo's black with his neck over +Tom's bay, as these horses were great chums. But Caliente and Juarez's +roan were not sociable and kept strictly to themselves. + +Then Jo returned to the rock where he had been sitting. He stirred the +dying fire so that it sent up a feeble spurt of flame by the aid of +which he looked at his watch. It lacked a few minutes of ten. The +Mexican had taken up his old place on the ground watching for his +chance. He was anxious that the attack should take place during Jo's +watch for he had his doubts in regard to Juarez or the redoubtable Jim +proving easy victims. + +All this time, Captain Bill Broom and his crew had been keeping watch +upon their intended victims from the top of the cliff above the pool. +They could see every move from the time the Frontier Boys had arrived +until they lay down near the smouldering fire. + +"They are a husky lot," was the Captain's first comment. "That tall +fellar, I guess, is a horse tamer and Injun fighter." + +Some time later when the altercation occurred about the coffee and +Juarez expressed his opinion about the Mexican, the Captain could +scarcely keep from haw-hawing right out. + +"Them fellars have got some dis'pline," commented the saturnine mate. + +"You're right they hev," said the Captain. + +"That lad don't know how to handle my pet rattlesnake," was the +Captain's comment when the Mexican trailed Jo to the drinking pool. +After Jo had returned from making his rounds and had resumed his guard +again, the Captain decided that the time had come for action. + +"Now, lads," he ordered, "pull off your shoes and the first man that +makes a sound will get his neck cracked. Knock 'em out, if necessary, +but no killing this time." + +Then they started, the Captain in the lead, and old Pete bringing up the +rear. They had had a good many hours in that vicinity and had made a +path from their hiding place to the soft dust trail. So they moved in +their sock feet without a sound. There was an oppressive stillness in +that dark canyon under the heavy blanket of fog. + +Already it had began to lower and as the sailors advanced with +snail-like slowness the heavy white fog settled down, filling the canyon +with its white opaqueness. You could not see five feet in front, and the +moisture beaded itself upon the eyebrows and mustaches of the men. + +This dense fog was a great help to the attacking party. They had now +crawled half way down the main trail, when Pete came near putting all +the fat in the fire, for his eyesight was not overly keen, and the fog +made it more difficult for him. He did not see a round stone poised on +the edge of the trail until it rolled down towards the pool. + +Although every sound was deadened by the fog, still the watchful Jo +heard it distinctly. He got quickly to his feet and, with soft +moccasined tread he went in the direction of the sound, his pistol in +his hand. + +No sooner had the stone fallen than the Captain motioned the mate to +halt. This signal was repeated to Jack Cales, who was so hidden by the +fog that he could not see the Captain. He stopped suddenly so that old +Pete tumbled over him, making some noise. + +The Captain almost had a fit of apoplexy because he did not dare express +himself at this interesting juncture. Jo had heard the noise on the +trail and his suspicions centered in that direction. Noiselessly he went +up with slight footprints in the damp dust of the trail. The Captain +waited his coming, crouched behind a bend in the trail. + +Then Jo saw a huge figure rising suddenly out of the fog in front of him +and, before he could fire, a great hand gripped for his throat, but if +he could not shoot in defense, at least he could give his comrades +warning. He fired one shot, and then he was overpowered. + +Jim and Juarez heard it instantly. Then Manuello got in some of his +work. Before Juarez could rise, he struck him a vicious blow upon the +head that stunned him, rendering him unconscious. Cold with fury, Jim +picked up the rat of a Mexican before he could land a blow upon him, +whirled him over his head and dashed him upon the ground. + +Then he sprang through the fog in the direction of the shot. He heard Jo +groan as the ruffians overpowered him and he leaped up the trail blind +with a fighting rage. The Captain had just got up from the struggle +with Jo, who lay as good as dead in the trail. + +Then Jim hurled himself upon him. Powerful though he was, the Captain +could not withstand the sinewy lurch of that sudden attack and together +boy and man crashed from the trail over rocks and through brush until +with a fearful impact they struck the trunk of a pine tree. + +The mate sprang swiftly down to the rescue of his fallen master. He was +a strong, sinewy man and knew how to act in an emergency. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +"HAUL IN" + + +The jar of the fall had knocked out the Captain partially and Jim had +risen to give him the coup de grace, when he heard the rush of the mate +coming down through the fog. It was a strange sensation hearing your +enemy but not able to see him. + +Then the mate plunged into view, a dark ball through the opaqueness. He +could not have stopped if he had so desired and it was evident that he +did not wish to. For, with lowered head, he came for Jim as he would for +an ugly sailor. + +Jim stopped him with his shoulder and ripped in a right uppercut with +his keen hard fist that would have stopped the heart action of an +ordinary man, and it sent the seasoned mate back upon his haunches, +partially dazed. Feeling the Captain squirming back to life, he planted +a back blow with his heel in the latter's stomach that took the wind out +of the Captain's sails for the time being. The mate, a really hardy +individual, had made good use of the brief respite and, picking up a +heavy stick, came for Jim with it. + +The latter dodged the blow aimed at his head and it glanced off his +shoulder. Then he closed with the sailor, struggling to put him out. +Three seconds more and Jim would have landed the proper blow, had not +Jack Cales arrived upon the scene under cover of the melee. Before Jim +could turn to meet this new assailant, a stone crashed against his +head--and the frontier boys had lost. + +The Captain had now recovered sufficiently to get on his feet, and the +fallen Jim was kicked until the Captain himself called a halt. + +"Wait till we get him on board ship, lads," he said, "and we will finish +this job." + +"Better get the other two, Cap'n," advised the mate. + +So they dragged the prostrate Jim to the foot of the trail near where +the drinking pool was and went to look for Juarez and Tom. They saw a +small black object crawling towards them through the fog. + +"What's this a coming?" asked Jack Cales. + +"Why, it's my Mexican ferret," said the Captain. "What's the matter, +Manuello?" he asked as he turned him over none too gently with his foot. + +"The big Senor throw me over his head and on the ground. I think I +crack the world open," he explained. The Captain roared with laughter. + +"Where is the rest of this dangerous gang?" he asked. + +"I will show you," he said, struggling to his feet. The presence of his +master gave him strength and confidence. "This way, Senor Captain." + +He brought them to where Juarez lay upon the ground, partially held up +by Tom, who had been crying and endeavoring to bring his comrade back to +consciousness from the ugly blow that the Mexican had given him. I am +sure that none could blame Tom for tears upon this occasion for it was +calculated to try the heart of the stoutest. + +"Why, this boy looks like an Indian," said the Captain regarding Juarez +closely. + +"He lived with the Indians when a boy, Senor Captain," volunteered the +dwarf, who by subtle means of his own had become possessed of the +history of the four boys. + +"He don't seem to be much more than a boy, now," said the Captain. They +had not paid much attention to Tom because he seemed a mere kid, but the +hunchback was not to be caught napping, for he had worked around back of +Tom, and as the latter aimed his revolver at the Captain, having worked +it cautiously out of his holster, the dwarf grabbed him in the nick of +time else the expedition would have lost its head. + +Instead of being infuriated as one might have expected, the Captain was +decidedly amused at the temerity of the youngster, for that is all Tom +appeared to him, and, therefore, he did not hand him a beating. + +"The nerve of the little rooster," guffawed the Captain. "I'll make a +real pirate out of you." + +Tom struggled wildly, but it was no use, as Jack Cales and the mate +disarmed him. Just then there came a loud yell from up the trail. + +"Haul in, Cap'n!" It was Old Pete's well known and melodious voice. + +"Jack, go and see what the old cuss wants," ordered the Captain. "I +expect that the lad up there is trying to kidnap Pete." + +When Jack arrived on the scene, he found that the Skipper had guessed +right. For Jo had been playing possum and was not nearly so badly hurt +as he had appeared to be. + +He came near escaping from his keeper and it was only by a quick forward +lunge that Pete had grabbed him and then occurred a short struggle in +which Pete had called for help and just as Jo had wrestled himself +loose, Cales appeared and grabbed him. It took both Pete and Cales +quite a while to subdue him. + +Finally it was accomplished and they made him go down the trail, one on +either side. At the foot of the incline he saw the bruised and battered +form of Jim lying on the ground and a big lump came into his throat. + +"You fellows will pay for this," he said, rendered desperate by the +sight of Jim. But his captors only laughed, not realizing that the +Frontier Boys were apt to keep their word. + +Then they joined the main gang and Jo saw to his dismay that Tom and +Juarez were in the coils as well as himself and that Juarez, too, had +been laid out and appeared dazed and only partially conscious of what +was going on. Thus there was little hope of escape with the two leaders, +Jim and Juarez, done for. + +"Better search these beggars for their money, Captain," suggested the +mate. + +"It hadn't slipped my mind," replied the Skipper. + +Now the money and the jewels that the boys had found in Mexico were in +leather belts around their bodies. These were soon in the possession of +the Captain, but the crew knew full well that they would receive their +share and thus it was that the Skipper gave promise of living to a ripe +old age instead of being murdered for his money. + +"It's about time to make a start, Cap'n," announced the mate, and the +Captain consulted his watch by the light of a lantern. He found that it +was half-past eleven. + +"We won't be so long going back," he said. "We will use their horses." + +This was easier said than done, for when any of the crew approached +Caliente, that noble animal became transformed into a tiger and as he +came for them with bared teeth or whirled and kicked out with his heels, +they decided that discretion was the better part of valor and they left +him alone. Sailors at best are not very clever horsemen. + +"Let me have a chance and I'll quiet him for you," volunteered Jim +gruffly. "I don't want to see you poor fellows eaten alive." + +"My lad," said the Skipper solemnly, "I'm no spring chicken and you +can't catch me with any such chaff." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +MISSOURI'S MANOEUVRE + + +The other three horses proved more tractable than Caliente, and after +some skirmishing they managed to get their new ships rigged up with the +saddles and other tackle. Now as soon as they got their cargo aboard, +they would be prepared to set sail and to cruise over the plains. (I +must use this nautical language out of respect for Captain Broom and his +crew.) + +As I have said before, sailors are poor horsemen and when it came to +making fast the double cinches, they were quite at sea, where sailors +should be, perhaps. Old Pete came near getting his head kicked off by +pulling the back cinch too tight, but he and Captain Broom profited by +their youthful experience on a New England farm, so the horses were +finally all saddled and bridled and ready for a flight--except Caliente. +He was to be left marooned in the lonely canyon. + +It was surprising to Jim and his comrades how quietly Juarez's roan took +matters, but there is no relying on a broncho, because he always does +the unexpected, and the Captain was so pleased with his behavior that +he decided to ride the animal himself. + +"Now, that's what I call a well broken hoss," he said. "I ain't so sure +of the black so I will let you cruise on him, Jack, being the most +active. I don't know what I shall do for Pete, unless I can find him a +rocking-horse." + +"What are you going to do with the boys?" inquired the mate. "Have 'em +walk?" + +"They can ride their pack mule," said the Captain grimly. + +So Jo, Juarez and Jim were securely fastened on the patient mule, while +Tom rode behind the mate upon his own horse, but no longer as master. +Then the queer procession started up the trail through the dense fog. +The Captain was in the lead, followed by the mate with Tom, then the +mule with Pete and the Mexican dwarf guarding the animal and its cargo, +while the active Jack Cales was the rear guard. It was exactly twelve +o'clock when they weighed anchor and sailed from the harbor or cove in +the mountain canyon. + +The three boys said little to each other. They did not waste their +breath with threats of what they would do to their captors later on, but +accepted the situation with true western stoicism. But you may be sure +that their minds were active even if their tongues said little. + +They were so securely tied that there was no chance for them to make a +move as their arms were corded tight to their bodies and their feet were +tied under the belly of the mule. Unless they had been experienced +riders they would have had a difficult time of it. But it was terribly +humiliating, especially under the insolence of the malignant Mexican. +But he did not dare do them any actual injury, because the Skipper had +given him a warning which he did not dare to disregard. Finally, old +Pete put an end to his slurring remarks to the prisoners, so he had to +content himself with ugly looks and frequent expectoration wherewith to +express his disgust. + +Before they reached the foot of the trail, Jack Cales changed with Pete, +though the latter demurred at first, at boarding the strange black craft +with four legs, but finally consented under the urging of Jack and the +warm recommendation of the boys, who had taken somewhat of a fancy to +the old sailor, since he had shut up the Mexican in their behalf. + +"He won't hurt you, Pop," said Jim, "he is a good horse. Any lady could +ride him." + +"I ain't no lady," replied the old fellow suspiciously, as he slowly +and stiffly mounted, while Jack held his head, that is to say, the +horse's head, not Pete's. + +"What did he do that for?" inquired Pete, anxiously, preparing to +dismount. + +"Stay on, you old Barnacle," roared the Captain from the head of the +procession, for though he could not see anything in the rear, still he +seemed able to keep an instinctive tab on his old comrade Pete. + +"That horse is all right, Pop," said Jo, "and I ought to know. I've +ridden him a good many hundred miles. Don't tickle him with your heels, +that's all." + +"I guess that's what I've done," admitted Pete. + +Then the procession resumed its march with Pete as rear guard, riding +with due caution and circumspection as though his craft was loaded with +dynamite and liable to explode at any time. Jack Cales tried to quiz the +prisoners on the mule in a friendly way, but they would not relax in +their attitude of grim, if not sullen, defiance towards their captors. + +Captain Broom need not think that his prisoners would ever accept any +conditions from him. Doubtless, he thought that these boys might be +trained to help him in his business for he appreciated their courage +and fighting ability, but he did not fully understand what stuff the +frontier boys were made of. + +The procession of pirates and their prisoners had now reached the foot +of the range and were in close proximity to the ranch, but everything +favored the plans of the Skipper of the Sea Eagle. The fog became denser +when they reached the level plain so that it was scarcely possible for +the rider to see the ears of his horse. + +Every sound was deadened, so that they could have gone directly past the +ranch houses and not even the dogs would have heard them. But the +Captain was determined to take no chances, and as soon as the party were +free of the canyon, he bore off toward the south, making quite a +circuit. + +Anybody but an experienced navigator would have been lost in the fog +upon the plain, but you could not lose Captain Broom either on the high +seas or the low plains. They passed between two wooded hills, which the +reader will have to take on faith as he cannot see them. Then across a +gully, on the other side of which they came to a barb wire fence. + +This did not stop them long, as the Captain cut it and they rode +through. From the footing which was about all that could be observed, +they appeared to be in a pasture land with a gentle slope towards the +sea. The fog did not diminish in thickness and the boys determined to +escape. Here was their chance, if they could be said to have one. + +"Here's where we make a break," said Jim to Juarez. "Guide the mule +alongside of Tom. Then we will run for it." Jim did not say this in so +many words, but he had ways and means of indicating to Juarez, who was +tied directly back of him, by a sign and poke language which Juarez was +quick to seize. + +It seemed at every turn that his experience with the Indians was a help +to him. The mule was a protege of Juarez and with a word he could guide +it in any direction that he wished it to go. The fog was one thing that +favored them. The Mexican could scarcely be seen and Jack Cales stalked +along looking like a giant through the mist. + +He had grown somewhat lax through the long march. This was the time, if +ever. Jim gave Juarez the signal that all was ready. A quick word to the +mule and he trotted out from his place in the column, knocking over the +Mexican and before Cales was fairly awake to the situation, he was +obscured by the fog. + +In about two seconds he had hove alongside of the horse that the mate +was on. Tom was foot-loose, and no sooner did he see Missouri's long +ears through the fog, than he was ready for action. + +"Jump, Tom," urged Jim. It took only about two seconds for Tom to +execute the manoeuvre. + +"Halt!" roared the Captain, and he tried to turn the roan to capture the +runaways, but right here, the broncho strain in the animal showed +itself. + +He began to buck and never in all his experience had the redoubtable +Captain Broom ever been on so choppy a sea. It was hard to distinguish +fog from whiskers. At the second hunch upward, the Captain shot into +space. The boys did not tarry to watch for his descent. A word from +Juarez to the mule, and Missouri turned directly south just as Jack +Cales came rushing up. + +"Touch him with your foot, Tom," said Juarez, meaning the mule, not +Cales. Tom's heel reached the right spot and up flew the mule's hind +feet with the rapidity of a rapid fire-gun. + +One foot struck Cales on the shoulder with a sufficient impact to send +him down and out. The mate had been involved in the cyclone of which +Captain Broom was the centre. Tom's horse, considered the gentlest of +the four, had become infected with the roan's example and he started in +to do a little bucking on his own account. Never since the mate had +rounded Cape Horn, had he known so much action in so short a time. + +The only one left was Old Pete and he came on right gallantly, but by +dodging and turning they got away in the fog. After putting what they +considered a safe distance between themselves and their former captors, +Juarez persuaded Missouri to halt, and Tom went to work and with great +difficulty first untied, then lifted, them to the ground for the boys +were as stiff as boards from being tied hard and fast for so long a +time. + +"My, but it certainly hurts," said Jo, stamping around in an endeavor to +get the blood to circulating again. "It's just like it used to be back +home in the winter when we would go skating and get our hands numb." + +"What is the matter, Juarez?" asked Jim in alarm. + +"Oh, I'm all right, I guess," he said in a voice that sounded faint to +the boys and far away to himself. Then, without warning, he fell over on +the ground and stiffened out. + +"It's from the blow that the greaser gave him," said Tom. "It would have +killed him if it had struck him fair." + +"Wait until I get my hands on him," cried Jim, significantly. + +What should they do now? It was not an easy question to decide. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE RANCHERO + + +They could not desert Juarez and they could not get far with him. It was +enough to stagger them and it seemed that they had reached the end of +their resources. + +"If it wasn't such an open country," said Jo, "we might hide until they +had got out of range and then get to the nearest ranch." + +"If they overtake us we can stand them off," saying this Jim reached for +his revolver. To his astonishment it was gone. Then he remembered he had +been disarmed by Captain Broom, and they were absolutely defenseless +unless they could depend on Missouri's heels which had furnished them +such active protection. + +Finally they brought Juarez around so that he was able to sit up. + +"Where am I?" he asked in a sort of daze. + +"You will be all right in a minute, old chap," encouraged Jim, speaking +cheerfully, but he did not feel so. + +"You bet I will," he assented feebly, but with invincible determination. +"What are you holding me for, Jim? Let's get at those fellows." It was +evident that his mind was not exactly clear yet. They got him on his +feet and he seemed better, though still very wabbly. + +"There come those fellows," cried Jim, suddenly, with more of despair in +his tone than he had ever spoken before, no matter how hard pressed they +had been. But before there had always been something to do, but now they +were helpless. Jim looked hastily around for some weapon. All he found +was a small round stone. + +With a yell of exultation, Jack Cales and the mate dashed down upon +them, followed by the Captain and old Pete. They had been able to follow +the distinctive mark of the mule's shoes in the soft earth until they +came in hearing of the boys' voices. Then they jumped upon them. They +were out for blood this time, for they had the boys' revolvers in their +hands, probably because they were better than their own. + +Missouri, finding himself free, made off. Tom halted when covered by one +of the sailor's revolvers, but Jim dodged as the mate fired at him. The +lug of lead spattered the mud between his feet, the next second he was +off full speed through the fog, followed by fleet Jo. + +The sailors soon gave up the useless chase, for there was no trail to +guide them, so they had to content themselves with half of their +original capture and they started for the cove where the Sea Eagle was +anchored as fast as they could go, though they were hampered by Juarez. + +"Better leave him, Captain," urged old Pete. "He is nothing but a +nuisance." + +"I'll have use for that fellow yet," said the Captain. "As for the other +lad, he won't feel so lively after a few days on shipboard." + +This did not have a very cheerful sound for Tom and he was in anything +but a happy frame of mind. Still he had great confidence in Jim and did +not give up hope of being rescued before the coast was reached. It was +now getting towards daybreak, and the fog began to lift somewhat so that +they could see a distance of thirty or forty yards. + +Captain Broom's gang had now left the region of the level pasture and +were coming to the brush section, fringing the coast, and beyond that +they reached the sand dunes. The nearer they came to the sea the more +depressed Tom became. The only thing that encouraged him was the fact +that Juarez began to seem like himself. + +Let us now return to Jo and Jim, who had been so fortunate as to make +their escape. As soon as they were sure that the pursuit was at an end, +they slowed down to a walk. + +"Well, they didn't give us much of a chase," remarked Jim. + +"Plenty to suit me. What are we going to do now?" + +"This fog is beginning to lift," said Jim, "and then we can take our +bearings. I want to locate this ranch the first thing, and then we can +get help." + +"Here's a wire fence," announced Jo, "I reckon it's the one the old +geser cut." + +"It surely is and a straight course north is our direction," remarked +Jim. + +"Here are hills that look like those we rode through," said Jo. + +"We will soon be there now," was Jim's cheerful comment "What's that? It +sounds like a dog barking." They stopped, listening intently, as the +sound came faint, but there was no mistaking it. + +"I suppose it's some big hound, that they usually keep on these +ranches," said Jo, who was beginning to feel depressed from hunger and +fatigue, "and he will jump at us because we haven't any weapons." + +But in spite of Jo's fear they hurried on in the direction of the sound. +In a short time, they came to a road between two barb wire fences, which +the reader will remember that the Captain and his crew took when they +were coming through the Sebastian ranch. But the boys struck it higher +up, and were soon in the pasture that sloped down from the ranch houses +toward the road. + +Jim and Jo now heard the voices of men as well as the baying of the +dogs. The men were talking excitedly about the finding of one of their +number in the canyon tied and gagged, and it was evident that it was not +a good time for strangers to visit the ranch of the Sebastians. + +But Jim and Jo were dulled to danger and did not care what risk they ran +and so they called to the men in a friendly Spanish greeting. There was +instantly a great hubbub, and two men charged down upon them, preceded +by a couple of fierce-looking mongrels. These came dashing for them with +red, gaping mouths. The boys defended themselves gallantly with two +stout sticks that they had picked up. Then the two Mexicans took a hand. + +"Look out, Jo," cried Jim, who was ever on the alert. "That fellow is +going to throw his lasso." Jo dodged just in the nick of time, but this +gave one of the dogs a chance, and if Jim had not stunned him by a +resounding crack on the head it would have gone hard with his brother. + +Just then another man appeared on the scene, attracted from the vicinity +of the house by the noise of the encounter. He came full speed on a +splendid sorrel. It was Juan Sebastian, a dark, handsome young man, a +true son of Spain. + +"What's all this?" he cried as he rode up. "Here, Sancho, Jan, you +brutes, come off." The dogs slunk obediently to heel. + +"We found those insolent Gringoes," said one of the men, "coming +straight for the Senor's house. We undertook to stop them." + +"Senor," said Jim, bowing low and speaking in his best Spanish, "we are +sorry, my brother and I, to have caused this disturbance. We are +strangers and unfortunate, and we have heard of your hospitality, +Senor"--Jim bowed again. He was not so simple, after all. + +The Senor Sebastian returned the bow with more grace than Jim could +command. + +"I regret, Senor--" he hesitated. + +"Darlington," added Jim. + +"Senor Darlington, that you have been attacked in this manner, but there +has been a party of desperadoes that have been overrunning this part of +the country for the past two days, and they took one of my men and bound +and gagged him and so you see, Senors," a smile and bow completed the +Spanish gentleman's apology perfectly. + +"We have just escaped, not more than an hour ago, from these same +desperadoes," said Jim. "They have taken my brother and friend with them +towards the coast." + +"We will saddle and overtake them," promised the Senor, "after we have +had breakfast." + +Jim was stunned by this gentle sort of procrastination. + +"But, Senor," he said gravely, "we will not be able to overtake them if +we do not start immediately. Pardon my abruptness, but I cannot rest +while there are two of my party prisoners in the hands of this gang of +cut-throats." + +"It is to be perfectly understood," replied the Spaniard with no less +gravity, "we will make haste, but first we will eat while the servants +are getting two of the horses ready for you and your brother." + +This was not Jim's idea of making haste by a long shot, but he was +enough of a traveler to recognize that the ways of men and nations +differed and that nothing was to be gained by going against the grain +of a national characteristic. So while fuming inwardly, he was outwardly +quiet and composed. He argued, too, that it was not likely the pirate +gang would retain the captured prisoners. Later, when they were +themselves at a safe distance they would set free the others. + +As they went towards the house, the Spaniard dismounted and walked with +them, giving his horse into the charge of one of the men, with +directions to bring two other horses to the house. There was an +unmistakable courtesy in doing this and the boys appreciated it. They +could not help but contrast their appearance with that of the Spaniard. +He was not gaudily dressed like a vaquero, but everything he wore was +possessed of a certain richness and was not lacking in color. He truly +was a Prince of the South in appearance as well as in courtesy. + +Jim and Jo were disreputable beyond words. Their clothes were muddy, +torn and disheveled, their faces so grimed that it was hard to tell +their original color, and there were blotches of blood upon their +clothes as well as faces and hands. But, though they looked worse than +tramps, there was something straightforward in their manner and their +way of speech that the Spaniard was quick to recognize. + +As they walked along the Spaniard explained that his household had been +unusually disturbed that morning. His mother, he said, was an invalid, +and had escaped from her attendant. Some mental trouble, he briefly +mentioned as the cause of the elderly lady's worriment. Evidently, he +did not connect the tragedy in his own life, in which his father's life +was sacrificed, with the boys' antagonist. His mother, he assured them, +had been found and was returned to her home. + +The boys now had a good view of the house, as they approached it. The +fog having lifted, they could take in the whole situation. The structure +itself was of adobe, of the early California type, low, with broad +verandas, and built on four sides around a court with a fountain in the +centre, with fish in the basin, and grass around it. There were +beautiful rose-tree bushes with gold and red clusters growing over the +corners of the house. + +From the verandah there was a beautiful view looking off over the +surrounding country. The house itself stood on a rise of ground that +sloped gently from the plain below. Back of it rose the mountains of the +coast range, while in the distance glittered the broad breadths of the +Pacific, shining like an azure floor. As far as eye could see was the +domain of this great ranch. It was, indeed, a princely estate, and one +of which the Senor Sebastian might well be proud. Those were the days of +romance and of charm in the land of Southern California. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +A NEW FRIEND + + +The servants eyed the two boys curiously as they stepped upon the +verandah and the brothers were not reassured by any looks of +friendliness, though they were outwardly courteous. A withered looking +old woman, who looked to Jim as though she had Indian blood showed the +boys to a room, where they could wash up. + +"Jove! Doesn't it dazzle your eyes, Jo?" exclaimed Jim, "to see a real +room, with a bed and a white spread, with those starched things where +the pillows ought to be." + +"This room would certainly please Aunt Maria," remarked Jo. "That four +poster bed with the canopy over it, is an old timer, I'll warrant you." + +"If I slept in this room," said Jim, "I would make a low bow to the bed +and then roll up in my blanket and go to sleep on the floor." + +"How do I look?" asked Jo, after he had rubbed and scrubbed his face +for a long time. + +"You have got off the first layer," replied Jim, "and look about the +color of a half-breed. Let me try my hand at polishing up." + +"It will take you a week," remarked Jo discouragingly. + +It cannot be truly said that they looked ornamental even when they were +clean, for Jim's face was badly torn, one side of it being scraped raw. +He got this memento when he tackled the Captain and fell down into the +canyon with him. One eye was blackened and the other cheek bruised. +These disadvantages were not to be overcome in a short time. + +Jo was somewhat more presentable, but he, too, showed signs of the rough +time that they had had with the Captain and his "merry" crew. But in +spite of all this, there was something in their bearing, an honest +hardihood and manliness that could not be discounted by torn clothes and +bruised faces. + +"This room looks dirty, now," said Jo, "I'm ashamed to leave it like +this." + +"We will go outside to brush off our clothes," proposed Jim, "and I'm +going to empty this dirty water myself." He started out with it when he +met one of the servants in the hall. With many explanations, numerous +gestures and much excitement, she took the pail from Jim and disappeared +with it. + +"They won't let you do anything for yourself here, Jo," reported Jim, +returning to the room. + +This was correct and the boys noticed afterwards that the servants +regarded them with odd expressions of amusement and it was evident to +the sensitive Jo that they were being "guyed" by them, to use a modern +expression. The boys being American lads, were self-reliant, and were +accustomed to do everything for themselves, and, unknowingly they had +gone counter to a custom of constant service of the Spaniards. It was to +demean oneself, according to their code, to do any menial work. + +"Might as well start for the dining room," proposed Jo. "I hate leaving +Tom and Juarez to their fate this way." + +"I more than hate it," protested Jim, "but as you can't hurry these +people, we will make the best time by falling in with their way of doing +business." + +Then they went out into a passageway and, taking the wrong turn, which +was quite easy in the rambling old house, they came to a door that +entered into the courtyard. + +"My, but this is beautiful," exclaimed Jo. "It makes you appreciate +California better when you see a place like this." + +"That hammock looks good to me," said Jim. "I would like to stretch out +in it right now." + +Just then the door opened on the verandah and a really beautiful young +girl stepped out. She was probably seventeen years of age, dressed in +white, with a black mantilla over her equally black hair and her dark +cheeks glowed with color. A very romantic meeting, Messieurs, the +gallant young Americans at one end of the verandah and the Senorita at +the other. Then she saw Jim and Jo with their scarred and bruised faces. +With a little shriek, and clasping her hand to her eyes, she retreated +quickly to her room. + +"What did you do to scare that girl, Jo?" inquired Jim severely of his +brother. + +"Nothing," declared Jo, stoutly. "It was the sight of your face. It +would give a wooden Injun a chill." Jim felt of the said face +reflectively. + +"I guess you are right, Jo," he admitted, "but you ain't so charming in +appearance that you would do any damage." + +"Let's walk along this side," proposed Jo. "Perhaps we will locate the +breakfast." + +"All right," agreed Jim. + +So they stalked along, more or less conscious that a pair of dark blue +eyes were regarding them, and they thought they heard a trill of +laughter, but it might have been one of the maids. They need not have +felt embarrassed for there was the grace in their movements that goes +with strength and youth and suppleness. + +They were walking under a perfect bower of flowers anyway. For this side +was beautifully latticed and over the lattice work grew vines with +purple and golden flowers, that would give a grateful shade when the +California sun would drive the fog away. + +Under foot there was a double flagging of stone with trodden dirt on +either side. + +"I don't see a broom anywhere," said Jo. + +Just then they heard the voice of Senor Sebastian behind them and they +turned quickly. + +"I had begun to fear, Senors, that you had become lost again." + +"We were, partially, Senor." + +"Our simple breakfast is ready now if you are," he said. + +"We will have to brush the dirt off before we can go in," protested Jim. + +"Antonio bring a brush," called the Senor. In a moment a gray-haired, +bent Mexican came with a big kitchen broom. Instantly the Senor flushed +with anger. + +"Stupid one, my guests are not my horses. Have a care." + +A suspicion flashed through Jim's mind that the ancient servitor had +brought the broom on purpose. It was clear that the servants did not +have a very high opinion of their American visitors. The next time he +returned he had gotten the right brush, and made a point of sneezing as +the dust flew from their mud-dried clothes. This made Jim laugh in spite +of himself. + +"More dust than the Sirocco brings," said Jim. The old servitor regarded +him with a cunning eye. + +"Si, Senor," he said, then he was seized with a perfect convulsion of +sneezing. This aroused his master's ire. + +"No more of that, Antonio," he commanded, "or it will be the lash." +Antonio's cold was cured from that moment. Jim's mouth twitched at the +corners with the humor of it but he did not laugh now for that would be +discourteous to his host. + +Finally the brushing was finished to the regret of the servants, who had +kept an amused eye on Antonio's performance, while pretending to be busy +on some trivial tasks near the Patio or court. In her own room, the +Senorita was faint with laughter as she watched Antonio dusting the two +American lads. + +It was a simple breakfast that the boys found prepared for them in a +long, low dining-room, with its dark beams and white plastered walls. +The coffee was excellent, with a delicate aroma, and was probably the +best that Mexico could afford. There was a large plate of meat garnished +with peppers, and a mixed dish of vegetables that looked odd, but that +tasted deliciously. You may be sure that Jim and Jo appreciated their +meal, and they felt invigorated when it was finished, wishing all the +while, however, that they were on the trail of their captured comrades. + +"Now, Senors, the horses are at the door. They are spirited, but I am +sure that you ride well." + +This was a mere expression of courtesy on his part, for he did not +expect any such thing and thought to see his guests fall off if the +horses should rise on their hind legs, as they no doubt would, for there +was not a horse on the big rancho but what was peppery and spirited. No +sooner had the Senor spoke than Jim jumped to his feet, putting his hand +to his head. + +"I have forgotten about Caliente!" he exclaimed. "It is my horse, +Senor," he explained to his host. "He is up the canyon because the gang +that attacked us last night were afraid of him." + +"I will send for him," said the Senor. + +"By the pool in the pocket," said Jim. "But I think I ought to get him +myself, though I appreciate your offer, but one's horse, you know--" + +"I understand perfectly." + +"I cannot leave him without food and water," said Jim. + +"I will attend to that. I will send a trustworthy man," and he spoke to +the servant who was waiting on the table. In a short time he returned +with a tall, sinewy man, with straight black hair and dark skin. He gave +this man the necessary instructions and with a "Si, Senor," the man went +out. + +"A good reliable fellow," remarked Jim. "He looks like an Indian." + +"He is an Indian," replied their host, "but of the right kind. Your +horse is in good hands." + +"Tell him to bring him down to the ranch," said Jim. "I'll trust +Caliente with him." The Indian was called back and under his stolid +demeanor was an appreciation of Jim's confidence. + +Breakfast over they went out on the verandah, where they could see the +horses. They were spirited looking beasts all right. One was a bay, the +two front legs white stockinged, very trimly built, with a flashing eye, +that he kept rolling around. The boy who was holding him had his hands +full, as the bay would rise on his hind legs and strike out viciously +with his forefeet. + +The other animal was much heavier than the bay. A brilliant black, whose +coat fairly shone with careful grooming. He had been standing +comparatively quiet until the three appeared upon the verandah of the +house, then, with a sudden surge backward, he dragged the Mexican boy +off his feet, shaking his head viciously. + +"We ought to be armed, Senor," advised Jim. "If we should overtake those +men, they will put up a desperate fight." + +"Certainly, Senor," he answered. "Come into this room and select your +weapon." + +After both Jim and Jo were armed, they went out to the horses. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE PURSUIT + + +All the servants seemed just now to find duties of importance in front +of the house or near it. They had no idea of missing the chance of +seeing these Gringoes, whom they held in contempt, thrown from their +horses. + +Jim took the black and Jo was left the red, the easiest to manage even +if he seemed the liveliest. Jo was too quick for his horse and before he +could whirl to one side, he was in the saddle. Then his animal reared +and plunged but Jo sat on him as easily as a cowboy does his steed. +There was no mistaking his horsemanship. The servants were duly and +deeply disappointed. + +But their hopes revived when they saw Jim tackle the black. He began +that steady sideways movement which Jim knew so well, whenever he tried +to put his foot in the stirrup. The servants began to smile, here would +be some fun. The "Black Devil," as they called the horse, had been known +to kill men, so they had pleasant anticipations. When Jim found that he +could not mount by the stirrup, he made a quick, powerful leap and was +in the saddle. + +"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian, but he knew that the fight had just +begun. + +Jo looked on with interest and perfect confidence in brother Jim's +ability. The black stood perfectly stunned for a moment or two at being +so suddenly mounted, then he sprang into action. With his back in a hump +he shot into the air and came down stiff-legged. + +Without loss of a second he went into the air again, higher than before. +From the corral the Mexican cowboys were looking at the duel between the +horse and the boy with lively interest. + +"The Diablo will kill him," said one nonchalantly, blowing a puff of +smoke from his cigarette. + +"Five dollars that the Gringo stays on," said a second. The wager was +made and others followed, for the Mexicans are inveterate gamblers. The +third time the horse pitched into the air, Jim swaying with the animal's +every motion as the trained cowboy does. Finding that he could not +dislodge his rider that way, the black rose on his hind legs to a +perpendicular position. + +Jim knew the trick of old, and was prepared for it. As the horse started +to fall backwards, Jim who had been sticking like a leech, leaped +lightly to the ground and with all his strength, pulling upon the +bridle, slammed him to the ground. No sooner was the horse upon his feet +again than Jim was in the saddle. + +Once more he tried that falling back trick and this time Jim brought him +down upon the damp earth with a thud that jarred things. The black devil +had had enough. He stood quivering and sweating, but for the time being +subdued. + +"Bravo!" cried the Senor Sebastian again, and he shook his guest by the +hand warmly. "You are a true horseman. Now we shall go. We shall eat up +the miles." + +The crowd of cowboys swung their hats in a salute to the Gringo, who +could conquer the black devil, while the house servants, disappointed at +the stranger's triumph, went back to their different tasks. + +The three horsemen galloped away down the sloping pasture, the Spaniard +in advance as he knew the country and the most direct way to the coast. +His horse was a splendid sorrel, somewhat taller than the horse that Jim +rode. And he was a gallant figure in his leather riding suit and peaked +sombrero with a brilliant colored band around it. + +Jim and Jo rode few yards behind the Spaniard and side by side. Jim felt +a certain exultation in his victory over the Black before people who +would have liked to have seen him defeated. It was exhilarating, too, +this plunging gallop ahead with a chance to rescue Tom and Juarez and to +get even with Captain Broom and his gang, who had taken away their +valuables and had given the boys such a cruel defeat. + +"This is a fine horse," said Jim, "though he hasn't the stride of +Caliente." + +"He is a beauty, when it comes to bucking," Jo commented. "There is +nothing the matter with this bay but my black can beat him for speed." + +So they flew on, the speed of their steeds blowing back their horses' +manes, and the fresh air from the sea bringing a feeling of hope to +their hearts, that they would yet be able to overtake the pirates, and +rescue their comrades in distress. Their horses' feet were devouring the +miles. + +"We stand a chance to get 'em at this rate," shouted Jim. + +"Won't it be fine if we can all sit down to dinner tonight?" replied Jo. +"I bet that Tom and Juarez would enjoy a square meal with the Senor at +the ranch house. Ifs kind of nice to be civilized once in a while." + +"You're right, it is," declared Jim emphatically. + +"I wonder if there isn't a store around here where we could buy some +clothes," inquired Jo, anxiously. "We look too disreputable to appear in +polite society." + +"Thinking about that girl, I suppose?" remarked Jim with brotherly +intuition. + +"I wouldn't be so sure if I were you," replied Jo evasively. "How about +the Senorita down in Mexico who threw you the rose at the castle?" This +reference to the Senorita Cordova whom the Frontier Boys had rescued in +Mexico, checked Jim from getting too gay for he still had a tender place +in his memory for her. + +The fog by this time was entirely dissipated, and they could see by +certain white or rather light spots in the clouds where the sun was +going to break through and an absolutely clear day would result. The +three riders had now reached the brush region that began a few miles +from the coast and they were compelled to go more slowly. + +But if they had only known what was going on not more than two miles +away from where they were, they would not have slackened speed no +matter what risk they ran. For Captain Broom and his crew with the two +captives had arrived at the cove and old Pete and Jack Cales were going +into the cave for the boat. + +There was a chance, but the Senor and his companions must hurry. Some +mishap to the pirates' expedition just at this point and the frontier +boys would win. Tom and Juarez might have sung the tune that they had +often sung before in camp. + + "Tramp, tramp, tramp, the boys are marching, + Cheer up, comrades, they will come, + And beneath the starry flag + We will breathe the air again + Of freedom in our own beloved home." + +But they did not know and they sat miserable and dejected upon the damp +sand of the beach, not knowing that Jim and Jo were coming nearer every +second. Then there came an accident, though a slight one, that gave the +pursuers a chance. + +Old Pete was carrying one end of the boat. He was nervous, anyway, in +regard to the cave and its grewsome contents, thought he saw some dark +spectre coming for him out of the blackness of the cave and he dropped +his end of the boat and scudded for the beach. + +The Captain was furious, giving him a blow that sent him spinning half +way down to the water, and he and the mate rushed back to see what +damage the boat had suffered. It was only slightly stove in, but every +second was precious. The pursuers were only a mile away. + +Jim began to grow restless as they neared the coast. He seemed to feel +that they were nearing the enemy, and at his urging, the Spaniard, who +had an increased respect and liking for Jim ever since he had conquered +Black Diablo, put his horse to the gallop, and away they went along the +narrow winding path through the bushes. + +The branches whipt them, but they paid no attention, but on they went; +it was evident that they made considerable racket and Captain Broom, +with a fierce burst of energy for which he was famous, got the boat +launched, the two prisoners in, and with himself and the mate at the +oars, made the boat leap forward over the lazy rolling swell towards the +graceful Sea Eagle. + +When they had reached a point half-way to the vessel, the horsemen came +tearing through the last screen of brush onto the yellow sand. The enemy +had escaped by the skin of its teeth and it was heart-rending to see Tom +and Juarez being carried away from them at every stroke of the oars +towards their black prison. Jim put up his hands to his mouth and +yelled: + +"We will rescue you, boys. Don't give up. We'll get 'em yet." + +A derisive yell greeted this challenge and one of the men in the boat +fired at the group on the shore, but the bullet fell harmlessly short. +They did not dare to fire in return lest they hit either Tom or Juarez. + +"They have steam up on board," observed Jim. "But I see one chance to do +some execution." + +It was this. The Sea Eagle was anchored close under a cliff on the +northern side of the cove. So Jim slipped off his horse, for the way on +that side was impracticable except on foot. It was hard going at that, +especially as there were a good many cacti with their wretched thorns. + +Jim stepped gingerly along over the rocks, gliding through the bushes +until at last he reached a point above the vessel where he could almost +look down upon her decks. The boat from the shore had just come +alongside and the prisoners were hustled into the cabin and the door +locked. Tom and Juarez were a dejected-looking pair and it made Jim's +heart ache to see them. + +The Captain went upon the quarter-deck and gave an order to the man at +the wheel. The anchor had already been weighed. Slowly and gracefully +the Sea Eagle turned, and there stood Captain Broom, as big as life upon +the bridge. Why did not Jim fire? Because he had come to a certain wise +conclusion. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +JIM AND THE SEA EAGLE + + +As Jim had raised his revolver to fire, a sudden idea came to him. In +the first place he rebelled instinctively from shooting a man down in +cold blood from ambush, even if he was as desperate and crime-stained a +character as Captain Bill Broom, besides it would not save Tom and +Juarez and only make their captivity harder to endure, if any injury was +done the Captain. + +Another thing, Jim was sure that if he began the attack that his two +comrades would be used as shields to protect the man at the wheel, so +that the Sea Eagle could be navigated safely out of the cove. He saw +with interest the narrow place between two lines of foam above hidden +ledges where the boat must pass in order to reach the open sea. He +marvelled at the temerity of Captain Broom in daring to bring his ship +through such a place. + +Then a brilliant thought came to him, a sudden stroke that might turn +defeat into victory. The Sea Eagle was now making straight for the +narrow channel. Jim slipped back for a short distance an ran as rapidly +as he could to a point a little to the west of where he had first +hidden. He did not have long to wait. The Sea Eagle was almost directly +opposite his place of ambush, and was just sticking her nose into the +narrow passage. + +Jim raised his revolver and took careful aim and fired. The man at the +wheel gave a yell and clapped his hand to the shoulder, letting go the +wheel and the nose of the little steamer swung toward the rock. A swell +lifted her bow clear by a few inches, and the Captain caught the steamer +by the wheel and brought her to a course. + +"Bring those boys up on deck and shoot them if that black-haired devil," +(meaning Jim) "fires another shot," he called to the mate. + +That worthy was not slow to obey the order, he had them on deck in full +sight in a jiffy and held a pistol at Tom's head. Jim had raised his arm +to fire at the Captain when he heard his order and it was as if he had +been paralyzed. He knew that Tom and Juarez would have been killed to a +certainty if he fired another shot. + +Luck had broken against him again, for that was all that had kept the +Sea Eagle from going on the reef, where if she had not been wrecked, +she and her crew would have been at the mercy of the men on shore. Just +the lifting of the wave had saved the vessel by a few inches, that, and +Captain Broom's quick and skillful action. + +The second round of the contest had gone in favor of the pirate and his +crew, but only by a shade as it were. But it would not surprise me a bit +if Jim evened up matters in the third and final round. Let us hope so, +at least, for that will give a silver lining to the black cloud that had +rolled over the boys' fortunes at this particular time. + +Jim made his way slowly back to where Jo and the Senor were waiting for +him on the beach. He was despondent over the failure of his plans by so +close a margin, and the sight of Tom and Juarez helpless on the deck in +the hands of these sea-coast pirates, was always before his eyes. + +"What were you trying to do, Jim?" inquired Jo, "Sink the ship?" Before +Jim could reply, the Spaniard gave a cry of warning. + +"Look out, they are going to shoot." + +Glancing toward the Sea Eagle, which was now a half mile from shore, +they saw a puff of smoke, and then a shell struck into the beach below +them and exploding, sent a shower of sand over them and the horses. The +latter, frightened, reared and plunged, but the boys soon got their +animals under control, as they quickly tired of acting up in the heavy +sand. Jim shook his fist in the direction of the Sea Eagle. + +"Curse your insolence!" he yelled. "I'll make every one of you eat crow, +you miserable hounds!" + +Jim looked ugly, his eyes glared with concentrated fury and the veins on +his temple were swollen and throbbing. Unthinkingly, he pulled back hard +upon the bit, sending his horse up in the air. + +"Easy, boy," he said, soothingly. "Easy. It was my fault for yanking +you." + +When the horse was quieted, Jim was cooled down to his normal +temperature, and he told his comrades of his attack upon the Sea Eagle +and how it had turned out. + +"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard impressively, "I will take off my +hat to you. You are a natural General. Take my advice, my friend, and go +to Spain. There you might head a revolution and in time rise to high +mark." + +"I appreciate your praise deeply, Senor Sebastian," responded Jim, "but +my own country, Senor, I could not leave it for another." + +"Right, Senor," replied the Spaniard, "you have the true spirit." + +"Which way will she turn, do you suppose?" asked Jo, pointing to the +vessel that was moving steadily out on the Pacific in a straight line +from the shore. + +"To the North, doubtless," replied the Spaniard. + +"Wherever she goes we must find her out," said Jim, with grim +determination. + +"I wish we could follow them," sighed Jo. "If we could only hire a +boat." + +"They have our money," replied Jim, briefly. + +"I had forgotten that," said Jo, and his face showed his disappointment. + +"Permit me to help you," said the Spaniard, "I am to blame for detaining +you at breakfast." + +"That is generous of you, Senor," replied Jim, "but I do not favor going +to the expense of chartering a steamer. Even if it were possible, my +plan would be to follow along the coast on horseback and see what can be +done when they make a landing." + +"As you are the General," replied the Spaniard, "we will allow you to +make the plans." + +"Look!" exclaimed Jo, "they are turning South instead of North." + +"Impossible!" cried the Spaniard. "There is only one port within two +hundred miles. I do not understand. Yes, they are surely going South." + +"Perhaps they have a secret landing place," hazarded Jim. + +"Not so," replied the Spaniard. "Not a harbor where they could land save +one and there they would not dare to go." + +The three watchers on horseback gazed until there was little to be seen +other than a smudge of smoke upon the horizon. It was no use, the Sea +Eagle was holding to her southerly course to some mysterious port. The +sun had now come out and was shining with sheer brilliance upon the +sparkling ocean. + +"We must return now," said the Spaniard. "There is nothing more for us +to do at present." + +"I think that my brother and I will start this afternoon and take the +trail to the south," announced Jim, "wherever those fellows set foot, I +want to be waiting for them." + +"I fear it is impossible to start so soon," replied the Spaniard, "I +must go with you as I know the country to the South, every foot of it." + +"The Senor is right, Jim," put in Jo, quickly, as he saw a frown on +Jim's face and was afraid that he was going to say something abruptly. +"You will want to give Caliente a good rest, so that when we start, we +will make the distance without delay. Then we have to make some +preparations ourselves." + +Jim looked at his brother with a moment's dark suspicion, but it was +evident that Jo was perfectly sincere in what he said. + +"I will promise, Senor," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile, "that +when we start which will be early tomorrow morning, that we will travel +far and fast enough to suit you and your horse." There was a challenge +in his voice that Jim met smilingly. + +"So be it, Senor," he said, "I will try to be in sight at the finish." + +"My horse is a remarkable animal for speed and endurance, I must tell +you frankly," said the Senor gravely. "He has no equal in this country +of California. He has proved it more than once and against all comers." + +"He is certainly a fine horse," admitted Jim, looking at the sorrel with +admiring eyes. "He has a splendid stride." + +"Ah, no, Senor," laughed the Spaniard with a gleam of his white teeth, +"I did not mean him," patting the horse on the neck, "a good animal, +indeed, but more for my little sister to ride than for me. Wait, my +friend, until I introduce you to Don Fernando and then you will see a +horse for the first time." + +"I should be very much pleased to see him," said Jim, frankly curious +and interested. + +"Tomorrow," said the Spaniard. + +They had now turned into the narrow trail among the bushes and had only +ridden a few steps when Jo called a sudden halt. + +"What do you think, Jim, there's my horse and Tom's tied in that +thicket." + +Sure enough there they were, utterly worn out, but with spirit enough to +recognize their old comrades Jim and Jo, and if ever horses expressed a +welcome these two did when they first caught sight of their two friends. + +"They have cut the saddles to pieces, the brutes," exclaimed Jo. + +"I'm glad to get the horses," said Jim, "I am surprised that they didn't +cut their throats." + +"They will follow us all right," said Jo, in reply to the Spaniard's +suggestion that they would have to be led, and they trotted along behind +Jo, who was the last one in line. + +"Do you know of any place where we could buy things?" asked Jim. "We +need a new outfit." + +"But we have no money," put in Jo quickly. + +"I will get the money or its equivalent today," said Jim. "If there is a +store where the Senor can get me credit." + +"Yes, there is a store where a Portugee sells about everything that we +need in this country," replied the Spaniard. "It is some distance to the +north. We will ride there before we return to the ranch. There will be +no difficulty about the credit," he concluded, with a bow to Jim. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE BOYS PUT ON STYLE + + +"You do not know my ability to spend," said Jim, "I may have to plunge +to the extent of several hundred dollars. You see my brother has very +expensive tastes. It will cost quite a small fortune when I buy him a +complete trousseau including diamonds." + +"I will pledge my lands if necessary to get the young Senor diamonds," +said the Spaniard laughingly. + +In about an hour's time they came to a large one story frame building +painted a rather light blue, which color had weathered a good deal. It +had a square, false front with a sign on it that read, "Mr. Gonsalves, +General Trader." + +They hitched their horses to some well graveled posts, and went inside +leaving Jo's and Tom's horses free to graze at will around, or to stand +under the shelter of some drooping pepper tree across the road. The +proprietor, a short, thick-set Portugee with a close trimmed black +beard, and a gray slouch hat which he always wore, apparently, received +them graciously. The contents of the store were entirely at their +service,--if they paid for them. + +"We will miss poor Tom here," said Jo, "he was always our purchasing +agent." + +"And a mighty good one," added Jim. "Not even a Connecticut Yankee could +get the best of him in a bargain." + +The Spaniard sat in a round armed wooden chair, gracefully smoking a +cigarette, while his guests busied themselves making purchases. First +the boys bought some new clothes, which they retired behind a counter to +put on, and emerged in proper apparel for the plains. + +Blue flannel shirts, and pants of the same color, held up by leather +belts, with much glitter of silver on them, then they bought a sombrero +apiece, not after the Mexican style, but of the American type. Jim had a +red band around his and Jo had a blue. + +"Now we want some handkerchiefs to tie around our necks," said Jo. + +"Of course," remarked Jim with a wink, "something that will catch the +eyes of the ladies." + +So M. Gonsalves brought out a brilliant assortment of handkerchiefs. + +"Here's a very fine article, gents," he said holding out a red silk +handkerchief, clustered with white horseshoes. + +"Nothing the matter with that," admitted Jim admiringly, with a droll +look at Jo. "But this plain red one will suit me. My brother would +probably like the horseshoe one." But Jo also declined. + +"I will take the dark blue one," he said, "it matches my costume +better." + +"Gee! but you will look like a color scheme," laughed Jim, "blue eyes, +blue pants, shirt, tie and socks, and hat band, you ought to be a sailor +on the blue Pacific." + +"The next things are boots," remarked Jo. + +"Not for me," said Jim briefly, "I want moccasins. Worn 'em all my life, +and I am not going to change to boots now." + +"Fine line of moccasins," said the accommodating Mr. Gonsalves in his +best trade manner. You see he had been in business in San Francisco and +knew something of the ways of customers. + +"But it gives us more style to wear boots. You notice that all the +inhabitants wear them, we can buy moccasins too. You wear them all the +time and they will set you down for an Indian." + +"When a fellow once gets the idea of style in his head," said Jim +resignedly, "nothing this side of matrimony is going to stop him. So lay +on MacDuff and cursed be he who first cries hold, enough." + +"I feel like I was anchored," commented Jim, stepping across the floor +with heavy tread. "I should like to stalk a deer or an Indian in these +things. He could tell you were arriving before you got above the +horizon." + +"But you look fine in 'em," said Jo. + +It was true that he made a striking figure in his blue togs. The lithe +powerful physique, and the strong, resolute face. + +"Better look out, Jo," grinned Jim. "No Senorita would look at you, when +they see me dashing over the landscape." + +"I'm a pretty stylish looking guy myself," responded Jo, confidently. He +did make a good appearance, there was no doubt of that. Though slighter +than his brother he was well set up, and his frame was well muscled. He +was handsomer than Jim. But there was no nonsense about either of the +two boys and they never gave an unnecessary thought to their appearance. + +"Now, Mr. Gonsalves," said Jim, "we would like to look at some of your +man-killers." + +"Revolvers?" he questioned, "just step this way. I can fit you out all +right." + +He did have a fine collection and Jim examined the different ones +carefully, noting their action and how easily they worked. + +"I see you are no tenderfoot," complimented the proprietor. "You have +handled shooting irons before." + +"I'll be a tenderfoot before long, if I wear these condemned boots you +sold me," said Jim gruffly ignoring the compliment. He did not care +especially for M. Gonsalves' style. "Now let's have a look at your +rifles." The proprietor actually took off his hat and bowed. + +It was evident that the distinguished gentlemen from nowhere in +particular were going to buy out his entire stock. + +"Would you be so gracious as to step this way?" he said, "I have the +rifles in the back of the store." + +They were so gracious, and after due examination they selected a couple +of well balanced guns and purchased enough ammunition to stand off a few +Indian raids. All the stuff besides what they had on their backs they +packed upon Tom's horse, as Tom was not present to resent the indignity. + +"Now the last things are some saddles," said Jim, "seeing that our kind +friends, the pirates, cut up those we owned." + +"Senor Darlington," said the Spaniard coming forward and touching Jim +lightly on the arm, "Do not speak of buying saddles. I will see to +that." Jim did not know exactly what their host meant but he thanked him +and deferred to his request. + +Now behold the frontier boys in complete costume, with glittering +revolvers at their hips and rifles swung across their backs, upon their +hands were fringed buckskin gloves. They had gone the whole hog as Jim +said. + +"I'll take the shine off this costume in about one day," said Jim +grimly, "when I get in the open, I would rather break a broncho, than a +new suit of clothes." There was no doubt about his impressive +appearance, as the sun flashed on the metal of the accoutrements and he +swung himself into the saddle. Even their host seemed to hold them in +higher regard. Different people, different manners. + +When they reached the house ranch the first thing Jim did was to find +Caliente. He was in the long adobe stable that was a half-mile from the +house, at the beginning of a wide mountain valley, where the air drew +through from the sea. + +"How are you, Caliente old fellow," cried Jim, as he opened the box +stall and went in to shake hands with his old comrade. But the horse +leaped to one side, and then reared up as if to strike Jim. + +"He don't know you," cried Jo who was on the outside of the stall. "Take +off your hat." + +Jim whirled it out of the stall, and a change came over Caliente. He +recognized his master, and nickering in recognition he rubbed his head +against Jim's shoulder, and took playful nips at his fine new shirt, +while Jim fairly hugged him, and gave him resounding whacks with his +open hand upon his splendid sides and shoulders. + +"A magnificent animal, Senor Darlington," said Senor Sebastian to Jim, +"I congratulate you." + +It was a true word. Caliente with his proud neck, small but shapely +head, powerful but not too heavy frame, and color of mottled gray was +magnificent. + +All that afternoon Jim busied himself grooming his horse until his coat +fairly glistened. He looked carefully to his feed, and saw to his +watering. For Jim was determined that his horse should not be beaten by +the Spaniard's. He knew that the latter's horse must be an unusual +animal. It was not a short race, instead, one of two hundred miles that +lay before them on the morrow. + +That evening the American boys presented a better appearance than they +did at breakfast. It was a pretty scene that evening in the long dining +room. The snowy table lit by light of candles and set with ancient +silver brought from Spain. The young Senorita was seated at her +brother's right, and on the other side were James Darlington and his +brother Joseph. As to the impression she made upon them, we will say +nothing, as this is not a romance, but they had a merry and delightful +evening. + +Their host and the young Senorita were much interested in hearing of the +adventures of the boys in Mexico, especially that part that referred to +the rescue of the Senorita Cordova from the hands of Cal Jenkins and his +gang. I do not know that The Frontier Boys told it with any less fervor +because the eyes of the young girl, seated opposite, were fixed intently +upon them. It appeared that their host knew of the Senor Cordova, who +was a man of prominence in his country, though he had not actually met +him. So there was one more bond of sympathy between the Senor Sebastian +and James and Jo Darlington. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +ON BOARD THE SEA EAGLE + + +Let us now turn our interest and attention for a time to the cruise of +the Sea Eagle, under the guidance of that redoubtable free-booter, +Captain Broom. It was a mystery to the three who watched the ship turn +to the South, what her port could be. We will soon be in a position to +solve that problem. + +No sooner had the Sea Eagle cleared the cove than Captain Broom went to +his cabin to go over his spoils which he had taken from the frontier +boys. He placed all the belts upon the table, took up one, and with a +keen knife slit the first pouch. A large heavy Spanish coin rolled out +and then clinked down upon the table. + +The Captain's eyes glistened. "By Gosh!" he exclaimed, "it was worth +while rounding up those fellows. They must have struck it rich down in +Mexico. I bet the boys will be tickled to death to get their share." For +whatever crimes and shortcomings Captain Broom could be charged with, +at least he always divided fairly with his crew. Thereby he held their +loyalty. It was not all policy, either, for there was a sterling streak +in the bad old fellow. + +Out of the next pouch there glittered upon the table several diamonds +and a small palm full of rubies, with their rich color and radiance. +"The boys will have enough to start a jewelry store," commented the +Captain. "But I am not surprised at this haul. I know something about +the hidden treasures myself, and they do say Mexico is the the place for +them." + +Out of another belt he got some ingots of gold and a girdle that caused +the Captain to open his eyes. At first he did not know what to make of +it. When he held it up he saw that it was formed of golden disks linked +with strings of rubies and sapphires. In the third belt was a necklace +that might have been worn by some Princess of the Incas. It was oddly, +almost weirdly beautiful. + +The fourth belt that he picked up chanced to belong to Jim. + +"This seems lighter than the others," remarked the Captain. "Three of +the pouches are empty." His face got black with rage. For instantly his +mind leaped to the suspicion that one of his men had rifled it. If such +had been the case, the guilty party would have got short shift at the +end of a rope from the yard arm. + +But the second examination showed that the cut was an old one. + +"So!" he cried, "one of the boys has cached part of his share. I bet it +was that long-legged, black-haired guy. That fellow would give the best +of us trouble. I wish I had him to train. Maybe, I can make something of +the Injun boy," meaning Juarez. + +As to the belts, the shrewd old fellow, to make sure, measured them to +see where the worn holes of the leather came, and the partially empty +belt had been worn two inches longer than any of the others. + +"It was the big fellow's," said the Captain. + +Then he went upon deck and called the crew forward. + +"Now, lads, choose your man to get your share of the goods," he said. + +"It's Jack Cales, sir," they said, knowing that they would be called +upon to select a man to take their share. + +"All right! Come, lad," said the Captain, and led the way to his cabin. +When Jack Cales saw the treasures on the table, he opened his eyes and +mouth in astonishment. + +"Why, Sir," he exclaimed, "we haven't seen anything like this since the +day two years ago when--" he stopped suddenly, seeing from a look in the +Captain's eyes that no reminiscences were desired. + +"This is your share, lad," said the Captain, gruffly. + +"Thank you, sir," responded Cales, as he swept the small pile of gold +and jewels into the palm of his big hands. + +"And mind ye, lad," warned the Captain, "I don't want any quarreling +among yourselves or ye will hear from me." + +"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor and backed out of the cabin. + +There was an interesting gathering in the forecastle when Jack Cales +deposited his handful of treasures on the top of a sea chest that had +been hauled out for the purpose. + +For once it was not necessary to have the lantern lit, for a broad band +of sunshine shone down the steep ladder and cut a golden swath through +the dingy gloom and fell athwart the chest and illuminated the group: +the tall and swaggering Cales, the rugged, grizzled Pete, and the other +sailormen; a typical group and not to be matched for picturesqueness +anywhere; with their faces intent upon the center of the old black sea +chest, where glowed and glittered the gold and jewels in the band of +light that shone upon some of the faces of the intent group, while +others were in the shadow. It was a scene such as Rembrandt--pardon, +kind reader, I forgot for a moment, this is a simple narrative of +Adventure. + +"Pete," said Cales, "how the ladies will love you when they see a chain +of glittering diamonds around your throat." + +"One thing is certain, lad," replied the grizzled Pete, "I won't be +givin' none of my diamonds away to the ladies. I'll keep the stones safe +in my jeans." + +"You'll have to be keerful, Pete," rallied another, "they'll be marrying +you for your ill-gotten wealth, when they find out that you are an +heiress. You can't help yourself, Pete. It won't make any difference +because you are a pirate, that won't scare 'em. Not when they see them +jewels." + +"What's the use of you boys a talkin' to me," he said with a wise wink, +"you're only kittens. I'm sixty year old and I'm a free man yit." + +"Here's a pill for you, Pop," said Cales, dropping a diamond into his +horny hand. + +"Gee! I'm just as well pleased to get this as I was to get a bunch of +popcorn when I was a kid back in New England, off the Christmas tree." + +"Better have it sot in one of your front teeth, Pop," said Jack. This +produced a roar of laughter, for Pete's front teeth were conspicuous by +their absence. + +So the distribution went on without any bickering at first, only jovial +jokes, but at last there came a bone of contention over the last +diamond. And in a jiffy Jack Cales and a short, stocky sailor were all +tangled up in a fierce encounter. Their comrades, none too gently, +hoisted them up on deck. There they continued their fight. + +No sooner did Captain Broom see them than he cluttered down from the +bridge at a furious rate. The two combatants ought to have taken warning +but they were deaf to everything except their own struggle. He was livid +with anger, and his wrath was in a large measure justified. + +"I'll larn you!" he yelled, grabbing each by the back of the neck. "You +won't fight any more this trip." + +They were like children in his hands. He had not only the arms of a +gorilla, but the strength of one when he was aroused and it was a +caution the way he slammed them around, flaying the deck with them, and +dashing their heads together. It seemed as if every bone in their bodies +would be broken. Finally he flung them unconscious on the deck. + +"Put them in the Sagenette," he ordered the mate. + +"Aye, aye, sir," he replied, and with the aid of one of the sailors, +they were chained in a narrow cell. + +Here was where Juarez and Tom came in. As the two fighters were knocked +out and locked up, it made the crew short and they were ordered out on +deck from the cabin where they had been kept. Almost famished though +they were, they had to jump in and work like nailers, not to say, +sailors. + +Fortunately for them, they had experienced a hard schooling in many +different ways since they came west and were practical masters of +several lines of industry, but this was their first experience +sailoring. It was a hard school, but they learned more in a few days, +than they would have under months of more gentle tuition. This was to +stand them in good stead when they started on their cruise to Hawaii. + +"I'll get even with those fellows," growled Tom as he passed near Juarez +who was busy polishing some brass work. "Yes, if it takes the rest of my +life." + +"What do you mean, stopping and gabbing, you little shrimp?" roared the +mate who chanced to see Tom stop. + +And he rushed up and grabbing Tom by the back of the neck, shook him +ferociously, landing him a couple of kicks at the same time. This was +too much for Juarez, who poised a stone that he was using and was about +to brain the mate with it when the Captain's iron grip fell on his arm. +He didn't throw that brick. + +"Easy, lad," said the Captain. "No more fighting on board this ship, or +I'll take a hand again and don't you two lads pass the time of day +either. You won't be killed if you work hard and keep cheerful." Then he +gave the mate a look, which that worthy understood and Tom was allowed +to go about his work without further molestation. + +But this was a new and hard doctrine that the Captain had laid down that +the boys had to take hard usage and unceasing work and keep cheerful +about it. They soon found that the Skipper meant what he said. It was a +bitter lesson, but perhaps they were the manlier for learning it so +young. For it's something that life hands out to everyone sooner or +later. + +Often the boys looked longingly over the rail towards the faint, far +outline of the California coast. The Skipper was keeping his ship far +out from the land for reasons best known to himself. One thing was +favorable in that the sea air had braced up Juarez so that he felt more +like himself though his head was queer at times. And no wonder for that +blow the Mexican dwarf had given him was sufficient to have stunned an +ox. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +A DAY AT SEA + + +The Sea Eagle was steaming steadily South to her mysterious harbor. The +day was a brilliant one and as the afternoon wore on the wind from the +Northwest began to blow with fresher force and the white caps began to +jump, here, there and everywhere over the broad surface of the ocean, +and then slide down on the back of the waves. + +There was a good deal of motion on the part of the Sea Eagle now, as she +plunged into the waves and threw the spray back over her decks. Both +Juarez and Tom proved themselves good sailors, which was just as well +for if they had been sea sick together with their other miseries they +might have succumbed. + +Finally the long afternoon wore away and the time came for supper. The +boys being neither flesh, fish or fowl, were not allowed to eat with the +crew, and they did not mind in the least. When their rations did arrive, +or rather when they went to the ship's galley and got their share, they +found the fare not lacking in quality and abundance. There was a heaping +plate of Mexican beans, a big hunk of bread and a bowl of hot tea. After +the boys had stowed this below in their hatches they felt a hundred per +cent better and more fit to meet any fate that might await them. + +An hour before sunset a heavy bank of fog began to roll up from the +West, soon covering the whole sky with its gracious softness, and +decided restfulness, after the glittering blue-diamond beauty of the +day. + +It is the fogs alone that make the climate of California, especially in +the Southern part endurable. Too much sunshine becomes as unbearable as +too much cloudiness. + +The sea went down, when the fog came up and the waters took on a steely +color under their blanket of gray, rolling on, in that monotonous +meditation that holds the mystery of forgotten ages in its brooding. + +"Here's where you will sleep, boys," said Old Pete, who had been +appointed by the Captain to have special charge over their education. +"The men won't have you in the fo'castle, and it's pretty crowded there +anyway." + +"This will suit us, sir," replied Juarez. He did not call him Pop, as +he would have on the land. This was the sea and had its own rules and +customs, therefore Old Pete received his due of respect. But in his +rough way he was not unfriendly towards the boys, for he remembered that +they had given him friendly advice, when he was aboard that strange +craft, a horse, the night before. + +The place where the boys were to sleep was a sort of cubby hole in the +bow of the boat, that was roofed over and where anchor chains and other +junk was sometimes kept. It was not over four feet high, five in width +at the broadest and narrowing to the bow. + +A rude place to sleep in, but what did the Frontier Boys care for that? +They could scarcely count the nights that they had slept out on the +ground, and in bad weather too. They had a blanket apiece, and a +tarpaulin to pull over them. + +The blankets they had spread out on the floor of the cubby hole and they +found that the tarpaulin made a mighty warm protective covering, keeping +out the damp sea air in fine style. + +"Where do you suppose we are heading for, Juarez?" inquired Tom. + +"Maybe a port in Mexico or South America and then again we may head for +Hawaii before we intend to." + +"We are going South now, though," said Tom. + +"If we run in close to the coast, we'll jump overboard, and swim for +it," said Juarez. + +"We could do it if we get within a mile," said Tom, "if it is not too +rough." + +Just then Juarez put his hand over Tom's mouth, he felt sure that +someone was listening or was preparing to. Juarez ran his fingers +carefully over the boards until he found where a hole had been bored +through the planking a little back of their heads. It was just as he had +suspected, someone was listening to hear what plans they would make. + +With the noiselessness characteristic of him when scouting, Juarez crept +out partially and cautiously raised his head until he caught sight of +the sole of a man's boot. Then he crept back to his place and gave Tom a +nudge. Forthwith they began talking in rather loud tones. + +"Say Tom, do you know I rather like this ship. These fellows are rough +in their way but that is to be expected." + +"Of course," said Tom, in an equally loud voice, "but we might as well +make the best of it. There is no chance for the boys to find us." + +"You're right there, Tom." + +Then in a short time they appeared to fall into a deep and sonorous +sleep. This was no fake on the part of Tom who was actually and +thoroughly tired. But Juarez was more of a veteran and he kept his eyes +open and he was rewarded in a few minutes by seeing a man's feet hanging +over the edge of their bunk house and then he saw the figure of the mate +slouch aft. + +"You sly old rascal, you," remarked Juarez. "We will 'larn' you to try +and be too smart with the Frontier Boys. We may be young but we are not +fools." + +Nothing happened for a while and the gentle plunge of the Sea Eagle into +the long rolling swell soon lulled the tired Juarez into a sound sleep, +so that neither he nor Tom were aware that the ship had suddenly changed +her course. + +By and by however, Juarez waked with a start. Something had happened, he +knew not what. He sat up and struck his head upon the planking overhead. +Fortunately however he did not hit the place where the Mexican had +struck him but at the best his head was a tender place with him and the +blow stunned him, but as he was now more his rugged self, he soon +recovered. + +He found what had wakened him was the stopping of the ship. He saw +several dark forms moving aft and he crept out to see what was afoot. He +had to move very carefully but managed to reach the hood of the +forecastle, where he crouched looking and listening. + +He saw that they were lying to, close in to shore and could see the +white splash of the breakers as they rolled towards the shore and could +hear their monotonous thunder upon the beach. Here perhaps was their +chance. Just then he heard the heavy voice of the Captain from the +bridge. + +"Lower away there." Then the starboard boat slid noiselessly down from +the davits into the water. + +Juarez got up and glided back into the cubby hole to tell Tom the good +news. It was their opportunity to escape and seemingly a good one. The +sea was smooth and the night was dark. They could slip over the side of +the vessel and pull for the shore, and not a soul on the Sea Eagle would +be the wiser until they looked into their nest in the morning to find it +empty. + +Once they got to the shore it would be an easy matter to make their way +North until they met Jim and Jo. + +The anticipation of the escape had already thrilled through every nerve +in Juarez's body. But he had just started to wake Tom, when something +made him look down the deck. There was the tall figure of one of the +sailors coming directly towards the bow. + +Juarez lay down quickly as though asleep. Then the man reached down and +caught hold of Tom's foot and Juarez's and gave them a rough yank. "So +you are here, you young brats. You had better make a move or the Cap'n +will finish you." + +Juarez was fairly sizzling with rage especially as Tom was really +frightened by being wakened in such rough fashion and after all Tom was +but a boy and it pained Juarez to see him so scared, but he was +helpless, and all he could do was to add one more black mark to the +score he was charging up to the free-booters. + +Instead of moving away, the man sat on a capstan a few feet distant from +the boys' den, watching for the slightest move on their part, a marlin +spike dangling playfully in his hands. Juarez had not taken the crafty +and keen sighted Captain Broom into account. + +From the Bridge, that worthy, although he was watching the launching of +the boat, had chanced to catch sight out of the tail of his eye of a +dark shadow flitting back to the forecastle. He was not sure it was one +of the boys, but he was taking no chances, for he had a real respect for +their prowess and audacity as he might well have. + +So he had sent one of his crew to guard this young lions' den, while the +ship was so close in shore. He did not intend to stay longer than was +necessary right at this point, and he waited with some anxiety for the +return of the mate and Pete in the boat. + +It was now two o'clock in the morning and Captain Broom wanted to be out +at sea a good safe distance before the light broke. The mate's boat had +now been gone over a half-hour, and the Captain stood at the end of the +Bridge looking towards the shore. There was not a light upon the vessel +to show her position. She lay silent and black upon the dark waters. + +Then the Captain straightened up. He saw a moving body approaching the +ship and heard the slight dip of oars. Then the boat was alongside and +instead of two men, there were three in the boat. The Captain went down +to the main deck to meet them. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +THE PASSENGER + + +They met without any formality. The new passenger was a tall, slightly +stooped man, with long hair falling down to his shoulders. Juarez was +exceedingly anxious to see him, but could make out only a dark form +moving along the deck. + +"Come to the cabin, Jeems," called the Captain. "I've got something to +tell ye." + +They were soon seated in the Captain's cabin. This was a good-sized +room, panelled in light wood and very neatly kept. There was quite a +broad table of the same wood as the walls and a swivel chair in front of +it. The Captain seated himself in this chair and whirled to talk to the +visitor from the shore. + +It was evident that he was not a temporary visitor for scarcely had they +seated themselves in the cabin than the Sea Eagle slowly and gently +turned and they felt the pulsation of her engines as she headed once +more for sea. The man was seated on a sea chest opposite the Captain. + +He wore long cowhide boots, with jeans pants thrust into their tops, +flannel shirt of a nondescript color and a corduroy jacket. His hat was +of a battered gray. The face was smooth-shaven, deeply lined and burnt +to a dull brown. The hair which came down to his shoulders had that +peculiar sun-burnt weathered tinge that comes from continual exposure to +the weather. He was not an old man, probably on the sunny side of forty. + +"Well, Jeems, what is your news?" inquired the Captain. + +"The government boat is in the harbor, that's all." The Captain gave a +low, peculiar whistle. + +"When did she show up?" he asked. + +"Two days ago, Cap'n," he replied. + +"Come from the South?" + +"Yes," replied the man. "Put in for coal, I reckon." + +"Then put out for us," said the Captain briefly. + +"Any 'baccy, Cap'n? Been out two days," remarked Jeems. + +"Lift your lanky frame off that chest," replied the Captain, "and I'll +git you some." + +The man sprang up with remarkable alacrity, and as he unfolded length +after length of his long figure, it seemed as if his head would touch +the ceiling of the cabin. In fact, he did not miss it by many inches. +It was a comical contrast between the short stooping figure of the +Captain and the tall stranger. + +"Waal, Jeems, I wouldn't advise you to grow any more, or I'll have to +raise the roof of my cabin." + +"That's what, Cap'n," replied Jeems imperturbably. "That's what happens +when you grow up in Californy. You grow all the year around, and not +like in New England where the winters makes you stubby." + +Then the native philosopher seated himself on the chest again and took +long and delightful pulls at his recently staked pipe. + +"Hum!" he said. "This tastes right. Did yer ever know what it war to be +starved for yer 'baccy, Cap'n?" + +"No," replied the Captain, "I can't say that I ever did." + +"Well, I want to tell you, Cap'n, that it is worse than going without +water and I know what that is. Been on a desert till my tongue was as +thick as a cow's, and hung out between my teeth, black." + +"How long have you been away?" inquired the Captain. + +"Three weeks, Cap'n." + +"How are the sheep lookin'?" + +"Pretty fair, Cap'n," he replied. "I think that they had a whiff of rain +over there a few days ago." + +"It won't be long till we git the rains," suggested the Captain. + +"I don't know, Cap'n," remarked the lanky one. "The climate of Californy +is a curious proposition. It's built on the bias down at this end." + +"How's that?" asked the Captain curiously. He had a certain interest in +this particular courier's theories, however he might laugh at their +peculiarities. For there was apt to be a basis of reason in them. + +"Well, it's this way, Cap'n," said James Howell, to give him his correct +name, thrusting one lanky hand deep into his jeans pocket and bending +forward awkwardly. "It's this way. You see the storms come down from the +North to the Tehatchipei mountains, where there isn't any way for them +to get through to the south. Then the clouds shift around to Arizony, +and if the wind is right they are blown through the passes of the Sierra +Madre into Southern Californy, then we get the rain. That's why I said, +Cap'n, that this dazzling climate is built on the bias." + +"Waal, Jeems, as a weather prophet you can't be beat," said the +Skipper. + +"In my business I get plenty of time to think, Cap'n," he remarked, "and +as they ain't much to see except climate I think about that." + +"Waal, I have a good sight more than that to consider," replied the +Skipper. "I'm thinking right now about that government boat. I'm going +on deck. You can turn in." + +The Captain showed him to an empty cabin and the lanky stranger +proceeded to make himself comfortable for the balance of the night, +while the Captain went up on the Bridge. + +"Where are you heading this boat to?" he asked gruffly of the man at the +wheel. + +Then he took the helm himself and immediately the Sea Eagle's prow +pointed to the Westward as if she were heading directly for Japan. +However, she held this course for only an hour and a half when the +Skipper swung her bow once more to the South. + +Long before the morning broke, Tom and Juarez, hauled out of their +resting place, were set to scrubbing the decks and rubbing them down +with holy-stone. They waited eagerly for the first break of day to see +where they were. + +Then the light came slowly through the fog-covered sky, showing a glossy +sea with a slight swell and not a sign of land anywhere. The boys' +hearts sank within them and they felt sure that they would not see their +native land again. + +Once in a while they would glance up at the Bridge where stood the +Captain with his powerful stooped figure. He was evidently on the +lookout, for with his eye at a long glass, he kept scanning the sky-line +to the east. What was he looking for? Juarez knew instinctively that he +was afraid of pursuit. + +If only they could be overtaken and captured, his heart thrilled at the +thought and he watched the Captain eagerly for the first sign of +excitement. About ten o'clock he saw by the Skipper's actions that +something of interest had come under his observation. + +There were a number of quick, sharp orders given and Juarez noticed the +increased volume of smoke pouring from the stack. The Sea Eagle began to +show the speed that was in her trim, black form. Juarez worked around +the port side of the boat as rapidly as he dared, and his heart leaped +with hope. + +He saw low upon the eastern horizon a smudge of black smoke. If he only +had known what the Skipper knew, his hopes would have risen still +higher. Certain preparations were going on upon deck. The three cannon, +one in the stern, that had fired the salute to the group on the shore, +one on either side of the quarter-deck, were divested of their canvas +jackets. + +They certainly gleamed bravely in their polished brass. Then the +ammunition was got ready beside each separate gun. It begin to look like +business. The Sea Eagle began to justify her name and fly through the +water. Still the spot upon the horizon grew bigger. + +Then Juarez began to have a paralyzing feeling of doubt. The steamer, +though coming up fast, did not seem to be steering the proper course to +head the Sea Eagle, bearing on her port-quarter instead of across her +bows as would have been the natural course if she wished to intercept +her. + +Then the doubt in his mind was changed to disappointed certainty for the +Skipper waved his hand to the mate, who was busy on the deck below. It +was after he had taken a pull at the spyglass, which this time seemed to +have an intoxicating effect upon the Captain. + +"It's all right, Bill," he yelled, "It's nothing but a steamer bound for +'Frisco. It looks like the Panama." + +Juarez and Tom resumed their work doggedly. That was all that was left +for them to do. They scarcely glanced at the big steamer as she +appeared, growing constantly larger above the horizon, and then +diminishing as she steamed North towards San Francisco. + +Juarez was scrubbing the deck near a cabin door when it suddenly opened, +and a tall, long-legged figure stepped out and fairly over him. He came +to the conclusion that it was the man who had come aboard the night +before. + +He took in the tall, gaunt man with the smooth-shaven face and long hair +at two glances--one not being sufficient to his height. + +"Well, who are you?" he inquired lounging on the rail and regarding +Juarez with mild-eyed interest. + +"I'm Juarez Hopkins, deck scrubber. Who are you?" + +"I'm James Howell, sheep farmer. I'll add you two lambs to my flock," he +replied, whimsically, glancing at Tom who was down the deck a way. + +"You are more apt to find us wolves in lamb's hide," retorted Juarez. +"Where's your farm?" + +"There," said the stranger, pointing with a long, bony finger on the +port-quarter, "that nigh island." + +Then Juarez saw to his surprise, two islands that seemed to have sprung +like magic upon the South-eastern horizon. The further one lay long and +low and dark but distant beneath the fog-lined sky, the "nigh one" was +more short and dumpy in appearance. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +TO THE RESCUE + + +During the afternoon, everything had been made ready for the journey of +the morrow. There was not a great deal to be done for the three rescuers +would travel light. There would be no need of a pack animal, because the +Senor had assured the boys that they would find hospitality on the way. + +Jo however was in mourning because when he gave his black a trial +gallop, it was discovered that he was badly lamed in the right knee. It +would not have been safe for any of the pirate gang to come within range +of Jo's wrath. + +"The cursed brutes stove him up for fair," he declared grinding his +teeth. + +"I'm afraid it will take a month's rest before he will be fit," +determined Jim. + +"Then I'm out of it," exclaimed Jo sorrowfully. + +"Not so, my friend," interrupted the Spaniard. "Take the bay. He is not +as good a horse as yours, but he has great endurance. He is yours to use +as long as you wish." + +Jo thanked the Spaniard heartily for his kindness and generosity. Then +he spoke in a low voice to his brother. "How about that money, Jim? +Don't forget to pay the Spaniard for those goods we bought at the +store." Jim spoke up. + +"Senor, I wish to show you a little something of interest." + +Then Jim got his heavy saddle, on which he had ridden so many hundred +miles. And the Senor regarded it with interest, because of the carved +leather workmanship which was of the finest and he was a connoisseur of +such matters. + +"How much would you give for it, Senor Sebastian," inquired Jim, "if it +were put up for purchase?" + +"It is a beautiful saddle. I would be willing to give a hundred dollars. +It is worth it." + +"That saddle is worth several thousand, Senor," replied Jim confidently. + +"I do not understand," replied the Spaniard. "It is the personal value, +I suppose." + +"I will show you," said Jim. + +Then he took from his hip pocket a heavy bone handled knife which he had +bought at the store and pulled back the hoof cleaner, an instrument +attached to the knife that was used to get a pebble or anything that had +got into the horse's hoof. + +With this he worked at the leather that covered the high and rather +thick horn of the saddle. Finally he pried the top leather flap off. +There was a heavy piece fitted into the top of the horn. With some +difficulty Jim got this out disclosing a hollow, in which was concealed +most of the jewels he had found in Mexico. + +"Hold your hands, Jo. Tight now." And with the word he emptied the +contents of the horn into Jo's palms. Diamonds, rubies, turquoises and +some heavy gold pieces. + +"That is what you might call a horn of plenty," said Jim jocosely. + +"But!" cried the Spaniard in amazement, "where did you get these?" + +"In Mexico," replied Jim. "This was what the Pirates were after. And +they got all but this. Sometime I will tell you the story of its +discovery. Now take this to reimburse you, Senor, for the money we spent +at the store." And he held out the diamond. + +"That is far too much. That stone is worth five hundred dollars at +least," said the Spaniard. "These three rubies would be more exact and I +will take them." + +Jim, handing over the three stones selected, said, "Now, Senor, you +shall take the diamond as a token of good will from my brother and +myself." + +"We insist upon it," chimed in Jo. + +Finally the Spaniard accepted the gifts with many protestations of +obligation and appreciation. Jo was about to urge him to accept a jewel +for his sister, but Jim stopped him, knowing that the proud Spaniard +would not hear to such a present. + +The next morning they were up an hour before daylight and ate a hearty +breakfast by the light of the candles. Veterans though they were, the +boys felt a thrill go through their pulses as they thought of the +expedition that lay before them. Outside they could hear the pawing of +the impatient horses. + +"To the success of our expedition and the rescue of our friends!" was +the toast the Spaniard proposed as they rose from the table. The +Frontier Boys drank it, but not in wine. They felt just a little foolish +too, but such is the reward that often comes with doing what is right. +But they were sturdy in their determination to stick to their +principles. + +If they had only known it, down in his heart the Spaniard respected them +the more, even though it seemed odd to him. + +Then they went out on the verandah, fully armed and ready to take their +departure. Two oil lamps near the door and fastened to the wall, backed +by shining reflectors sent a strong light across the verandah and into +the darkness outside. + +There stood the three horses, eager to be off, each one held by a +Mexican groom. Caliente we already know, and the horse that Jo is to +ride also. So let us take a glance at the third animal, Don Fernando. He +evidently justified all the enthusiasm of his master, a truly splendid +creature. + +A dark chestnut, as large as Caliente and built on something the same +lines. They were beautifully matched except in color. It was with a +thrill of pleasure that Jim swung himself into the saddle. His mount was +in fine fettle and ready for the long pull ahead. + +They started from the home ranch with a thunder of hoofs in unison, the +riders checking their horses to a slow gallop with a heavy hand. +Together they pressed through the waning darkness. There was a wonderful +exhilaration, as they leaped forward, the horses powerful and fresh. + +Instead of following in the direction of the morning before, the +Spaniard turned to the East until they came near the foot of the range. +In a short time they came to a gate, which seemed to open mysteriously +as they approached, but the motive power proved to be a small Mexican +boy, whom the Senor had sent on ahead. + +Now they were on a turf road with bushes on either side and down this +they thundered, Caliente the gray, and Don Fernando the dark, matching +stride for stride, with Jo well in the rear. For he found if he rode +close up he was blinded and stung by sods and stones thrown back from +the flying hoofs of the two horses in the front. + +It was a bit lonely for Jo and he wished that one of the other boys was +here to keep him company. As they rode, the bushes seemed to fly by as +they do when you look from a railroad train and Jo was afraid lest his +horse would be unable to keep the pace indefinitely. One thing in Jo's +favor was that he was the lightest of the three and what is more to the +purpose a very light rider. + +So like the good horseman he was, he determined to save his horse all he +could and make him last out. For eight miles or more they rode without a +stop until they came to another gate. This the Spaniard unfastened and +swung open without dismounting, then closed it after Jo. + +The morning light was now distinct, although the fog was over the sky. +Before them stretched a long level plain that broke into sand dunes near +the sea. They could see the ocean lying dark in its monotonous level of +color, to the Western horizon. + +"We have just left the Sebastian ranch," called the Spaniard. + +"It is immense," commented Jim. "May I ask how many acres it embraces?" + +"It was immense in the old days," replied the Spaniard. "Before your +people took possession of the land. It was held by no fences then. But +your laws were not ours and we lost many square miles. Now there are +fifty thousand acres under fence." + +"Fifty thousand acres!" exclaimed Jo. + +"Ah, but it was double that before the Americans came," replied the +Spaniard. Then he glanced critically at Caliente. "Your horse looks as +cool as though he had been standing in the stable. The pace does not +affect his wind either. Splendid condition!" + +"Caliente is as hard as nails," said Jim proudly. "But your horse has +wonderful speed." + +The chestnut seemed more on edge than the old warrior, Caliente, and +tossed the foam from his bit, until his dark coat was speckled with it. + +"He is high strung," said the Spaniard, "but I would back him against +any horse flesh in California. We can let them out here for a half dozen +miles." + +"Let her go, Senor. I won't let you lose me." + +At the word the Spaniard gave his chafing horse his head and away the +chestnut sprang in the lead. It was slightly down grade for a mile, +then there was a gulch twelve feet wide and of considerable depth. It +was a good jump and to make it saved a little distance. Going at top +speed the chestnut took the jump in fine style. His rider half turned in +his saddle to watch Jim's effort. Caliente had faced worse leaps than +that, he rose to it and swept over it as gracefully as a bird. + +"Good fellow!" exclaimed Jim patting him affectionately on the neck. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE BANDITS + + +When Jo saw the gulch ahead, he decided that discretion was the better +part of valor as he did not know his mount well enough to risk the leap, +so he galloped a few hundred feet below, where the gulch narrowed and +then he took the jump nicely, and scampered after the other two riders +who were quite a way ahead. + +Jim purposely held Caliente in check, keeping a hundred yards in the +rear of the Spaniard. Ahead a few miles, there was a perfect sea of +yellow where the tall mustard covered the plain for a great distance. +Into this they charged full tilt, the mustard reaching as high as their +heads. + +There was a swish of its blossoms in their faces as the powerful horses +charged into it and in spite of their strength they began to tire after +going some distance. + +"Where is Jo?" inquired Jim suddenly after they had slowed down, "I +don't see a sign of him." And he rose in his stirrups looking over the +level lake of mustard. + +"Hello, Jo," he yelled at the top of his voice. No answer came. Could he +be drowned in this lake? There was not a motion to indicate his +whereabouts, no waving of the yellow tops. + +"It is very strange," said the Spaniard. "Did he cross the gully all +right?" + +"Yes, I saw him take the jump below us a ways." Then Jim raised his +revolver above his head and fired. + +"That ought to fetch him," he said. Then they listened intently. +Suddenly about a quarter of a mile ahead of them they saw a sombrero +rise like a gray mushroom above the yellow surface of the mustard, and +Jo's voice came back to them. + +They both gave their horses the rein, this time Jim did nothing to hold +Caliente back, and with their powerful speed the two great horses tore +forward, on even terms until in the last hundred yards Caliente forged +ahead by half a length. + +"Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. There was Jo sitting quietly on +his horse. + +"That's how you beat us," exclaimed Jim, pointing to a cow trail running +diagonally through the growth of mustard. + +"Yes," laughed Jo, "I struck it further down after I jumped the gully. +Otherwise you fellows would have lost me." + +"Good work, Jo," said Jim. "Now we will have it easier going." + +So in single file they galloped along the path, until they found +themselves by noon, at the foot of a spur of mountains that extended +from the main coast range to the ocean. Jim regarded this barrier in +their way with a practised eye. + +"This will slow us down, Senor," he said. "It looks like a pass below +there, about two miles." + +"Yes," said the Senor, "we can get through there all right, but it is +pretty rough going." + +They had to advance more slowly now, as the ground was broken into stony +ravines, and there was a good deal of brush. In this kind of country +Jo's horse more than held its own with the bigger animals, for he was as +nimble as a goat. + +"I hope we will find water, Senor," remarked Jim. "Our horses are pretty +dry now." + +"Yes," replied the Spaniard, "there is a good spring at the foot of the +Pass." + +They found it all right, in the entrance to the Pass, where there was a +small green cove, surrounded with bushes, and on one side was a sheep +herder's shanty. Jo investigated this immediately and found nothing in +it but the charred remnants of a fire and a pair of discarded overalls. + +Jim, who had himself been looking around, made a more important find. + +"There has been somebody here recently," he announced. "Here are some +tracks around the spring and not over twelve hours old." + +"Yes, I have no doubt," said the Spaniard carelessly puffing at his +cigarette. "This Pass is used occasionally by ranchmen and herders." + +"There have been five or six horses here," said Jim, whose experiences +had made him suspicious. + +"There are no Indians," said Jo, "in this section, at least none who are +on the warpath." + +"I suppose you do have cattle rustlers, Senor?" inquired Jim. + +"Yes, there is a band of outlaws," replied the Spaniard, "that raids +from as far north as our ranch, south to San Diego, but we have seen no +trace of them for many months." + +"Then, Senor," remarked Jim, "it is about time that they paid you +another visit." + +"Ah, Senor Darlington," exclaimed the Spaniard. "We Castilians do not +reason so. We say that there is no trouble today, why worry about +tomorrow. Perhaps these bandits may have starved to death, or been hung, +or the good Padres may have persuaded them by the fear of Hell, to +become quiet, sheep raising citizens. God knows." + +"I fear that they are raising sheep in their old style," grinned Jo. The +pun glanced off the Spaniard harmlessly. + +"The theory that they may be hung, sounds plausible, Senor," admitted +Jim. "But before we advance into the Pass, I will scout a little." + +"If the Senor pleases," responded the Spaniard courteously. + +"Do you chance to know of a small, hunchbacked Mexican who is more or +less in this section of the country, Senor?" Jim suddenly inquired. + +The Spaniard flushed with red anger and spit emphatically on the ground. + +"You give him into my hands and I will reward you well," cried the +Spaniard. + +Jim made no immediate reply but gazed thoughtfully at the ground. He was +considering the case. This was not the time to turn aside in a chase for +even so desperate a criminal as the hunchbacked greaser. So he made no +definite reply to the Spaniard. + +After the horses were fed, and watered, and while Jo was looking after +the coffee, Jim started off, to do a little scouting up the Pass. The +first thing that he did was to slip off his heavy riding boots, which +the stylish Jo had forced him to buy, and to put on his noiseless footed +moccasins. + +Then with his revolver loaded and ready to his hand, he went swiftly and +silently up the trail that followed through thick brush, gradually +working up the side of the mountain. It was no difficult task to follow +the tracks of the horses. In a half hour's swift climbing he came to the +top of a stony ridge, over which the trail curved, and dipped down the +other side. + +Jim now saw that the Pass was an irregular one with recurrent spurs, +thrusting out from the mountains on either side, at quite frequent +intervals. There were innumerable chances for ambuscades. Jim did not +stand in the trail but to one side partially hidden in a thicket. + +All the time his keen eyes were taking in the canyon below, not however +admiring the scenery. In fact there was nothing particularly beautiful, +or interesting in the view. In the Rockies and further South too he had +seen canyons incomparable to the rather ordinary ones that he had seen +in California. + +Jim was watching for some slight movement of a living creature in the +canyon. Finally he gave it up, and was about to turn away, then he gave +a start, he saw one, two, three, men crouch across the trail, a quarter +of a mile below, and disappear into the thick brush. He was almost +certain that the first one was the hunchback. + +That was all that Jim wanted to see. He noiselessly took the back trail, +thinking over the best course to pursue. He would have liked nothing +better under ordinary circumstances than to fight it out with the +outlaws and to capture the hunchback. But their first object must be the +rescue of Tom and Juarez. + +Was there not some way by which they could get to the South without +going through this bandit infested Pass? + +"Well brother, what didst thou find?" inquired Jo, who was at times +pleased to be dramatic. + +"Very few specimens in the way of bandits," replied Jim. + +"As I said, Senor," remarked the Spaniard, "they have become good +citizens." + +"Not yet, I am sure, because they are alive." + +"That is a good one, Jim," remarked Jo, appreciatively, but the Spaniard +was politely mystified. "Same as Indians." + +"I found one thing out," said the diplomatic Jim, "and that is, that the +Pass is a hard one on horses. Are you sure, Senor, that there is no +easier way than this to get through?" + +"Positive," briefly responded the Spaniard. + +Jim who was seated on a rock digging his heel into the soft earth, +looked up as a sudden idea struck him,--but without knocking him out. + +"How far is it from here to the sea, Senor?" he asked. + +"Not over five miles." + +"Can we not get around that way?" Jim inquired eagerly. + +"Why, yes," replied the Spaniard slowly, "if the tide is not coming in. +In that case we should be drowned." Jim glanced hastily at his watch. + +"We can try for it and make it, if we do not waste any time," he said. +"The horses have had a good rest." + +"Very well, Senor," said the Spaniard resignedly. He regarded Jim as an +amiable hurricane whom it was not worth while battering to resist. Jim +hastily swallowed his coffee and a hunk of bread and in five minutes the +three musketeers were in the saddle again. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +RACE WITH THE TIDE + + +In spite of the rough going, they made good time for the five miles, +spurred on by the constant anxiety lest they should not reach the beach +before the tide began coming in. There were several gathered to see them +off when they left the mouth of the Pass, but not to give them a send +off. + +A short explanation will prove this. It is not to be supposed that the +hunchbacked Mexican and the bandits did not know that the three horsemen +were coming over the plain of the mustard growth. Indeed, their scout, +the Mexican dwarf, saw Jim, Jo and the Spaniard when they first landed +in the entrance to the canyon. + +He had gone back to report to the bandits their coming, and after Jim +had returned, they had prepared the nicest trap imaginable near where +Jim had been hiding. They had had numerous experiences in that line and +were perfectly qualified experts. The spider and the fly was nothing to +the arrangements they had made to receive their supposably unsuspicious +guests. + +You can imagine the surprise and disgust of the bandits and their scout +when they saw the three horsemen ride in an entirely different direction +than that they had looked for. Talk about convulsions, you should have +seen these desperadoes express their disappointment. It was terrific. +Not a saint in the long calendar was left unscathed. + +How Jim would have enjoyed the performance. But entirely oblivious to +this, Jo, Jim and the Spaniard were riding rapidly towards the sea. +Before an hour had passed, they had ridden between the rounded sand +dunes and then out upon the hard, smooth sand of the beach. + +"This is splendid going, Senor Sebastian," exclaimed Jim. + +"It is all right," he replied, "if the sea does not get hungry too +soon." But the sea appeared to be in a very pleasant mood and the white +breakers had withdrawn as far out as it was possible to get. It was such +a smooth smiling sea with the laugh of its little sparkling waves that +it seemed that there could be no possible harm in it. + +"I never saw a road that was better than this!" exclaimed Jo in +delight. "It is perfectly springy and no dust or mud." + +It deserved all of Jo's praises, this broad, firm California beach. The +brown sand, that had been pounded down by the force of the great rollers +some hours before, showed scarcely a sign of the shoes of the horses. + +There was plenty of width and the three horses pressed on abreast, the +powerful sweep of the gray Caliente and the chestnut Don Fernando, and +the snappy, nervous leaps of the little bay that Jo was riding. With the +bracing sea air and the exhilarating speed, the three musketeers were +invigorated. + +The Spaniard hummed a gay ballad, while at times Jim's heavy bass and +Jo's lighter treble were joined in a rollicking American song. They +laughed without reason, for the simple joy of being alive and on the +move; but as pride sometimes goes before destruction, so happiness often +goes before disaster. + +It was a small matter too, but it made for trouble. The Spaniard's horse +stepped between two small rocks that were close together and wrenched +one of his hind shoes nearly off. Jim and Senor Sebastian hastily +dismounted. Of course they carried with them the necessary things to +fix the shoe on again, but even then it was a question of a number of +minutes. + +"You had better ride ahead, Jo," urged Jim. "Your horse is beginning to +tire and we will overtake you, when we once get started." + +"It is a good idea," joined in the Spaniard. + +"All right," acquiesced Jo readily enough, and he gave his bay the rein, +riding slowly down the beach. + +Then the two began operations on Don Fernando's hind foot. Here they +found their first real delay. At the point where the accident happened, +the mountains came down quite close to the sea, so that they were +crowded in much closer than they had been. The nearness of the water +made the big chestnut restless and hard to handle. + +The Spaniard had great difficulty in getting near enough to his horse to +get hold of his hind foot. When he did succeed in doing this, and was +just starting to peg the shoe on, an extra big wave slapped down upon +the beach, though at a safe distance and caused the big chestnut to jump +and hurl his master to a distance of a dozen feet. + +"This won't do," cried Jim. "I'll take my horse around to the sea side +of yours and close up. Perhaps that will give your animal confidence." + +It worked like a charm, for though Caliente was high-spirited, he was +not flighty and he steadied his comrade so that the two workers were +able to fasten the shoe. + +"We have lost a good half hour," said Jim, looking at his watch with a +grave face. + +"Perhaps we shall have to turn back," remarked the Spaniard with +gravity. "We may not escape the incoming tide if we go on." + +"Don't you believe it," cried Jim, impetuously. "I've got business ahead +and must go." + +"Have it your way," said the Spaniard with a peculiar smile. He knew +what dangers lay ahead with a rising tide and Jim did not or he probably +would not have been so insistent. + +"I see no sign of Jo," remarked Jim, as they swung into the saddles. + +"Ah, we will not catch him. He is safe," replied the Spaniard. + +Then with tremendous speed, they swept down the beach, the splendid +horses responding to the crisis. It was their fleetness against the +steadily rising rush of the inexorable sea. They actually gained ten +minutes on the first two miles and a half. Then Jim saw ahead the dark +form of a headland thrusting out towards the sea. + +Already the rush of a long wave would send the water lapping around +their horses' feet. Jim recognized the danger. They must get around that +promontory or give up beaten. Then he gave Caliente a touch with a spur, +the first that day. With a snort, the spirited animal sprang forward +faster than before and at his shoulder was the chestnut with flaming +nostril. + +None too soon had they reached the headland, for the recurrent waves +were beginning to surge against it, with full force and gnawing foam. In +the fierce fury of their charge, they sent their horses against the sea. +It was at the long withdrawal that made bare the scattered black rocks, +that they rounded the headland. + +But too soon a great thundering wave with the force of the Pacific +behind it came roaring in and swelled to the horses' throats, almost +submerging the riders. But the animals held against its withdrawing +power and before the ocean could return to the attack, they had got +beyond the headland to a safe place on the beach. + +The horses were trembling and quivering with their exertions and with +the fear of the sea which is the most terrible and paralyzing of all +fears. Jim drew a long breath of relief and looked ahead to see if there +was any sign of Jo. Then to his consternation he saw that the beach +curved inland and at the further end of the curve was another frowning +headland thrusting itself out somewhat further than the one they had but +just rounded. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +THE ENCHANTED ISLE + + +Let us now return to the Sea Eagle, and find out what is happening +there. + +You recollect that Juarez had just discovered two islands lying on the +South-eastern horizon, the one, long and low, the other comparatively +short and dumpy. He had been conversing with the tall shepherd of the +island, who seemed to take an interest in Juarez. But because of his +isolated life during a greater part of the year, he would have taken an +interest in a stone idol, if he had chanced to discover one. + +"Which of these islands are we making for?" inquired Juarez. + +"The one where we land," replied the sheep farmer oracularly. "I might +ask the Cap'n, only I never pester him with questions. You aren't a +Yankee, are you?" + +"No," replied Juarez, "I'm not. My folks live in Western Kansas." + +"I'm glad to hear it, son. But what are you doing here?" he asked. + +"You aren't a Yankee, are you?" inquired Juarez, quizzically. The man +laughed softly to himself. + +"You've got me there, lad," he said. "It looks to me," he continued, +"that the old man is going to steer for the further island." + +"Then you will have to swim for your home," remarked Juarez. + +"I can wade," he replied whimsically, looking down at his long legs. + +"You are a humorist," said Juarez. + +"No, you can put me down for a philosopher, that is to say, a man who +has much time to think and nothing to do." + +"I should like to be one," said Juarez. "Suppose you holy-stone these +decks while I try it." + +"No, my friend," replied the shepherd, "I am too much of a philosopher +to make any such swap." + +"Is Captain Broom one?" asked Juarez. + +"Well, he is a sort of a philosopher till he gets mad, then he becomes a +living active volcano, belching out a lava of hot language and scorching +things generally. I guess that I had better be moving along. I see that +he is eyeing me from the Bridge, and he is likely to get active any +moment if I keep you from working." With this the lanky shepherd +strolled forward and seating himself upon the top of the boys' sleeping +place in the bow, smoked his pipe in meditative comfort. + +His estimate in regard to the destination of the Sea Eagle proved to be +correct. For in the early afternoon the ship passed under the lee of the +long island and was steaming up the channel between it and the mainland, +which was distant some thirty-five miles. + +The fog had cleared by noon, and there was that complete transition to +brilliant, sunny weather. There was a sort of a white haze along the +distant coast and beyond far inland, rose the faint summits of the high +mountains. + +Fortunately Juarez and Tom had a chance to observe their new +surroundings for they had been set to work sewing on a small sail that +was to be used in one of the boats. They sat upon the top of one of the +hatches, under the watchful eyes of old Pete and the philosophic gaze of +the shepherd. Sewing was one of the accomplishments of the Frontier +Boys. They had been obliged to learn. + +"What is that particular bronze looking weed, floating in these waters?" +asked Tom. It was as Tom phrased it, bronze and a most beautiful color. + +It was indeed a giant among weeds; just such as the garden of the ocean +would grow. The stems were fifty to eighty feet long, with peculiar +colored leaves eight to ten inches in length, growing on little boughs +from the parent stem. The whole structure was held up by small bronze +buoys, of a round shape. + +"Well as ye seem likely boys and want to learn, I'll tell you about this +plant," said the shepherd. "The scientific fellows call it Algae. When +the world was first made this algae covered the whole surface of the +ocean." + +"How did you learn this?" asked Juarez. + +"You know that the Captain is quite a collector, and in his travels has +gotten together among many other things some interesting books. He gives +them to me when convenient." The face of the lanky shepherd was +perfectly grave when he spoke of Captain Broom as a collector. + +"What makes the water so clear around here?" asked Juarez. "I never saw +anything like it." + +"Well, you see," replied their mentor, "this island is placed +peculiarly, I mean this side of it. You see how quiet the water is?" + +"It is certainly smooth and blue," said Juarez. "More like a lake than +the ocean." + +"That's only true of this side," resumed the shepherd, "the other is +rough enough, but you see the prevailing winds are from the Northwest +and this shore is never disturbed. So on the beaches you will find not +sand, but smooth round pebbles, because there is no action of the water, +no breakers or waves to grind them into sand." + +About four o'clock the Sea Eagle came into a perfectly beautiful little +harbor, at the South-eastern end of the island. There was a small level +plot back from the beach and on all sides rose steep hills and back of +them the mountains. It was the most picturesque scene the boys had ever +beheld in all their travels. + +What would they not have given to have been free to roam that island, +hunting inland, or fishing or bathing along those quiet, enchanted +shores. But this was no pleasure excursion. Far from it. Captain Broom +had his own ideas, and he did not intend to make a landing at all. + +"Get the whale boat ready, lads!" he ordered. "And put her over, we've +got no time to lose." + +They lost no time either, under Captain Broom's commanding eye. + +What was necessary for the cruise was already in the boat. Two casks of +water, several guns, and a lot of provisions. Then the boat was hove +overboard into the quiet bay. The captain was ready with a much battered +satchel in his hand. Not for one second did he entrust it to any one +else. + +"Now over with you, you two lads," he commanded and Juarez and Tom, +with a sinking of the heart, got into the boat. This was the last leg of +their mysterious journey, and it boded them no good they felt sure of +that. The mate they noticed stayed aboard in charge of the ship. + +They were put in the stern where old Pete had the steering oar. Near +them sat the shepherd on one of the casks of water, his long legs +getting uncertain accommodation. The captain had his position in the bow +and two powerful sailors were at the oars, one on either side. They did +not sit down, but stood up to their work. + +Without any loss of time the boat got under way proceeding seaward from +the shelter of the beautiful little harbor. In spite of their +depression, the two boys could not help being interested in the +absolutely clear water in which they could look down for eighty feet. + +They could see the straight slender columns of the Algae rising to the +surface, starting from where they were rooted in the bottom of the bay +and swaying to the slow pulsation of the tide. These strange plants of +this marine garden were marvels indeed. Between their stalks and among +the encrusted rocks swam in absolute unconsciousness of being watched, +many beautiful, and strange fishes. + +Some were small of golden hue, with little spots of a marvelous blue +(poetry) that flashed like keen electric dew, (that will do). Others +were like gold fishes, a foot in length and of corresponding breadth. +There were long mackerel, and innumerable minnows, and over the rocks a +peculiar little fish crawled or rather walked on thin rat-like feet. + +Before they had time to observe further the boat had got out of the +harbor where the water sunk away to blue unfathomed depth. When clear of +the harbor, they turned to the South, passing near a cove with a +symmetrical pebbly beach, built up for five feet, above the level of the +water. The ocean was perfectly smooth, with not a ripple upon its +surface. They were evidently making to round the Southern extremity of +the Island. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +IN THE WHITE BOAT + + +Ahead of them was a rock rising fifty or sixty feet out of the water. It +was evident that the rock was inhabited for there could be seen dark +forms moving around upon it. Nothing had been said since they started, +for the Captain was not in a talkative mood. Jeems Howell, the shepherd, +had sat silently smoking his pipe in philosophic contentment. + +"What are those things on that rock?" inquired Tom, his curiosity +getting the best of his reserve. + +"Two yankees in this boat," commented the shepherd. "Those are seals, +son. Didn't you ever see any before?" + +"No!" admitted Tom. + +"You didn't know that seals, next to humans, are the smartest animals, +in the world." + +"Is that so?" inquired Juarez. "They certainly are sleek." + +"They have got the most brain room, that's a fact." + +The boys regarded the seals with peculiar interest as the boat passed +near the rock. They were moving about awkwardly by means of their +flippers, moving their sinuous necks this way and that and regarding the +strange boat with their soft brown eyes. Then they dived headlong into +the sea, swimming about with a peculiar grace. + +"Queer animals," remarked Tom, "belong half to the sea and half to the +land." + +"Something like sailors," remarked the shepherd. + +"What's the Captain going to do with us?" asked Juarez in a low voice. +The shepherd's face took on a solemn expression, but before he could +reply the Captain's voice roared. + +"None of that, you'll find out soon enough. You can talk about the flory +and fauny, with long shanks, but don't let me hear anything else out of +you," such was the Captain's ultimatum. + +But soon matters grew so interesting that they lost all inclination for +talking. When they got near the Southern end of the island they began to +notice white caps to the Southward, dotting the darkness of the sea. + +"You lads will have to hold tight now in a few minutes," remarked +Howell. "Do you get seasick?" + +"No," replied the boys. + +"Well, you will have a chance soon, and if it don't fetch you, nothing +will." + +So far they had been rowing under the sheltering lee of the island whose +huge rocky bulk had shouldered off the charge of the wind-driven seas. +Now before they had fairly rounded the island the character of the water +began to change. The boat began to toss on the great rollers. Then as +they cleared the land for good and were in the channel, a fresh gust of +wind struck them, drenching the occupants of the boat with spray. + +The Captain stood up in the bow of the boat and steadying himself took +in the conditions of the sea and wind. There was nothing in his grim +weatherbeaten face to show what he felt. The men at the oars now made +hard work of it against the headwind and the running sea. + +They would climb up a steep wave and then with a sickening slide, go +down into the hollow, then with a lusty pull the sailors would bring the +heavy boat over the toppling crest of wave to find another rushing to +meet them. No rest, this was what made it such heart breaking work. + +The early fog had come, covering the sea with gloom, and the waves did +not go down perceptibly. At times, they shipped a good deal of water and +Tom and Juarez were kept busy bailing out. After an hour's hard +struggle the sailors were about all in and seemed hardly able to hold +their own against the sea and wind. The Captain was quick to notice +this. + +"Can you row, lad?" he inquired of Juarez. Now the latter's experience +had been confined to his work going down the Grand Canyon of Colorado, +on the raft-boat that the Frontier Boys had built. + +Even the old ocean itself could not show anything worse than some of the +rapids that the boys had run. As for rocks, nothing could beat the +canyon for them. + +"I'll try, sir," he replied, "I've never rowed on the ocean." + +"Humph!" grunted the Captain, "take the starboard. And you, you lazy +long shanks, you take the other oar." + +"All right, sir," replied cheerfully, the one addressed. + +"Get out of here, Pete," he cried, giving that worthy a lift with his +foot that landed him on top of Tom, "I'll do the steering. You boys will +only have to pull, that's all. I'll keep her headed up right." + +Fortunately Juarez was in fine condition, or he could never have stood +the gruelling work ahead. He weighed one hundred and sixty pounds and +there was not an ounce of fat on him. Likewise he had had a sound +night's sleep and three square meals so that he was fortified for what +was ahead. + +Juarez buckled to the task with all his strength, and he was glad of the +chance to get his blood in circulation for he was chilled to the bone by +the flying spray, and then too, anything was better than thinking of the +fate ahead. He was surprised to find out that the shepherd who appeared +rather frail in physique was able to keep up the pace. + +But he had that sinewy length of muscles that counts for more than mere +bunchy thickness. Juarez was crafty enough not to spend all of his +strength in the first fifteen minutes of work. He liked this, fighting +the sea and standing on his feet he was able to put the whole leverage +of his body into the stroke. + +The change in speed was noticeable right away, and the boat began to +pull ahead steadily. The two sailors who had been laid off from +exhaustion, had watched Juarez with a sneering grin as he took the oar. +They were sure that the first wave that came along would wrench the oar +out of his hand. Great was their surprise when they saw him buckle to +the oar, rising and pulling at the right time to meet the toppling, +rustling seas. + +"That little shrimp will last about ten minutes," said one of them to +his mate. + +"Sure, Bill," replied the other. + +Juarez choked back a hot reply, for he knew that it would not be good +for him to say anything to them. They were in the majority and would get +him if he did, besides making it bad for Tom. The ten minutes passed and +Juarez was just beginning to warm to his work. This took the wind out of +their sails completely. + +The powerful hand of the Skipper at the steering oar was a great help, +for now all that the two men at the oars had to do was to pull and not +to worry about keeping her headed right. Juarez kept steadily at it for +an hour and then darkness began to fall over the channel but not until +the island that they were approaching had begun to loom up, dead ahead. + +They were now getting in the lee of the strange island and the sea was +moderating perceptibly. At this juncture the two sailors who had become +thoroughly rested took the oars from Juarez and his co-worker and pulled +steadily through the gathering gloom. In a short time the bulk of the +island loomed above them in the darkness. + +Not a word was said, only the swish of the sea was heard and the +groaning of the oars in the locks. Tom and Juarez were deeply depressed +and gloomy. They felt exactly as though they were being taken to prison +and could sympathize with sailors who had been marooned on lonely and +desolate islands. + +"Easy now, lads," called the Captain, as he brought the boat's head +squarely around towards the shore. + +"Two strokes," he yelled, "and let her run." + +With great force they pulled the oars in succession, then they shipped +them in a hurry. Juarez could see the dashing of foam on either side of +the boat where the waves smote the rocks. There was a roar in his ears +as the boat rushed toward seeming sure destruction. It was going with +great speed from the impetus of the sailors' strokes. + +The Captain was standing taut at the steering oars, his eyes piercing +the darkness ahead, then the foam of the breakers dashed in their faces, +there was a quick sliding past of dark rocks and before they could draw +breath again the boat was in quiet water, under some black cliffs. At +last they had reached the mysterious goal of their mysterious journey. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +IN PERIL + + +We must now go back in our narrative to where we left Jim Darlington and +the Spaniard, Senor Sebastian, in a position of extreme peril, between +the cliffs and the deep sea, with the white-fanged tide coming in like a +devouring monster eager for its prey. + +"Is there a chance, Senor?" cried Jim as soon as his horse gained his +footing. + +"It is the fatal day, I fear," replied the Spaniard with resigned +hopelessness. "The sea is hungry." + +"As for that, so am I," declared Jim coolly. "So let us try to get +around the headland and after that, supper." + +"As you please," acquiesced the Spaniard quietly. + +Then Jim turned Caliente's head and with a quick touch of the spur sent +him full stride along the curving beach, followed closely by the +Spaniard. Already the heavy waves were licking far up the slant of the +sand. Even the veteran Caliente seemed nervous at its approach, while +Don Fernando would jump and shy as the hissing water crept around his +feet. + +In about two minutes the two horsemen reached the base of the rocky +headland that barred their way. It was a desperate moment, there was but +one thing to do and that was to take the chance. + +"Better be drowned quick, Caliente, old boy," cried Jim, "than slowly, +but we'll beat you yet," and he shook his clenched fist at the ocean, +and whirled his horse to meet a wave that struck Caliente breast high. +So for a moment, the two, boy and horse, stood facing their powerful +enemy, The Sea, that came with the recurring charge, its evenly +separated files robed in blue with white crests. Thus they stood getting +a full free breath before they leaped into the ranks of the foe. + +Jim's strained, keen gaze took in every detail of the situation, noting +the position of the rocks that a receding wave left bare, so that he +might find a clear path or trail in his dash for life. Nor did his gaze +flinch as he saw the advancing wave break against the front of the +cliff. + +"Now, Caliente," yelled Jim, with a sense of fierce determination and +exultation that communicated itself to his horse, and lifting his feet +free from the stirrups so that he would not be entangled, if Caliente +should fall, he headed him seaward, galloping fast down the beach upon +the heels of the withdrawing wave. + +Meeting a smaller inrush of water and dashing through its foaming crest, +his gallant horse swam until he got a foothold upon the rocks at the +base of the cliff. Now was the crucial moment. With absolute +recklessness, Jim urged his powerful horse over the foam-covered rocks, +striving to get around the prow of the headland before the charge of the +next wave. Not one look did Jim give seaward, all his energies were bent +upon using every precious second, and Caliente was filled with his +rider's indomitable spirit. + +Then above them towered the fatal wave, and with a confused roar, it +broke over them in sweltering foam and they were swept towards the black +front of the cliff. Then came the impact against the rock and the next +moment, stunned and bruised, Jim holding to the pommel of the saddle, +with a death-grip, was carried out to sea with Caliente in the grasp of +the retreating wave. + +It was all over, as like pieces of drift, horse and rider were swept +away, but fortune does sometime favor the brave and, being caught in a +powerful current, Caliente was carried South of the headland and his +progress towards the sea was stayed by a rock that rose high, an +outer-guard of the headland. So then the next great wave bore them +toward the beach, and once Caliente got his feet upon the sandy bottom +he braced himself against the fierce pull of the retreating sea, +striving to drag him back again. + +Though almost unconscious, Jim clung to the saddle with his body +half-drooping over the pommel. Then Caliente plunged blindly forward +until he stood with head bent down and nose almost touching the sand, +his great sides heaving, but safe at last. + +In the distance, a horseman could be seen coming at full gallop along +the straight line of the beach. It was Jo, who finally had become +frightened by the non-appearance of his two comrades and had turned +back. His fright had been increased by seeing a horse and rider coming +apparently out of the sea. + +When he came up, he found his brother Jim sitting on the sand still half +dazed but slowly coming to himself. + +"Where's the Senor, Jim?" cried Jo. This question served to bring Jim +completely to himself. He got up, looking pale, with one side of his +face bruised to a real blackness, and the flesh of his left hand badly +torn, where it had struck the cliff, but he was not thinking of these +matters. + +"Why, Jo, the Senor came after me. Where is he?" Then it came over him +all at once, that his companion was even now caught between the jaws of +the black cliff. + +"We must get to him, Jo," he cried. + +"But how did you ever get around that cliff?" asked Jo. + +Already it was an awesome sight as the waves crashed in foam against its +front and rushed shoreward along its black sides. It seemed impossible +that only fifteen minutes before Jim had actually come around that +foaming headland. + +In reply to Jo's question, Jim threw his arms around Caliente's neck +with warm affection. + +"This is the old fellow that pulled me through," he cried. "But we must +go to the help of our Spanish friend." + +"How can we?" inquired Jo. "We can't get around the headland unless we +become fishes." + +Jim considered the problem carefully. One thing he was determined on and +that was not to leave the Spaniard who had been so hospitable and +helpful to them. + +"No, we can't go around by the headland," he determined, "but we might +be able to find a way over the rocks and down on the other side." + +"All right, I'm ready." + +"Let's find a place for Caliente first," advised his owner. Back a short +distance from the beach there were some trees on a lower spur of the +mountain. Here Jim brought Caliente and took off the saddle and bridle. + +"Now make yourself comfortable," said Jim. + +Caliente, in seeming recognition of what was said, took immediate +advantage of the invitation and rolled heartily in a dry and dusty spot. + +"Get your lasso, Jo," urged Jim, "and we will start." + +So together they made for the steep rock and soon reached the base of +it, and now began a hard climb, but no more difficult than they had +encountered before in their travels. + +"Do you recollect, Jim," inquired Jo, "that day you got stalled in our +first canyon in Colorado, when you tried to imitate an eagle and fly up +a precipitous cliff and we had to get you down?" + +"Oh, yes, I remember," replied Jim, "and how I scared you and Tom by +pretending that an Injun was after me, when I went down to the creek for +water." + +"Poor Tom," said Jo sadly, "I wonder when we will see him again." + +"In a couple of days," stoutly declared the optimistic Jim. + +They were now going up the face of the cliff, the lariats over their +shoulders, and searching with careful feet for a foothold, while their +hands clutched some piece of projecting rock. + +"Lucky this rock isn't rotten," cried Jo, "or we would find ourselves +stuck headfirst in the sand below." + +"Like an ostrich," said Jim. "We couldn't do much in a place like this +without our moccasins, that's certain." + +The moccasins did make them nimble as goats, and they not only made +possible a secure hold, but they protected as well the feet. At first +they were not in any grave danger of a fall because the drifted sand at +the bottom of the cliff would have made a soft landing. But after a +while they were forced to work their way out over the rushing water, +then if they had slipped and fallen it would have been all up with them. + +It seemed as if the sea, furious at having lost Jim a short while ago, +was making fierce efforts to get at them now. The great waves foamed +against the cliff and the spray dashed over the boys, making the +surface of the rock treacherous and slippery. + +"I can't bear to look down," said Jo. "It makes me dizzy." + +"Look up, then," Jim called back. + +"That's almost as bad," replied Jo. + +"Keep 'em shut then," was Jim's command. + +Finally they came to a place that stopped Jo entirely. Jim was able to +get over it, because of his superior height and reach, and he attained a +point of safety above Jo. + +"What am I going to do now?" cried Jo. "I can't go any higher and it is +impossible for me to go back." + +"You wait," urged Jim, "till I get a secure foothold above here." + +"Oh, I'll wait," said Jo grimly, "you don't observe any anxiety on my +part to move, do you?" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI + +TWO LASSOES + + +Finally Jim reached a broad ledge, that gave him an excellent foothold, +and he got his lariat ready and dangled the loop under Jo's nose. + +"What are you going to hang me for?" inquired Jo. + +"For a horse thief, I reckon," replied Jim, "that bay don't belong to +you does it, Mister?" + +"Meaning this ocean bay?" queried Jo. + +"I certainly will hang you for that," retorted Jim, "Now get the loop +under your armpits." + +"All ready," cried Jo. + +Then Jim, bracing himself, kept a taut line on his brother, and with +this help he was able quite easily to get over the slippery, bare belt +of rock, and in a few moments was safe with Jim on the ledge. + +"It won't take us long now," said Jo, "to get to the other side." + +"Let's give him a yell," suggested Jim, "to let him know that we are +coming." + +Then Jim put his hands to his lips and cried: + +"Senor, ahoy." They listened breathlessly and in a few moments came a +faint reply. This put renewed energy into the boys and as the way was +now easier, they leaped ahead, agile as goats, and had soon reached the +top of the cliff. They looked eagerly down. + +There was the deep short semi-circle of the little bay with the waves +heaving in against the cliffs and at the point midway between the two +head-lands, where the beach was highest, they saw the Spaniard on Don +Fernando. Already the encroaching waves were gnawing at them. + +It was only a question of minutes now, and horse and rider would be +carried out to sea. The Spaniard sat like a statute. It was seemingly +possible for him to have made his escape up the cliffs, which were not +overly precipitous, like those Jim and Jo had just scaled, but he was a +fatalist and believed that his day had come. Perhaps he did not want to +abandon his horse, in which his pride was centered. + +"Cheer up, Senor, we'll be there," yelled Jim. + +Then followed by Jo, he sprang forward, leaping from rock to rock, and +from jutting point to opportune foothold. It was dangerous and daring +work, but the life of their friend was at stake and the boys were not +the kind to consider their own safety at such a time. + +It was only their sure-footedness and varied experience in climbing that +saved them from broken limbs or possible death. In a remarkably short +time, they stood upon a ledge above the Spaniard. + +"Here, Senor," yelled Jim, "catch the rope." + +He did as ordered but called up, "Is there no way to save my horse?" + +Jim considered a moment, then shouted: "All right, yes, we will save +your horse, too. Tie the ends of the lasso to the iron rings at the ends +of the front cinch." This was a broad, strong band, which would furnish +a good purchase, when Jim tossed down the lariat. The Spaniard caught it +and made it fast as ordered. + +"Now, fasten this under your arms," ordered Jim, as he cast down the +second lariat, which belonged to Jo. They then drew up the Spaniard to +safety and he appeared to be pleased in a quiet way but not at all +enthusiastic. + +"I am your eternal debtor, Senors," he said with a courteous bow. + +"How was it you did not follow me, Senor?" questioned Jim, "when I +sailed around the headland?" + +"Don Fernando balked," replied the Senor. "I thought, too, that you had +been drowned." + +"Came near it," replied Jim. "I would, too, if it had not been for +Caliente." + +"But my poor Fernando, he will be drowned," cried the Spaniard, now much +more excited about the safety of his steed than he had been for his own. +It did look rather bad for the big chestnut, as a large wave swelling +in, almost took him off his feet. He began to neigh wildly. + +"Don't worry, Don, old boy," cried Jim to the frightened horse. "If you +will help yourself." There was something in his voice that seemed to +reassure the animal. + +"Now, Jo, we will let you down by the lariat and get the bridle reins +over his head and help him get a foothold on that ledge below us. He +will be safe enough there, even if he does get somewhat damp." + +"Let me go. It is my risk for my horse," urged the Spaniard. + +"It is no risk, Senor," replied Jim. "You are heavier than my brother +and stronger and can do more good on this ledge with me." + +"The commands of the General!" said the Spaniard with a low bow. "I see +your plan is good." + +"We will tie this end of the lasso to the tree," said Jim, "so you will +feel perfectly safe, Jo." + +The tree referred to was a sturdy, gnarled cedar, growing on the ledge. +Then Jim swung his brother off and with every confidence in the strength +of the lariat to hold, Jo made his way quickly and safely down, while if +he had been without the rope he would have doubtless fallen into the +water below. + +A wave surged in, submerging him, and then started triumphantly to carry +him out to sea, but when the lariat pulled taut Jo struggled safely back +on the rock, while the wave went grumbling back. + +"Catch the bridle now, Jo," urged Jim. "Don't waste any more time +swimming." + +Thus adjured, Jo grabbed the bridle reins and pulled them over Don +Fernando's head, and braced himself on the rock above. All was ready +now, and the two above held the loop of the lasso that had been tied at +the cinch, with both hands, and they pulled together. Again a big wave +swelled in towards the cliff, which gave the frightened horse a big +boost. + +Then, with Jim and the Spaniard pulling mightily from the ledge above, +and Jo giving the big chestnut a purchase by a steady pull upon his +bridle, the horse scrambled with a mighty clatter and all his frightened +energy up the sloping rock. The lariat and Jo's work helped a whole lot. +Without the three, he would never have made it. + +Before the next wave swept in, Don Fernando stood, trembling and +dripping, but safe, upon the lower ledge. He seemed above the danger +point now, though an unusually big wave welled up around the horse's +fetlocks and the spray was continually dashing upwards. + +"He is all right now," cried Jim, "better come up, Jo, where it is +dryer." + +"Haul in then," replied Jo, and then he was landed safely on the ledge. + +"Caught a speckled trout," exclaimed Jim in happy humor again. + +"Referring to my freckles, I suppose," grinned Jo. "If I'm a fish, I +reckon Don Fernando is a whale." + +"Do you suppose he is safe?" inquired the Spaniard anxiously. + +"Who, Jo?" + +"Ah, no," said the Spaniard smilingly. "I mean the Don. The water seems +to be rising." + +"You may rest assured that he is safe," replied Jim. "It is the turn of +the tide now, and it is only a westerly wind that makes it appear +higher. All we will have to do now is to wait." + +"It is a great pity, this delay," said the Spaniard warmly. "You are +anxious to be on to the rescue of your brother and his friend. Anyway, I +hope you will succeed as well in their case as you did in mine." + +"In another hour we will be able to start," said Jim, "the tide will +then commence to run out." + +"Where shall we stop tonight?" inquired Jo. + +"Camp in the open as usual," replied Jim. + +"I hope we will get up above the sea so high that it won't come within a +mile of us," said Jo, fervently. + +"As to a place to stop, I will see to that," said the Spaniard. "Do not +give yourselves any uneasiness on that score." + +"It's getting kind of chilly roosting up here," remarked Jo, +plaintively, "especially as the fog is coming in." + +"I'll warm you," said Jim. "Put up your Dukes." + +"You'll take the counts if I put up my Dukes," said Jo, who was an +inveterate punnist. + +"Shut up," yelled Jim, giving his brother a hearty chug in the chest. +Then they went at it hammer and tongs, giving and receiving good hard +blows, and after ten minutes of whaling at each other, both were plenty +warm. The Spaniard looked on in mild wonder. + +"You Americans love the hard exercise," he said. "I should think you +would have great pleasure in resting awhile." + +"I got the best of the bout," declared Jo. "See how black and blue your +face is on this side." + +"You didn't do that," protested Jim. "That was a wallop that old Neptune +handed me when he bumped my head against yonder cliff." + +"Neptune! Yonder cliff!" jeered Jo. "You ought to be a story writer and +use fine words." + +"Me a story writer!" growled Jim. "I ain't got so low as that, not so +long as I have got two hands to steal chickens with." + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII + +ANOTHER FRIEND + + +"Do you not think, Senor Darlington, that it is now safe to start?" +inquired the Spaniard, who was fearful of bloodshed, not quite +understanding the boys. + +"Certainly," responded Jim, "we will get Don Fernando down from his +perch and proceed." + +This proved to be an easier task than getting him up. His master lowered +by the rope to his side, one scrambling leap and the horse was on the +firm wet sand of the beach, almost knocking his master over in his +eagerness to be on safe footing again. Don Sebastian now showed the gay +side of his nature, as he vaulted into the saddle. + +He swung his hat wildly, the blood mounting to his face, and the horse +seemed to feel the sting and excitement of his master's mood, as he +pranced, danced and caracoled upon the sand and ended up by bowing in +unison with his master to the two American lads, who were looking on +with interest and amusement. + +Then the party made their way quickly along the curve of the beach and +went around the fateful headland with perfect safety, while quite a +distance out among the hidden rocks snarled the defeated ocean. Then +Caliente heard them coming and he quickly raised his head, neighing in +welcome to Jim and his comrade, Don Fernando. + +Jim gave him a vigorous hug for more than ever he was fond of his +faithful horse. In a few minutes he had him saddled and away the three +horsemen thudded in a swift gallop down the beach. The horses fairly +flew, the wind of their speed tossing their manes back. It was cool +beneath the fog laden sky and the refreshing sea air seemed to give the +horses tireless endurance. + +Soon three miles had spun backwards under their hoofs and the boys were +filled with the joyous excitement of the run. It seemed now that every +stride of the horses was bringing them nearer to the hoped-for rescue of +Tom and Juarez. And this was an incentive to their energy. + +"Here, friends, is where we branch off from the beach," cried the +Spaniard. + +Then he turned his horse to the left and headed straight for a wooded +spur that extended from the range to the shore. In a short time the +three came to a well-traveled trail and were soon riding through the +semi-dusk of the woods. For two miles they went up a steady grade. + +Then they rounded the summit of the wooded ridge and saw stretching far +below them in the indistinct dusk, a wide plain bounded on the West by +the blue darkness of the level sea with its rim of yellow sand. + +"We will soon be at the home of my friend, Senor Valdez," said the +Spaniard, "where we will spend the night." + +"I'm a lovely looking object to present itself in a civilized home," +protested Jim, "I look like a tough who has been in a bar-room rush." + +"You are my brave friend," said Senor Sebastian, quietly, "and will be +welcome." + +Jim blushed, at least one side of his face did, the other was already +too deeply colored to show any emotion, and he grinned sheepishly. +Before he had time to reply they swept into an open driveway, carefully +sanded, and drew rein in front of a long, low white adobe house, that +from its mountain terrace looked over Plain and Sea. + +Out came Senor Valdez to receive them, a stately Spaniard, who furnished +the boys with an ideal of perfect courtesy ever after. To the end of +their days they remembered their first visit to the home of Senor +Valdez. How they did enjoy their dinner that evening in the long, +pleasantly lighted dining-room. + +It was an excellent meal, with delicious soup, a salad garnished with +peppers of the Spanish style, and garlic. Jim and Jo had never tasted +anything equal to it. Besides there were frijoles and lamb, while the +dessert was some slight and delicate confection of jelly and cream, made +by the hands of the Senora Valdez. + +"I feel wicked sitting here and eating this fine meal," said Jo, +addressing Jim in a low voice, "when Tom and Juarez are being ill used +and probably starved." + +"Well," replied Jim, who was always practical, "I think it is better to +eat, and to keep my strength up." + +"I guess it won't fail," commented Jo slyly. + +The boys bore themselves well, and without any diffidence though Jim had +a whimsical recollection of his bruised side face and blackened eye, and +he tried to keep it turned from the Senora Valdez, the fragile little +woman who sat at the end of the table opposite her husband. She had snow +white hair, parted low over her ears and the pallid face was lined with +years. Very gentle was the Senora Valdez, but she had in her time beheld +scenes of carnage and terror, so Jim need not have worried about his +bruised face. But the wise old lady noticed his solicitude and +understanding, was the more gracious to the young Americano because of +it. + +That evening they sat on the piazza, that looked out towards the sea, +the Spaniards smoking and Jim and Jo enjoying the music of a guitar +played by a Mexican in a dim corner of the verandah and the boys heard a +bit of important news. + +"There was a mysterious ship put into shore several miles South of here, +late last night, Senor," said their host, "one of my shepherds brought +me word." + +"The first scent of the trail," cried Jim eagerly. Then the Senor +Sebastian explained to his friend more fully the objects of their +search. Immediately the listener was deeply interested. Then he sent for +an Indian, one of his trusted men, to come to him, and gave him minute +instructions about some matters. Without a word the Indian turned and +disappeared in the darkness, and in a short time there came the sound of +a horse galloping full speed down the road. + +"Tomorrow, Senor Darlington, this Indian will meet you at a point near +the Puebla de los Angeles, which my friend knows and he will have all +the information there is obtainable as to the location of this ship and +its crew," thus spoke the Senor Valdez. Jim thanked him with deep fervor +for his unusual kindness, but the Spaniard made light of it. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + +A TALE OF YORE + + +As they sat there in the dusk of the verandah, Jim would have liked to +ask his host to relate some of his experiences in southern California +for he felt sure that the Senor Valdez had known something of adventure +not only because those early days were full of marvels of interest, but +there was something in the bearing of the old Spaniard that spoke of +former days of romance and of stirring incidents. + +Then, too, there was something in the after-dinner content and quiet, +following the perilous adventure which they had been through that +predisposed the boys to listen to a good story of adventure. Their +friend, the Senor Sebastian, seemed to divine what was passing through +Jim's mind, for he suddenly spoke, breaking the meditative spell that +had fallen upon the group on the piazza. + +"It just occurred to me, Senor Valdez, that our friends here might like +to hear something of the early days in this part of the country, for you +of all men know it thoroughly and I am sure it would interest them." + +"Indeed, it would, Senor," cried Jim enthusiastically, "it was in my +mind to ask Senor Valdez to tell us of the early days but I was afraid +to impose upon him." + +"I feel greatly honored to think that you young men would care to hear +anything my poor tongue could relate. It would hardly be worth your +distinguished attention." Jim made due allowance for the courteous +exaggeration characteristic of the Spaniard. + +"Try us, Senor," he said briefly, "we would want nothing better." + +"I will have the coffee brought first," replied the Senor, "that may +serve to stimulate my dull imagination." + +In a short time a softly moving servant brought out a tray of coffee +cups, and placed one before each guest on a small wicker table. Jim +noticed these cups with immediate interest. They were certainly +beautiful and he had never seen anything like them before. They were of +a wonderful blue, each one, and had a coat of arms in gold with raised +figures on it; a scroll above with a Latin motto, and beneath the +representation of a wild animal couchant. The Senor Valdez was quick to +see Jim's interest and respond to it. "That is the coat of arms of my +family," he explained. + +"I am not a scholar, Senor," said Jim, "and all I can make of the motto +is that it has something to do with a lion." + +"You are quite right," the ghost of a smile hovered around the +white-fringed lips of the Spaniard, at Jim's innate boyishness. + +"That figure does not look exactly like a lion," remarked Jo frankly. + +"Not like an African lion certainly," replied the Spaniard, "but a lion +nevertheless, such as one finds yet in the mountain fastnesses of Spain, +something like a panther only larger and much more fierce." + +"The lion seems to have a rope or chain around his neck," commented Jim, +"and fastened to a collar." + +"Quite so," responded the Spaniard, "likewise the motto translated +reads, 'Gentle as a Lion.'" + +"Rather strange way of putting it," said Jim curiously. + +"I will explain, for you would naturally be puzzled by the phrase, +'Gentle as a Lion,' as it seems to contradict common knowledge," said +Senor Valdez. "You see my family has the distinction, if such it can be +called, in these modern days, the distinction of being old. This +coat-of-arms dates back to the eleventh century." + +Jo was about to give a prolonged whistle of surprise when Jim gripped +his knee to enforce silence, for though Jo might mean all right, the +Spaniard might not understand. + +"The founder of the family who flourished at that time was a rather +rugged character, and I am afraid would regard the family +representatives of this day as very puny and unworthy specimens. This +Rodriquez de Valdez had his castle in a rugged mountainous part of +Spain, where there were plenty of wild animals and of wilder and fiercer +men, bandits and free-booters without number. + +"His castle was a very powerful one, not only in construction but +likewise in location, as it was built on a shelf of rock above a deep +chasm, with precipitous cliffs behind it. However, Rodriquez de Valdez +spent but very little time behind the protection of its powerful walls. +It would take the forces of some strong Duke from the lowland to cause +him to seek the shelter of his castle and to raise his war banner of +crimson with a blue cross upon it, above the turret. + +"He spent his days hunting among the mountains for wild beasts or for +marauding bands of lawless men. Rodriquez was a man of wonderful +strength, even for those days, when there were giants in the land. In +stature six feet five and powerful in proportion and likewise very fleet +of foot. If I should tell you of some of the legends of his strength and +swiftness, you would probably laugh. + +"But the one that has to do with the coat-of-arms of my family I will +tell you. It chanced one day that he was out in the wilds of the +mountains and quite alone. Intent upon the trail of a deer that he was +following along a shelving mountain side, he did not see a lion half +grown, but nevertheless very dangerous, which was crouching on the +branch of a tree ready to spring upon him when he got beneath it. + +"When he had passed by under the tree a pace or two, the lion sprang +with distended claws. Some instinct of danger made Rodriquez turn and he +was just in time to grapple with the brute, clutching it by the throat. +The lion had some advantage in weight but not a great deal, for my brave +ancestor was probably three hundred pounds of sinew, bone and muscle. So +that the struggle was not such an unequal one, but it was terrific while +it did last. Finally, though torn and bleeding, the man subdued the +beast, and had it in abject fear of him. + +"Then instead of killing the lion as one would naturally expect, +Rodriquez took a strange humorous notion into his head. He would make a +pet of this same lion and it should be his dog to follow obediently at +its master's heels wherever he went. This idea he carried out and he +even had a heavy brass collar placed upon its neck, and it followed him +on all his trips, slouching with padded tread at his heel, or behind his +war horse as he rode abroad, like a powerful yellow dog. + +"I do not imagine that the beast ever had any great amount of affection +for his master, but he no doubt was in great fear of him, which seemed +to answer the purpose quite as well. So, my friends, you have a full and +complete explanation of the coat-of-arms of my family. My only fear is +that I have wearied you with what could not have the same interest for +you as it does for me." + +"Indeed, you have not wearied us, Senor," exclaimed Jo enthusiastically. + +"That is one of the most interesting accounts that I have ever listened +to," said Jim. "I only wish I could have lived in those days when there +was plenty of adventure." + +"I do not think that you have any reason to complain," remarked the +Spaniard laughingly. "Perhaps your descendants in future years will be +pointing out your daring deeds as emblazoned on their coat-of-arms." + +"No danger of that, I guess," laughed Jim, "though they might have a +picture of Jo and me tied to a mule. That was the way old Captain Broom +treated us." The Spaniard joined in the merriment at this unheroic +representation of Jo and Jim. + +"Now, Senor Valdez, you have told us a tale of old Spain, tell us +something of new Spain here in California," urged Jo. + +"It seems to me that it is now someone else's turn," said the Senor. "I +would not do all the talking. A host should sometimes listen. Perhaps +Senor Darlington will tell us of some of his experiences. They will be +much more stirring than any musty tales of mine." But Jim shook his head +firmly, not to say obstinately. + +"I would not think of telling our adventures," he replied. "Perhaps +after we have travelled more, we will have something worth while +relating." + +"That's right," said Jo, "we would much rather listen to you, Senor." + +The Senor Valdez sipped slowly at his coffee, looking out into the +semi-darkness beyond the verandah, where over the plain below stretched +the gray blanket of the fog-clouds. Then he rolled another cigarette, +lit it and took a few meditative puffs. The Senor now began his next +story at a peculiar angle, and did not commence with the stereotyped +form of "once upon a time," so dear to the days of one's childhood. + +"I see you do not take cream in your coffee," he said addressing Jim. + +"No, but I like some sugar, not too much." + +"It has seemed to me," said the Spaniard, "that the seasoning of coffee +is in a way an indication of character." + +"Where the party uses milk in his coffee that indicates weakness, does +it not, Senor?" inquired Jim with a sly look at Jo, but the subtle +Spaniard was not to be trapped. + +"Not necessarily," he replied, "only mildness." + +"And when it is taken straight and black that means a strong character," +remarked Jo. + +"You have stated it," replied the Spaniard. + +"But I would like to know how I would be sized up?" questioned Jim, "you +see I use a little sugar." + +"My friend," said the Spaniard with playful earnestness, putting his +hand lightly on Jim's knee, "that shows a character of great strength, +tempered with mercy and human kindness. All of which leads one to speak +of a man who was once famous in this part of the country, but not +popular. He always had the reputation for taking a strong liquor in his +coffee, Fernet, if I remember right. His name was Alverado, but I judge +that you are not acquainted with it." + +"No," replied Jim, "but I should say that he was a very fierce +character." + +"He was. He was a bandit." + +"I thought so," agreed Jim. + +"This Don Alverado came from a well known Spanish family, of ancient +lineage, but impoverished fortune. He was such a wild and unruly blade +that his family were decidedly relieved when he left Spain and came to +the new world to mend his fortune, if not his ways. He landed first in +Mexico, and after a series of more or less remarkable adventures, he +came to this part of California. I knew him, or rather I knew of his +family in Spain, and for their sake I made him welcome here at my home. + +"He was really a charming fellow in manner and appearance, tall, slight, +with dark eyes and hair, a typical cavalier. But the graces of his +manner did not reach down to his heart, and after a disagreeable episode +which I need not revive here, he left my rancho never to return except +as an enemy. I heard nothing further of him after his departure for +some six months. My next introduction to him was an unpleasant one. + +"It consisted in the loss of a band of horses and a herd of cattle which +were driven off by a gang of raiders, thirteen in number, at the head of +which was this fellow Alverado. His depredations went on for years among +the ranchmen in this part of California. So resourceful and crafty was +this desperado that he evaded trap after trap laid for his capture. + +"He had several very close calls and there were numerous battles between +the outlaws and the ranch owners, but though some of his men were shot, +he seemed to bear a charmed life. I remember one running fight over the +plain yonder, when, believing me to be absent from home, as I had been, +but returned unexpectedly from the north, this Alverado and his gang +made a bold dash to capture some horses from a field directly below the +house. + +"It did not take long to get my men together and I gave the bandits a +surprise indeed. Nothing but the speed of Alverado's horse, a splendid +black stallion, saved him from capture. We got several of his men +however. At last there came the turning of the lane. Through the +treachery of one of the band we found that their rendezvous was at the +head of a small canyon in a range of foot-hills several miles south of +here. + +"You will go through it tomorrow on your way south, if you carry out +your speed schedule, which with your remarkable horses you ought to be +able to. We came upon the gang about noon, where they were resting after +a long chase. In a corral near by were a number of stolen stock. They +were not expecting trouble of any kind. Some were playing cards, a few +cooking, most, however, were enjoying the siesta, their leader among the +number lay under the shadow of a tree, his head resting on a saddle, +sound asleep. + +"There were fifty of us, and we had them surrounded, so that there was +no chance of escape. Alverado himself made a desperate dash, but the +cordon was too strong. The rest surrendered. That afternoon we took the +bunch to the lower end of the canyon, where there was a giant sycamore +tree. There we hanged the whole thirteen, and by them no more were +troubled not even by their ghosts." + +Jim and Jo expressed their appreciation of their host's kindness in +entertaining them as he truly had done in relating his tales. Then they +said good night and went to their room. + +That night the boys slept in a comfortable bed in a quaint old bedroom +with roses nodding in at the half open casement windows. By the light of +the candles they could see the strange old and carved furniture and +tired as they were how they did sleep. + +The next morning they started hours before daylight. "I will be prepared +to welcome more of you in a few days," said the Senor Valdez, and the +boys thanked him heartily. Promising to return soon they galloped away +through the darkness. + +All day they rode, hardly drawing rein at all. At first through the +foot-hills and then over the wide plains. Jo had a fresh horse, a +powerful black, as his other mount could not stand the strain of the +long trip that meant three score and ten of miles before evening. + +Early in the afternoon they left the plain and rode into the deep and +rugged gorges of a mountain chain, running East and West. Thence into a +broad valley leading South-easterly, and about four P. M. they turned +directly South entering a Pass in the Southern side of the valley, from +which they emerged on a plain. Where the trail left the Pass stood a +large sycamore tree, when they reached it, the Indian messenger rose +from its shelter. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX + +A WONDERFUL LEAP + + +Now without hesitation we must take up the fortunes or rather +misfortunes of Tom and Juarez as they landed in the darkness upon the +mysterious island, for our narrative presses to its conclusion. Never +did they feel more hopeless than on this occasion, when they were going +to a dubious and uncertain fate. + +"You boys come with me," called the Captain gruffly. + +"How about me, Cap'n?" asked Jeems Howell, the lanky shepherd. + +"What's your business?" inquired Captain Broom briefly. + +"Looking after the sheeps." + +"Then attend to it," said the Captain grimly. + +"Certainly, Cap'n," replied the shepherd, who was incapable of taking +offense. + +"You come, Jake," called the Captain, to one of the sailors, "and be +quick about it, we haven't much time." Tom shivered, for in the gloom +and tired as he was he felt that his time too was short. + +Then with the Captain in the lead, carrying a lantern, which was muffled +in his great coat, they started, the sailor bringing up the rear. + +"Look out sharp, that these lads don't spring something on you, Jake. +They are a bad lot." + +"Aye, aye, sir," replied the sailor, "they'll have to be quick to get +the jump on me, sir." + +"It's the Injun one's the worst. Don't let him scalp you," warned the +Captain jocosely. + +"I'm no Indian," said Juarez, hoarsely and utterly reckless of his fate, +"I'm an American, and was proud of it, till I found you were one, you +cursed yankee barnacle." + +"Ho, ho, lad!" roared the Captain, "you won't talk so tall in a few +minutes. Nothing like a slow fire for stewing the nonsense out of a +fresh kid." + +"How far is this cave of yours, you are taking us to, old salt horse?" +said Juarez insolently, and utterly unwise. + +This was too much for Captain Broom, and with an imprecation he turned +to strike Juarez. This was what Juarez was looking for and as the +furious Skipper whirled facing him, Juarez dodged his huge fist, and +sent a fierce hook to the Captain's jaw. There was anger, desperation +and strength behind that blow and the Captain fell, striking his head on +a rock. That time the Frontier Boys scored. + +"Follow me, Tom," yelled Juarez, and he sprang away through the +darkness. It seemed like a hopeless undertaking to make an escape with +the sea on one side and the cliffs on the other, and a desperate enemy +near at hand. But Juarez thought it was best to take a chance. Anything +was better than captivity, that was seemingly just ahead of them. + +One thing he was determined on and that was, that he would not be taken +alive. He ran splashing through the water, leaping rocks, with the two +sailors in fast pursuit. Not far ahead to the right was the white dash +of the breakers that shut off escape in that direction, to the left was +the cliffs. + +Then before him rose a steep but not precipitous rock that had been +divided from the main cliff by the action of the water. Instantly Juarez +abandoned his desperate plan of plunging into the sea, and without +lessening his speed, he sprang up the rock, in his moccasined feet. + +The sailor who was following most closely, got up ten feet when he +slipped and rolled violently to the bottom, knocking down the one who +came after. Once Juarez came near falling but he caught himself, and +kept going up, driven by a desperation that seemed to carry him over +every obstacle. + +"We've got yer, ye little shrimp," exultantly cried the sailors at the +base of the rock, "Ye can't get away unless you fly." + +"Shoot the blasted little varmint," roared the Captain, who, still +dizzy, had struggled to his feet. In obedience to the order a flash +punctured the darkness and there was a roar like artillery echoing among +the hollow cliffs. A slug of lead whistled past Juarez's head. + +The boy had now reached the top of the rock and was at the crisis of his +fate, a distance of ten feet separated him from the main cliff, not an +impossible jump but the foothold was precarious and uncertain, and fifty +feet or more below were the jagged rocks, and enemies equally as hard, +but Juarez did not hesitate. + +He dodged down just as the sailors fired another shot, then he sprang to +the narrow pinnacle of the rock and bending slightly forward with bent +knees and swinging hand, poised for the leap. + +"The condemned fool is going to jump," roared the Captain. "Shoot him on +the wing." + +But the sailors were not ready and the skipper ran between the rock and +the cliff to be at hand to stamp the life out of Juarez when he should +fall as he knew he would. Then he leaped, a dark object flying through +space, his hands caught the edge of the cliff, the roots of a small bush +held him for a moment, then he slipped. Below him was certain death. + +Two strong hands caught his arms, and he was drawn in safety to the +cliff above. The Captain and the two sailors watched in open mouthed +wonder, all they could see was the dim figure of Juarez crawl in safety +over the top of the cliff, but they could not determine the means of his +escape. + +It struck a superstitious chord in their natures and the skipper became +moody and silent. + +Juarez breathlessly followed the lanky figure of the shepherd through +the darkness, for it was no other who had extended the rescuing hand. +Hardly a word was spoken, and they started off. After going a +considerable distance they came to a slab hut built at the foot of a +high range of hills that formed the backbone of the island. + +Two shepherd dogs rushed forth and gave their master a boisterous +welcome, and were soon good friends with Juarez. Everything in the hut +was neat; with Indian rugs on the floor which gave a warm touch of +color to the interior and one side of the hut was lined with books. + +"What am I thinking of," suddenly cried Juarez in dismay, "to leave Tom +in the hands of that crew? My head is wrong." With that, he grew pale +and slid unconscious to the floor. He had evidently not recovered from +the blow that the Mexican had dealt him a few days before, and the +strain he had been under brought on a relapse. The shepherd worked over +him a long time before he finally brought him around. + +Meanwhile what had become of Tom? He had not been quick enough to make +his escape, and his fate was in the balance when the Skipper came up to +him just after Juarez had disappeared over the cliff. + +"You don't get away, I promise you that, lad," growled the Captain. +Roughly seizing the boy by the shoulder he dragged him toward the cliff. +Then the two disappeared into the entrance of a cave, the Captain still +holding in one hand his battered leather satchel. + +The sailor who stood on guard at the entrance, saw just then the lights +of a steamer that was just entering the channel and he rushed into the +cave, called to the Captain, and in a few minutes that worthy appeared. +If he felt any alarm he showed none, but without any loss of time he +assembled his crew, got his boat free of land and rowed silently out to +sea. Whatever he had intended to do with Tom, evidently passed from his +mind, now awakened to the solution of some other problem. + + + + +CHAPTER XXX + +IN THE STRAIT + + +As Juarez and Tom were under the kindly escort of Captain Broom and his +sailors in the whale boat on their cruise to the mysterious island, Jo, +Jim and the Spaniard had stopped at an old sycamore tree, where, as had +been promised, the Indian messenger was awaiting their coming. + +"What news, Yaquis?" asked the Spaniard, who knew the Indian well. + +"I saw the boat by my own eyes," he replied, "heading for the Big +Island," pointing to the South. "By her smoke she stopped in the Bow +Harbor near the lower end." So spoke the Indian, standing straight and +tall. He was a picturesque sight with his coarse, black hair cut square +and long. + +"The trail is getting warm," exclaimed Jim eagerly. "Where can we get a +boat?" + +"There is a small boat at the Harbor of San Pedro," replied the +Spaniard, "that is the property of a friend of mine. I doubt not we can +have the use of it." + +"It is now a little after six," said Jim. "How far is it to the Harbor?" + +"A dozen miles," replied the Indian. + +"Is your horse too tired, Senor Sebastian, to make it by eight?" The +Spaniard's eyes flashed. + +"Senor, Don Fernando is never tired. Let us start." + +"We are ready," replied Jim. "Which is the shortest cut?" + +"I will guide you," was the Indian's response. + +"He knows this country like the foot does the shoe," assured the +Spaniard. + +Without more ado, the new guide took the lead and they rode at a rapid +gait in single file. At first they went down a gentle grade for several +miles until they came to a perfectly level plain that stretched in three +directions to the sea. At the end of the land was a perfectly rounded +rise like a huge long bolster. + +The party of rescuers left the Puebla de los Angeles several miles to +the East, taking the shortest way to the harbor. There was no let-up to +the speed, if anything, they seemed to be going faster, with sweaty +sides and shoulders, but with unaffected stamina. The going was fine, +over a springy turf and sometimes they tore through wide belts of tall +mustard. + +Jo and Jim were in fine fettle as the end of the journey came in sight +and there was promise of their coming to close quarters with the pirates +and possibly rescuing their oppressed brothers from captivity. Then, +too, the passage of the strait in an open boat appealed to their sense +of adventure. + +About eight o'clock, they came to a ranch two miles from the harbor, +where Senor Sebastian had a short talk with a man who owned the small +boat that had been referred to. He was perfectly willing to lend them +the boat and also sent a Mexican servant to bring back their horses and +put them up in his stables. Not forgetting to thank him for his great +kindness to them, the boys turned their horses' heads for the harbor, +the last lap of their long journey had begun. + +In a half hour, they stood on the shore of a long, narrow inlet, at a +point where a craft was moored. From a small boat-house, they got the +oars, the mast and the sail to be used if the wind was right. Then they +were ready to get aboard. Jim looked at his watch. "It lacks ten minutes +of nine," he said. + +Then they embarked. The boat was not a mere row-boat, but was found to +be of good size and about equal to a whale boat. It was staunch, too, +and sea worthy. The mooring was cast off. Jim was at the bow oar, and Jo +at the one back of him on the other side, while the Indian, Yaquis, +steered. The tide favored them as they glided quickly between the banks, +and they were not long in reaching the channel. + +At first, there was a slow, heavy swell, while in the lee of the land, +that did not bother the boys but within a half hour they were in a +choppy sea with breaking crests, and now the real work for Jo and Jim +began. Fortunately, the Indian was a most skillful oar, and he kept them +from being swamped. As yet there was no breeze to help them. + +"This is almost as good as running the Rapids in the Grand Canyon," +cried Jim joyously. + +The boys were in fine fettle for their work, notwithstanding their long +day in the saddle, and they buckled to it with a will, although wet +through with flying spray. They had enjoyed a good rest the night before +and after their long ride they were glad to get the kinks out of their +muscles. They really made remarkably good headway against the sea and +the stoical Indian grunted approval of their work. Ah, but it was fine, +battling with the waves through the darkness, while the boat thrashed +and beat its way ahead. + +The boys stood to their oars and put all the strength of their lithe +young bodies into the stroke and they seemed tireless. The Spaniard had +made himself comfortable in the bow, where, sheltered by a short +overhead deck, he was soon fast asleep. + +"Wake me when it is time to be drowned," he said. "I know it is my +fate." Jim remembered the Spaniard's melancholy of the day before, and +laughed heartily, as he promised. + +"There are the lights of a vessel," cried Yaquis, who, though silent, +was ever on the watch. "Ahead of us to the Southwest." + +"You are right," said Jim. The lights were like two faint, moving stars, +one aloft and the other below. + +"That isn't the Pirate ship," declared Jo. "She wouldn't be showing any +light." After a while, the lights of the vessel were suddenly eclipsed, +but by the dull light of the moon, now risen, the vessel's bulk could +still be made out. + +"She has gone into the further straits," said Yaquis, "between the two +islands." + +A gentle breeze sprang up, but blowing directly toward them, it lent no +aid. Before midnight, the westerly breeze had died absolutely down, and +in a not very long time, the sea followed suit, leaving a long swell and +the rowing became much easier. Nothing occurred to break the monotony +for a while. There was the steady grinding of the oars in the row-locks +and the lapping of the waves in the gloom, for the moon was now obscured +by clouds. Then, of a sudden, the Indian called a halt. + +"Do you hear footsteps?" inquired Jim, jocosely. + +"A steamer coming, I hear her, no lights. Pull hard." In a minute, even +the boys could hear the beat of her engines and saw the occasional flare +from her stacks, then a dark form took shape through the night. They +pulled lustily for they knew their danger and who it was. How quickly +they would be run down, if discovered, and left to drown in the wide +strait, when Captain Broom found out their identity. No wonder they +pulled. + +"Stop now, draw in your oars. Lie down," warned the Indian. + +Not a hundred yards to the Eastward came The Sea Eagle and she was on an +even line with the boat that lay a black patch on the dark water. If +Captain Broom was not on the Bridge they would be safe. + +"Boat ahoy," boomed out his voice. + +"Indian fishermen," cried Yaquis. "Stop, take me ashore." + +With a growl, the Captain sent his ship ahead, paying no attention to +the "Indian fisherman" in distress. There was a gleam of white teeth as +the Indian smiled at the hearty congratulations of the boys and their +glee at his stratagem. Then the Spaniard and Yaquis took the oars while +Jim steered and Jo slept. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI + +CONCLUSION + + +When morning came, they were but a few miles from the Northern end of +the longer Island and the fog was over the whole sky. The sea was glassy +with a sullen glaze. Nowhere was there sign of any steamer or ship. The +Sea Eagle had made good her escape. + +"I wish we had a stiff breeze to help us along," said the Spaniard, who +loved not manual labor, as did the boys. + +"It will come, the strong breeze, soon," said the Indian. + +"When we make the Island, what are we to do?" asked Jo. + +"Who can tell, maybe Tom and Juarez have been taken along with the +Skipper, instead of being marooned." + +"That's so," replied Jo, and gloom settled down upon his spirits, +heavier than the fog upon the sea. + +"We will keep after them," said the never despondent Jim, "even if we +have to chase them around the world." + +The boat seemed to crawl so slowly along, and the boys began to fret in +their eagerness to find out whether their comrades were on the island or +not, but they were not yet close enough to make out any object upon its +surface. Then from the West there came a breeze rippling the glassy +water. + +"Up with the sail," cried Jim. "Here's where we fly." + +As the breeze strengthened to a wind, they went towards the island at a +clipping gait. When they got within a half mile of the shore, they began +to look eagerly for some sign of a living being and they were +disappointed at first, but they drove their boat along as near the shore +as they dared. + +"Say, did you hear that?" cried Jim in excitement. "That was a rifle +shot, or my name is Dennis." + +"Three men on the shore," said the Indian, imperturbably. + +"I see them," cried Jo, "on that beach yonder. I believe it is Tom and +Juarez. Hurrah for the Frontier Boys." + +"It is they," declared Jim as they drew closer, "but how Tom has grown. +He looks over six feet." + +"That isn't Tom," said Jo. "It's some one else. The short one is Tom." +Then he saw Jim grin and realized that he had been kidded. + +"If this wasn't my busy day," said Jo, "I'd give you a punching for +being so smart." + +Five minutes later, the boat had grounded on the pebbly beach and The +Frontier Boys were again united. There was a great jubilee for a while +with the Spaniard, the Indian, and the lanky shepherd on the outskirts +of the family celebration, but in a short time they were all good +friends, each according to his different nature; the Spaniard, suave and +courteous, the Indian stolid, but with his share in the general +good-will, and Jeems Howell, the shepherd, lankily humorous. + +"We met our old friend Captain Broom in the channel, boys," said Jim, +"steaming along like the Devil was after him." + +"I'll give him reason to think so," growled Juarez sullenly, "if I ever +get on his trail." + +The Indian, Yaquis, grunted approval, for there seemed to be a bond of +sympathy between him and Juarez, as the reader can well understand. + +"How far is that cave, Tom, where the old codger left you?" inquired +Jo. + +"Just around the bend," said Tom. "Here's the rock where Juarez made his +famous jump." + +"How did you ever get up there?" asked Jo in wonder, looking up at the +pinnacle of rock. + +"You'd a done the same if those fellows had been chasing you," replied +Juarez, "but if it hadn't been for Jeems here catching me when I jumped +they would have got me after all." + +"I was afeard you might have fallen on the Skipper and a hurt him. He's +a kind of a tender plant you know." The Shepherd made this remark with a +perfectly sober face, in no wise disturbed by the hilarity of the boys, +over the idea of the tenderness of the Skipper. + +"Here's the cave," said Juarez, and he led the way through an arched +opening in the wall of the cliff. Picking up a lantern, he went ahead as +guide. + +"This is certainly a dry cave," said Jim. + +"It ought to be," said Jeems Howell. "It don't rain on this Island more +than twice a year, but I feel it in my bones that it is coming on to +storm today." + +"I hope you don't feel it in _all_ your bones," remarked Jim, +quizzically, "because it is liable to be a long drawn out storm if you +do." + +The lanky Shepherd gave himself over to spasms of silent mirth at Jim's +queer humor. + +"Here's where we found Tom," said Juarez. "Just discovered him a couple +of hours before you discovered us." + +When the Captain had made his sudden change of plans, Tom made himself +as comfortable as he could for the night, intending to search for Juarez +in the morning. + +"Sometime I hope that this wretched Captain will be captured and +imprisoned right here," said the Spaniard with a cold, vindictiveness. + +"If he comes snooping around here again, that is what will happen to +him," remarked Jim quietly. "I suppose, Tom, that he hid some of the +loot he took from us in this cave somewhere. I bet this is his safe +deposit vault, all right." + +"He went back in there with his small satchel," said Tom, indicating the +depths of the cave as yet unexplored. + +"It will keep," said Jim, "but before I leave this island for Hawaii, I +am going to search every corner of this cave and see if I cannot find +our property." + +"We discovered it in a cave and perhaps we will lose our treasure in a +cave," said Juarez, who was something of a fatalist. + +"Don't you believe that we won't find it," declared Jim stoutly, "but no +work for me for a while. I'm going to take a good rest." + +"So say we all of us," chanted the boys. + +"Gentlemen," said Jeems Howell oracularly, "If it pleases you, and +Christopher Columbus," with a wave of his hand toward Jim, "who +discovered this savage group, we will now adjourn to my castle on the +distant hillside." + +"We are with you," declared those assembled in unison, and in a short +time they were making their way up the slope towards the "castle" on the +hillside, where they made themselves at home. + +All the new arrivals at the island were soon fast asleep. + +Later after several hours of rest, they occupied themselves according to +their different ideas of comfort. + +The Spaniard amused himself thrumming on a guitar, that belonged to one +of the Mexican herders on the island. Tom got a book, and stretched out +on a rug forgetful of all his recent troubles, while Jim and Juarez +borrowed a couple of guns and went for an hour's hunting, in the woods +which at that time covered the mountain ridges of the island. + +That evening they were all gathered in the cabin before the blazing fire +on the stone hearth, while outside raged the Easterly storm that Jeems +Howell had predicted, with rush of wind and sweep of rain. But the slab +cabin was storm proof and comfortable. It is a good place to leave the +boys after their days of trial and bitter hardship. In our next book we +will meet "The Frontier Boys in Hawaii, or The mystery of The Hollow +Mountain." There, I feel confident they will cope with adventures as +unusual and as remarkable as they have heretofore encountered. I am sure +that the Reader will be anxious to accompany them on their journey. But +we must permit the Frontier Boys to have the last word, in this volume. + +"Do you think that Captain Broom, will return here, before we get away +for Hawaii, Jim?" inquired brother Jo. + +"I certainly do," replied Jim, "and we will be right here, to give him a +warm and hearty Welcome, you can rest assured of that." + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. + +Page 9, "hearn" changed to "heard" (I heard the mate) + +Page 136, "wierdly" changed to "weirdly" (almost weirdly beautiful) + +Page 148, "ever" changed to "over" (hanging over the) + +Page 158, "besiide" changed to "beside" (got ready beside) + +Page 170, text was both missing and repeated in the original. The +original read: + + on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal- + iente forged ahead by half a length. + + "Hold on boys," yelled Jo in warning. +"Don't + on even terms until in the last hundred yards Cal- + horses up.+ There was Jo sitting quietly on his horse. + +The words between the ++ were removed to try to improve readability. + +Page 172, "supose" changed to "suppose" (I suppose you do) + +Page 213, "aint" changed to "ain't" (I ain't got) + +Page 231, "scycamore" changed to "sycamore" (sycamore tree, when) + +Page 232, "hestitation" changed to "hestitation" (without hesitation we) + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Frontier Boys on the Coast, by Capt. Wyn Roosevelt + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FRONTIER BOYS ON THE COAST *** + +***** This file should be named 25473.txt or 25473.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/2/5/4/7/25473/ + +Produced by Robert Cicconetti, Emmy and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from images generously made available +by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/25473.zip b/25473.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a4563f --- /dev/null +++ b/25473.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3f2048 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #25473 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/25473) |
